WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations Synopsis

1. The chemical substances participating in a chemical reaction are known as reactants and the substances produced in the reaction are called products.

2. A chemical equation is the representation of a chemical reaction with the help of symbols and formulas. The reactants are written on the left side while the products are written on the right side of the equation.

3. A chemical equation gives us qualitative as well as quantitative information about the reaction. We can calculate the mass, number of moles and volumes of the involved reactants and products from the chemical equation.

4. Law of conservation of mass: According to the law of conservation of mass proposed by Lavoisier, in any physical or chemical change total mass of all the substances before the change is equal to the total mass of all the substances formed after the change.

5. Law of conservation of mass and energy: The law states that the total amount of mass and energy remains constant before and after any chemical or physical transformation.

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

6. Equivalence of mass and energy: According to Einstein’s theory of relativity, mass and energy are different aspects of the same entity and are interconvertible.

If a substance ‘A’ of mass ‘m’ is converted into another substance ‘B’ to produce an equivalent amount of energy T, then according to Einstein’s equation of mass-energy equivalence, E=mc2, where c = velocity of light in vacuum.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations

7. In normal chemical reactions very minute change of mass takes place, which is too small to be measured. Hence, the law of conservation of mass and energy is not applicable to a general chemical reaction. However, the law is applicable to nuclear reactions where a change in energy is detectable.

8. The mass (measured in gram units) of 1 L of a gas at STP is known as the standard density of the gas.

9. The vapour density or relative density of a gas is defined as the ratio of the mass of a given volume of the gas at a given temperature and pressure to the mass of an equal volume of hydrogen gas at the same temperature and pressure.

10. Vapour density is a ratio and hence, it has no unit.

11. Vapour density is independent of temperature and pressure. So, its value is constant at any temperature or pressure.

12. Molecular mass of a gas is twice its vapour density.

13. At STP, the volume of 1 mol of any gas is 22.4 L.

14. At STP, the mass of 1 L of any gas = vapour density of the gas x 0.089

15. Calculation of relative quantities of reactants and products in a chemical reaction is known as stoichiometry.

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations Short And Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Discuss the significance of a balanced chemical equation in chemical calculation.
Answer:

The significance of a balanced chemical equation in chemical calculation

A chemical equation provides us with qualitative as well as quantitative information about a chemical reaction.

Qualitative information: From the chemical equation we can easily identify the reactants and products in a chemical reaction.

  1. Quantitative information:

    It gives us an idea about the number of atoms and molecules of reactants and products involved in the reaction.
  2. It gives us an idea about the mass of the reactants that reacts with each other and the mass of the products formed.
  3. If the reactants or products are gases, then at a given temperature and pressure, their volume can be determined.

Question 2. What information can be obtained from the equation \(2 \mathrm{H}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)?

Answer:

Information can be obtained from the equation \(2 \mathrm{H}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

The equation provides us with the following information:

Qualitative information: Hydrogen and oxygen react with each other to form water.

Quantitative information:

1. 2 mol of hydrogen reacts with 1 mol of oxygen to produce 2 mol of water.
2. Here, 2 X (2 x l)g = 4 g hydrogen reacts with (2 X 16)g = 32g oxygen to produce 2 x (2 x 1 + 16) = 36g water.
3. At the same temperature and pressure, 2 volumes of hydrogen combine with 1 volume of oxygen to produce 2 volumes of water vapour.
4. At STP, 2 x 22.4L = 44.8L hydrogen combines with 22.4 L oxygen to produce 2 x 22.4 L = 44.8 L steam.

Question 3. State the limitations of a chemical equation.
Answer:

A chemical equation cannot give us information about:

1. Concentration of reactants and products.
2. The rate of the reaction or the time required for the completion of the reaction.
3. Whether the reaction has completed or not.

Question 4. In a chemical reaction, mass is conserved explain.
Answer:

In a chemical reaction, mass is conserved as

In a chemical reaction, reactants are transformed into products. The total mass of the products is found to be equal to the total mass of the reactants.

Let us consider, A and B react with each other to produce C and D in a reaction. Hence, the mass of A + mass of B = mass of C + mass of D Thus, the total mass of A and B = total mass of C and D.

Question 5. Show with the help of an experiment that mass is conserved in a chemical reaction.
Answer:

With The help of an experiment that mass is conserved in a chemical reaction:

The law of conservation of mass can be proved with the help of rusting of iron.

Materials required: A hard glass test tube, some new iron nails, water, rubber cork, and common balance.

Experiment: A small amount of water is taken in a hard glass test tube and some glossy iron nails are dipped into the water. The mouth of the test tube is covered with the help of a rubber cork. The mass of the test tube is measured with a common balance and is left undisturbed for some days.

Observation: After some days it will be observed that brown-coloured rust is formed on the iron nails. In this condition, the mass of the test tube is measured again with a common balance and it is observed that the mass of the test tube before and after the experiment is equal.

Conclusion: Iron nails react with oxygen and water present in the test tube to form rust.

∴ \(\mathrm{Fe}+\mathrm{O}_2 \text { + water vapour } \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3 \cdot x \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

x = a number of water molecules.

In this case, the total mass of the iron piece along with unreacted oxygen and water vapour is equal to the mass of the rusted iron. Thus, we can say that mass is conserved during chemical reactions.

Question 6. A piece of iron gets heavier when it is kept in moist air for a long time state whether mass is conserved in this case?
Answer:

When iron is kept in moist air for a long time rust is formed over the surface of the iron piece. Oxygen and water vapour present in the air react with iron to form hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3 . xH2O).

As a result, the mass increases. So, the total mass of the iron piece along with oxygen and water vapour is equal to the mass of rusted iron. Hence, mass is conserved in this process.

Question 7. On burning, the mass of a candle decreases state whether mass is conserved in this process.

Answer: On burning, the wax of the candle reacts with aerial oxygen to form carbon dioxide (CO2), other gases and water vapour. These products escape into atmosphere. If all the products are collected together, then it would be observed that the total mass of the products is equal to the total mass of wax and used oxygen.

Thus, it can be said mass of wax + mass of used oxygen before burning = mass of remaining candle + mass of produced CO2 + mass of other gases produced + mass of water vapour.
Hence, mass is conserved in this process.

Question 8. Explain with reasons whether law of conservation of mass is followed during electrolysis of acidified water.

Answer: During electrolysis of acidified water, water decomposes to form hydrogen and oxygen.

If electrolysis is carried out in a closed vessel it will be observed that the total mass remains same before and after the electrolysis, i.e., total mass of acidified water = mass of remaining acidified water + mass of produced hydrogen + mass of produced oxygen.

So, it can be said that law of conservation of mass is obeyed during the electrolysis of acidified water.

Question 9. In the normal chemical reactions, mass does not undergo measurable change-explain.

Answer: In the normal chemical reactions, heat is either evolved or absorbed. According to mass-energy equivalence, if heat is evolved in a reaction, an equivalent amount of mass of the reactant will decrease. On the other hand, if heat is absorbed, an equivalent amount of mass of the reactant will increase.

But, in normal chemical reactions, the change in mass observed due to the absorption or evolution of heat is too small to be measured with a balance. Hence, we can say that no measurable change of mass takes place in a chemical reaction.

Question 10. What is the significance of the equation E=mc2? In normal chemical reactions heat is either evolved or absorbed, yet, the change of mass is not observed. Why?

Answer: When a substance of mass ‘m‘ is converted into another substance, an equivalent amount of energy E is produced. The equation, E=mc2, represents the conversion of mass into energy and vice versa, where c = velocity of light in vacuum.

The change of mass involved in the normal chemical reactions is too small to be measured. Thus, a change of mass is not generally observed in normal chemical reactions.

Question 11. The law of conservation of mass is not applicable in high energy transformations— explain.
Answer:

During high-energy transformations such as in nuclear reactions, the total mass is converted into an equivalent amount of energy.

As a result, the large amount of energy produced can be determined from Einstein’s equation, E=mc2. Hence, it can be said that in high-energy transformations law of conservation of mass is not valid. Instead, in such cases, law of conservation of mass and energy is applicable.

Question 12. 1g of a substance is completely converted into energy. Using the equation E=mc2 find the amount of energy obtained due to the conversion.

Answer: The eqaution, E=mc2, represents mass-energy equivalence where,

E = energy, m = mass and c = speed of light in vacuum = 3 x 1010 cm . s-1

∴ E = 1 x (3 x 1010)2erg

= 9 x 1020 erg = 2.14 x 1013 calorie. [∴1 cal = 4.2 x 107 erg]

Question 13. What do you mean by standard density of a gas? What is vapour density or relative density of a gas?

Answer:

1. The mass (measured in gram units) of 1 litre of a gas at STP is known as standard density of the gas.

2. The vapour density or relative density of a gas is defined as the ratio of mass of a given volume of the gas at a given temperature and pressure to the mass of an equal volume of hydrogen gas at the same temperature and pressure.

Question 14. Deduce the relationship between the standard density and vapour density of a gas.

Answer: Vapour density of a gas = mass of a given volume of the gas at a given temperature and pressure/ mass of an equal volume of hydrogen gas at the same temperature and pressure

or, Vapour density of a gas = \(\frac{\text { mass of } V \text { volume of the gas at STP }}{\text { mass of } V \text { volume of hydrogen gas at STP }}\) = \(\frac{\text { mass of } 1 \mathrm{~L} \text { of the gas at STP }}{\text { mass of } 1 \mathrm{~L} \text { of hydrogen gas at STP }}\)

or, Vapour density of the gas =\(\frac{\text { standard density of the gas }}{\text { standard density of hydrogen gas }}\)

or, Vapour density of the gas =\(=\frac{\text { standard density of the gas }}{0.089 \mathrm{~g} \cdot \mathrm{L}^{-1}}\)

Question 15. Deduce the relationship between molecular mass (M) and vapour density (D) of a gas.
Answer:

The relationship between molecular mass (M) and vapour density (D) of a gas;

Vapour density of a gas =  mass of a given volume of the gas at a given temperature and pressure/ mass of equal volume of hydrogen gas at the same temperature and pressure

According to Avogadro’s law, if ‘n’ number of molecules are present in 1/ L of a gas at a given temperature and pressure, ‘n’ number of H2 molecules will also be present in V L of hydrogen gas at the same temperature and pressure.

Hence, vapour density of the gas (D) = \(\frac{\text { mass of } n \text { molecules of the gas }}{\text { mass of } n \text { molecules of hydrogen }}\)

= \(\frac{\text { mass of } 1 \text { molecule of the gas }}{\text { mass of } 1 \text { molecule of hydrogen }}\)

= \(\frac{\text { mass of } 1 \text { molecule of the gas }}{\text { mass of } 2 \text { atoms of hydrogen }}\) (as hydrogen molecule is diatomic)

= \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\text { mass of } 1 \text { molecule of the gas }}{\text { mass of } 1 \text { atom of hydrogen }}\)

= \(\frac{1}{2} \times \text { molecular mass of the gas }(M)\)

∴ \(D=\frac{M}{2}\)  ∴ M = 2D

Thus, the molecular mass of gas = 2 Χ vapour density of the gas.

Question 16. How will you understand whether a gas is heavier than air or not? The vapour density of chlorine is 35.5. How will it displace air from a gas jar?
Answer:
1. lf the vapour density of a gas is found to be greater than that of air (14.4), it can be assumed that the gas is heavier than air.

2. The vapour density of chlorine is greater than air. Hence, it is heavier than air. So, there will be an upward displacement of air when chlorine gas is collected into a gas jar filled with air.

Question 17. Vapour density of a gas does not change with temperature justified.

Answer: The vapour density or relative density of a gas is defined as the ratio of the mass of a given volume of the gas at a given temperature and pressure to the mass of an equal volume of hydrogen gas at the same temperature and pressure.

With an increase or decrease in temperature the volumes of hydrogen as well as the concerned gas increase or decrease in the same proportion. Hence, the vapour density of a gas does not change, with temperature.

Question 18. Air contains 74% nitrogen, 24% oxygen and 2% CO2 by volume. Which of the following gases are heavier and which ones are lighter than air CO2, NH3, CH4, and Cl2?

Answer: Average molecular mass of air = \(\frac{28 \times 74+32 \times 24+2 \times 44}{100}\) = 29.28.

So, Vapour density of air = \(\frac{29.28}{2}\) = 14.64.

Now, the vapour density of CO2 = \(\frac{44}{2}\) = 22

Hence, it is heavier than air.

Vapour density of NH3 = \(\frac{17}{2}\) = 8.5.

Hence, it is lighter than air.

Vapour density of CH4 =\( \frac{16}{2}\) = 8.

Hence, it is lighter than air.

Vapour density of Cl2 = \(\frac{71}{2}\) = 35.5.

Hence, it is heavier than air.

Question 19. Dry air is heavier than moist air. Explain with reason.

Answer:

Dry air is heavier than moist air:

The average vapour density of air is 14.4 while that of water vapour is 9. Hence, a given volume of dry air is heavier than an equal volume of water vapour. Moist air contains more amount of water vapour as compared to dry air. That is why dry air is heavier than moist air.

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. Law of conservation of mass was proposed
1. Dalton
2. Lavoisier
3. Arrhenius
4. Proust

Answer: 2. Lavoisier

Question 2. The difference in mass between reactants and products is
1. Observed in low-energy transformations
2. Observed in a general chemical reaction
3. Observed in high-energy transformations
4. Never observed

Answer: 3. Observed in high-energy transformations

Question 3. Two substances, A and B react with each other to produce C and D. Which of the following statements is true?
1. Total mass of A and B > total mass of C and D
2. Total mass of A and B < total mass of C
3. Total mass of A and B = total mass of C and D
4. Mass of A = mass of 8 and mass of C = mass of D

Answer: 3. Total mass of A and B = total mass of C and D

Question 4. The mass-energy equivalence is represented by the equation
1. E2=mc
2. E=mc2
3. E= m2c
4. E = mc

Answer: 2. E=mc2

Question 5. Which of the following cannot be determined from a chemical equation?
1. Number of moles of reactants & products
2. Volume of reactants and products at STP
3. Concentration of reactants and products
4. Mass of reactants and products.

Answer: 3. Concentration of reactants and products

Question 6. The equation E=mc2 is related to
1. Newton
2. Planck
3. Avogadro
4. Einstein

Answer: 4. Einstein

Question 7. Measurable change in mass takes place in
1. General chemical reactions
2. Nuclear reactions
3. Exothermic reactions
4. Endothermic reactions

Answer: 2. Nuclear reactions

Question 8. In the equation E=mc2, the terms E, m and c respectively represents
1. Mass, energy and speed of light in vacuum
2. Speed of light in vacuum, mass and energy
3. Energy, mass and speed of light in vacuum
4. Energy, speed of light in vacuum and mass

Answer: 3. Energy, mass and speed of light in vacuum

Question 9. According to mass-energy equivalence, in an exothermic reaction the mass of products
1. Will decrease in an equivalent amount
2. Will increase in an equivalent amount
3. Will increase or decrease in an equivalent amount
4. Will remain unchanged

Answer: 1. Will decrease in an equivalent amount

Question 10. According to mass-energy equivalence, in an endothermic reaction the mass of products
1. Will decrease in equivalent amount
2. Will increase in equivalent amount
3. Will increase or decrease in equivalent amount
4. Will remain unchanged

Answer: 2. Will increase in equivalent amount

Question 11. Total amount of mass and energy after any physical or chemical transformation
1. Decreases
2. Increases
3. Remains constant
4. Norie of these

Answer: 3. Remains constant

Question 12. The relationship between mass and number of moles is given by

1. \(\text { number of moles }=\frac{\text { molar mass }}{\text { given mass }}\)

2. \(\text { molar mass }=\frac{\text { number of moles }}{\text { given mass }}\)

3. \(\text { number of moles }=\frac{\text { given mass }}{\text { molar mass }}\)

4. number of moles = given mass x molar mass

Answer: 3. \(\text { number of moles }=\frac{\text { given mass }}{\text { molar mass }}\)

Question 13. The amount of N2 produced from 64g NH4NO2 is
1. 14g
2. 28g
3. 32g
4. 40g

Answer: 2. 28g

Question 14. The volume of NO2 produced when 2 mol of NO reacts with O2 at STP is
1. 11.2 L
2. 44.8 L
3. 22.4 L
4. 5.6 L

Answer: 3. 22.4 L

Question 15. Which of the following relations is correct?
1. At STP, mass of 1L of a gas = vapour density of the gas x 0.89
2. At STP, mass of 1L of a gas = vapour density of the gas x 0.089
3. Vapour density of a gas = 0.089 x mass of 1L of a gas at STP
4. Vapour density of a gas = 2.24 x molecular masss of the gas

Answer: 2. At STP, mass of 1L of a gas = vapour density of the gas x 0.089

Question 16. 1 mol of nitrogen combines with 3 mol of hydrogen to produce.
1. 1 mol NH3
2. 2 mol NH3
3. 3 mol N3  
4. 4 mol NH3

Answer: 2. 2 mol NH3

Question 17. The relationship between molecular mass and vapour density is given by
1. 2M = D
2. M = D2
3. M = 3D
4. M = 2D

Answer: 4. M = 2D

Question 18. The vapour density of SO2 is
1. 16
2. 32
3. 64
4. 48

Answer: 2. 32

Question 19. The molecular mass of a gas is 46. Its vapour density is
1. 23u
2. 23 amu
3. 23 g
4. 23

Answer:  4. 23

Question 20. The vapour density of a gas is 22. The volume of 44g of the gas at STP is
1. H.2L
2. 5.6L
3. 22.4L
4. 44.8L

Answer: 3. 22.4L

Question 21. The average vapour density of air is
1. 14.4
2. 16.5
3. 17.2
4. 20.1

Answer: 1. 14.4

Question 22. The molecular mass of chlorine is 71. Which of the following statements is correct?
1. Chlorine gas is lighter than air
2. Chlorine gas is heavier than air
3. Chlorine gas has the almost same mass as that of air
4. Unpredictable

Answer: 2. Chlorine gas is heavier than air

Question 23. Mass of 112 mL O2 at NTP is
1. 0.64 g
2. 0.96 g
3. 0.32 g
4. 0.16g

Answer: 4. 0.16g

Question 24. Mass of 6.022 x1022 number of molecules of water is
1. 18 g
2. 1.8 g
3. 9 g
4. 0.18 g

Answer: 2. 1.8 g

Question 25. Volume of CO2 gas at STP, obtained by heating 1 mol of CaCO3 is
1. 22.4 L
2. 11.2 L
3. 5.6 L
4. 44.8L

Answer: 1. 22.4 L

Question 26. The percentage increase in mass of an Mg wire after its combustion in pure oxygen is
1. 100%
2. 66.7%
3. 24%
4. 80%

Answer: 2. 66.7%

Question 27. The volume of hydrogen at STP obtained from the reaction of 4 mol Na with water is
1. 22.4 L
2. 44.8 L
3. 11.2 L
4. 5.6L

Answer: 2. 44.8 L

Question 28. The number of moles of NH3 gas formed by the reaction of 2 mol Nwith 6 mol H2 is
1. 6 mol
2. 2 mol
3. 8 mol
4. 4 mol

Answer: 4. 4 mol

Question 29. Vapour density of sulphur trioxide is
1. 40
2. 32
3. 36
4. 80

Answer: 1. 40

Question 30. Vapour density of a gas is 32. Which of the following is the molecular mass of the gas?
1. 8
2. 16
3. 32
4. 64

Answer: 4. 64

Question 31. The volume of CO2 at STP, obtained by the complete combustion of 1.2 g of C is
1. 1.2 L
2. 2.24 L
3. 4.8 L
4. 4.4 L

Answer: 2. 2.24 L

Question 32. Molecular mass of methane is 16. Which of the following is its vapour density?
1. 22.4
2. 8
3. 16
4. 32

Answer: 2. 8

Question 33. The volume of 2 mol CO2 at STP is
1. 11.2 L
2. 22.4 L
3. 44.8 L
4. 44.8 mL

Answer: 3. 44.8 L

Question 34. The mass of 1 L of H2 gas at STP is
1. 1g
2. 2g
3. 0.089 g
4. 22.4 g

Answer: 3. 0.089 g

Question 35. Amount of nitrogen required to produce 4 mol NH3 is
1. 14 g
2. 28 g
3. 42 g
4. 56 g

Answer: 4. 56 g

Question 36. The volume of 1.7 g of ammonia gas, at STP is
1. 22.4 L
2. 2.24 L
3. 11.2 L
4. 1.12 L

Answer: 2. 2.24 L

Question 37. The volume of 2.8 g ethylene, at STP is
1. 224 L
2. 22.4 L
3. 2.24 L
4. 0.224 L

Answer: 3. 2.24 L

Question 38. Vapour density of a gas is 16. The mass of 11.2 L of the gas at STP is
1. 22.4 g
2. 8 g
3. 16 g
4. 11.2 g

Answer: 3. 16 g

Question 39. Ratio of the standard density of a gas at NTP to its vapour density is
1. 0.89
2. 0.98
3. 0.089
4. 8.9

Answer: 3. 0.089

Question 40. The volume of 17 g of a gas at STP is 22.4 L. Vapour density of the gas will be
1. 17
2. 0.85
3. 8.5
4. 1.7

Answer: 3. 8.5

Question 41. The ratio of molecular mass to the vapour density of a gas with respect to hydrogen is
1. 2:1
2. 1:2
3. 1:1
4. 1:3

Answer: 1. 2:1

Question 42. Number of molecules formed by the complete reaction of 1 mol of C with 1 mol of O2 is
1. 6.022 X 1023
2. 1.806 X 1024
3. 6.022 X 1022
4. 6.022 x 1024

Answer: 1. 6.022 X 1023

Question 43. Value of c in the equation, E=mc2 is
1. 3 x 1010 m/s
2. 3 x 109 cm/s
3. 3 x 109 m/s
4. 3 x 1010 cm/s

Answer: 4. 3 x 1010 cm/s

Question 44. If the population of the earth be 7 x 109, then the number of moles of human is
1. 1
2. 6.022 X 10~14
3. 1.16 X 10~23
4. 1.16 x 10~14

Answer:

Question 45. Mass of 11.2 L CO2 at STP is
1. 88 g
2. 44 g
3. 32 g
4. 22 g

Answer: 4. 22 g

Question 46. Molar mass of water (in g .  mol-1 unit) is
1. 16
2. 18
3. 20
4. 22

Answer: 2. 18

Question 47. Mass of 12.046 X 1023 number of molecules of N2 is
1. 28 g
2. 56 g
3. 14 g
4. 7g

Answer: 2. 56 g

Question 48. If the volume of 44 g of CO2 at STP be 22.4L, the mass of 5.6 L of CO2 will be
1. 11g
2. 22g
3. 33 g
4. 44 g

Answer: 1. 11g

Question 49. According to E=mc2 equation, the unit of E will be
1. meV
2. MeV
3. mev
4. mV

Answer: 2. MeV

Question 50. What is the amount of chalk to be reacted with HCI to produce 5.6 L of CO2 at STP?
1. 25 g
2. 30g
3. 15 g
4. 20 g

Answer: 1. 25 g

Question 51. If the vapour density of a compound be 13, its molecular formula may be
1. CO2
2. C2H4
3. C2H6
4. C2H2

Answer: 4. C2H2

Question 52. The gas whose vapour density is equal to that of CO gas is
1. O2
2. N2
3. H2
4. Cl2

Answer: 2. N2

Question 53. Amount of carbon required to produce 2 mol CO2is
1. 12 g
2. 6g
3. 24 g
4. 44 g

Answer: 3. 24 g

Question 54. The percentage of Ca in CaCO3 is
1. 25
2. 40
3. 60
4. 80

Answer: 2. 40

Question 55. Amount of hydrogen formed by electrolysis of 5 mol of water is
1. 4 g
2. 5 g
3. 20 g
4. 10g

Answer: 4. 10g

Question 56. Vapour density of carbon dioxide is
1. 22
2. 11
3. 44
4. 88

Answer: 1. 22

Question 57. 22 g CO2 is formed by the reaction of 6 g carbon with oxygen, the required amount of oxygen is
1. 6g
2. 18g
3. 16g
4. 28g

Answer: 3. 16g

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations Answer In Brief

Question 1. What do you mean by ‘conservation of mass’ in a chemical reaction?
Answer: In a chemical reaction, total mass of all the reactants is equal to total mass of all the products. This is known as the ‘conservation of mass’ in a chemical reaction.

Question 2. State the law of conservation of mass and energy.
Answer: The law of conservation of mass and energy states that the total mass and energy before and after a transformation is always constant.

Wbbse class 10 physical science chapter 3 question answers

Question 3. When is the ‘law of conservation of mass and energy’ applicable instead of ‘law of conservation of mass’?
Answer: In high energy transformations like nuclear reactions, ‘law of conservation of mass and energy’ is applied instead of ‘law of conservation of mass’.

Question 4. Define ‘reactants’ and ‘products’.
Answer: The chemical substances participating in a chemical reaction are known as ‘reactants’. The substances produced due to chemical reactions among the reactants are known as ‘products’.

Question 5. Is the change in mass detectable in normal chemical reactions?
Answer: No, the change in mass is not detectable in normal chemical reactions.

Question 6. Write the relationship between molecular mass (M) and vapour density (D) of a gas.
Answer: Molecular mass (M)=2x vapour density (D).

Question 7. Vapour density of SO2 gas at 25°C and normal pressure is 32.-What will be its vapour density at 50°C?
Answer: Since, vapour density is independent of temperature and pressure, hence, the vapour density of SO2 at 50°C will remain 32.

Question 8. Define ‘stoichiometry’.
Answer: Stoichiometry is defined as the calculation of relative quantities of reactants and products in a chemical reaction.

Wbbse class 10 physical science chapter 3 question answers

Question 9. What is the unit of vapour density?
Answer: Since vapour density is a ratio, thus it has no unit.

Question 10. Mass of 5.6 L of a gas at STP is 11g. Find the vapour density of the gas.
Answer: Mass of 5.6 x 4 = 22.4L of the gas at STP is 11 x 4 = 44g. Hence, vapour density of the gas = 44/2 = 22.

Question 11. Name the physical quantity whose unit is ‘mole’.
Answer:’Mole’ is the SI unit of the amount of substance.

Question 12. What is the number of molecules in 22.4 L of a gas at STP?
Answer: 6.022 x 1023.

Question 13. What is the number of moles in m g of a gas having molar mass of M g/mol?
Answer: Number of moles of the said gas = M/N.

Question 14. What is the number of molecules in 1.8 g water?
Answer: Number of molecules present in 1.8 g water = 6.022 X 1023 X 1.8/18 = 6.022 x 1022

Question 15. How much ammonia is equivalent to 4 mol ammonia?
Answer: 4 mol ammonia is equivalent to 17 x 4 = 68 g of ammonia.

Question 16. What is the mass of 12.046 x 1023 number of nitrogen molecules?
Answer: Mass of 6.022 x 1023 number of nitrogen molecules = 28 g

∴ Mass of 12.046 x 1023 number of nitrogen molecules

∴ \(\frac{28 \times 12.046 \times 10^{23}}{6.022 \times 10^{23}} \mathrm{~g}\)

Question 17. Calculate the molecular mass of a gas if the volume of 50 g of the gas is 44.8 L at STP.
Answer: Gram-molecular mass of the gas = mass of 22.4L of the gas at STP = \(\frac{50 \times 22.4}{44.8}\) = 25g
∴ Molecular mass of the gas is 25.

Question 18. What is the relationship between standard density and vapour density?

Wbbse class 10 physical science chapter 3 question answers

Answer: Standard density = 0.089 x vapour density.

Question 19. If the vapour density of a bimolecular gas be 14, calculate its atomic mass.
Answer: Molecular mass of the gas = 2 x 14 = 28

Since the gas is bimolecular, hence its atomic mass = 28/2 =14.

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. A chemical equation. provides us with _________ and ____________ information.
Answer: Quantitative, qualitative

Question 2. The velocity of light in a vacuum is _________.
Answer: 3Χ108m.s-1.

Question 3. The change in mass is __________ in normal chemical reactions.
Answer: Undetectable

Question 4. Mass is ____________ in case of rusting of iron.
Answer: Conserved

Question 5. The volume of H2S produced from 88g FeS is __________.
Answer: 22.4L

Question 6. When hydrogen reacts with oxygen to form water, the number of moles ___________.
Answer: Decreases

Question 7. Vapour density is __________ of temperature and pressure.
Answer: Independent

Question 8. CO2 is heavier than air as the__________ of CO2 is greater than air.
Answer: Vapour density

Question 9. If the vapour density of a gas is 20, the number of moles of 80g of the gas is ________.
Answer: 2

Question 10. The mass of 1L H2 at STP is ________.
Answer: 0.089g

Question 11. In a chemical reaction, the total mass of reactants is = the total mass of the _________.
Answer: products

Wbbse class 10 physical science chapter 3 question answers

Question 12. The proposer of E=mc2 equation is ____________
Answer: Albert Einsein

Question 13. At STP/ 22.4 L of H2 reacts with 22.4 L of Cl2 to produce ________ L of HCl.
Answer: 44.8

Question 14. Vapour density is a ______ less quantity.
Answer: Unit

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. The total mass remains constant before and after a chemical reaction.
Answer: True

Question 2. The vapour density of a gas is twice its molecular mass.
Answer: False

Question 3. 35Cl atom is taken as the standard for the determination of atomic mass.
Answer: False

Wbbse class 10 physical science chapter 3 question answers

Question 4. 8g oxygen contains 3.011 Χ 1023 molecules.
Answer: False

Question 5. Vapour density is a unitless quantity.
Answer: True

Question 6. 16g oxygen is equal to 0.5 mole oxygen.
Answer: True

Question 7. 6.022 x 1023 molcules of water weighs 18g.
Answer: True

Question 8. The substances produced in a chemical reaction are called reactants.
Answer: False

Question 9. The volume of lg gas at STP is 22.4L.
Answer: True

Wbbse class 10 chemical calculation

Question 10. Scientist Lavoisier proved the ‘law of conservation of mass’.
Answer: True

Question 11. Interconversion of mass and energy is possible.
Answer: True

Question 12. At STP, the mass of 22.4 L of any substance refers to its molecular mass.
Answer: False

Question 13. The amount of O2 formed by heating 4 mol of KCIO3 is 2 mol.
Answer: False

Question 14. Vapour density of a gas x 0.089 =standard density of the gas.
Answer: True

Question 15. If the molecular mass of a gas is 44, its vapour density will be 24.
Answer: False

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations Numerical Examples

Question 1. 3 g of carbon reacts completely with 8 g oxygen to produce carbon dioxide. How much carbon dioxide will be produced? Justify your answer.
Answer: During chemical reactions, law of conservation of mass is obeyed and hence, according to the law, total mass of the reactants must be equal to the total mass of the products.

Here, mass of carbon = 3g; mass of oxygen = 8g
Hence, mass of produced CO2 = (3 + 8)g = 11 g

Question 2.  15.9 g copper sulphate and 10.6 g sodium carbonate react with each other to produce 14.2 g sodium sulphate and 12.3 g copper carbonate. Show that the results are in accordance with the law of conservation of mass.

Answer: According to the given data,

Mass of copper sulphate \(=15.9 \mathrm{~g}\)

Mass of sodium carbonate \(=10.6 \mathrm{~g}\)

So, total mass of reactants =26.5 g similarly for the products,

Wbbse class 10 chemical calculation

Mass of sodium sulphate 14.2 g

Mass of copper carbonate =12.3 g

Total mass of products =26.5 g

Hence, in the given reaction, total mass of the reactants = total mass of the products. So, we can say that the given data is in accordance with the law of conservation of mass.

Question 3. When 3.0g ethane (C2H6) is burnt in air 8.8g CO2 and 5.4g H2O are produced. Show that the result is in accordance with law of conservation of mass.

Answer: When ethane is burnt in air, following reaction takes place

2\(\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_6+7 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 4 \mathrm{CO}_2+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Gram-molecular mass of ethane = 30g.

Hence, from the equation it can be deduced that (2 x 30) g ethane reacts with (7 x 32)g oxygen.

∴3g ethane reacts with \(\frac{7 \times 32 \times 3}{2 \times 30}\) = 11.2 g oxygen.

Thus, total mass of reactants = (3 + 11.2 g) =14.2g

Total mass of products = (8.8 + 5.4)g = 14.2g.

Thus, the result agrees with the law of conservation of mass.

Question 4. 30g potassium chlorate on heating produces 14.9g potassium chloride and 9.6g oxygen. How much potassium chlorate remains unreacted?

Answer: Let us consider, the mass of unreacted potassium chlorate is xg.

In a chemical reaction mass is conserved. Hence,mass of potassium chlorate taken = mass of unreacted potassium chlorate + mass of produced potassium chloride + mass of produced oxygen

∴30 = x+ 14.9 + 9.6

X = 5.5

Hence, 5.5 g potassium chlorate will remain unreacted.

Wbbse class 10 chemical calculation

Question 5. When 12.25g of potassium chlorate is strongly heated, it produces 7.45g potassium chloride and gives out 3.36 L oxygen at standard temperature and pressure. Show that the reaction obeys the law of conservation of mass.

Answer: The molecular mass of oxygen = 32.

Hence, at SIP 22.41 oxygen weighs 32g.

∴ At STP 3.36 L oxygen weights \(\frac{32 \times 3.36}{22.4}\) g= 4.8g.

Mass of potassium chlorate = 12.25 g.

Total mass of produced oxygen and KCI = (4.8 + 7.45)g = 12.25g.

Thus, we can say that the reaction obeys the law of conservation of mass.

Question 6. What amount of sodium chloride will react with 3.41g silver nitrate to produce 1.70g sodium nitrate and 2.87g silver chloride? Consider that the mass is conserved completely in the reaction.

Answer:

1. As the mass is conserved in a chemical reaction, we can say, mass of sodium chloride + mass of silver nitrate = mass of sodium nitrate + mass of silver chloride or, mass of sodium chloride + 3.41g

Therefore, mass of sodium chloride = (1.70 + 2.87 -3.41)g = 1.16 g

Question 7. 6.3g NaHCO3 when added to 15g acetic acid solution produces 18g of residue. Find the mass of evolved CO2.

Answer: According to the law of conservation of mass in a chemical reaction, total mass of reactants = total mass of products

Here, total mass of reactants = (6.3 + 15) g = 21.3 g

Hence, 21.3g = mass of residue + mass of evolved CO2 or, 21.3 g = 18 g + mass of evolved CO2

Therefore, mass of evolved CO2 = (21.3- 18) g = 33 g.

Wbbse class 10 chemical calculation

Question 8. At STP, mass of 250 ml of a gas is 0.7317g. If the density of hydrogen at STP is 0.08987g •L-1, then find the vapour density of the gas. What will be its molecular mass?

Answer: At STP, mass of 250 mL of hydrogen gas = \(\frac{0.08987 \times 250}{1000} \mathrm{~g}\) = 0.0224g

Hence, vapour density of the gas \(\frac{\text { mass of } 250 \mathrm{~mL} \text { of the gas at STP }}{\text { mass of } 250 \mathrm{~mL} \text { hydrogen at STP }}\)   = \(\frac{0.7317 \mathrm{~g}}{0.0224 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 32.66.

Molecular mass of the gas = 2 x vapour density = 2 x 32.66 = 65.32 .

Question 9. At 750mm pressure and 25° C 44.8 temperature, 0.15 g of a gas occupies 45.95mL. Find the standard density,vapour density and molecular mass of the gas.

Answer: Let, the volume of the gas at STP = V1 mL

p1 = 760mm, T1 = 273 K V2 = 45.95mL, p2 = 750 mm, T2= (25 + 273) K = 298K

By combining of Boyle’s law and Charles’ law \(\frac{P_1 V_1}{T_1}=\frac{P_2 V_2}{T_2}\)

∴ \(V_1=\frac{750 \times 45.95 \times 273}{760 \times 298} \mathrm{~mL}\) = 41.54mL

Thus, at STP, 41.54mL of the gas weighs 0.15g.

Hence, at STP, 1000 mL of the gas weights \(\frac{0.15 \times 1000}{41.54} \mathrm{~g}\) = 3.61g.

Therefore, the standard density of the gas = is 361 g. L-1.

Vapour density = \(\frac{\text { standard density }}{0.089}\) = \(\frac{3.61}{0.089}\) = 40.56.

Molecular mass = 2 x vapour density ^ 2 x 40.56 = 81.12.

Question 10. 44.8 L of oxygen is required to completely convert 24g of a solid element into its oxide at STP. At STP, the gaseous oxide occupies 44.81. Find the mass of the gaseous oxide produced and its vapour density.

Answer: At STP, 22.4 L oxygen weighs 32 g.

Hence, 44.8 L oxygen at STP weights \(\frac{32 \times 44.8}{22.4} \mathrm{~g}\) = 64 g.

Mass of gaseous oxide formed = (24 + 64)g = 88g.

At STP, mass of 44.8 L of the gaseous oxide is 88g.

∴ At STP, 22.4 L of the gaseous oxide weighs \(\frac{88 \times 22.4}{44.8} \mathrm{~g}\) = 44g.

Thus, molecular mass of the gaseous oxide = 44g.

Vapour density =44/2 = 22 .

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 11. Vapour density of a gas is 8.62. What volume will be occupied by 8.62 g of the gas gat STP?
Answer: Vapour density of the gas = 8.62.

The molecular mass of the gas = 2 x 8.62 = 17.24 g.

Thus, at STP, 17.24 g of the gas occupies 22.4L

Hence, at STP, 8.62g of the gas occupies

= \(\frac{22.4 \times 8.62}{17.4} \mathrm{~L}\) = 11.1L.

Question 12. Vapour density of a gaseous element is 5 times than that of oxygen. If the molecule of the gas Is triatomic, find its atomic mass.

Answer: Vapour density of oxygen (D)= 32/2 = 16

∴ Hence, vapour density of the gas = 5×16 = 80.

Molecular mass of the gas = 2 x 80 = 160.

The gas is triatomic, hence its atomic mass = 160/3= 53.33.

Question 13. At standard temperature and pressure, vapour density of sulphur vapour is 9.143 times the vapourdensity of nitrogen gas. Find the molecular formula of sulphur vapour.

Answer: Vapour density of sulphur vapour with respect to nitrogen gas =\(\frac{\text { molecular mass of sulphur vapour }}{\text { molecular mass of nitrogen }}\)

Hence, molecular mass of sulphur vapour = 9.143 Χ 28 = 256.004.

So, atomicity of sulphur vapour = \(\frac{256.004}{32}\) = 8.

∴ Molecular formula of sulphur vapour = S8.

Question 14. Vapour density of a gas with respect to air is 1.528. At 27°C and 750 mmHg pressure, find the mass of 2 L of the gas. (vapour density of air with respect to hydrogen is 14.4)

Answer: Vapour density of the gas with respect to air = \(\frac{\text { molecular mass of the gas }}{\text { molecular mass of air }}\)

Hence, molecular mass of the gas = 1.528 x 28.8 = 44g.

If the volume of the gas at STP be V, then \(\frac{750 \times 2}{(273+27)}\) = \(\frac{760 \times V}{273}\)

or, \(V=\frac{750 \times 2 \times 273}{300 \times 760} L\) = 1.796L.

At STP, mass of 22.4 L of the gas = 44 g.
∴ At STP, mass of 1.796 L of the gas = \(\frac{44 \times 1.796}{22.4} \mathrm{~g}\) = 3.528g

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 15. log calcium carbonate reacts with excess dilute hydrochloric acid to produce CO2 gas.
Answer:

\(\begin{array}{cc}
\mathrm{CaCO}_3+\mathrm{HCl} & \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{CO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
(40+12+16 \times 3) \mathrm{g} & (12+16 \times 2) \mathrm{g} \\
=100 \mathrm{~g} & =44 \mathrm{~g}
\end{array}\)

1. From the above equation, it is observed that 44 g CO2 gas is produced from 100 g CaCO3.

Again, 44g CO2 = 1 mol CO2

Thus, we can say , 100g CaCO3 produces 1 mol CO2 10 g CaCO3 produces = 10/100 Χ 1 mol CO2  = 0.1 mol CO2 .

2. At STP, 1 mol CO2 occupies 22.4 L.

∴ At STP, 0.1 mol CO2 occupies = 0.1 X 22.4 L = 2.24 L.

Question 16. What amount of calcium carbonate will react with excess dilute HCL to produce 66g CO2?

Answer: CaCO3 reacts with dilute HCI to form calcium chloride and CO2. The reaction can be represented by the following equation,

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

⇒ \(\mathrm{CaCO}_3+\mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{CO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

⇒ \(\begin{array}{cc}
(40+12+16 \times 3) \mathrm{g} & (12+16 \times 2) \mathrm{g} \\
=100 \mathrm{~g} & =44 \mathrm{~g}
\end{array}\)

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Thus, 44g CO2 is produced from 100 g CaCO3 . 66g CO2 is produced from 66 g = 150g CaCO3 .

Question 17. How much potassium chlorate is required to produce 9.6 g oxygen? [K = 39, Cl = 35.5]

Answer: Oxygen is produced on thermal decomposition of potassium chlorate. The reaction is represented by the following balanced equation,

⇒ \(\mathrm{CaCO}_3+\mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{CO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

⇒ \(\begin{array}{cc} (40+12+16 \times 3) \mathrm{g} & (12+16 \times 2) \mathrm{g} \\
=100 \mathrm{~g} & =44 \mathrm{~g} \end{array}\)

From the above equation it can be said that, to produce 96g oxygen, the amount of potassium chlorate required is 245g.

∴ To produce 9.6 g oxygen, the amount of potassium chlorate required is= \(\frac{245 \times 9.6}{96} \mathrm{~g}\) = 245 x g

Question 18. What amount of Cu turnings and conc. H2SO4 are required to mproduce 64g of SO2 gas?
Answer: The reaction between copper turnings and sulphuric acid can be represented by the following balanced equation,

Cu\(+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{CuSO}_4+\mathrm{SO}_2+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

∴ \(\begin{array}{ccc}
63.5 \mathrm{~g} \quad 2(2+32+16 \times 4) \mathrm{g} & (32+16 \times 2) \mathrm{g} \\
=196 \mathrm{~g} & =64 \mathrm{~g}
\end{array}\)

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

From the above equation we can conclude that, 63.5g copper and 196 g sulphuric acid is required to produce 64g SO2 gas.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 19. What amount of ferrous sulphide is required to produce 1.12L H2S at STP on reaction with excess dilute H2SO4?

Answer: The reaction is represented by,

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{FeS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{FeSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \\
& (56+32) \mathrm{g}=88 \mathrm{~g} \quad 22.4 \mathrm{~L} \text { at STP } \\
&
\end{aligned}\)

Thus, at STP, 22.41 H2S is produced from 88g FeS

∴ At STP 1.12 L H2S is produced from \(\frac{1.12 \times 88}{22.4} \mathrm{~g}\)= 4.4g FeS

Question 20. When steam is passed over red hot iron ferrosoferric oxide is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved. To produce 8 mol of hydrogen how many moles of iron is needed?

Answer: The above reaction can be represented as

⇒ \(\underset{3 \mathrm{~mol}}{3 \mathrm{Fe}}+4 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_3 \mathrm{O}_4+\underset{4 \mathrm{~mol}}{4 \mathrm{H}_2}\)

To produce 4 mol of hydrogen number of moles of iron required is 3.

∴ To produce 8 mol of hydrogen number of moles of iron required is =\(\frac{3 \times 8}{4}\) = 6.

Hence, 6 mol of iron will be required.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 21. What amount of Zn-dust is required to produce 7g hydrogen? Zn-dust contains 88% zinc [Zn = 65.5].

Answer: The balanced equation of the reaction is

⇒ \(\underset{65.5 \mathrm{~g}}{\mathrm{Zn}}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{ZnSO}_4+\underset{1 \times 2 \mathrm{~g}=2 \mathrm{~g}}{\mathrm{H}_2}\)

2g hydrogen is produced from 65.5g Zn dust.

∴ 7g hydrogen is produced from \(\frac{65.5 \times 7}{2} \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{Zn}\) dust = 229.25g Zn dust.

Now, 88g zinc is present in l00g of Zn-dust.

∴ 229.25g zinc is present in \(\frac{100 \times 229.25}{88} \mathrm{~g}\) = 260.51 g of Zn-dust.

Hence, 260.51g of Zn-dust will be required to produce 7g of hydrogen.

Question 22. 15.25g of a mixture containing KClO3 and MnO2 gives off 4.8g oxygen on heating. What amount of MnO2 was present in the mixture as a catalyst? [K = 3S, Ci = 35.5, O = 16]

Answer: Oxygen is produced on the thermal decomposition of potassium chlorate. The reaction is represented by the following balanced equation,

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{KClO}_3+2 \mathrm{KCl} \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_2\)

⇒ \(\begin{array}{cc}
2(39+35.5+16 \times 3) g & 3(16 \times 2) \mathrm{g} \\
=245 \mathrm{~g} & =96 \mathrm{~g}
\end{array}\)

From the equation it can be said that, to produce 96g of oxygen, the amount of potassium chlorate required is 245g.

∴ To produce 4.8g oxygen, the amount of potassium chlorate required is 4.8g oxygen is produced from 12.25g KCIO3.

The total mass of the mixture = 15.25 g.

Hence, the amount of MnO2 present in the mixture = (15.25 -12.25)g = 3.00g.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 23. When 174g pure MnO2 is added to excess amount of cone. HCI, a gas is evolved. What amount of l2 will be released from Kl by the gas produced in this reaction? [Mn = 55,1 = 127]

Answer: MnO2 reacts with HCI according to the following balanced equation,

4\(\mathrm{HCl}+\mathrm{MnO}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{MnCl}_2+\mathrm{Cl}_2+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

55\(+2 \times 16=87 \mathrm{~g} \quad 2 \times 35.5=71 \mathrm{~g}\)

87 g MnO2 produces 71 g chlorine gas.

∴ 174 g MnO2 produces \(\frac{174 \times 71}{87} \mathrm{~g}\) = 142g chlorine gas.

Again, \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{Cl}_2+2 \mathrm{Kl} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{KCl}+\mathrm{I}_2 \\
& 2 \times 35.5=71 \mathrm{~g} \quad 2 \times 127=254 \mathrm{~g} \\
&
\end{aligned}\)

Thus, 71 g Cl2 gas releases 254g iodine.

Hence, 142g Cl2 gas releases \(\frac{254 \times 142}{71} g\) = 508g iodine.

Question 24. When excess AgNO3 solution is added to 1,873 g of a mixture containing KCI and NaCl, 3.731g AgCI is precipitated. Find the amount of KCI in the mixture. [K = 39,Ag = 108, Cl = 35.5 ]

Answer: Let us consider that the mixture contains xg NaCI. Hence, the amount of KCI = (1.873 – x)g.

∴ \(\mathrm{NaCl}+\mathrm{AgNO}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{NaNO}_3+\mathrm{AgCl}\)

23 \(+35.5=58.5 \mathrm{~g} \quad 108+35.5=143.5 \mathrm{~g}\)

58.5g NaCI precipitates 143.5 g AgCI.

∴ xg NaCI precipitates \(\frac{143.5 \times x}{58.5} \mathrm{~g}\) = 2.453 x g AgCI.

Again, \(\mathrm{KCl}+\mathrm{AgNO}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{NaNO}_3+\mathrm{AgCl}\)

74.5g KCI precipitates 143.5g AgCI

∴ (1.873 -x)g KCI precipitates \(\frac{143.5(1.873-X)}{74.5} \mathrm{~g}\) = (3.61-1.926x)g AgCI.

According to the problem, 2.453x + 3.61 – 1.926x = 3.731 Or, x = 0.2296 g.

Amount of KCI = (1.873 – 0.2296)g = 1.6434g.

Question 25. When 6.23g of a mixture of magnesium oxide and magnesium carbonate is strongly heated, the mass of the mixture decreases by 2.2g. Find the percent composition of the mixture.

Answer: On heating MgCO3, it decomposes to MgO and CO2 , but MgO has no effect on the mass. The produced CO2 gas is released from the system and hence the mass decreases.

⇒ \(\underset{24+12+3 \times 16=84 \mathrm{~g}}{\mathrm{MgCO}_3} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{MgO}+\mathrm{CO}_2\)

44 g CO2 is produced from 84g MgCO3.

∴ 2.2g CO2 is produced from \(\frac{84 \times 2.2}{44} g\) = 4.2g MgCO3 .

Thus, the mixture contains 4.2g MgCO3 .

∴Mass percent of MgCO3 in the mixture is = \(\frac{4.2}{6.23} \times 100\) = 67.42%.

Hence, the mass per cent of MgO in the mixture =(100-67.42)% = 32.58 %.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 26. 112g pure iron is converted to ferric chloride and dissolved in water. What volume of H2S gas at STP is required for the complete conversion of ferric chloride to ferrous chloride? [Fe = 56, Cl = 35.5]

Answer: The reactions involved can be represented by the following equations:

1. \(\underset{2 \times 56=112 \mathrm{~g}}{2 \mathrm{Fe}+3 \mathrm{Cl}_2} \rightarrow \rightarrow_{2(56+3 \times 35.5)=325 \mathrm{~g}}^{2 \mathrm{FeCl}_3}\)

2. \(\begin{aligned}
& 2 \mathrm{FeCl}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{FeCl}_2+2 \mathrm{HCl}+\mathrm{S} \\
& 2 \times(56+35.5 \times 3) \quad 22.4 \mathrm{~L} \\
& =325 \mathrm{~g} \quad \text { (at STP) } \\
&
\end{aligned}\)

Thus, according to the first equation, 112g of pure iron produces 325g of FeCl3 .

Again, from the second equation it can be concluded that 325g FeCl3 is completely reduced to  FeCl2 by 22.4L H2S gas at STP.

Question 27. The mass of 2.24 L of a gas at NtP is 3.17 g. Calculate its molecular mass, vapour density and standard density.

Answer: At NTP, 2.24 L of the gas has the mass of 3.17 g.

∴ At NTP, 22.4 L of the gas has the mass of \(\frac{3.17 \times 22.4}{2.24} \mathrm{~g}\) = 31.7g

∴ Molecular mass of the gas = 31.7

Vapour density of the gas = 31.7/2 = 15.85

∴ Standard density of the gas = vapour density x 0.089 g. L-1 = 15.85 x 0.089 g. L-1 = 1.41 g. L-1 respectively.

Molecular mass, vapour density and standard density of the gas is 31.7, 15.85 and 1.41 g • L_1 respectively.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 28. What amount of NaOH will be formed by reacting 23g Na with water at room temperature.

Answer: Balanced equation of the corresponding reaction,

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{Na}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NaOH}+\mathrm{H}_2\)

⇒ \((2 \times 23) g=46 g\)      \(2(23+16+1) g=80 g\)

According to the equation, 46 g Na produces 80g of NaOH

∴ 23 g Na will produce = \(\frac{80 \times 23}{46}\) = 40g of NaOH.

Question 29. What amount of sulphuric acid is required to neutralise 4 g of NaOH? Or, What amount of sulphuric acid will be needed to neutralise 40g NaOH?

Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& 2 \mathrm{NaOH}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
& 2(23+16+1) g(2 \times 1+32+4 \times 16) g \\
& =80 \mathrm{~g} \quad=98 \mathrm{~g} \\
&
\end{aligned}\)

Mass of H2SO4 required to neutralise 4g NaOH = \(\frac{98 \times 4}{80} \mathrm{~g}\) = 4.9 g

∴ 4.9 H2SO4 is needed to neutralise 4g NaOH.

Question 30. CaCl2, CO2 and H2O are formed by the reaction of CaCO3 with diL HCI. To form 55.5g of CaCl2, 22.0g CO2 and 9.0g of H2O from 50.0 g CaCO3, what amount (in g) of HCI will be needed? Calculate the number of moles of the required amount of HCI.

Answer: Balanced chemical eqaution:

⇒ \(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{CaCO}_3+2 \mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{CO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
(40+12+3 \times 16) \mathrm{g} 2(1+35.5) \mathrm{g}(40+2 \times 35.5) \mathrm{g}(12+2 \times 16) \mathrm{g}(2 \times 1+16) \mathrm{g} \\
=100 \mathrm{~g}=73 \mathrm{~g} \quad=111 \mathrm{~g}=44 \mathrm{~g} \quad=18 \mathrm{~g}
\end{gathered}\)

According to the equation, 100/2 g or 50g of will form 111/2 or 55.5g of CaCl2, 44/2 or 22g of CO2 and 18/2 or 9g of H2O by reacting with 73/2 g or 36.5g HCL.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 31. What amount of ammonium sulphate will be required to produce 6.8g ammonia by reaction of caustic soda with ammonium sulphate solution?

Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

(NH4)2SO4 + 2NaOH →Na2SO4 + 2NH3 + 2H2O
2 x (14+1 x 4)+32+(16 x 4)g    2 x (14 +1 x3)g
= 132g                                          =34g

Now, to form 34g NH3 amount of (NH4)2SO4 needed = 132g

∴ To form 6.8 g of NH3, amount of (NH4)2SO4 needed = \(\frac{132 \times 6.8}{34} \mathrm{~g}\) = 26.4g

Question 32. If the purity of limestone is 95%, then calculate the amount of CO2 formed by heating 200 g of the said sample. (Assume, no impurity present in the sample produces CO2 on heating)

Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

⇒ \(\begin{array}{cc}
\mathrm{CaCO}_3 \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} & \mathrm{CaO}+\mathrm{CO}_2 \\
(40+12+16 \times 3) \mathrm{g} & (12+16 \times 2) \mathrm{g} \\
=100 \mathrm{~g} & =44 \mathrm{~g}
\end{array}\)

Now amount of pure CaCO3 in 200 g of 95% pure lime stone sample = 200 x 95/100g = 190g

∴ According to the equation, the amount of CO2 formed from 100g CaCO3 is 44 g.

Amount of CO2 formed from 190g CaCO3 is \(\frac{44 \times 190}{100} \mathrm{~g}\)

∴ 83.6g CO2 will be formed from 200g of the 95% pure limestone sample.

Question 33. What amount of ferrous sulphide will be needed to react with dilute sulphuric acid to form 1.7g hydrogen sulphide gas.
Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

⇒ \(\mathrm{FeS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{FeSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}\)

(56 + 32)g = 88g   (1 Χ 2 +32)g = 34g

Now, to form 34g H2S, FeS needed = 88g

∴ To form 1.7g H2S, Fes needed = \(\frac{88 \times 1.7}{34} \mathrm{~g}\) = 4.4g.

∴ 1.7 g of H2S will be obtained by the reaction between dil.  H2SO4 and 44g FeS.

Question 34. When zinc oxide is heated with carbon, metallic zinc and carbon monoxide are formed. What amount of carbon will be needed to form 31.785g Zn and 14.000g CO from 40.685g zinc oxide? How many moles of carbon monoxide will be formed?

Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

∴ \(\mathrm{ZnO}+\mathrm{C} \rightarrow \mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{CO}\)

Mass of ZnO = 40.685g

Mass of Zn = 14.000g

Mass of CO = 14.000g

∴ Required amount of carbon = (31.785 +14 – 40.685)g + 5.1g

Number of moles of CO = 14/28 = 0.5

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 35. What amount of H2 will be formed when steam is passed over 21g of red hot Iron? What will be its volume at STP?
Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

3\(\mathrm{Fe}+4 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_3 \mathrm{O}_4+4 \mathrm{H}_2\)

(3 Χ 56)g = 168g  (4 Χ 2)g= 8g

The amount of H2 obtained from 168g red hot Fe is 8g

∴ Amount of H2 obtained from 21g red hot Fe is \(\frac{8 \times 21}{168} g\) = 1g

Again, the volume of 2g H2 at STP is 22.4L

∴ Volume of 1g H2 at STP is \(\frac{22.4}{2} \mathrm{~L}\) = 11.2L

Question 36. Calculate the amount of (1) magnesium chloride and (2) hydrogen (in grams) formed by the reaction between 36g magnesium and an excess amount of dil. HCI.
Answer: Balanced Chemical equation: \(\mathrm{Mg}+2 \mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{MgCl}_2+\mathrm{H}_2\)

24g   (24 +2 Χ 35.5)g =95g   2g

1. 24g of Mg forms 95g of MgCl2

∴ 36g of Mg forms \(\frac{95 \times 36}{24} \mathrm{~g}\) = 142.5g of MgCl2

2. Again, 24g of MgCl2 Mg forms 2g of

∴ 142.5 g of and 3g of H2 will be obtained by the reaction between 36g and an excess amount of dil HCL.

Question 37. What amount of KNO3 should be heated to obtain oxygen exactly in the same amount that is obtained by heating 49g KClO3?

Answer: Balanced chemical equation for heating KClO3:

2\(\mathrm{KClO}_3 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{KCl}+3 \mathrm{O}_2\)

2 Χ 39 + 35.5 + 16 Χ 3)g = 245g  3 Χ 32g + 96g

According to the reaction, 245g KClO3 produced 96g of O2.   

∴ 49g KClO3 produces \(\frac{96 \times 49}{245} \mathrm{~g}\) = 19.2 g of O2.

Balanced chemical equation for heating: 

\(\begin{aligned}
& 2 \mathrm{KNO}_3 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{KNO}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \\
& 2 \times(39+14+16 \times 3) \mathrm{g} \quad 32 \mathrm{~g} \\
& =202 \mathrm{~g} \\
&
\end{aligned}\)

According to the reaction, 32g O2. is obtained by heating 202g of KClO3.

∴ 19.2 g O2 is obtained by heating \(\frac{202 \times 19.2}{32} \mathrm{~g}\) = 121.2g of KClO3.

∴ 121.2g of KNO3 should be heated to obtain exactly in the same amount that is obtained by heating 49g of KClO3.

Question 38. What is the percentage of phosphorus in calcium phosphate?
Answer:

Molecular mass of Ca3(PO4)2 = 40 Χ 3 +2 (31 +16 Χ 4) = 310

∴ Amount of phosphours in 100g Ca3(PO4)2 = \(\frac{62 \times 100}{310}\) = 20g

∴ percentage of phosphours in Ca3(PO4)2 is 20%

Question 39. Calculate the amount of magnesium oxide formed by the complete combustion of 24g magnesium.

Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

2\(\mathrm{Mg}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{MgO}\)

2 Χ 24g = 48g  2 Χ (24+16) g = 80g

According to the equation, amount of MgO obtained from 48g Mg is 80g

∴ = \(\left(\frac{80 \times 24}{48}\right) \mathrm{g}\) = 40g

∴ 40g of MgO will be obtained by the complete combustion of 24g Mg.

Question 40. SO2 is produced by the combustion of iron pyrites for the industrial preparation of sulphuric acid. The chemical equation is as follows:4FeS2 + 11O2→2Fe2O3 + 8SO2 . Calculate the amount of FeS2 needed to produce 512g SO2.

Answer: Balanced chemical equation:

4\(\mathrm{FeS} 3+11 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3+8 \mathrm{O}_2\)

4 Χ (56 + 32 Χ 2)= 480g      8x(32+16×2) = 512g

To produce 512g SO2 , 480g of FeS2 is required.

Question 41. 112g of a metal oxide and a gaseous compound are formed when 200g of a metal carbonate is heated. Vapour density of the gaseous compound is 22.Calculate the number of moles of the gaseous compound formed in the reaction.
Answer:

Mass of the gaseous compound formed in the reaction = (200- 112)g = 88g

Given, vapour density of the gaseous compound = 22

∴ Molecular mass of the gaseous compound = 2 x 22 = 44

∴ Number of moles of the gaseous compound = 88/44 = 2

∴ 2 mol of the gaseous compound will be formed.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 42. Commercial zinc contains 35% impurity. Calculate the amount of hydrogen gas formed when 50g of such zinc reacts with excess amount of dii H2SO4.

Answer: Percentage of impurity = 35%

∴ Percentage of pure zinc = (100- 35)% = 65%

∴ Amount of pure zinc in 50g of impure sample = 65/100 Χ 50g = 32.5g

Now, balanced chemical equation:

⇒\(\mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{ZnSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2\)

Now, 65g of pure zinc forms 2g of H2

∴ 32.5g of pure zinc forms \(\frac{2 \times 32.5}{65} \mathrm{~g}\) = 1 g of H2.

∴ 1 g hydrogen gas will be formed

Question 43. The oxygen formed by heating a mixture of 75g potassium chlorate and manganese dioxide reacts completely with 3g hydrogen to form water. Calculate the amount of potassium chlorate and manganese dioxide.

Answer: Balanced chemical equation for the formation of water from hydrogen and oxygen is

⇒ \(\begin{gathered}
2 \mathrm{H}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
(2 \times 2) \mathrm{g}=4 \mathrm{~g}(16 \times 2) \mathrm{g}=32 \mathrm{~g}
\end{gathered}\)

According to the equation,  4g of hydrogen reacts with 32g of O2

∴ 3g of hydrogen reacts with \(\frac{32 \times 3}{4} \mathrm{~g}\) = 24 g of O2.

Now, balanced chemical equation for preparation of oxygen from potassium chlorate is

2\(\mathrm{KClO}_3+\left[\mathrm{MnO}_2\right] \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{KCl}+3 \mathrm{O}_2+\left[\mathrm{MnO}_2\right]\)

2(39+35.5+16×3) = 245g   3 Χ 32 = 96g

According to the equation, to produce 96g oxygen, KClO3 needed

∴ To produce 24g oxygen, KClO3. needed \(\frac{245 \times 24}{96} \mathrm{~g}\) = 61.25g

∴ Amount of KClO3 in the mixture = 61.25 g

∴ Amount of MnO2 in the mixture = (75 – 61.25)g = 13.75g

Question 44. SO is oxidised to form SO3 by O2 in presence of catalyst. What amount of SO (in g) will be needed to produce 40g SO3

Answer: Balanced chemical equation,

⇒ \(\begin{array}{ccc}
2 \mathrm{SO}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 & \rightarrow & 2 \mathrm{SO}_3 \\
2 \times(32+2 \times 16) \mathrm{g} & & 2 \times(32+3 \times 16) \mathrm{g} \\
=128 \mathrm{~g} & & =160 \mathrm{~g}
\end{array}\)

According to the equation, to produce 160g SO3, SO2 needed = 128g

∴ To produce 40g SO3, SO2 needed = \(\frac{128 \times 40}{160} \mathrm{~g}\) = 32g

∴ 32g of SO2 will be needed.

Question 45. To convert 25.64g of a solid element A into a gaseous oxide, 11.2L of oxygen (at STP) is needed. Volume of the gaseous oxide (at STP) is 2-1.2L What is the vapour density of the gaseous oxide?
Answer: At STP, the mass of 22.4L oxygen = 32g

∴ Mass of 11.2L oxygen = \(\frac{32 \times 11.2}{22.4} \mathrm{~g}\) = 16g

∴ Mass of the gaseous oxide = (25.64 + 16)g = 41.64g

According to the question, 21.2L of the gaseous oxide weight 41.64g

∴ 22.4L of the gaseous oxide weights \(\frac{41.64 \times 22.4}{21.2} \mathrm{~g}\) = 44g

∴ Molecular mass of the gaseous oxide = 44

∴ Vapour density of the gaseous oxide = 44/2 =22

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 46. What amount of HgO should be heated to produce 0.5 mol oxygen gas?
Answer: Balanced chemical equation of the reaction:

2\(\mathrm{HgO} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Hg}+\mathrm{O}_2\)

2 Χ (200 +16)g = 432g

Now according to the equation, 1 mol O2 is obtained by heating = 432 Χ 0.5g = 216g of HgO

∴ 0.5 mole O2 is obtained by heating =432 Χ 0.5g = 216g of HgO

∴ 216g HgO should be heated to produce 0.5 mol oxygen gas.

Question 47. What amount of ammonia will be formed by the reaction of 5.35g NH4CI with an excess amount of lime?
Answer: Balanced equation of the reaction:

2\(\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{CaO} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCl}_2+2 \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

2(14+1×4+35.5)g V = 107g   2(14+3×1)g = 34g

According to the reaction, 107g NH4CI produced 34g NH3   

∴ 5.35g NH4CI produces \(\frac{34 \times 5.35}{107} \mathrm{~g}\) = 1.7g NH

∴ 1.7 g of NH3 will be produced.

Question 48. What amount of Al will be needed (in grams) to produce 558g of Fe by the reduction of Fe2O3 by Al at high temperatures? Calculate the number of moles of Fe2O3 needed in the reaction.
Answer: Balanced chemical equational of the reaction:

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
\mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3+ & 2 \mathrm{Al} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}+\mathrm{Al}_2 \mathrm{O}_3 \\
(2 \times 27) \mathrm{g} & (2 \times 55.8) \mathrm{g} \\
=54 \mathrm{~g} & =111.6 \mathrm{~g}
\end{aligned}\)

According to the equation of the reaction,  to produce 111.6g Fe, Al needed =54g

∴ To produce 558g Fe, Al needed = \(\frac{54 \times 558}{111.6} g\) = 270g

∴ 270g of Al will be required.

Again, according to the equation of the reaction, 54g of Al reacts with 1 mol Fe2O3


∴ 270g of AI will react with \(\frac{1 \times 270}{54}\) mol Fe2O3= 5 mol Fe2O3

∴ 5 mol Fe2O3 will be required for the reaction.

Question 49. How many grams of H2SO4 should react with zinc to form 44.8 litre of H2 gas at NTP?

Answer: Balanced equation of the reaction—\(\mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{ZnSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2\)

2 Χ 1+ 32+ 16 Χ 4 = 98g    22.4L

To form 22.4L H2, H2SO4 needed =98g

∴ To form 44.8L H2, H2SO4 needed = \(\frac{98 \times 44.8}{22.4} \mathrm{~g}\) = 196g

Question 50. Upon heating with calcium hydroxide, 32.1g ammonium chloride produces 10.2g NH3, 33.3g CaCl2 and 10.8g H2O. What is the amount of calcium hydroxide (in gram) that participates in the reaction? Calculate the number of moles of NH3 and the volume of NH3 at STP, produced in the reaction.

Answer: According to the law of conservation of mass, mass of NH4CI + mass of Ca(OH)2 = mass of NH3 + mass of CaCl2 + mass of H20

∴ 32.1 g + mass of Ca(OH)2 = 10.2g + 33.3g + 10.8g

∴ Mass of Ca(OH)2 = (10.2 + 33.3 + 10.8)g- 32.lg = 22.2g

∴ 22.2g of Ca(OH)2 participates in the reaction. = 14 +1×3 = 17

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 51. lg limestone, in reaction with an excess amount of HCI, produces 0.4g CO2 gas. Calculate the percentage of purity in the lime stone sample.

Answer: A balanced chemical equation of the reaction is \(\mathrm{CaCO}_3+2 \mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{CO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

(40+12+3Χ 16)g=100g  (12+2Χ16)g = 44g

According to the equation, 44g of CO2 is obtained from 100g of CaCO3

∴ 0.4g of CO2 is obtained from \(\frac{100 \times 0.4}{44} \mathrm{~g}\) = 0.909g of CaCO3

∴ 1 g of CaCO3 sample contains 0.909g pure CaCO3

∴ 100g of CaCO3 sample contains = (0.909 x 100)g = 90.9 g of pure CaCO3

Question 52. How many grams of CuO can be reduced completely by hydrogen gas obtained from the reaction of 14g of Fe and dii HCI?

Answer: Balanced equation of the chemical reaction is

⇒ \(\underset{56 \mathrm{~g}}{\mathrm{Fe}}+2 \mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{FeCl}_2+\mathrm{H}_2\)

According to the reaction, 56g Fe produces 2g if H2 in reaction with dil Hcl

∴ 14g Fe produces \(\frac{2 \times 14}{56} g\) = 0.5g H2 in reaction with dil HCl

Now, the balanced chemical equation of the reduction of CuO is

⇒ \(\underset{(63.5+16) \mathrm{g}=79.5 \mathrm{~g}}{\mathrm{CuO}}+\underset{2 \mathrm{~g}}{\mathrm{H}_2} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

According to the reaction, 2g H2 can reduce = \(\frac{79.5 \times 0.5}{2} \mathrm{~g}\) = 19.875g of CuO

∴ H2 gas obtained from the reaction of 14g Fe and dil. HCL can completely reuce 19.875g of CuO.

Question 53. What amount (in gram) of cupric oxide will be reduced by 3.4g NH3? What will be the volume of the gas produced in this case at NTP?
Answer: Balanced chemical equation of the reaction is—

3\(\mathrm{CuO}+2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{Cu}+\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

3x(63.5+16)g = 238.5g  2x(14+3)g= 238.5g = 34g  22.4L

∴ 34g NH3can reduce 238.5g CuO

∴ 3.4g NH3 can reduce \(\frac{238.5 \times 3.4}{24} \mathrm{~g}\) = 23.85 g CuO

Again N2 gas is formed during the reaction, according to the reaction

34g NH3 produces 22.4L N2 at NTP

∴ 3.4g NH3 produces \(\frac{22.4 \times 3.4}{34} L\) = 2.24 L N2 at NTP.

Question 54. What amount of Fe2O3 will be needed to produce 22.4l Of oxygen gas according to the following reaction? \(\mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}+\mathrm{O}_2\)

Answer: Balanced chemical equation is

⇒ \(\mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}+\mathrm{O}_2\)

2 Χ (2 Χ 56 + 3 Χ 16)g = 320g   3 Χ 22.4L(at STP)

According to the reaction,  3 Χ 22.4L O2 will be produced by 320g Fe2O3

∴ 22.4L O2 will be produced by \(\frac{320 \times 22.4}{3 \times 22.4} \mathrm{~g}\)

= 106.67g Fe2O3

∴ 106.67g Fe2O3 of will be needed.

Chapter 3 Chemical Calculations Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Column:

Question 1.

Column A Column B
1. Mass-energy equivalence 1. Vapour density
2. Calculation of relative quantities of reactants and products 2. Lavoisier
3. Conservation of mass 3. E=mc2
4. The quantity whose value is half the molecular mass of a gas 4. Stoichiometry

 

Answer:

1. Mass-energy equivalence: 3. E=mc2
2. Calculation of relative quantities of reactants and products:
4. Stoichiometry
3. Conservation of mass:
2. Lavoisier
4. The quantity whose value is half the molecular mass of a gas:
1. Vapour density

Question 2.

Column A Column B
1. Amount of CO2 produced on heating 1 mol CaCO3 1. 32g
2. 0.01 mol C2H4 2. 71g
3. 22.4L Cl2(g) at STP 3. 0.28g
4. Mass of 6.022 X 1023 O2 molecules 4. 44 g

 

Answer:

1. Amount of CO2 produced on heating 1 mol CaCO3: 4. 44 g
2. 0.01 mol C2H4: 3. 0.28g
3. 22.4L Cl2(g) at STP: 2. 71g
4. Mass of 6.022 X 1023 O2 molecules: 1. 32g

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic A Atmosphere Synopsis:

Atmosphere: The gaseous layer surrounding the surface of the earth that extends up to about 1600 km, is known as the atmosphere.

Different layers of the atmosphere: On the basis of temperature and pressure, the atmosphere is divided into five different layers namely troposphere, stratosphere, mesosphere, thermosphere, and exosphere.

Convection current: On heating, fluids (liquids and gases) undergo expansion, and hence their density decreases. So, the heated liquid or gas becomes lighter and moves upward. On the other hand, the cool heavy part of the upper region comes down. This results in the formation of circular current which is known as convection current.

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

Wind and storm: Wind blows from a region of comparatively higher pressure to a region of comparatively lower pressure. Earth surface, under certain circumstances, gets heated up. Hence the air adjacent to this earth surface also gets heated up and moves upward.

This creates a low pressure zone in that, region. Cooler air from surroundings rushes towards that region. Greater the difference in air pressure, faster the movement of air from the higher to lower pressure region. Thus wind is created. When wind blows above a specified speed, it is termed as a storm.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic A Atmosphere Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is the atmosphere? What are the different regions of the atmosphere?
Answer:

Atmosphere:

The gaseous layer surrounding the surface of the earth which extends up to about 1600 km, is known as the atmosphere. Under the influence of gravity, this surrounding remains attached to the surface of the earth. On the basis of height and temperature, the atmosphere is divided into five different regions.

Layers Height from the earth’s surface Temperature Range (°C)
Tropo- sphere 0- 12 km +15 to -60 (temperature increases with the. increase in height)
Strato- sphere 12 – 45 km -60 to 0 (temperature increases with the increase of height)

 

Layers Height from the earth’s surface Temperature Range (°c)
Meso- sphere 45-85 km 0 to -100 (temperature increases with the increase in height)
Thermo- sphere 85 – 500 km -100 to +1200 (temperature increases with the increase in height)
Exo- sphere 500 -1000 km > 1200

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Different Layers Of Atmosphere

Wb Class 9 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 2. What are the ‘homosphere’ and ‘heterosphere’ of the atmosphere?
Answer:

The ‘homosphere’ and ‘heterosphere’ of the atmosphere:

The lower part of the atmosphere (extends up to an approximate height of 85 km above the earth surface) is homogeneous in nature. The gaseous components ( N2, O2, Ar, CO2, water vapor etc.) are evenly distributed in this, region. This part of the atmosphere is called the homosphere.

The remaining part of the atmosphere above the homosphere where the components are unevenly distributed is called the heterosphere. This part starts just above the homosphere region and extends between 85km above the earth’s surface up to a distance of 1000 km.

Question 3. Define troposphere. Why is it called turbulent sphere’?
Answer:

Troposphere:

The lowest layer of the atmosphere is called the troposphere. It extends from the sea level up to a height of about 12 km. This layer contains dust particles, water vapour, clouds etc. Different natural phenomena like storms, rains, lightning, thunderstorms etc., occur in this region. So, it is also known as the turbulent sphere.

Question  4. What is the stratosphere? Why is it dynamically stable?
Answer:

Stratosphere:

The atmospheric layer that extends up to a height of 45 km above the troposphere is known as stratosphere.

There is very little air in this region and dust particles, water vapor etc. are absent in this layer. Hence, this layer is free of several associated turbulence like clouds, rains, lightning, thunderstorms etc. Thus, it is dynamically stable.

Environment Solutions

Question 5. What is the mesosphere? Name the top layer of the mesosphere.
Answer:

Mesosphere:

The atmospheric layer present just above the stratosphere and extends up to a height of 85 km below the thermosphere is known as the mesosphere. The top layer of the mesosphere is known as mesopause. Temperature remains fixed (-92°C) in this region.

Question 6. What is the thermosphere? Why is it named so?
Answer:

Thermosphere:

The atmospheric layer present just above the mesosphere and extends up to a height of 500 km is known as thermosphere.

The temperature of this layer tends to increase abruptly with increasing altitude. At a height of about 120 km the temperature is about 500°C, at a height of 200 km the temperature becomes almost 700°C and at 480 km the temperature is about 1232°C. Therefore, this layer is called thermosphere.

Wb Class 9 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 7. What is ionosphere? Why Is it named so?
Answer:

Ionosphere:

The particular portion of thermosphere which contains several gaseous ions is known as ionosphere.

Cosmic radiation, X-rays, and gamma rays coming from the Sun ionizes the gases (mainly nitrogen and oxygen) of this region. As a result, this particular region contains large number of ions and free electrons. Due to the high concentration of ions in this region, this is called ionosphere.

Question 8. What is meant by ‘aurora’? What are ‘aurora Borealis and ‘aurora australis’?
Answer:

‘Aurora’:

Cosmic radiations, X-rays, gamma rays coming from the sun ionizes the gases present in ionosphere (a specific portion of thermosphere) and produce large number of ions as well as free electrons.

These charged particles undergo interactions with the magnetic field of the earth. As a result of this interactions, bright lights appear in the sky of polar regions. These polar lights or natural light displays in the earth’s sky is commonly known as aurora.

The aurora formed in the sky of north pole is known as aurora borealis and the aurora formed in the sky of south pole is called aurora australis.

Question 9. Give a brief description of the exosphere layer of atmosphere.
Answer:

The exosphere layer of atmosphere:

The atmospheric layer situated at a height of more than 500 km with respect to the surface of earth is called exosphere. It extends up to an altitude of about 1000 km. The temperature in this region is more than 1200°C. This layer contains hydrogen and. helium gases. Artificial satellites and space stations are located at this layer.

Wb Class 9 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 10. How does atmospheric pressure change with the increase in altitude?
Answer:

As we move up from the sea level, density of air decreases, and hence, atmospheric pressure also decreases.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Variation Of Pressure With Increasing Attitude
Generally, with every 110 m rise in height, air pressure decreases by 1cm. However, the rate of change of pressure is not uniform at the upper layer of the atmosphere.

Question 11. Discuss how temperature change in different layers of the atmosphere as the distance from the earth’s surface increases.
Answer:
1. The troposphere gets colder with the increase in altitude. With each km rise in altitude, the temperature falls by 6.5°C. The top layer of troposphere has a temperature of about -56°C.

2. With increasing altitude, the temperature of stratosphere gradually increases and temperature becomes 0°C at the top.

3. Mesosphere is the coldest region of atmosphere. Temperature decreases as we move upward along this layer.

4. In the thermosphere, temperature gradually increases with increasing height. This layer absorbs cosmic radiation coming from the Sun and is heated up. ConseQuestionuently, its temperature reaches up to 1200°C. The temperature of exosphere is higher than 1200°C.

Wb Class 9 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 12. Why does temperature increase with increasing height at the stratosphere?
Answer:

The oxygen molecules present in stratosphere is dissociated into atomic oxygen by absorbing the UV rays of the sun. These oxygen atoms then combine with molecular oxygen to form ozone (O3) molecules.

The last step is highly exothermic in nature and produces a large amount of heat. As a result, the temperature of this layer increases gradually with increase in height and reaches at a temperature around 0°C at the top of the layer.

Question 13. What is convection? What is convection current?
Answer:

Convection: The process by which the heated molecules of a liquid or a gas move from a region of higher temperature to a region of lower temperature thus carrying heat energy, is called convection.

Convection current: When a liquid or gas is heated, its density decreases due to expansion The heated liquid or gas thus becomes lighter and moves upward. Comparatively colder and heavier liQuestionuid or gas from the surroundings then rushes towards that region to fill up the vacuum. Such circulation of gaseous or liQuestionuid layer results in the formation of a convection current.

Question 14. How is convection current formed in air?
Answer: If the earth’s surface becomes hot the air adjacent to the earth’s surface also gets heated up. Hence it becomes lighter and rises up. This creates a low-pressure zone in that region. Cold air from surroundings then rushes towards that region to fill up the vacuum. This creates a convection current.

Question 15. Give two natural phenomena where a convection current is observed. When do they have maximum intensity?
Answer:

Convection current is observed in land breeze and sea breeze. The inland breeze blows during the night and intensifies around the dawn. On the other hand, sea breeze blows at the morning and intensifies around dusk.

Question 16. Describe the formation of land breeze.
Answer:

The formation of land breeze:

At night, the landmass in the coastal area loses heat at a faster rate than the sea water. Hence, the water remains comparatively warmer at night. ConseQuestionuently, warm air above the sea becomes lighter and rises up while cold and dense air from the landmass starts moving towards the sea. This is known as land breeze.

Question 17. Describe the formation of the sea breeze.
Answer:

The formation of the sea breeze:

The specific heat of water is high, due to this the land in the coastal areas get heated up in a Questionuicker manner compared to the seawater. As a result, the air above the landmass becomes lighter and rises up, thereby creating a low-pressure zone. The cold, denser air from the sea then flies into this region resulting in the sea breeze.

Question 18. How is a storm formed?
Answer:

Formation Of Storm

Wind blows from a higher-pressure region to a lower pressure region. The earth surface under certain circumstances get heated up so Questionuickly that the air adjacent to the earth’s surface becomes warmer and lighter. Hence it goes upward creating a vacuum. As a result a low pressure zone is created in that region.

The air from the surroundings then rushes towards that region. Greater the difference in air pressure, the faster the air blows from higher to the lower-pressure region. When wind blows above a specified speed, it is termed as a storm.

Chapter 1 Environmental Topic A Atmosphere Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. The layer of the atmosphere having the highest density is
1. Troposphere
2. Stratosphere
3. Mesosphere
4. Thermosphere

Answer: 1. Troposphere

Question 2. The layer of atmosphere in which natural phenomena such as storms, rains, and lightning occur is
1. Thermosphere
2. Troposphere
3. Stratosphere
4. Mesosphere

Answer: 2. Troposphere

Question 3. In the atmosphere, the percentage (by mass) occupied by the troposphere is
1. 25
2. 50
3. 75
4. 60

Answer: 3. 75

Question 4. The layer which is characterized by its calmness is
1. Troposphere
2. Stratosphere
3. Mesosphere
4. Thermosphere

Answer: 2. Stratosphere

Question 5. The temperature at the topmost level of the stratosphere is
1. 50°C
2. -50°C
3. 0°C
4. -30°C

Answer: 3. 0°C

Question 6. The atmospheric layer that absorbs ultraviolet rays is
1. Troposphere
2. Ozonosphere
3. Thermosphere
4. Mesosphere

Answer: 2. Ozonosphere

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 7. The hottest layer of the atmosphere is
1. Exosphere
2. Ozonosphere
3. Ionosphere
4. Thermosphere

Answer: 1. Exosphere

Question 8. In which atmospheric region does aurora form?
1. Ozonosphere
2. Ionosphere
3. Tropopause
4. Mesosphere

Answer: 2. Ionosphere

Question 9. The atmospheric layers where temperature increases with increasing altitude are
1. Troposphere and thermosphere
2. Mesosphere and stratosphere
3. Thermosphere and mesosphere
4. Stratosphere and thermosphere

Answer: 4. Stratosphere and thermosphere

Question 10. The atmospheric layer in which the radio waves get reflected is
1. Stratopause
2. Ozonosphere
3. Ionosphere
4. Mesosphere

Answer: 3. Ionosphere

Question 11. For each kilometer rise in altitude from the earth’s surface, the troposphere gets colder by
1. 5.6°C
2. 6.5°C
3. 3.5°C
4. 4.6°C

Answer: 2. 6.5°C

Question 12. Artificial satellites and space stations are located at the
1. Eexosphere
2. Thermosphere
3. Mesosphere
4. Stratosphere

Answer: 1. Eexosphere

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 13. Which layer of the atmosphere controls temperature and water cycle?
1. Stratosphere
2. Thermosphere
3. Troposphere
4. Mesosphere

Answer: 3. Troposphere

Question 14. The intensity of land breeze increases
1. Around dawn
2. Around noon
3. Around dusk
4. At night

Answer: 1. Around dawn

Question 15. The layer of the atmosphere that can be called as ‘Natural Solar Screen’ is
1. Troposphere
2. Ozonosphere
3. Thermosphere
4. Exosphere

Answer: 2. Ozonosphere

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 16. Several ions are present in
1. Troposphere, stratosphere
2. Troposphere, mesosphere
3. Mesosphere, thermosphere
4. Stratosphere, exosphere

Answer: 3. Mesosphere, thermosphere

Question 17. The average height of the troposphere from earth’s crust
1. 18 km
2. 15 km
3. 12 km
4. 20 km

Answer: 3. 12 km

Question 18. In which layer of the atmosphere the amount of water vapor is the highest
1. Troposphere
2. Stratosphere
3. Thermosphere
4. Mesosphere

Answer: 1. Troposphere

Question 19. X-ray is absorbed in the layer called
1. Troposphere
2. Mesosphere
3. Ionosphere
4. Exosphere

Answer: 3. Ionosphere

Question 20. Gases that are present in the exosphere are
1. He, H2
2. N2, O2
3. N2, H2
4. H2, O2

Answer: 1. He, H2

Question 21. The coldest region of the atmosphere is
1. Stratosphere
2. Exosphere
3. Mesosphere
4. Thermosphere

Answer: 3. Mesosphere

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic A Atmosphere Answer In Brief

Question 1. State the range of troposphere in the polar region and eQuestionuatorial region.
Answer: In the polar region, troposphere extends from sea level up to a height of 8-9 km and in the eQuestionuatorial region it extends up to 16-18 km.

Question 2. What is tropopause?
Answer:

Tropopause

The narrow region, at a height of 12km from the earth’s surface, where troposphere meets stratosphere is known as the tropopause. In this region, the temperature remains unaltered with the increase in height.

Question 3. What is the air pressure at the lowest part of the troposphere?
Answer: The air pressure at the lowest part of the troposphere is eQuestionual to the pressure of 76 cm Hg column.

Question 4. What is stratopause?
Answer:

Stratopause

The thin layer between the stratosphere and mesosphere where. the change in temperature becomes almost negligible is known as the stratopause.

Question 5. Which part of the atmosphere is the coldest?
Answer: Mesosphere.

Question 6. Which gases are predominantly found in thermo sphere?
Answer: Nitrogen and oxygen.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 7. The temperature gradually decreases at a definite rate as we move upward in the atmosphere from the earth’s surface. What is this phenomenon called?
Answer: Normal lapse rate.

Question 8. What is the temperature at the upper end of the troposphere?
Answer: At the upper end of the troposphere, the temperature ranges between -56°C to -60°C.

Question 9. Give examples of local winds.
Answer: Land breeze and sea breeze.

Question 10. Name the lowest layer of atmosphere.
Answer: Troposphere

Question 11. In which layer of the atmosphere do storms and rain occur?
Answer: Troposphere.

Question 12. The living world of the earth’s crust remains in direct contact with which layer of the atmosphere?
Answer: Troposphere.

Question 13. In which layer of the atmosphere does the strongly moving ‘Jet stream’ flow?
Answer: The ‘Jet Stream’ flows in the tropopause region.

Question 14. Through which layer of the atmosphere can a jet plane fly?
Answer: Jet planes can fly through stratosphere.

Question 15. How does the temperature change with an increase in height of the stratosphere?
Answer: The temperature increases with increase in height in the stratosphere.

Question 16. Name some gaseous components present in stratosphere.
Answer: Nitrogen, oxygen, and ozone.

Question 17. What is the temperature of the mesopause part of the mesosphere?
Answer: -92°C.

Question 18. Aurora Borealis is found in which region of the atmosphere?
Answer: Ionosphere region of thermosphere.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 19. Mention some components of the mesosphere and thermosphere.
Answer:
Some components of the mesosphere: N2, O2,
Some components of thermosphere: of, O NO

Question 20. Which layer is used for communication with the help of radio waves?
Answer: Ionosphere of thermosphere .

Question 21 Mention the maximum temperature of thermosphere.
Answer: Almost 1200°C.

Question 22. Which layer of the atmosphere is suitable for the installation of artificial satellites?
Answer: Exosphere.

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic A Atmosphere Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. The _________ is the most dense layer of the atmosphere.
Answer: Troposphere

Question 2. The layer separating troposphere stratosphere is called ____________.
Answer: Tropopause

Question 3. When a meteorite enters the earth’s atmosphere, it burns due to it’s collision with the air of __________ layer.
Answer: The Mesosphere

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 4. The lower part of the ___________ ionosphere.
Answer: Thermosphere

Question 5. Due to the presence of excess amount of _________ gas in the stratosphere, the temperature of this region rises with altitude.
Answer: Ozone

Question 6. As the distance from the earth surface increases, the __________ of air decreases.
Answer: Density

Question 7. _______ breeze helps in sailing ships offshore.
Answer: Land

Question 8. The term troposphere was first used by the scientist 
Answer: Teisserenc de Bort.

Question 9. The word troposphere means __________ region.
Answer: Turbulent

Question 10. The temperature of the troposphere ___________ with increases in height.
Answer: Turbulent

Question 11. The air layer above the troposphere is called ____________
Answer: Stratosphere

Question 12. The temperature of stratosphere _______ with increase in height.
Answer: Increases

Question 13. The layer of the atmosphere in which Aurora can be seen is _______
Answer: Thermosphere

Question 14. The effect of charged molecules in the ionosphere of atmosphere results in the formation of _________
Answer: Aurora

Question 15. The water cycle of the earth is controlled by ________
Answer: Troposphere

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic A Atmosphere State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. In troposphere, with increase in height, the pressure decreases.
Answer: True

Question 2. Stratosphere is the most dense layer of the atmosphere.
Answer: False

Question 3. Convection currents are formed in solid, liquid, and gaseous states of matter.
Answer: False

Question 4. Heterosphere starts from a height of 85 km. relative to the surface.
Answer: True

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 5. Air pressure decreases with increase in height in troposphere.
Answer: True

Question 6. Water vapour, clouds, etc. do not exist in troposphere.
Answer: False

Question 7. Due to the presence of dust particles in troposphere, the sky looks blue.
Answer: True

Question 8. Aurora can be seen in ozonosphere.
Answer: False

Question 9. The maximum temperature of thermosphere is around 1200°C.
Answer: True

Question 10 Atmospheric pressure in Darjeeling is greater than that in Kolkata.
Answer: False

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic B Ozone Layer, Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming Synopsis

Ozonosphere: The harmful UV rays of the Sun are absorbed by the ozone layer or ozonosphere present in the stratosphere. In this way, the ozone layer protects living organisms from their harmful effects.

Ozone hole: Increased use of chemicals and technology for the development of civilization has adverse effects on the ozone layer. Due to the constant decomposition of ozone molecules, ozone holes are found to be formed at different parts of the ozone layer.

Compounds responsible for ozone layer depletion: Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and oxides of nitrogen (mainly NO) are mainly responsible for the depletion of the ozone layer.

Greenhouse effect: Gases like CO2, CH4, N2O, CFC, and water vapor traps the retransmitted infrared radiations of higher wavelengths. This helps to keep the earth’s surface warm and thus a favorable environment is created for the survival of living beings. This is called the greenhouse effect.

Global warming: Gradual increase in the average temperature of the earth’s atmosphere . due to several natural phenomena as well as man-made activities is called global warming. Greenhouse effect plays an important role to create global warming.

Causes of global warming: Unlimited use of fossil fuels, emission of harmful gases by industries, and deforestation enhance the amount of several greenhouse gases like CO2, CH4, CFC, etc. in the atmosphere. The increased amount of such greenhouse gases is one of the main reasons of global warming.

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic B Ozone Layer, Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming Short And Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is ozonosphere? Why is this layer so essential for us?
Answer:

Ozonosphere:

Stratosphere contains an ozone gas layer which is extended from 16 km to 30 km with respect to the earth’s surface and the concentration of ozone gas is maximum in this layer. This particular layer is called ozonosphere.

The harmful UV rays of the Sun are absorbed by ozone layer. The ozone layer in the stratosphere prevents the UV rays from reaching the earth’s surface and thus, protects living organisms from its harmful effects. That is why ozonosphere is so essential.

Question 2. What is ozone hole?
Answer:

Ozone hole:

Excessive use of different chemicals and technological devices for the development of human civilization leads to a gradual depletion of the ozone layer. The rate of decomposition of ozone is much higher than the rate of its formation of it. As a result, hole is formed in certain regions of the ozone layer which is known as the ozone hole.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Depletion Of Ozone Layer
Question 3. Name some man-made chemical substances which are responsible for ozone layer depletion.
Answer: Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and some oxides of nitrogen such as nitric oxide (NO) and nitrogen dioxide NO2 are mainly responsible for depletion of the ozone layer.

Question 4. What is the unit used to measure concentration of ozonosphere? Define the unit.
Answer: The concentration of ozone layer is measured in Dobson unit. At 0°C temperature and 760 mm of Hg pressure, the density of 0.01 mm thick ozone gas layer is called 1 Dobson Unit (1 DU).

Question 5. Describe the significance of ozone layer on the environment.
Answer:

The significance of ozone layer on the environment:

Ozone layer in stratosphere acts as a protective shield for the earth. If the ozone layer was not present in the stratosphere, the ultraviolet rays would reach the earth surface.

As a result- the overall temperature of the earth surface would increase. The increased temperature would lead to extinction of plants and animals on the earth. direct exposure to ultraviolet rays may cause a number of diseases including skin cancer, premature cataract etc.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 6. How is ozone layer formed?
Answer: UV-C (wavelength: 100-280 nm) along with some UV-B. (wavelength: 280-315 nm) decomposes oxygen molecules present in the stratosphere into atomic oxygen. These oxygen atoms then combine with molecular oxygen to form ozone (O3) molecules. The last step is highly exothermic in nature, i.e., large amount of heat is produced in this step.

\(\mathrm{O}_2 \stackrel{(\text { UV-C or UV-B) }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{O}+\mathrm{O}\) \(\mathrm{O}_2+\mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \mathrm{O}_3\)

Question 7. Discuss the natural causes that decompose the ozone present in ozone- sphere. How is the total amount of ozone gas maintained in the ozone layer?
Answer: Dissociation of ozone molecules in the stratosphere occurs simultaneously with its formation. Ultraviolet rays of larger wavelength (UV-A; wavelength: 315-400 nm) decompose ozone molecules into molecular oxygen and atomic oxygen.

\(\mathrm{O}_3 \stackrel{\mathrm{UV}-\mathrm{A}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{O}_2+\mathrm{O}\)

In stratosphere, formation of ozone molecules and decomposition of ozone molecules occur simultaneously in a cyclic manner and a dynamic equilibrium is maintained between these two processes. As a result, the amount of ozone gas in the stratosphere remains constant.

Question 8. Ozone gas present in stratosphere is important but presence of ozone gas in to- posphere is harmful-justify the statement.
Answer: The harmful UV rays of the Sun are absorbed by ozone layer present in the stratosphere. Hence, this stratospheric ozone is protecting the earth from UV rays and their harmful effects as a natural umbrella.

On the other hand, ozone gas present in troposphere acts as a greenhouse gas (it contributes about 7-8% to the greenhouse effect). The greenhouse effect plays an important role in the gradual increase of the average temperature of the earth.

Question 9. How is the dynamic equilibrium maintained in the stratosphere during the formation and depletion of the ozone layer?
Answer:
Formation of ozone layer: Oxygen molecules. present in the stratosphere absorbs UV rays and are dissociated to form oxygen atoms.

\(\mathrm{O}_2+\text { UV-rays } \rightarrow \mathrm{O}+\mathrm{O}\)

This atomic oxygen combines with molecular oxygen to form ozone molecules-

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

\(\mathrm{O}_2+\mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{O}_3\)

Depletion of ozone layer: Ozone decomposes to 0.12 Discuss the harmful effects of ozone oxygen molecules by absorbing UV rays.

\(\mathrm{O}_3+\text { UV-ray } \rightarrow \mathrm{O}_2+\mathrm{O} ; \mathrm{O}_3+\mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{O}_2\)

Formation of ozone molecules and decomposition of ozone molecules-these two opposite processes continue in cycles at the ozone layer and an equilibrium is established. It is for this equilibrium that the amount of ozone gas in the stratosphere remains constant.

Question 10. Discuss the role of chlorofluorocarbons (freons) in the depletion of ozone layer.
Answer:

The role of chlorofluorocarbons (freons) in the depletion of ozone layer:

Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) act as catalysts in the depletion of ozone layer in the stratosphere. In presence of ultraviolet rays, CFCs dissociate to form active chlorine atoms (CI).

Active chlorine atom reacts with ozone molecule to form oxygen and chlorine monoxide. Chlorine monoxide further reacts with ozone molecules to form oxygen and active chlorine. This process continues in a cyclic manner. As a result, the density of ozone layer decreases.

\(\mathrm{CFCl}_3 \stackrel{\mathrm{UV} \text {-ray }}{\longrightarrow} \dot{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{FCl}_2+\dot{\mathrm{C}}\) \(\dot{\mathrm{Cl}}+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \dot{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{OO}+\mathrm{O}_2\) \(\dot{\mathrm{ClO}}+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{O}_2+\dot{\mathrm{C}}\)


Question 11. How are supersonic jet planes responsible for depletion of ozone layer?

Answer: Supersonic jet planes flying through the stratosphere emits large amount of nitric oxide. Nitric oxide (NO) reacts with ozone to form nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and oxygen.

On the other hand in stratosphere, ozone molecules are decomposed by the UV rays to produce atomic oxygen, which reacts with NO2 to produce back NO. Thus, the amount of NO never decreases and causes gradual destruction of ozone molecules. As a result depletion of ozone layer takes place.

\(\mathrm{NO}+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{O}_2\) \(\mathrm{O}_3 \stackrel{\mathrm{UV}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{O}_2+\mathrm{O}\) \(\mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NO}+\mathrm{O}_2\)


Question 12. Discuss the harmful effects of ozone layer depletion.

Answer:

The harmful effects of ozone layer depletion:

1. Ozone layer in the atmosphere absorbs harmful UV rays which would otherwise, reach the earth’s surface. This would cause an increase in the earth’s temperature resulting in melting of snow-caps in polar regions. Thus the water level of the seas and oceans would increase and flood the coastal regions.

Exposure to UV rays may cause skin cancer and premature cataract in the eye, and natural immunity also decreases. These rays are
responsible for formation of photochemical Ozone layer in the atmosphere absorbs. harmful UV rays which would otherwise, reach the earth’s surface.

This would cause an increase in the earth’s temperature resulting in the melting of snow-caps in polar regions. Thus the water level of the seas and oceans would increase and flood the coastal regions.

2 Exposure to UV rays may cause skin cancer and premature cataract in the eye, and natural immunity also decreases. These rays are responsible for the formation of photochemical smog.

3 UV rays inhibit the process of photosynthesis in plants, hence production of crop gets reduced.

Question 13. What are greenhouse gases?
Answer:

Greenhouse gases:

Some gases present in the atmosphere absorb radiations of comparatively greater wavelengths (re-radiated from the earth surface) and reflects back the remaining radiations, thus they keep the earth’s atmosphere warm. These gases are known as greenhouse gases.

Some examples of greenhouse gases are carbon dioxide (CO2), methane ( CH4), chlorofluorocarbon (CFC), ozone (O3), nitrous oxide (N2O), water vapor etc.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 14. What is greenhouse effect?
Answer:

Greenhouse effect:

Infrared (IR) light coming from the Sun accounts for the heating of earth. As it has a smaller wavelength the gases present in the atmosphere are unable to absorb this incident radiation. The IR light re-radiated from the earth surface is of longer wavelengths.

Greenhouse gases like CO2, CH4, CFC, N2O, O3 etc. absorb these re-radiated wavelengths and thus prevent the heat of the Sun to escape from the earth’s atmosphere. As a result the earth’s atmosphere stays warm and thus a favourable environment is created for the survival of living beings. This phenomenon is known as greenhouse effect.

Question 15. Discuss the importance of greenhouse effect.
Answer:

The importance of greenhouse effect:

Greenhouse gases prevent the reflected radiations to escape from the earth. As a result, the earth’s atmosphere stays warm and thus a suitable environment is created for the survival of living beigns.

If there were no greenhouse gases in the atmosphere, there would have been no greenhouse effect and the earth’s average temperature would fall to -30°C.

Question 16. How do greenhouse gases increase the temperature of the atmosphere?
Answers: IR rays (of shorter wavelengths) of the Sun can easily penetrate the lining of the greenhouse gases (CO2, CH4,O3, N2O, CFC etc.) present in the atmosphere. The earth’s surface absorbs some part of this radiation and becomes heated. Remaining part of this radiation is retransmitted.

IR rays radiated from the heated earth’s surface is of greater wavelengths and got absorbed by the screen of greenhouse gases. Thus the layer of greenhouse gases maintains the warmth of the atmosphere within a certain range by trapping the retransmitted IR rays. But the amount of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere is gradually increasing due to human activities as well as by natural causes.

As a result greater amount of surface radiated IR rays (of longer wavelengths) getting trapped in the atmosphere which in turn increases the mean [temperature of the earth. Thus greenhouse effect influences rather accelerates the phenomenon of global warming.

Question 17. Name the sources of CO2 in atmosphere. Discuss its role in creating greenhouse effect.
Answers:
Sources of CO2 in the atmosphere:
1. Large quantities of CO2 is added to the atmosphere due to uncontrolled use of fossil fuels in automobiles and factories.
2. In different industries, mainly in case of cement production, a large amount of CO2 is produced.
3. Cutting down of trees in indiscriminate manner results in the rise of the amount of CO2 in atmosphere.

Role of CO2 in creating greenhouse effect:
Amount of CO2 in atmosphere is maximum, so it has the highest contribution in creating greenhouse effect. Its contribution in greenhouse effect is more than 50%.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 18. Name the sources of methane gas. Discuss the role of methane gas in greenhouse effect.
Answer:
Sources of methane gas:
1. Methane gas is produced in wetlands due to anaerobic decomposition of dead plants and animals by the action of methanogenic bacteria (methanococcus, methanobacterium).
2. Methane gas is found in oil mines.
3. Decomposition of several organic wastes and the excreta of different animals release methane to the atmosphere

Role In greenhouse effect: The capability of a molecule of methane to trap the re-radiated heat energy is 25 times greater than that of a molecule of CO2. But the amount of methane in the atmosphere is much lower than that of carbon dioxide. Hence the contribution of methane in greenhouse effect is lower than that of CO2 which is nearly around 19-20%.

Question 19. What are the sources of chlorofluorocarbons? Discuss their role in causing greenhouse effect?
Answer:
Sources of chlorofluorocarbons: Chlorofluorocarbons are extensively used in refrigerator as refrigerant, fire extinguishers,
1. Aerosol sprays as propellant,
2. Foam and plastic productions etc. Chlorofluorocarbons from these sources are added to the atmosphere.

Role of CFCs in creating greenhouse effect: The capacity of a CFC molecule to trap the retransmitted heat energy is 15000-20000 times greater than that of a CO2 molecule. These compounds are highly stable and remain in the atmosphere for a long period of time. Contribution of CFCs towards greenhouse effect is nearly around 16%.

Question 20. Discuss the consequences of greenhouse effect.
Answer:

Detrimental consequences of greenhouse effects are

1. Average temperature of earth’s surface and troposphere is constantly increasing which may result in melting of polar ice and snow caps of mountains. Water level of the seas and oceans would thus increase and flood the coastal regions. Saline water will make agricultural land infertile and crop production will significantly decrease.
2. Frequent drought will take place in the countries of northern hemisphere.
3. Frequency and intensity of super cyclones and tornadoes will increase.
4. Living organisms will gradually become extinct due to the intense heat. This will destroy the ecosystem.

Question 21. State some precautionary measures that should be taken to stop global warming.
Answer:
1. Use of fossil fuels has to be controlled.
2. Deforestation should be stopped immediately.
3. Use of non-conventional energy should chlorofluorocarbon carbons have to be banned.
4. Nitrogenous fertilizers should be used in a controlled manner. This will reduce the possibility of mixing nitrogenous oxides in air.
5. Awareness of common people regarding greenhouse effect and global warming will surely reduce the extent of global warming.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 22. Mention the name of an organic and an inorganic greenhouse gas and their percentage contributions towards global warming.
Answer: An organic greenhouse gas is methane (CH4) and an inorganic greenhouse gas is carbon dioxide CO2. The contributions of methane and carbon dioxide towards global warming are 19% and 50% respectively.

Question 23. Why are O2 and N2 not considered as greenhouse gases?
Answer: Gases that can absorb infrared radiations of longer wavelengths emitted from the earth’s surface are called greenhouse gases. O2 and N2 gases are unable to absorb these retransmitted IR radiations of longer wavelengths, so they do not cause the greenhouse effect. That is why they are not considered as greenhouse gases.

Question 24. What is global warming?
Answer:

Global warming:

Global warming is defined as the gradual increase in the average temperature of the earth’s atmosphere mainly due to the greenhouse effect caused by the uncontrolled increase of several greenhouse gases ( CH4, CO2, CFC, etc.) in the atmosphere.

Question 25. Why will the crop production be disrupted as a result of global warming? Or, Mention a detrimental effect of global warming.
Answer: Average temperature of the earth’s atmosphere is gradually increasing which may result in melting of polar ice and the snow caps of mountains. Water level of the seas and oceans would thus increase and flood the coastal regions. The saline water of seas will thus make the fertile agricultural lands unsuitable for cultivation. As a result, crop production will be severely disrupted.

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic B Ozone Layer, Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. The coldest region of the atmosphere is
1. Tropopause
2. Mesopause
3. Stratopause
4. Thermopause

Answer: 3. Stratopause

Question 2. Heat reaches the earth surface from the Sun by
1. Conduction
2. Convection
3. Radiation
4. All of these

Answer: 3. Radiation

Question 3. The depletion of ozone layer over the Antarctic region is maximum in the month of
1. March-August
2. September-November
3. January-March
4. April-June

Answer: 3. January-March

Question 4. Oxides of which element is responsible for the decomposition of ozone molecules?
1. Carbon
2. Nitrogen
3. Hydrogen
4. Sulfur

Answer: 2. Nitrogen

Question 5. CFC dissociates in the presence of ultraviolet rays to produce
1. Active carbon atoms
2. Active chlorine atoms
3. Active fluorine atoms
4. Active hydrogen atoms

Answer: 2. Active chlorine atoms

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 6. Which oxide of nitrogen emitted from the supersonic jet planes causes depletion of ozone layer?
1. NO2
2. N2O
3. NO
4. N2O4

Answer: 3. NO

Question 7. The concentration of ozone in ozonosphere Stain is around
1. 30 ppm
2. 10 ppm
3. 40 ppm
4. 20 ppm

Answer: 2. 10 ppm

Question 8. Which of the following is a greenhouse gas?
1. O2
2. N2
3. O3
4. H2

Answer: 3. O3

Question 9. Which of the following is not a greenhouse Jotolygas?
1. CO2
2. NO2
3. CH4
4. N2O

Answer: 2. NO2

Question 10. The contribution of the CO2 Greenhouse effect is almost
1. 30%
2. 20%
3. 50%
4. 60%

Answer: 3. 50%

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 11. Naturally, ozone gas is produced due to the reaction between
1. CFC and O2
2. UV rays and O2
3. IR rays with O2ollatay
4. O2 and water vapor

Answer: 2. UV rays and O2

Question 12. The correct order of contribution of the given gases towards greenhouse effect is
1. CO2>CH4>CFC>O3
2. CFC>O3>CH4>CO2
3. O3>CH4> CFO>CO2
4. CH4>CO2>O3>CFC

Answer: 1. CO2>CH4>CFC>O3

Question 13. Which would inhibit photosynthesis if it reaches the earth’s surface?
1. Infrared radiation
2. Ultraviolet radiation
3. Radio radiation
4. None of these

Answer: 2. Ultraviolet radiation

Question 14. Source of CFC is
1. A refrigerator
2. Vehicles
3. Agricultural fields
4. Water-bodies

Answer: 1. A refrigerator

Question 15. Which of the following greenhouse gas has the maximum contribution in increasing the temperature of the earth?
1. N2O
2. CO2
3. CH4
4. H2O vapour

Answer: 3. CH4

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 16. Dissociation of ozone molecules is done by
1. CI radical
2. OH radical
3. I radical
4. CH3 radical

Answer: 1. CI radical

Question 17. Which of the following is required to form ozone layer?
1. Ultraviolet ray
2. Visible light
3. Microwave
4. Radiated heatwave

Answer: 1. Ultraviolet ray

Question 18. The ozone layer of the atmosphere absorbs y-Raya-ray UV-ray B-ray 19 The main greenhouse gas is
1. γ-ray
2. α-ray
3. UV-ray
4. β-ray

Answer: 3. UV-ray

Question 19. The main greenhouse gas is
1. CH4
2. CO2
3. CFC
4. NO2

Answer: 2. CO2

Question 20. Which one of the following plays the key role in depletion of ozone layer?
1. NO2
2. O2
3. NO
4. CFC

Answer: 4. CFC

Question 21. Mars gas formed in water-bodies is
1. CO2
2. CO
3. CH4
4. C2H2

Answer: 3. UV-ray

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 22. Which of the following is responsible for greenhouse effect?
1. γ-ray
2. UV-ray
3. IR-ray
4. X-ray

Answer: 3. IR-ray

Question 23. The full name of CFC is
1. Chlorofluorocarbon
2. Cold fluorinated carbon
3. Carbonfluro chloride
4. Chlorofluoro carbonate

Answer: 1. Chlorofluorocarbon

Question 24. Which of the following does not deplete the ozone layer?
1. NO
2. N2O
3. CO2
4. DCFC

Answer: 3. CO2

Question 25. The ozone layer is formed in the atmosphere due to
1. Chemical reactions
2. Photochemical reactions
3. Nuclear reactions
4. Electrochemical reactions

Answer: 2. Photochemical reactions

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic B Ozone Layer, Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming Answer In Brief

Question 1. Give an example of a gas which is responsible for the gradual increase of atmospheric temperature.
Answer: Carbon dioxide.

Question 2. What percentage of ozone gas found in the atmosphere is present in ozonosphere?
Answer: Ozonosphere contains almost 90% of total ozone gas present in the atmosphere.

Question 3. What happens when ozone molecules absorb ultraviolet rays?
Answer: They decompose to form oxygen molecules.

Question 4. How are UV rays harmful to the eyes?
Answer: Ultraviolet (UV) rays damage the retina of the eyes and may cause premature cataracts.

Question 5. Which instrument is used to measure the density of the ozone gas in atmosphere?
Answer: Dobson spectrometer.

Question 6. How many ozone molecules can be destroyed by an active chlorine atom?
Answer: Over 100,000 ozone molecules.

Question 7. What would be the average temperature of the earth if the greenhouse gases were not present in atmosphere?
Answer: In absence of the greenhouse gases, the average temperature of the earth would have been -30°C.

Question 8. What is the average temperature of the atmosphere due to the presence of greenhouse gases?
Answer: Due to the presence of greenhouse gases, the average temperature of the atmosphere is maintained around 15°C.

Question 9. Which diseases may flourish due to global warming?
Answer: Diseases like dengue, malaria, encephalitis may flourish due to global warming.

Question 10. What do you mean by global warming?
Answer:

Global warming

The phenomenon of gradual increase of earth’s temperature due to greenhouse effect is known as global warming.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 11. What is the ‘natural sunscreen’ or ‘natural solar screen’ or the ‘umbrella of the earth’?
Answer: The ozonosphere of the stratosphere.

Question 12. Incidence of which ray from the Sun is prevented by the ozone layer?
Answer: UV-ray.

Question 13. Which layer absorbs the Sun’s ultraviolet rays?
Answer: Ozone layer present in the stratosphere.

Question 14. Write down the full form of ODS.
Answer: Ozone Depleting Substances.

Question 15. What is ‘Chapman Cycle’?
Answer:

‘Chapman Cycle’

The cycle of creation and destruction of ozone in the stratosphere is called the Chapman Cycle.

Question 16. What is the full form of ODP?
Answer:

Full form of ODP

Ozone Depletion Potential.

Question 17. Which atom of CFC is responsible for the destruction of the ozone layer?
Answer: The cl atom of CFC is responsible for this.

Question 18. Which gas breaks down the ozone layer during lightning?
Answer: Nitric oxide (NO) gas.

Question 19. What is the role of NO in the depletion of ozone layer?
Answer: NO reacts with O3 to form NO2 and O2 and thus decomposes O3. As a consequence depletion of ozone layer occurs.
NO + O3→ NO2+O2+hγ

Question 20. In which year was the Montreal Protocol signed?
Answer: Montreal Protocol was signed in 1987.

Question 21. Write the name of an organic greenhouse gas.
Answer: Methane (CH4).

Question 22. Which is the main greenhouse gas?
Answer: Carbon dioxide (CO2).

Question 23. Write the full form of GWP.
Answer: Global Warming Potential.

Question 24. Mention a detrimental effect of global warming.
Answer: As global warming increases, polar ice caps will melt and as a result, coastal areas will be flooded.

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic B Ozone Layer, Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Ozonosphere is present in the  _______.
Answer: Stratosphere

Question 2. ________ was the first to observe the formation of holes in the ozone layer.
Answer: Joe Farman

Question 3. The full form of CFC is a ___________
Answer: Chloroflurocarbon

Question 4. Ozone is a gas with pale blue, _________ Color and a smell.
Answer: Pungent

Question 5. Ozone gas is an allotrope of _______ gas.
Answer: Oxygen

Question 6. The density of ozone gas in atmosphere is measured in the_______ unit.
Answer: Dobson

Question 7. Nitrous oxide and water vapor are _______ gases.
Answer: Greenhouse

Question 8. _______ layer of the atmosphere is also known as the ‘earth’s protective umbrella’.
Answer: Ozone

Question 9. The capacity of a molecule of methane to retain the absorbed heat energy is ______ times more than that of a CO2 molecule.
Answer: 25

Question 10. The wavelength of infrared radiation______ with decreasing energy.
Answer: Increases

Question 11. The rate of increase of CFC gas in the atmosphere per year is ______
Answer: 5%

Question 12. The gas emitted by supersonic aircraft breaks down the ozone layer is _______
Answer: Nitric Oxide

Question 13. The destruction of the ozone layer can cause diseases like ________
Answer: Skin cancer

Question 14. An inorganic greenhouse gas is _________
Answer: Carbon dioxide

Question 15. The _____________ present in the body spray is a greenhouse gas.
Answer: Chloroflurocarbon

Question 16. The greenhouse effect is causing ____________
Answer: Global Warming

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic B Ozone Layer, Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Nitrogen is a greenhouse gas.
Answer: True

Question 2. Supersonic jets release huge amount of nitric oxide.
Answer: False

Question 3. Scientist Joe Farman first noticed the formation of the ozone hole over Antarctica.
Answer: False

Question 4. Under the influence of UV rays, CFC splits and produces methane gas.
Answer: True

Question 5. The Montreal Protocol was signed in the year 1987.
Answer: False

Question 6. Damage to the ozone layer will increase the chance of cataracts.
Answer: False

Question 7. It would have been easier for the fauna to survive if there were no greenhouse gases in the atmosphere.
Answer: True

Question 8. The two gases responsible for the greenhouse effect are nitrogen and oxygen.
Answer: True

Question 9. Among all greenhouse gases the contribution of carbon dioxide is maximum in creating greenhouse effect.
Answer: False

Question 10. If there were no greenhouse gases, the temperature of the earth would be 50°C.
Answer: True

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic C Proper Uses of Energy and Sustainable Development Synopsis

Calorific value: Heat energy produced due to the complete combustion of 1 kg of a fuel is known as its calorific value. Unit: kJ • kg-1 (in SI).

The necessity of conservation of fossil fuels:
The incessant use of fossil fuels (coal, petroleum, natural gas) is gradually depleting the reserve of these fuels. To conserve these fuels, we must encourage the use of alternative fuels which are basically non- conventional renewable energy sources.

Alternative fuels: Alternative fuels are those which are being used to restrict the use of fossil fuels in order to conserve their sources as these are gradually running out. Examples: Solar energy, wind energy, tidal energy etc.

Sustainable development: Controlled and systematic use of natural resources to meet the need of present generation as well as sustaining them for future generation is called sustainable development. First step of sustainable development is to encourage the use of alternative sources of energy that are renewable and eco-friendly.

Purposes of sustainable development: Social welfare, Economic development and Ecological development are the major three purposes of sustainable development.

Conventional/non-renewable sources of energy: These sources are gradually exhausting due to their prolonged uses and these sources cannot be renewed.
Examples: Coal, petroleum, natural gases etc.

Non-conventional/renewable sources of energy: These sources have presently been used as alternative energy sources and these are inexhaustible and renewable.

Examples: Solar energy, wind energy, biomass energy, tidal energy etc.

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic C Proper Uses of Energy and Sustainable Development Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is sustainable development?
Answer:

Sustainable development:

The controlled and systematic use of natural resources to meet the need of present generation as well as sustaining resources for the future generation is called sustainable development.

Question 2. Discuss the purposes of development’.
Answer:
Purposes of sustainable development are Social welfare:
Major goal of sustainable development is to establish social equality and eradicate the differences that arise from social misconceptions, superstitions, backward traditions etc.

Economic development: No society can prosper without economic development. It is required in the field of education, health, agriculture and industries. Hence, one of the major goals of sustainable development is to achieve economic development.

Ecological development: Ecology of earth depends on the constant interaction between living and non-living things. Sustainable development also aims at maintaining proper balance in nature and building a stronger relationship between living & non-living world. of ‘sustainable

Question 3. Why is sustainable development considered to be of utmost importance for the present as well as a future generations?
Answer: The aim of sustainable development is to use natural resources without affecting the environment. This will enable both present and future generations to preserve natural resources and utilize them for a long time.

It gives importance not only to economic development but also to cultural, social & geopolitical development have been able to control the decline of environmental conditions as it encourages to decrease the use of conventional sources of energy and increases the use of alternative resources.

Question 4. What are fossil fuels?
Answer:

Fossil fuels:

Fossil fuels are natural fuels formed due to the action of geothermal heat, pressure, and bacterial degradation of the dead plants and animals buried beneath the earth’s crust for many years. Coal, petroleum, natural gas are examples of fossit fuels. These are exhaustible and non¬ renewable sources of energy.

Question 5. What do you mean by conventional or non-renewable sources of energy? Give examples.
Answer:

The sources of energy which- are gradually exhausting due to their prolonged uses and which cannot be renewed are called conventional or non-renewable sources of energy.

These have been used as the major energy source till date and hence their reserves are gradually running out. Coal, petroleum, natural gases are examples of conventional or non-renewable sources of energy.

Question 6. What are non-conventional? orrenewable sources of energy? Give examples.
Answer:

The sources of energy that have presently been used as alternative energy sources to minimize the uses of fossil fuels and which are in exhaustible and renewable are known as non-conventional or renewable sources of energy. Solar energy, wind energy, biomass energy, tidal energy, etc. are examples of non-conventional or renewable sources of energy.

Question 7. Write three differences between conventional and non-conventional sources of energy.
Answer:

The major differences are listed below:

 Conventional sources of energy Non-conventional sources of energy
1. These sources of energy are extensively used and their reserves are gradually exhausting. Examples—are coal,    petroleum, natural gas, etc. 1. These sources of energy are not being used extensively. These sources are exhaustible and they are mostly reusable in nature. Example-wind energy, are solar energy, tidal energy, etc.
2. These sources of energy cause pollution. 2. These sources are non-polluting in nature.
3. The sources of energy are not evenly distributed throughout the world. 3. Non-conventional energy sources are almost evenly distributed.


Question 8. Why should fossil fuels?

Answer:

The natural reserves of fossil fuels are gradually running out. The sources of such fuels are abruptly exhausting due to their indiscriminate usage. As a result, the world may face a severe energy crisis and development of human civilization may cease in near future.

These sources of energy are non-renewable. Combustion of fossil fuels produces several greenhouse gases. Hence controlled use of these fuels will minimize the chances of global warming.

Question 9. How is electricity generated from wind energy?
Answer:

Practically, the kinetic energy of the wind is harnessed to obtain wind energy. Using windmills, wind energy can be converted into electrical energy.

The blades of the windmills are connected to the turbines of an electrical generator. When the blades rotate by the action of wind, the turbines also rotate and electricity is generated.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern windmill
Question 10. How is electricity generated using tidal energy?
Answer:

During high tides, the surging water is stored in a dam and during the low tides this stored water is released, which comes down with a high velocity.

Turbines of electrical generators are placed in the path of moving water and thereby the kinetic energy of water can be converted into electrical energy.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Tidal power station

Question 11. How is electricity generated using geothermal energy?
Answer:

During volcanic eruptions, most of the magma coming out from the earth, gets stuck in the rocks near the earth surface at a depth of 5 to 10 km. These rocks, in contact with the magma, gets heated up.

When water passes through these hot rocks, it vaporizes to form steam. The steam is piped out directly from the underground wells to the power plants. The kinetic energy of the steam rotates the turbines and generates electricity.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Production Of Geothermal Energy

Question 12. What are methanogenic bacteria? Give examples.
Answer:

Methanogenic bacteria

Methanogenic bacteria can be defined as microorganisms that produce methane gas by the anaerobic decomposition of biomass. Some examples of methanogenic bacteria are Methanococcus, Methanobacterium etc.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Methanogenic Bacteria

Question 13. Discuss the role of methanogenic bacteria in increasing the amount of methane in the atmosphere.
Answer:

Methanogenic bacteria decompose dead plants in wetlands, rain forests etc. to produce methane gas. Thus, the amount of methane in atmosphere increases.

Question 14. What is biomass energy? What are the disadvantages of using biomass energy?
Answer:

Biomass energy:

Biomass refers to dead plants and plant remains, domestic wastes, agricultural wastes, animal excreta, animal carcasses etc. Energy stored in biomass is known as biomass energy.

Biomass energy is considered to be one of the major alternative sources of energy to replace fossil fuels. However, it has some harmful effects on environment as the combustion of biomass causes air pollution.

Question 15. What is biogas? What are its constituents?
Answer:

Biogas:

Biomass refers to dead plants and plant remains, domestic wastes, agricultural wastes, animal excreta, animal carcasses, etc. The biomass is enclosed in a large chamber and decomposed by the action of methanogenic bacteria to produce a combustible gas, known as biogas.

The major components of biogas is methane (CH4). Apart from methane, carbon dioxide CO2, and traces of H2, N2, CO, O2, H2S, and water vapor are also present in it.

Question 16. Write some uses of biogas.
Answer:

Some uses of biogas:

Biogas can be used as a fuel to light lamps, to heat water, and for cooking purposes. In many countries, it is used to dry bricks, ceramic tiles, tobacco etc. Electricity generated from biogas can be used to run small pumps and small-scale industries.

Question 17. What is biofuel? Give examples.
Answer:

Biofuel:

The fuel produced from biomass is known as biofuel. Bioethanol produced by fermentation of corn or sugar cane is an example of biofuel. It is mixed with petrol and used as automobile fuel.

Question 18. What is methane hydrate?
Answer:

Methane hydrate:

Methane hydrate is a crystalline solid substance (clathrate compound) in which a large amount of methane molecules are trapped inside the cage-like lattice of ice. It is represented by the formula 4CH4 23H2O. It exists only under suitable temperatures and pressure.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Methane hydrate

Question 19. How is methane present in coal mines?
Answer: Due to bacterial action or geothermal heating, methane gas is produced in coal seams. The coal seams are saturated by ground water and the produced water pressure causes methane gas to get absored in the coal seam.

Question 20. Why is methane gas extracted before the mining of coal?
Answer: Before the mining of coal, methane gas should be extracted as much as possible from the coal bed. This is because- it will reduce the probability of catching fire and chances of accidents can be averted, the extracted methane gas can be used as a potential fuel.

Question 21. Why is methane hydrate considered as an important source of energy?
Answer: Recent discovery of methane hydrate explores a new dimension of energy resources. Scientists have estimated that methane hydrate contains more carbon than all the fossil fuel available on the earth, combined together.

1 Litre of methane hydrate is found to contain 170 Litre of methane gas in STP. When the world is facing an energy crisis due to exhaustion of fossil fuels, methane hydrate provides a complete new direction towards energy resources.

Question 22. State the concerns of using methane?
Answer:

Concerns of using methane

Methane hydrate is not as stable as other minerals. Due to increase in temperature or decrease in pressure, it may be transformed into water and methane gas may be released from the mineral. This may cause landslide beneath the earth surface. Methane is a major greenhouse gas. Heating methane hydrate may release methane gas to the atmosphere which may lead to global warming.

Question 23. Discuss some advantages of using solar energy.
Answer:

Some advantages of using solar energy:

Solar energy is inexhaustible and renewable. Scientists consider it as the most important source of alternative energy. Unlike fossil fuels, solar energy does not cause pollution. source of energy is very effective in less populated areas and in those regions where the .conventional sources of energy are not widely available. The production of solar energy requires minimum natural resources.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Solar Panels
Question 24. Mention some disadvantages of using solar energy.
Answer:

Some disadvantages of using solar energy:

Production cost of solar energy is very high as it requires complex technological support. So, under-developed countries find this energy unsuitable for use.

The initial cost of installing solar panels is very high. This is one of the major disadvantages of solar energy. Areas which do not get sufficient sunlight, are not suitable for utilising solar energy. Solar energy centers produce solar energy in limited quantities which can satisfy only the local need.

Question 25. Mention some advantages of wind energy.
Answer:

Some advantages of wind energy:

Wind energy is renewable and is source is inexhaustible. Even it’s incessant use will not create energy crisis. Even though initial cost of installation is somewhat high, regular cost is very create energy crisis. Recurring cost is very low. This energy source does not cause pollution.

Question 26. Mention some advantages of tidal energy.
Answer:

Some advantages of tidal energy:

Tidal energy is renewable and is source is inexhaustible. Even it’s incessant use will not create energy crisis. Recurring cost is very slow. This energy sorce does not cause pollution.

Question 27. Discuss some advantages of geothermal energy.
Answer:

Some advantages of geothermal energy:

1. This source of energy is inexhaustible.
2. Being inexhaustible, it can be supplied continuously throughout the day.
3. Direct use of this energy inhibits the release of greenhouse gases into the atmosphere, thereby preventing pollution.

Question 28. Mention some advantages of biomass energy.
Answer:

Some advantages of biomass energy:

Biomass energy is a renewable source of energy. The residue left after production of biogas from biomass can be used as fertilizers.

Biogas can be used as fuels and for the generation of electricity. Pollution caused by the waste material during biomass production can be controlled by using them for production of biogas.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Biogas Plant Biogas Plant
Question 29. How is electricity produced from domestic wastes?
Answer: Initially, substances that can be recycled are separated from the domestic wastes. Remaining wastes are then placed into a furnace through a hopper. These are then burnt in the combustion chamber. The heat so produced vapourises the water taken in a tank above the furnace.
The vapour is used to rotate the turbine which in turn generates electricity.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Production Of Electricity From Domestic Wastes
Question 30. Mention some uses of coalbed methane (CBM).
Answer:

Some uses of coalbed methane (CBM)

Coalbed methane (CBM) can be used as a fuel for domestic as well as industrial purposes. It can be used as a substitute of natural gas in power stations. It can be liquefied by applying pressure. The liquefied gas can be used in automobiles.

Question 31. Classify biofuel. Give example of each Characteristics of each type?
Answer:

Biofuel:

The fuel produced from biomass is called biofuel. It is classified into three groups- solid biofuel, liquid biofuel and gaseous biofuel. Solid biofuel: Wood, straw, domestic wastes etc., are examples of solid biofuels.

Liquid biofuel: Bioethanol (produced by fermentation of corn or sugarcane), biodiesel (produced by transesterification of oil or fat) are examples of liquid biofuels.

Gaseous biofuel: Biogas or gobar gas is an example of gaseous biofuel.

Question 32. How is methane gas extracted from coal mines?
Answer: A vertical hole is drilled through the ground into coal seam. Coal seam remains saturated in When the water is pumped out, the pressure over the coal seam decreases and methane gas is released from the coal seam. The gas then comes out through the hole and its collected and supplied through pipelines.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Extraction Of Methane Gas
Question 33. What is ignition point of a fuel? What are the characteristics of a good fuel?
Answer:

The ignition point of a fuel can be defined as the lowest temperature at which the fuel catches fire and undergoes combustion.

Characterisitics of a good fuel:

1. It should possess a high calorific value.
2. It should have a proper ignition temperature. The ignition temperature of the fuel should neither be too low or too high.
3. It should not produce poisonous products during combustion. In other words, it should not cause pollution during the time of combustion.
4. It should have a moderate rate of combustion. Combustion should easily be controlled i.e.
5. It should be easier to start or stop the combustion of the fuel when required. Combustion of the fuel should not produce. much ash.
6. It should be cheap and well available. The transportation and handling of the fuel must be easier.

Question 34. What do you mean by calorific value of fuel? Which one of coal and diesel has higher calorific value?
Answer:

Calorific value of fuel

The amount of heat produced due to the complete combustion of 1 kg of a fuel is known as its calorific value. Its value is represented in It is actually a metal box with a heat-insulating kl. kg-1 unit in Sl.

The calorific value, of diesel (44800 kJ. kg-1) is greater than that of coal (15000-34000 kJ.kg-1).

Question 35. What are the uses of solar energy?
Answer:

Solar energy is a renewable, inexhaustible, and affordable form of energy.

It can be used in following ways-

1. Solar electricity can be generated through solar panels and is used to light streets, houses, health centres etc.
2. Solar water heaters are used to heat water by Solar water heater is used to heat water using using solar energy.
3. Solar space heating systems include radiant floors or a Force Hot Air (FHA) system to heat a home thus reduces the overall electricity cost.
4. Solar ventilation solution such as solar attic fans can reduce the burden of HVAC by helping to cool the home during summer.
5. Solar cookers can be used for cooking purposes.
6. Solar powered vehicles (e.g. buses, small cars etc.) are used in many cities.

Question 36. Mention the uses of solar cells.
Answer:

In a solar cell, solar energy is converted into electrical energy and the generated electricity can be stored in batteries or can be used directly.

1. Water can be pumped up with the help of this energy.
2. Motor cars can be driven by installing solar panels.
3. This energy can be used in artificial satellites, space ships or space stations.
4. Radio stations and TV relay stations can use this energy.
5. This energy can be used to supply powers to traffic signals, solar calculators etc.

Question 37. Briefly discuss about solar cooker.
Answer:

The properties of solar cooker are:

1. Solar cooker is a cheap, energy-saving, pollution-free tool used in cooking. the environment i.e. it is completely pollution free.
2. It is actually a mental box with a heat-insulting coating around it.
3. Black color is avery good heat absorber, so the inner surfaces are painted black.
4. With the help of a reflector, the sunlight is concentrated and applied to the box to create high temperature.
5. The surface of the cooker is covered with a glass plate to increase the temperature inside

Question 38. Briefly discuss about solar water heater.
Answer:

The properties of water heater are:

1. Solar water heater is used to heat water using solar energy.
2. A black-painted metal box and a black- painted copper coil are placed inside it.
3. Sun rays are being reflected into the box with the help of a reflector to create a high temperature, which also heats the inner copper coil.
4. The water flowing through the hot copper coil is also heated in this way.

Question 39. Mention a few uses of wind energy.
Answer:

Few uses of wind energy are:

1. Wind power is used to generate electricity by winding the wind turbines.
2. With the help of windmill it is possible to grind different grains or spices, pump water etc.

Question 40. Mention the advantages and disadvantage of using geothermal energy.
Answer:

Advantages of using geothermal energy:

1. The supply of geothermal energy is inexhaustible, i.e., its stock will never run out despite being used repeatedly.
2. Using of geothermal energy causes no harm to the environment i.e. it is completely pollution free.

Disadvantages of using geothermal energy:

1. The construction of geothermal power generation plants is extremely expensive.
2. Due to the use of advanced technology, the cost per unit of this power generation is higher than that of conventional power plant.

Question 41. Write the differences between conventional and non-conventional sources of energy.
Answer:

Differences between conventional and non-conventional sources of energy:

Conventional sources  of energy    Non-conventional Sources of energy
1. Conventional sources of energy (e.g. coal, petroleum, and natural gas) are nonrenewable sources of energy and that is why there is a probability of that such sources might be exhausted by excessive use. 1. Non-conventional sources of energy (e.g. solar energy, wind energy) are renewable sources of energy and thus they can not be exhausted.
Z- These energy sources have been used for a long time. For. example, the use of coal and petrol has been around for a . long time. 2. The use of these energy sources (e.g., solar energy, wind energy, tidal energy) is not very common. Their use has recently become popular.
3. Use of these energy sources causes environmental pollution. 3. Use of these energy sources does not cause environmental pollution at all.
4. The use of these energy sources is not conducive to sustainable development. 4. The use of these energy sources is conducive to sustainable development.
5. A variety of byproducts can be obtained during the extraction of these energies. For example, naphthalene, coal tar, etc. are obtained during the extraction of coal. 5. No by-products can be obtained during the extraction of these energies.


Question 42. In which type of natural environment is methane hydrate found?

Answer: The topography and environment of some parts of the world are favorable to the formation and sustainability of methane hydrate. Those are:

1. Sedimentary rock layers below the frozen soil layer (Permafrost) of the polar region.
2. The sedimentary layer is present at the bottom of large lakes and the seas in the subcontinental region.
3. The bottom region of frozen ice in the polar region.

Question 43. Why is methane hydrate termed as ‘fiery ice’?
Answer:

Methane hydrate is a solid, crystalline substance having the composition of 4CH4. 23H2O. A large amount of methane is trapped in these ice-like crystals. Methane is a combustible substance, hence methane hydrate starts to burn on contact with fire. Only water is left after combustion. That is why methane hydrate is termed as ‘fiery ice’.

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic C Proper Uses of Energy and Sustainable Development Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. Which of the following is a fossil fuel?
1. Coal
2. Petroleum
3. Natural gas
4. All of these

Answer: 3. Natural gas

Question 2. Among petrol, diesel, kerosene, and LPG, which one has the highest calorific value?
1. Peterol
2. Kerosene
3. Diesel
4. LPG

Answer: 4. LPG

Question 3. Which of the following represents the correct order of calorific values of the corresponding fuels?
1. Coal < diesel < hydrogen < LPG
2. Coal < hydrogen < diesel < LPG
3. Coal < diesel < LPG < hydrogen
4. Coal < LPG < diesel < hydrogen

Answer: 3. Coal < diesel < LPG < hydrogen

Question 4. Which of the following is a fossil fuel?
1. Coal
2. Petroleum
3. Natura! gas
4. All of these

Answer: 4. All of these

Question 5. Fossil fuels need to be conserved because
1. These are very expensive
2. These are not easily available
3. These are non-renewable
4. None of these

Answer: 3. These are non-renewable

Question 6. Which of the following elements is the major constituent of solar cells?
1. Li
2. Na
3. Si
4. Cu

Answer: 3. Si

Question 7. The major source of energy which meets our daily demands is
1. Solar energy
2. Wind energy
3. Tidal energy
4. Fossil fuels

Answer: 4. Fossil fuels

Question 8. Solar energy gets converted into electrical energy in a/an
1. Photo voltaic cell
2. Solar cooker
3. Pressure cooker
4. Electric motor

Answer: 1. Photo voltaic cell

Question 9. The least polluting fossil fuel is
1. Diesel
2. Coal
3. Kerosene
4. Natural gas

Answer: 4. Natural gas

Question 10. Source of non-renewable energy is
1. Wind energy
2. Petroleum
3. Tidal energy
4. Solar energy

Answer: 2. Petroleum

Question 11. The energy stored in coal, petroleum, etc. is
1. Wind energy
2. Solar energy
3. Tidal energy
4. Renewable energy

Answer: 2. Solar energy

Question 12. Which gas found in coal mines is used as a fuel?
1. Ozone
2. Methane
3. Oxygen
4. Nitrogen

Answer: 2. Methane

Question 13. An example of methanogenic bacteria is
1. Methanococcus
2. Methanobacterium
3. Both 1 and 2
4. None of these

Answer: 3. Both 1 and 2

Question 14. Which of the following does work on the principle of the greenhouse effect?
1. Solar cooker
2. Radio station
3. Windmill
4. Biogas plant

Answer: 1. Solar cooker

Question 15. The largest windmill of India is situated in
1. Kanyakumari (approx. 380MW)
2. Surat (approx. 220MW)
3. Haridwar (approx. 460MW)
4. Sagardwip (approx. 410MW)

Answer: 1. Kanyakumari (approx. 380MW)

Question 16. The state with the largest installed wind power generation capacity in India is
1. Tamil Nadu
2. West Bengal
3. Kerala
4. Maharashtra

Answer: 1. Tamil Nadu

Question 17. Which of the following are eco-friendly fuels
(1)Coal,
(2)Kerosene,
(3)Natural gas,
(4)Biogas

1. (1) and (4)
2. (3) and (4)
3. (1) and (2)
4. (1) and (3)

Answer: 3. (1) and (2)

Question 18. Which type of coal has the highest calorific value?
1. Pit
2. Lignite
3. Anthracite
4. Bituminous

Answer: 3. Anthracite

Question 19. The main component of biofuel is
1. Carbon dioxide
2. Ethanol
3. Methanol
4. Ether

Answer: 2. Ethanol

Question 20. Solar cells are formed by
1. Conductors
2. Insulators
3. Semiconductors
4. Superconductors

Answer: 3. Semiconductors

Question 21. Source of the solar energy is
1. Nuclear fission
2. Coal
3. Nuclear fusion
4. Petroleum

Answer: 3. Nuclear fusion

Question 22. Formula of methane hydrate is
1. CH3.H20
2. 4CH3-23H2O
3. CH3OH
4. 4CH4-23H2O

Answer: 4. 4CH4-23H2O

Question 23. Fiery ice is
1. CO2
2. Methane
3. Methane hydrate
4. Methanol

Answer: 3. Methane hydrate

Question 24. For which ray of sunlight does a solar cooker work?
1. Gamma ray
2. Infrared ray
3. Ultraviolet ray
4. Visible ray

Answer: 3. Methane hydrate

Question 25. What should be the minimum wind velocity for proper operation of a wind-power generator?
1. 15 km/h
2. 25 km/h
3. 35 km/h
4. 45 km/h

Answer: 1. 15 km/h

Question 26. The main component of biogas is
1. CO2
2. CH4
3. H2
4. H2S

Answer: 2. CH4

Question 27. Which is not a source of biomass energy?
1. Agricultural waste
2. Cow dung
3. Wood
4. Nuclear fission

Answer: 4. Nuclear fission

Question 28. A source of non-conventional energy is
1. Petrol
2. Kerosene
3. Biogas
4. Coal

Answer: 3. Biogas

Question 29. In which of the following states does methane hydrate exists?
1. Solid
2. Liquid
3. Gas
4. Any physical state

Answer: 1. Solid

Question 30. The potential difference formed in solar cells
1. 0 V
2. 0.5 V
3. 220 V
4. 110 V

Answer: 2. 0.5 V

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic C Proper Uses of Energy and Sustainable Development Answer In Brief

Question 1. What do you mean by alternative fuels?
Answer:

Alternative fuels

Alternative fuels are those which are being used to restrict the use of fossil fuels in order to conserve their sources as these are gradually running out.

Examples: solar energy, wind energy, etc.

Question 2. Mention two major sources of energy.
Answer:

Two major sources of energy

1. Conventional sources of energy and
2. Non-conventional sources of energy.

Question 3. Name a conventional and renewable source of energy.
Answer: Wind power.

Question 4. Write the name of a conventional and nonrenewable source of energy.
Answer: Coal (fossil fuel).

Question 5. Write the names of two non-conventional and renewable sources of energy.
Answer:
1. Solar energy,
2. Tidal energy.

Question 6. Write the names of two non-conventional and non-renewable sources of energy.
1. Geothermal energy,
2. Nuclear energy.

Question 7. Why is the inner surface of a solar heater painted black?
Answer: Black surface can absorb more heat from sunlight. So, the inner surface of a solar heater is painted black.

Question 8. Which fuel has the highest calorific value?
Answer: Hydrogen (150000 kJ/kg) has the highest calorific value.

Question 9. Why do the pipelines of natural gas often get blocked?
Answer: The pipelines of natural gas often get blocked due to the formation of solid methane hydrate.

Question 10. The gas trapped in coal mines is a potential source of energy. Name the gas. Why is it called firedamp? OR, What is firedamp?
Answer:
1. The gas is methane (CH4).
2. Methane gas accumulated in coal mines forms an explosive mixture when mixed with air and often causes fire in coal mines. So this gas is named as firedamp.

Question 11. How is electricity produced in solar cells?
Answer: When photons present in sunlight are incident on the surface of the solar cell (made up of semiconductors, such as Si), the electrons get excited and ultimately becomes free. These free electrons generate electricity.

Question 12. What is geothermal energy?
Answer:

Geothermal energy

When groundwater passes over hotbeds of rocks, it gets vaporised. These vapours are utilized to move the plates of a turbine thereby producing electrical energy. This is known as geothermal energy.

Question 13. What is tidal energy?
Answer:

Tidal energy

During tides, the kinetic energy of water can be converted into electrical, energy using turbines. This energy is known as tidal power or tidal energy.

Question 14. Which is the major raw material used for the production of biogas?
Answer: Cow dung.

Question 15. What is the calorific value of fuel?
Answer:

Calorific value of fuel

The amount of heat produced due to the complete combustion of 1 kg of a fuel is known as its calorific value. Its value is represented in kJ • kg-1 unit in SI.

Question 16. How is biodiesel produced?
Answer: Biodiesel is produced due to the transesterification of vegetable oil and animal fats.

Question 17. Which seeds are used to produce biodiesel in India?
Answer: The seeds of the jatropha tree are used to produce biodiesel in India.

Question 18. What is ‘methane hydrate’?
Answer:

‘Methane hydrate’

Methane hydrate is a crystalline solid where methane molecules remain trapped inside a cage-like lattice of ice.

Question 19. Write down the unit of calorific value of a fuel.
Answer: The SI unit of calorific value of a fuel is J/kg and the CGS unit is cal/g.

Question 20. The calorific value of LPG is 50 kJ/g —Explain.
Answer: It means that 50 kJ of heat is obtained by the combustion of 1 g of LPG.

Question 21. Arrange in ascending order of calorific value—Kerosene, Wood, Coal, Hydrogen, LPG, Diesel.
Answer: Wood > Coal > Diesel > Kerosene > LPG > Hydrogen

Question 22. Write the name of fossil fuel.
Answer: Coal.

Question 23. Which gas is filled in the gas cylinder used for cooking?
Answer: Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)

Question 24. What is the main component of LPG?
Answer: Butane.

Question 25. What is the main component of CNG?
Answer: Methane.

Question 26. Which of the following is a fossil fuel? Charcoal, Petrol, Ethanol.
Answer: Petrol

Question 27. Which gas is produced during the combustion of fossil fuels?
Answer: CO2(Carbon dioxide).

Question 28. Write the name of a conventional renewable pollution-free energy source.
Answer: Wind power.

Question 29. Write the name of an environment-friendly non-conventional energy source.
Answer: Geothermal energy.

Question 30. Write the name of an alternative energy source.
Answer: Solar energy.

Question 31. Write the name of a device that uses solar cells.
Answer: Solar calculator.

Question 32. What is generated from the wind power of wind mill?
Answer: Electrical energy.

Question 33. Write the name of a place in West Bengal that has windmills.
Answer: Fraserganj.

Question 34. Name an energy source that does not come directly or indirectly from the sun.
Answer: Geothermal energy.

Question 35. What is available as residue in the controlled construction of wood?
Answer: Charcoal.

Question 36. Methanogenic Bacteria decompose substances to produce methane gas.
Answer: Biomass.

Question 37. Give an example of Methanogenic Bacteria.
Answer: Methanogens—Methanosarcina barkeri

Question 38. Mention the use of Biogas.
Answer: Biogas can be used as a fuel for cooking purposes.

Question 39. Write down the fuel form of CBM.
Answer: Coalbed methane.

Question 40. What is sweet gas?
Answer:

Sweet gas

Methane gas obtained from coal mines is called sweet gas.

Question 41. What is ‘fiery ice’?
Answer:

‘Fiery ice’

Methane Hydrate ((4CH4• 23 H2O ) is called ‘fiery ice’.

Question 42. How much volume of methane gas can be obtained from 1 Litre of methane hydrate at NTP?
Answer: Almost 170 Litre of methane gas can be obtained from 1 Litre of methane hydrate at NTP.

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic C Proper Uses of Energy and Sustainable Development Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. The calorific value of LPG is _________.
Answer:  55000 kJ/kg.

Question 2. The major component of biogas is ________
Answer: Methane

Question 3. Apart, from methane, another gas that is found in biogas is ________.
Answer: CO2

Question 4. At STP, about __________ of methane is obtained from 1 L of methane hydrate.
Answer: 170L

Question 5. Methane hydrate is a solid _________ compound.
Answer: Clathrate

Question 6. _________ river basin in India has one of the largest reserves of methane hydrate.
Answer: Krishna-Godavari

Question 7. The idea of sustainable development is properly developed in the report of the __________ Commission.
Answer: Brundtland

Question 8. Biogas is produced due to the anaerobic decomposition of cow dung by __________ bacteria.
Answer: Methanogenic

Question 9. The calorific value of methane is _________ than petrol.
Answer: Less

Question 10. In photovoltaic cells, solar energy is directly converted into _________ energy.
Answer: Electrical

Question 11. In artificial satellites, the main source of energy is the energy produced by __________
Answer: Solar Cells

Question 12. The value of solar constant is approximately ________
Answer:  1.4kW/m2

Question 13. Biogas contains _______ of methane gas.
Answer: 50-80%

Question 14. Among wood and methane, the calorific value is more in case of __________
Answer: Methane

Question 15. The substance used to make solar cell is ________
Answer: Silicon

Question 16. Electrical energy is obtained from in solar cells ___________
Answer: Solar energy

Question 17. _________ is generated from wind power in wind mills.
Answer: Mechanical Energy

Question 18. _________ in West Bengal is a region that is rich in geothermal energy.
Answer:  Barkreshwar

Question 19. Vegetable wastes are decomposed by anaerobic bacteria in __________ of air in the biogas plants.
Answer: Absence

Question 20. To produce biogas___________ bacteria is needed.
Answer: Methanogenic

Question 21. The hard coal in the mine contains a large amount of_______ in the absorbed state.
Answer: Methane

Question 22. _____________ is also termed as fiery ice.
Answer: Methane Hydrate

Question 23.  _________ gas is obtained from methane hydrate.
Answer: Methane

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Topic C Proper Uses of Energy and Sustainable Development State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. The calorific value of kerosene is greater than LPG.
Answer: False

Question 2. Semiconductors like Si, Ge, etc., are used in solar cells.
Answer: True

Question 3. Gasoline is a kind of biofuel.
Answer: False

Question 4. Methanogenic bacteria play a major role in biogas production.
Answer: True

Question 5. C02 gas is trapped inside the coal mines.
Answer: False

Question 6. The quality of fuel is determined by its calorific value.
Answer: True

Question 7. Methane hydrate contains 13.3% methane. Bioethanol is a liquid biofuel.
Answer: False

Question 8. The source of solar energy is the nuclear fission reaction that takes place inside the Sun.’
Answer: False

Question 9. The chemical energy stored in biomass is called biomass energy,
Answer: True

Question 10. Solar panels are used in broadcast relay stations.
Answer: True

Question 11. The most widely used definition of sustainable development was produced by the report of the Brundtland Commission.
Answer: True

Question 12. Windmills usually convert electrical energy into mechanical energy.
Answer: False

Question 13. Bioethanol is a liquid biofuel.
Answer: True

Chapter 1 Environmental Concern Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Columns:

Question 1

Column A Column B
Chlorofluro-carbon 1. Non-conventional source of energy
Biofuel 2. Ozone layer depletion
Solar energy 3. Fossil fuel
Petroleum 4. Ethanol

Answer:
Chlorofluro-carbon: 2. Ozone layer depletion
Biofuel: 4. Ethanol
Solar energy: 1. Non-conventional source of energy
Petroleum: 3. Fossil fuel

Question 2

Column A Column B
Greenhouse gas 1. Tidal energy
Renewable source of energy 2. Photovoltaic cell
Natural gas 3. Global warming
Solar energy 4. Methane

Answer:
Greenhouse gas: 3. Global warming
Renewable source of energy: 1. Tidal energy
Natural gas: 4. Methane
Solar energy: 2. Photovoltaic cell

Question 3

Column A Column B
Turbulent sphere of atmosphere 1. Mesopause
Aurora borealis 2. Exosphere
The coldest region of the atmosphere 3. Troposphere
Hydrogen and helium gases are present 4. Ionosphere

 

Answer:
Turbulent sphere of atmosphere: 3. Troposphere
Aurora borealis: 4. Ionosphere
The coldest region of the atmosphere: 1. Mesopause
Hydrogen and helium gases are present: 2. Exosphere

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical and Chemical Properties of Elements Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements

Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Synopsis:

Dobereiner’s Law of Triads: In 1817, German scientist Dobereiner first attempted to arrange the elements on the basis of their atomic weights. According to his Law of Triads, if three elements having similar properties are arranged in increasing order of their atomic weights, the atomic weight of the middie element in the triad is found to be the average of the atomic weights of the remaining two elements.

Newland’s Law of Octaves: When the known elements are arranged in increasing order of their atomic weights, the eighth element, starting from a given one, will show resemblance in physical and chemical properties with the first element. This is known as Newland’s Law of Octaves (1861).

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

Mendeleev’s Periodic Law: In 1869, Mendeleev put forward the periodic law through which he established the relationship between atomic weight of an element to its physical and chemical properties.

The statement of the law was given as:
1. The physical and chemical properties of the elements are periodic functions of their atomic weights.
2. Almost at the same time, German scientist Lothar Meyer came to the same conclusion by observing that physical properties of the elements are changing periodically with their atomic weights.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Periodic Table: On the basis of his periodic law, Mendeleev constructed a table by arranging the elements in increasing order of their atomic weights. This table is known as Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Modem Periodic Law: In 1913, British scientist Moseley while observing the effects of X-rays on metals, concluded that atomic number is a more accurate and fundamental property of an element than its atomic weight. Accordingly, Mendeleev’s periodic law was modified. This modified form is known as the modern periodic law which states.

The physical and chemical properties of the elements are the periodic functions of their atomic number. In the periodic table, the horizontal rows of elements are called periods and the vertical columns of elements are called groups. The modified version of Mendeleev’s periodic table has 7 periods and 9 groups.

Wbbse Class 10 Periodic Table Of Elements

Long form of periodic table or Modern periodic table: The periodic table constructed on the basis of the electronic configuration of elements is known as long form of periodic table or the modern periodic table. It is also known as Bohr’s periodic table. It consists of 7 periods and 18 groups.

Elements of different groups are given some special names depending on their properties. For example:

Group Name Example
Group 1 elements Alkali metals Li, Na. K, Rb
Group 2 elements Alkaline earth metals Be, Mg, Ca, Sr
Group 11 elements Coinage metals Cu, Ag, Au
Group 15 elements Pnictogens N, P, As, Sb
Group 16 elements Chalcogens 0, S, Se, Te
Group 17 elements Halogens F, Cl, Br, 1
Group 18 elements Noble gases He, Ne, Ar, Kr

The position of hydrogen in the periodic table is controversial. It shows certain properties that resemble the properties of both group-1 (alkali metals) as well as group- 17 elements (halogens). For these reasons, it can be placed in group 1 as well as in group- 17. Due to this peculiar nature of hydrogen, it is often called the rogue element’.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical and Chemical Properties of Elements Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements

Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. State Dobereiner’s law of Triads’? Why was the law discarded?

Answer:

Dobereiner’s law of Triads’:

If the elements of a triad i.e., a group of three elements having similar chemical properties, are arranged in increasing order of their atomic weights, then the atomic weight of the middle element is found to be equal or almost equal to the average of atomic weights of the other two elements.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Dobereiner
Example: Li (7), Na (23) and K (39) have similar chemical properties and thus forms a triad. The average of atomic weights of Li and K = 7+39/2 = 23, which is the atomic weight of Na.

The law failed to arrange most of the elements known till then. It was only applicable for few elements. For these reasons, the law was discarded.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 2. State Mendeleev’s periodic law. What was the basis of Mendeleev’s periodic law?

Answer:

Mendeleev’s periodic law:

1. The physical and chemical properties of the elements are periodic functions of their atomic weights.

2. Mendeleev examined the relationships between the atomic masses of the elements and their physical and chemical properties such as boiling point, melting point, density, atomic mass, the formula of hydrides and oxides of the elements etc. He observed that the physical and chemical properties of the elements change and periodically repeat with the change in atomic masses.

3. Based on these observations, he arranged the elements in the order of increasing atomic masses and formulated the periodic law.

Question 3. Evaluate the contribution of Lothar Meyer in the periodic classification of elements.
Answer:

The contribution of Lothar Meyer in the periodic classification of elements:

German scientist Lothar Meyer (1870) worked extensively on the relationship between physical properties of elements (such as atomic volume, melting point, boiling point etc.) and their atomic weights. He also stated a periodic law which was quite similar to what Mendeleev had proposed.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

The work of both Mendeleev and Lothar Meyer are acknowledged towards periodic classification of elements. However, Mendeleev got greater recognition in this field as he put forward the theory much earlier than Lothar Meyer. However, the contribution of Lothar Meyer towards the concept of periodicity and periodic classification of elements cannot be neglected.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Lothar Meyer

Wbbse Class 10 Periodic Table Of Elements

Question 4. What do you mean by period and group and groups were present in Mendeleev’s periodic table published in 1871?

Answer: The horizontal arrays of periodic table are termed as periods and the vertical arrays are termed as groups of the periodic table. There were 7 periods (1, 2, 3,…, 7) and 8 groups (1-8) in the periodic table published in 1871.

Question 5. How many elements were mentioned in the main version of Mendeleev’s periodic table published in 1871? Which element was absent in the table and why?

Answer:
1. 63 elements were mentioned in Mendeleev’s periodic table published in 1871.
2. Group ‘0’ (zero) was absent in Mendeleev’s periodic table (1871) as inert gases were not discovered at that time.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 6. Why were subgroups needed in Mendeleev’s periodic tab?

Answer: In Mendeleev’s periodic table it was found that except for group ‘0’ (zero) and group 8, several elements of different properties are placed in the same group. Each of the groups except 0 and 8 is divided into two subgroups designated as ‘A’ and ‘B’. Properties of the elements of subgroups A and B are altogether different, except their valencies.

However, elements of the same subgroup exhibit more or less similar properties. E.g., the alkali metals of Group l-A are closely alike. But Group IA metals differ remarkably from the coinage metals of Group IB, although they have a common valency of 1.

Question 7. The atomic mass of argon (39.94) is greater than that of potassium (39.1), yet potassium was placed after Argon in Mendeleev’s periodic table—explain why.

Answer: Mendeleev’s main objective was to place elements with similar properties in the same class. That is why these two elements were placed in the group where their properties resemble with other elements although their atomic masses indicate just the reverse places in the periodic table.

Wbbse Class 10 Periodic Table Of Elements

Question 8. How was Mendeleev’s periodic table useful in the periodic classification of elements? Explain with an example.

Answer: The elements present in the same group of the periodic table show similarity in properties.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Dmitri Mendeleev

1. So, if the property of one element in a specific group is known we can get an idea about the properties of the other elements present in the group.
2. If we know the properties of sodium of group- IA, the properties of other elements of that group namely potassium, rubidium and caesium can easily be evaluated.

Question 9. How was Mendeleev’s periodic table helpful in describing the structure and electronic configuration of different elements?
Answer: The elements present in the same subgroup of a group in Mendeleev’s periodic table have similar physical and chemical properties. Again, it is known that elements with similar properties have similar electronic configurations of their outermost orbits.

Thus, it can easily be correlated that elements of the same group have similar electronic configuration. Therefore, we can get an idea about the electronic configuration of other elements of a definite group, if the electronic configuration of any one element of the group is known. Similarly, from the knowledge of electronic configuration, we get an idea about the structure of atom.

Question 10. Discuss the limitations of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Answer:

The limitations of Mendeleev’s periodic table:

Though Mendeleev was almost successful in arranging the elements on the basis of their properties in his periodic table, the periodic table had some serious drawbacks such as:

1. In some cases, in order to place the elements having similar properties in the same group, Mendeleev placed some elements with higher atomic weight before elements having lower atomic weight.
2. The position of hydrogen in Mendeleev’s periodic table was controversial.
3. In some cases, Mendeleev put elements having similar properties in different groups while elements having different properties in the same group.
4. Though the atomic weights of different isotopes are different, they were not given different positions in the periodic table.

Question 11. Mention the observation and inference of Moseley’s experiment on X-ray spectra.

Answer: In 1913, scientist Moseley made extensive research on the X-rays produced when cathode rays are bombarded on plates (target or anticathode) made of different metals.

Observation:
1. He observed that the X-rays produced due to collision of cathode rays with different metals have different frequencies. However, for a definite metal, the frequency of produced X-rays is constant.
2. He also observed when the square root of the frequencies of radiated X-rays was plotted against the atomic numbers of the elements (metals) used as anticathode, a straight line was obtained. However, no such straight line was obtained when atomic masses of the elements were plotted against the square root of the frequencies.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Moseley's Experiment On X-Ray Spectra

Inference: From the experiment, Moseley inferred that the properties of elements are a function of their atomic numbers and not their atomic masses.

Question 12. Write down the modified or modern periodic law. Mention the total number of periods and groups in the modern edition of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Answer: The physical and chemical properties of the elements are a periodic function of their atomic numbers. There are 7 periods (1-7) and 9 groups (1, 8 and 0) in the modern edition of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Question 13. Write down some differences between period and group in the periodic table.

Answer:

Differences between period and group in the periodic table are as follows:

Period Croup
1. A period is a horizontal row of the periodic table. 1. A group is a vertical column of the periodic table.
2. There are 7 periods in the long form of the periodic table. 2. There are 18 groups in the long form of the periodic table.
3. The elements in a period differ in physical and chemical properties. 3. The elements in each group have some similar properties but not entirely identical properties.
4. Number of electronic shells remains the same for all elements in a period. 4. Number of electronic shells increases gradually from top to bottom in a group.


Question 14. The chemical properties of all the elements in the same period are not the same, but the chemical properties of the elements in the same group are similar— explain.

Answer: The chemical properties of the elements depend on the atomic number and hence on the electronic configuration of the atoms. Since the atomic number and electronic configuration of the elements in a particular period are different, their chemical properties are also different.

On the other hand, although the atomic numbers of different elements belonging to the same group are different, the electronic configurations of the outermost shell are similar. That is why their chemical properties are also similar to each other.

Question 15. Why are the elements arranged in increasing order of their atomic number in the long form of the periodic table, instead of their increasing atomic weight?

Answer: In 1913-14, British scientist Moseley, on the basis of his experiments on X-ray spectra of different atoms, explained that atomic number is a more fundamental property of an element than its atomic weight. It controls the physical and chemical properties of the elements. Again, after the discovery of isotopes, it was well-known that an element may contain atoms of different atomic weights. Thus, it was proved that atomic weight does not control the properties of an element. So, in the long form of the periodic table, elements are arranged in increasing order of their atomic number instead of atomic weight.

Question 16. Mention the differences between modern version of Mendeleev’s periodic table and the long form of the periodic table.

Answer: The major differences between modern version of Mendeleev’s periodic table and long form of periodic table are:

The modern version of Mendeleev’s periodic table The long form of the periodic table   
1. In the modern version of Mendeleev’s periodic table, the elements are arranged on the basis of atomic number. 1. In the long form of the periodic table, the elements are arranged on the basis of the electronic configuration of the atoms.
2. In Mendeleev’s periodic table, there were 7 periods and 9 groups and each group from 1 to 7 was divided into A and B subgroups. 2. In the long form of the periodic table, there are 7 periods and 18 groups and no group is divided into subgroups.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Mendeleev's Periodic Table

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Long Form Of Periodic Table
Question 17. Which period is termed as the shortest period? Mention the groups where the elements of the shortest period reside.

Answer: The 1st period of the periodic table is termed as the shortest period. It contains only two elements. Among the two elements of the 1st period, Hydrogen belongs to group 1 and helium belongs to group 18 of the periodic table.

Question 18. What are the first and second short periods of the periodic table? Mention the total number of elements in each of these periods. What are the first and last elements in each of these periods and mention the corresponding groups to which they belong?

Answer: Second and third periods of the periodic table are termed as first and second short periods respectively. There are 8 elements in each of the short periods.

Period Name of the element Group in which it is placed
First short period Lithium (first element) Neon (last element) Group 1 Group 18
Second short period Sodium (first element) Argon (last element) Group 1 Group 18


Question 19. What is meant by ‘representative elements’?

Answer:

‘Representative elements’:

The elements of the 2nd and 3rd periods are abundant in nature. Apart from this, the elements of a certain group in these periods show much resemblance in properties in regular intervals. So, these elements are collectively called ‘typical or representative elements’.

[Apart from these elements, 8 elements from 4th period: K(19), Ca(20) and Ga(31) to Kr(36), 8 elements from 5th period: Rb(37), Sr(38) and ln(49) to Xe(54), 8 elements from 6th period: Cs(55), Ba(56) and Th(81) to Rn(86) and Two elements from 7th period: Fr(87) and Ra(88) are also known as representative elements.]

Question 20. What are alkali metals and alkaline earth metals? Why are they called so?

Answer: The elements present in group-IA or group-1 of the periodic table, i.e., lithium (Li), sodium (Na), potassium (K), rubidium (Rb), caesium (Cs) and francium (Fr) are collectively called alkali metals. The oxides, hydroxides and carbonates of these metals are strongly alkaline in nature. So, they are called alkali metals.

The elements present in group-2A or group-2 of the periodic table, i.e., beryllium (Be), magnesium (Mg), calcium (Ca), strontium (Sr), barium (Ba) and radium (Ra) are collectively called alkaline earth metals.

Compounds of these elements are abundantly found in the earth’s crust and their oxides, hydroxides and carbonates are alkaline in nature. So, they are called alkaline earth metals.

Question 21. Write down the characteristics of alkali metals.

Answer:

Characteristics of alkali metals are:

1. Alkali metals are highly electropositive and they have a tendency to form cations by losing electrons from their valence shell.
2. Because of high reactivity these elements do not occur freely in nature.
3. Valence shell of alkali metals contains 1 electron and thus alkali metals are monovalent.
4. Oxides and hydroxides of alkali metals are strong bases and alkalies respectively.
5. Alkali metals form metallic hydroxides and hydrogen in reaction with water.
6. Alkali metals are good reducing agents. Ascending order of reducing the power of alkali metals is — Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs.

Question 22. Write down the alkaline earth metals.

Answer:

Characteristics of alkaline earth metals are:

1. Alkaline earth metals are highly electropositive and have a tendency to form cations by losing electrons from valence shell.
2. Because of high reactivity, these elements do not occur freely in nature. ‘
3. There are 2 electrons in the outermost shell of the alkaline earth metals and thus they are bivalent.
4. They are strong reducing agent. Ascending order of reducing power of alkaline earth metals is — Be < Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba .
5. Alkaline earth metals are present in, earth crust as oxides.
6. Alkaline earth metals form hydrogen and alkalies in reaction with water under suitable conditions.

\(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{Ca}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \frac{\text { room }}{\text { temperature }} \mathrm{Ca}(\mathrm{OH})_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow \\
& \mathrm{Mg}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mg}(\mathrm{OH})_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow
\end{aligned}\)

 

Question 23. What are bridge elements? Why are they called so?

Answer:

Bridge elements:

1. The inert gases (He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe and Rn) present in group-0 or group-18 of the periodic table are known as bridge elements.
2. These elements act as a bridge between strong electronegative halogens of group-17 and strong electropositive alkali metals of group-1 of the next period. So, these elements are called bridge elements.

Question 24. What are transition elements?
Answer:

Transition elements:

The elements from scandium (Sc) to copper (Cu) in the fourth period, yttrium (Y) to silver in the 5th period, lanthanum (La) and hafnium (Hf) to gold (Au) in the 6th period are known as transition elements due to some specific characteristics in their electronic configurations.

Question 25. Write down some characteristics or properties of transition elements.

Answer:
1. Except for mercury (Hg), all transition elements are solid metals.
2. Transition elements generally exhibit variable oxidation states and valencies.
3. They can form both ionic and covalent compounds.
4. Transition elements exhibit a very distinctive property of forming coloured coordination complexes.
5. A number of transition metals such as Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu etc. and their compounds are used as catalysts.
6. Many transition metals form alloys.

Question 26. Which elements are known as pnictogens? Why are they named so?

Answer: The elements of group V.B. of Mendeleev’s periodic table or group 15 of the long form of the periodic table are known as pnictogens. E.g., nitrogen (N), phosphorous (P), arsenic (As), antimony (Sb), and bismuth (Bi).

The word pnictogen is derived from the Greek word pnicogens meaning ‘suffocating’ or ‘to choke’. The first member of group 15 is nitrogen which is a suffocating gas. That is why members of this group are known as pnictogens.

Question 27. What are chalcogens? Why are they called so?

Answer:

Chalcogens:

1. The elements of group 16 of the periodic table namely O, S, Se, Te and Po are collectively known as chalcogens.
2. The term ‘chalcogen’ means the producer of ores. Most of the metals are found as their oxide or sulphide ores in the earth’s crust. So, these elements are known as chalcogens.

Question 28. What are metalloids? Give example.
Answer:

Metalloids:

There are some elements which have certain characteristics common to both metals and nonmetals. These are called metalloids.
Examples of metalloids are arsenic(As ), antimony (Sb), and bismuth (Bi).

Question 29. What are trans-uranium elements? Mention two important characteristics of these elements?

Answer: The elements placed after uranium (92U) in the 7th period of periodic table are known as transuranium elements.
1. All trans-uranium elements are radioactive.
2. All these elements are artificially synthesised.

Question 30. Isotopes of an element have not been given separate places in the periodic table— this is one of the major drawbacks of Mendeleev’s periodic table. Explain.

Answer: In Mendeleev’s periodic table, the elements were arranged in increasing order of their atomic weights. However, the isotopes of an element have different atomic weights. But, Mendeleev placed all the isotopes of an element in the same group and same period which violates the basic rule of periodic classification. So, it can be considered as a major drawback of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

But in modern periodic table, the elements are arranged in increasing order of their atomic numbers. As all the isotopes of an element have the same atomic number, they should be positioned in the same place in the periodic table according to modern periodic law. Hence, this is no longer a drawback in modern periodic table.

Question 31. Discuss three advantages of modern periodic table over Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Answer: Three advantages of long form of periodic table over Mendeleev’s periodic table are discussed below:

1. In Mendeleev’s periodic table the elements were arranged in increasing order of their atomic weights and later in increasing order of their atomic numbers. But in long form of periodic table, the elements are arranged on the basis of their electronic configurations.

Elements having same electronic configuration in their outermost shell are placed in the same group. As the chemical properties are related to the electronic configuration of the outermost shell, the periodicity of properties of the elements are described more effectively in long form of the periodic table.

2. In Mendeleev’s periodic table, each group except group 8 and group 0, was divided into subgroups. But the elements of different subgroups of a definite group are not very similar in terms of their properties. In the modern periodic table, the concept of subgroups has been eliminated. Elements of different subgroups have been placed in completely different groups. Which is more scientific.

3. In Mendeleev’s periodic table, each period of group 8 had three elements, namely, (Fe, Co, Ni), (Ru, Rh, Pd) and (Os, Ir, Pt). This defied the basic rule of periodic classification. In the long form of periodic table, these elements are placed in different groups.

Question 32. Which elements are halogens? Why are these named so?

Answer:
1. Elements of Gr-17 in the modern periodic table i.e. F, Cl, Br, I, At etc. are termed as halogens.
2. The name ‘halogen’ means ‘salt-producing’. Several salts can be formed by the reaction of metal with these elements. Salts containing F, Cl or I have been found in seawater. That is why these elements are termed as halogens. Some salts of halogen are—NaCI (common salt), CaF2, NaBr, Kl etc.

Question 33. Write down the characteristics of halogen elements.

Answer:

Characteristics of halogen elements are:

1. Halogens are highly reactive and hence cannot be obtained in a free state in nature. Halogens forms halides with metals and nonmetals.
2. Among halogens, fluorine and chlorine are gaseous, bromine is liquid and iodine is solid. Astatine is the only radioactive halogen.
3. Halogens are highly electronegative (except Iodine). Descending order of electronegativity: F > Cl > Br > I.
4. Number of electrons in the valence shell of halogen elements is 7 and thushalogens are monovalent.
5. Halogens are non-metals and diatomic molecules.
6. Halogen elements are a strong oxidising agents. Descending order of oxidising power or halogens is— F > Cl > Br > I.

Question 34. Which elements form the noble gas family? Among noble gases which one is most chemically active?

Answer:
1. The Group zero of modified Mendeleev’s periodic table or Gr-18 of the long form of periodic table are designated as noble gases, e.g. He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe and Rn.
2. Among the noble gases (or inert gases) Xenon (Xe) is the most chemically reactive. State the differences in properties between alkali metals and halogens.

Question 35. State the differences in properties between alkali metals and halogens.

Answer:

The major differences in properties between alkali metals and halogens are as follows:

Property   Alkali metals  Halogens
Physical state Soft solid substances can be cut into pieces with a knife. The diatomic molecule can be solid, liquid or gas.
Conductance Good conductor of heat and electricity. Do not conduct heat or electricity.
Ionisation energy In a period, the alkali metal has the least ionisation energy. In a period, the halogen has the| highest ionisation energy.
Electronegativity The alkali metal is the least electronegative in a particular period. The halogen is the most electronegative in a particular period.
Oxidising and reducing property Strong reducing agents. Strong oxidizing agents.
Property Alkali metals Halogens
Reaction with acids React violently with acid to produce hydrogen. Generally do not react with acids.
Formation of  compounds Form, ionic compounds with non-metals. Form ionic compounds with metals and covalent compounds with non-metals.


Question 36. Write down the differences between representative elements and transition elements.

Answer:

Differences between and transition elements representative elements are as follows:

Representative elements Transition elements
1. The elements present in groups 12 and groups 13-17 are known as representative elements. 1. The elements present in group 312 in the long form of the periodic table are known as transition elements.
2. Most of the representative elements show single valency. 2. Transition elements show multiple valencies.
3. The compounds of representative elements are usually colourless. 3. Most of the compounds formed by the transition elements are coloured.
4. Representative elements consist of some metals, nonmetals and metalloids. 4. All transition elements are metallic in nature.


Question 37. Why is hydrogen called an element?

Answer:

While arranging the elements in increasing order of their atomic weights, Mendeleev observed that hydrogen shows similarity with both alkali metals of group-1A as well as with halogens of group-8B. So, hydrogen was placed in both group 1A and group 7B. Mendeleev faced difficulty in ascertaining a definite position for hydrogen and so he named it a ‘rogue element’.

Question 38. Write down Some similarities between hydrogen and alkali metals.

Answer:

Some similarities between hydrogen and alkali metals

1. Like the alkali metals of Gr-1, hydrogen shows mono-valency, high reactivity and electropositive character.
2. Both hydrogen and alkali metals are reducing in nature.
3. Both hydrogen and alkali metals have strong affinity for non-metals.
4. Hydrogen forms H2O with oxygen. Like hydrogen, alkali metals also form oxides e.g. Na20, K20 etc.
5. Like halogens, hydrogen reacts with halogens to form halide compounds.

Question 39. Write down some similarities in properties of hydrogen and halogen elements.

Answer:

Some similarities in properties of hydrogen and halogen elements:

1. Like halogens, hydrogen is diatomic, has high ionisation energy and non-metallic character.
2. Like hydrogen, halogens are mostly univalent.
3. Hydrogen combines with metals to form hydrides while halogens combine with metals to form halides.
4. Halogens may be obtained at the anode by electrolysis of molten metallic halides.

Question 40. Mention some limitations of long form of periodic table.

Answer:

Some limitations of long form of periodic table:

The long form of the periodic table successfully eliminated a number of drawbacks of Mendeleev’s periodic table. However, the long form to has a few limitations. Which are discussed below—

1. Even in long form of periodic table, the position of hydrogen is still controversial. Hydrogen cannot be placed in a definite group.
2. Depending on the electronic configuration, He should have been placed in group 2. But it is placed in group 18 with other noble gases.
3. Like Mendeleev’s periodic table, the lanthanides and actinides are placed separately in two different rows below the main periodic table. The elements could not be placed in individual groups in the periodic table.

Question 41. Mention the differences in the properties of alkali metals and hydrogen.
Answer:

The differences in properties of alkali metals and hydrogen are—

Alkali metals Hydrogen
1. Most alkali metals are usually solid at room temperature. 1. Hydrogen is gaseous at room temperature.
2. Alkali metals are monoatomic. 2. Hydrogen molecules are diatomic.
3. Alkali metals are electropositive metals. 3. Hydrogen is an electropositive non-metal.
4. Alkali metals always form cations, e.g., Na, and K. 4. Hydrogen can form both cation (H), and anion (HΘ).
5. Oxides of alkali metals are basic in nature. 5. Oxide of hydrogen (H2O) is neutral in nature.

Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. Which of the following sets of elements does not form a triad?
1. Ca, Sr, Ba
2. Li, Na, K
3. O, S, Se
4. Cl, Br, I

Answer: 3. O, S, Se

Question 2. The number of elements in the longest period and the incomplete period are respectively
1. 28,32
2. 32,28
3. 32,32
4. 18,28

Answer: 2. 32,28

Question 3. The elements that found no place in the original periodic table constructed by Mendeleev were
1. Transition metals
2. Alkali metals
3. Noble gases
4. Halogens

Answer: 3. Noble gases

Question 4. In Mendeleev’s periodic table, the arrangement of elements in the order of their increasing atomic weights was not maintained for which pair of elements?
1. C&N
2. S&Cl
3. K&Ar
4. K&Ca

Answer: 3. K&Ar

Question 5. The group having no subgroups in Mendeleev’s periodic table is
1. Group 2
2. Group 8
3. group 7
4. group 5

Answer: 2. Group 8

Question 6. Which group in Mendeleev’s period table contains more than one element in the same position?
1. Group 2
2. Group 3
3. Group 0
4. Group 8

Answer: 4. Group 8

Question 7. The number of elements in each position under group 8 is
1. 4
2. 5
3. 3
4. 2

Answer: 3. 3

Question 8. The pair of elements belonging to pnictogens is
1. N, P
2. P, O
3. F, Cl
4. Na, K

Answer: 1. N, P

Question 9. Moseley observed that the frequency (v) of X-rays produced when metal plates are bombarded with cathode rays is related to atomic number of elements (Z) as
1. v∝Z
2. √v∝ Z
3. v2∝Z
4. v = Z

Answer: 2. √v∝ Z

Question 10. The number of groups in the long form of the periodic table is
1. 9
2. 12
3. 13
4. 20

Answer: 3. 13

Question 11. In long form of periodic table, the elements are arranged on the basis of their
1. Atomic mass
2. Atomic number
3. Electronic configuration
4. Number of neutrons

Answer: 3. Electronic configuration

Question 12. In long form of periodic table, the alkali metals are placed in group
1. 1
2. 2
3. 3
4. 4

Answer: 1. 1

Question 13. In long form of periodic table, the alkaline earth metals are placed in group
1. 1
2. 2
3. 3
4. None of these

Answer: 2. 2

Question 14. In long form of periodic table, the halogens are placed in group
1. 15
2. 16
3. 17
4. 18

Answer: 3. 17

Question 15. In long form of periodic table, the coinage metals are placed in group
1. 11
2. 15
3. 17
4. 1

Answer: 1. 11

Question 16. In long form of periodic table, the chalcogens are placed in group
1. 16
2. 17
3. 13
4. 1

Answer: 4. 1

Question 17. Which of the following is a chalcogen?
1. Se
2. B
3. C
4. Ne

Answer: 1. Se

Question 18. In long form of periodic table, the noble gases are placed in group
1. 17
2. 18
3. 16
4. 15

Answer: 2. 18

Question 19. An example of a transition metal is
1. Ca
2. Mg
3. Fe
4. Al

Answer: 3. Fe

Question 20. In Mendeleev’s periodic table hydrogen can be placed
1. With halogens or with alkali metals
2. With chalcogens or with alkaline earth metals
3. With pnictogens or with coinage metals
4. With pnictogens or with alkaline earth metals

Answer: 1. With halogens or with alkali metals

Question 21. Which of the following is a coinage metal?
1. Iron
2. Silver
3. Aluminium
4. Nickel

Answer: 2. Silver

Question 22. A trans-uranium element is
1. Np
2. Ce
3. Lu
4. La

Answer: 1. Np

Question 23. The outermost shell of second period elements is
1. K-shell
2. L-shell
3. M-shell
4. N-shell

Answer: 2. L-shell

Question 24. Which of the following pair is not correct?
1. Coinage metal : Cu
2. Halogen: I
3. Alkaline earth metal: Fe
4. Inert element : Ne

Answer: 3. Alkaline earth metal: Fe

Question 25. Which one of the following is an alkali earth metal?
1. Rb
2. Ba
3. Sb
4. F

Answer: 2. Ba

Question 26. Total number of elements in the sixth period of modern long form of periodic table is
1. 2
2. 8
3. 18
4. 32

Answer: 4. 32

Question 27. Group 15 elements are called
1. Chalcogen
2. Pnictogan
3. Halogen
4. Aerogen

Answer: 2. Pnictogan

Question 28. To which group of the periodic table does 13X27 belong?
1. 14
2. 13
3. 15
4. 16

Answer: 2. 13

Question 29. Which of the following is not an alkali metal?
1. Rb
2. Cs
3. Ca
4. Na

Answer: 3. Ca

Question 30. Atomic number is more fundamental property of an element than atomic mass— the scientist who proved it is
1. Moseley
2. Lothar Meyer
3. Mendeleev
4. Dalton

Answer: 1. Moseley

Question 31. Which one is an alkali metal?
1. K
2. Mg
3. F
4. Ne

Answer: 1. K

Question 32. Which one of the following is not a transition element?
1. Fe
2. Co
3. Ca
4. Cr

Answer: 3. Ca

Question 33. Ca is
1. An alkali metal
2. An alkaline earth metal
3. Halogen
4. Inert element

Answer: 2. An alkaline earth metal

Question 34. Which one of the following is not a coinage metal?
1. Cu
2. Ag
3. Au
4. Fe

Answer: 4. Fe

Question 35. Number of rare earth elements is
1. 8
2. 12
3. 16
4. 14

Answer: 4. 14

Question 36. Which of the following elements represent the same period?
1. Li, Na, K
2. F, Cl, Al
3. Li, Mg, Ca
4. Cu, Ni, Zn

Answer: 4. Cu, Ni, Zn

Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Answer In Brief:

Question 1. The atomic weight of sodium is the average of the atomic weight of lithium and potassium. What can be inferred from this using the law of triads?
Answer: Using the law of triads, it can be inferred that the chemical properties of lithium, sodium and potassium are similar.

Question 2. Three elements A, B, and C obey Dobereiner’s law of triads. If the atomic weights of A and C are respectively 7 and 39, then find the atomic weight of B.
Answer: According to law of triads, the atomic weight of the middle element of the triad is the average of the atomic weights of the first and third elements.

Hence, atomic weight of B atomic weight of A + atomic weight of B = \(\frac{\text { atomic weight of } A+\text { atomic weight of } B}{2}\) =\(\frac{7+39}{2}\) = 23

Question 3. Newland’s law of octave is not applicable for which type of elements?
Answer: Newland’s law of octave is not applicable for heavy elements.

Question 4. On which basis did Mendeleev arrange the elements in the period table?
Answer: Mendeleev arranged the elements in the periodic table in increasing order of their atomic weights.

Question 5. How many groups in Mendeleev’s periodic table were divided into subgroups A & B?
Answer: In Mendeleev’s periodic table, seven (7) groups were divided into subgroups A & B.

Question 6. Which groups in Mendeleev’s periodic table (corrected version) do not contain any subgroup?
Answer: Zero (0) and Eighth (8) group.

Question 7. How many more elements are there in the second period than the first period of Mendeleev’s periodic table?
Answer: There are 6 more elements present in the 2nd period than the 1st period of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Question 8. The initial form of Mendeleev’s periodic table does not contain noble gases. Why?
Answer: At the time when Mendeleev first published the periodic table, noble gases were not discovered yet. So, the noble gases did not find any place in the initial form of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Question 9. What is the position of noble gases in modern version of Mendeleev’s periodic table?
Answer: In modern version of Mendeleev’s periodic table, the noble gases are placed in the ‘zero’ (0) group.

Question 10. The atomic masses of some elements were erroneous when Mendeleev constructed the periodic table. Why?
Answer: Valencies of the elements were incorrectly measured. These inaccurate valencies of elements were responsible for the erroneous values of atomic masses of some elements.

Question 11. Which element was predicted as eka-silicon by Mendeleev?
Answer: The element predicted by Mendeleev as eka-silicon is now known as germanium.

Question 12. Which element was predicted by Mendeleev as eka-aluminium?
Answer: Gallium was predicted by Mendeleev as eka-aluminium.

Question 13. What similarity is observed between Na and Cu regarding their positions in the periodic table?
Answer: Both Na and Cu were placed in group 1. Na was in group 1A and Cu was in group 1B.

Question 14. Which is the most electropositive nonradioactive alkali metal?
Answer: Caesium (Cs) is the most electropositive nonradioactive alkali metal.

Question 15. Which alkali metal is radioactive?
Answer: Francium (Fr) is a radioactive alkali metal.

Question 16. Name an alkali metal which is a liquid at 30°C.
Answer: Caesium is a liquid at 30°C

Question 17. Which alkaline earth metal is the heaviest?
Answer: Radium is the heaviest alkaline earth metal.

Question 18. Which alkaline earth metal is the lightest?
Answer: Beryllium is the lightest alkaline earth metal.

Question 19. Which is the radioactive halogen?
Answer: The radioactive halogen is astatine (At).

Question 20. Which is the lightest halogen?
Answer: Fluorine is the lightest halogen.

Question 21. Name a halogen that shows reducing property.
Answer: Iodine shows reducing property.

Question 22. Which group in the periodic table contains elements in all the three states, namely solid, liquid and gas?
Answer: Group 17 (group-8B) of the periodic table contains elements in all the three states. Fluorine and chlorine are gases, bromine is liquid and iodine is solid at normal temperatures.

Question 23. Which property is similar in all transuranium elements?
Answer: All the trans-uranium elements are radioactive elements.

Question 24. Mention the period in which all the elements are radioactive.
Answer: The elements of the 7th period are all radioactive.

Question 25. Name a radioactive noble gas.
Answer: A radioactive noble gas is radon.

Question 26. What are pnictogens?
Answer: The elements of group 15 in the long form of periodic table are known as pnictogens.

Question 27. Name the noble gas present in 2nd period of the periodic table.
Answer: Neon (Ne) is the noble gas present in 2nd period of the periodic table.

Question 28. Mention the series to Which U belongs.
Answer: Uranium (U) belongs to actinide series.

Question 29. Which period of the periodic table is known as very short period? To which groups do the elements of this period belong?
Answer: The first period of the periodic table is known as very short period. The period consists of two elements— hydrogen and helium. Hydrogen is placed in group-1A (group-1 in the long form of the periodic table). Helium belongs to group 0 (group 18 in the long form of periodic table).

Question 30. What are inert gases? Which one of them is chemically most active?
Answer: The six elements, helium (He), neon (Ne), argon (Ar), krypton (Kr), xenon (Xe) and radon belonging to group-0 (group-18) of the periodic table are known as inert gases. Xenon is the most reactive among all the inert gases.

Question 31. What are coinage metals?
Answer: Three metals namely, copper (Cu), silver (Ag) and gold (Au) were used to make coins in ancient times as well as in medieval period. So, these metals are also known as coinage metals.

Question 32. How many periods are termed as longest period and mention the periods?
Answer: Two periods of the long form of periodic table are termed as longest periods. They are 6th period and seventh period.

Question 33. How many elements are there in each of the longest periods of the periodic table?
Answer: 32 elements.

Question 34. Mention the position of isotopes of elements in the periodic table.
Answer: Isotopes reside in the same group with the corresponding elements.

Question 35. Which period contains all of the three types of element viz. metals, non-metals and metalloids?
Answer: Fourth period.

Question 36. Why do elements of a particular group resemble in properties? Or, Why do Na and K resemble in properties?
Answer: Due to the presence of a similar type of electron configuration in the valence shell, they show resemblance in properties.

Question 37. Name an alkali metal.
Answer: Example of an alkali metal is sodium (Na).

Question 38. Which gas is produced in reaction with water and alkali metals?
Answer: Hydrogen gas.

Question 39. In which group of the modern periodic table do the alkaline earth metals reside?
Answer: Group 2.

Question 40. Name the halogen element which belongs to the same period where sulphur resides.
Answer: Chlorine (Cl).

Question 41. Name the liquid non-metal.
Answer: Bromine (Br).

Question 42. Which halogen element forms rapidly in reaction with water?
Answer: Fluorine (F).

Question 43. Which group of the modern periodic table belongs to the inert gases?
Answer: Group 18.

Question 44. Name the inert gas of the first period of the periodic table.
Answer: Helium (He).

Question 45. Name the inert gas residing at the 2nd period of the long form of periodic table.
Answer: Neon (Ne).

Question 46. State whether the transition elements are metals or non-metals.
Answer: Transition elements are metals.

Question 47. Which transition element is a liquid metal?
Answer: Mercury (Hg).

Question 48. Give example of noble metal.
Answer: Platinum (Pt)

Question 49. Elements of which group of the periodic table is termed as chalcogens?
Answer: Group-16 elements are termed as chalcogens.

Question 50. Mention the group of the rare earth elements in the periodic table.
Answer: Rare earth elements are present in the 3rd group of the modern periodic table.

Question 51. Name the lanthanide element of lowest atomic number.
Answer: Cerium (Ce) of atomic number 58.

Question 52. Mention two elements of the periodic table which are formed in laboratory.
Answer: Neptunium (Np, Atomic no: 93) and nobelium (No, atomic no: 102)

Question 53. Hydrogen and alkali metals form similar type of oxides. Mention a difference between those oxides.
Answer: Oxide of hydrogen ( H2O) is a neutral oxide while oxides of alkali metals are basic oxides for e.g. Na2O, K2O etc.

Question 54. How many elements are there in shortest period of the periodic table?
Answer: 2

Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. Cl,_____ and I are members of a triad.
Answer: Br

Question 2. Noble gases are placed at extreme _______ of the periodic table.
Answer: Right

Question 3. In the modern periodic table, the elements are arranged on the basis of their ______ instead of ______
Answer: Atomic Numbers, and Atomic weights

Question 4. Moseley from his X-ray experiment came to the conclusion that ______ is the fundamental property of elements.
Answer: Atomic number

Question 5. The _______ period of periodic table is an incomplete period.
Answer: 7th

Question 6. The elements in zero group are chemical ______
Answer: Inert

Question 7. Hydrogen shows similar properties with ________ as well as ______
Answer: Alkali metals, halogens

Question 8. Trans-uranium elements start from the element with atomic number ______
Answer: 93

Question 9. There is no _______in the long form of periodic table.
Answer: Subgroup

Question 10. The elements of A and B subgroups in a given group of Mendeleev’s periodic table show no similarity except in their _______
Answer: Valances

Question 11. The elements sodium, potassium etc., are called alkali metals because the _____ and _______ of these elements are strong bases.
Answer: Oxides, hydroxides

Question 12. Among the halogens, _________ is liquid at normal temperature.
Answer: Bromine

Question 13. The elements Mg, Ca etc., are called alkaline earth metals because these elements are found in the earth’s crust as _______ and their hydroxides are ________ in nature.
Answer: Oxides, Alkaline

Question 14. Apart from ______ all other transition elements are solid metals.
Answer: Mercury

Question 15. There was no mention of _________ in Mendeleev’s old periodic table.
Answer: Inert gases

Question 16. According to the modern form of Mendeleev’s periodic table, halogens belong to the _______ group.
Answer: 7B

Question 17. There are _______ groups in the long form of periodic table.
Answer: 18

Question 18. The number of elements in each of the 2nd and 3rd periods of the long form of periodic table is ________
Answer: 8

Question 19. __________ is a radioactive halogen.
Answer: Astatine

Question 20. Gold, platinum and silver are examples of ______ metal.
Answer: Noble

Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic A Periodic Table State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Atomic weight of Na is the average of the atomic weights of Li and K.
Answer: True

Question 2. The law of octaves was found to be satisfactory in case of light elements.
Answer: True

Question 3. The physical and chemical properties of the elements are the periodic functions of their atomic weights.
Answer: False

Question 4. The elements after uranium are called transition elements.
Answer: False

Question 5. Except H, all other elements in group 1 are reactive metals.
Answer: True

Question 6. The initial form of Mendeleev’s periodic table does not contain noble gases.
Answer: True

Question 7. Beryllium is the lightest metal among the alkaline earth metals.
Answer: True

Question 8. All the group-17 elements in the periodic table exist in a gaseous state at normal temperature.
Answer: False

Question 9. Cu, Ag and Au are known as coinage petals.
Answer: True

Question 10. Zn is a transition element.
Answer: False

Question 11. Ne (neon) is the most electronegative element.
Answer: False

Question 12. Law of Triads was given by scientist Lothar Meyer.
Answer: False

Question 13. There was no subgroup in group 8 of Mendeleev’s periodic table.
Answer: True

Question 14. In group 6B of Mendeleev’s periodic table elements of all three states viz. solid, liquid, and gas is present.
Answer: False

Question 15. Halogens are members of Group zero (0) of the modern periodic table.
Answer: False

Question 16. Halogen means sea-salt producer.
Answer: True

Question 17. A number of transition elements in the 4th period is 10.
Answer: True

Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements Synopsis:

1. Periodic property: The physical and chemical properties which show regular change while moving across a period from left to right and on going down a group from top to bottom are called periodic properties. Atomic radii, ionisation energy, electronegativity, oxidising and reducing properties etc., are periodic properties.

2. The variation of some physical and chemical properties of elements in a periodic table are as follows:

Property Variation across a period Variation down a group
Atomic radii Decreases in moving from Increases in moving from top to bottom
Ionisation energy Increases in moving from left to right Decreases in moving from top to bottom
Electronegativity Increases in moving from left to right Decreases in moving from top to bottom
Oxidizing power Increases in moving from left to right Decreases in moving from top to bottom
Reducing power Decreases in moving from left to right Increases in moving from top to bottom

Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is meant by ‘periodic properties’?

Answer:

‘Periodic properties’:

With the increase in atomic number, physical and chemical properties of the elements belonging to different periods in the periodic table show a gradual change and as we move along a period, the change is systemic and periodic.

Similarly, the elements present in a group show the periodic variation of similar properties with the increase in atomic number down the group. The physical and chemical properties of elements which show regular and periodic change across a period and down a group are known as periodic properties. Atomic radius, ionisation energy, electronegativity, oxidising and reducing properties etc., are some of the common periodic properties.

Question 2. Define atomic radius.

Answer:

Atomic radius:

The distance from the centre of the nucleus to the outermost shell containing the electrons is called the atomic radius.
Since it is not possible to isolate a single atom for the measurement of its radius, atomic radius is expressed as covalent radius, metallic radius and van der Waal’s radius.

Question 3. Define covalent radius. If the inter-nuclear distance of the two atoms in a hydrogen molecule is 0.74A, then find its covalent radius.

Answer:
1. When two similar atoms are connected to each other by a single bond, one-half of the distance between their nuclei is called the covalent radius.
2. If the internuclear distance of the two atoms in a hydrogen molecule is 0.74 A, the covalent radius of hydrogen will be = 0.74/2 A = 0.37 A.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements Covalent Radius

Question 4. How does atomic radius of the elements change from left to right in a period? Give reason.

Answer:
1. While moving from left to right across a period in the periodic table, the atomic radii or sizes of the atoms progressively decrease.
2. The principal quantum shell remains unchanged In the same period. So, the differentiating electrons enter the same shell. But due to an increase in the number of protons the value of +ve charge of the nucleus is increased. So attractive force of the nucleus for electrons in the outermost shell also increases which in turn gradually decreases the atomic radii.

Question 5. How does the atomic radius change down a group In the periodic table? Give reason.

Answer:
1. On moving down in any group of the periodic table, the atomic sizes rather the atomic radii of the elements increase.
2. On moving down a group, a new electronic shell is added to each succeeding element, though the number of electrons in the outermost shell remains the same. This tends to increase the atomic size.

At the same time, increase in nuclear charge with an increase in atomic number tends to decrease the atomic size. But the effect of the addition of a new electronic shell is so large that it outweighs the contractive effect of the increased nuclear charge. Hence, there occurs a gradual increase in atomic radii on moving down a group in the periodic table.

Question 6. (1) Arrange In decreasing order of atomic size—O, C, F, Li.
(2) Arrange in increasing order of atomic size—Br, F, I, Cl. lYz+VA

Answer:
(1)Given elements are members of the 2nd period of the periodic table. We know, across a period, atomic radius decreases from left to right. As a result, atomic size also decreases in the same fashion. So, the decreasing order of atomic size is Li > C > O > F.

(2)Given elements belong to Gr-17 of the long form of periodic table. We know, down the group atomic radius as well as atomic size gradually increases. So, the increasing order of atomic size is F < Cl < Br < I.

Question 7. What is the first ionisation energy of an element? Arrange the following elements in the increasing order of their first ionisation energy B, C, N, O and F.

Answer: The minimum amount of energy required to remove the most loosely bound electron from the outermost shell of an isolated gaseous atom of an element in its ground state to form a mono-positive ion is called the first ionisation energy of the element.

The ionisation energy of the given elements increases as— B<C<0<N<F.

Question 8. How does ionisation energy of elements change along a period and down a group in the periodic table?

Answer:
Variation along a period: On moving along a period from left to right, the ionisation energy of the elements generally increases, though some elements show exceptions to this trend. In a given period, the alkali metals present at the extreme left have the least ionisation energy while the noble gases at the extreme right have the highest ionisation energy.

Variation down a group: The ionisation energy of elements gradually decreases on moving down a group in the periodic table.

Question 9. (1)On which factors does the ionisation energy of an element depend?
(2) Why ionisation potentials of inert elements and alkali metals are very high and very low respectively?

Answer:
1. Factors influencing ionisation energy are:
(1)Atomic size: Ionisation energy decreases as the atomic size increases and vice-versa.
(2)Magnitude of nuclear charge: Ionisation energy increases with an increase in nuclear charge and vice-versa.
(3)Effect of the electronic configuration of the outermost shell: Ionisation energy increases with an increase in the stability of the electronic configuration.

2. Very high values of ionisation energies of inert gases are due to their highly stable electronic configuration. To remove an electron from this highly stable outer shell, a higher amount of energy is required making their ionisation energy so high.

On the other hand, alkali metals contain only one electron in their valence shell. By the removal of this electron, they can attain the stable electronic configuration of nearest inert gas. This is why the removal of an electron from alkali metals require a lower amount of energy making their ionisation energies low.

Question 10. Will ionisation energies of isotopes of an element be equal to each other? Explain.

Answer: Although the number of neutrons in the isotopes of an element are different, the number of electrons are same. As a consequence, electronic configurations are also the same. That is why the ionisation energies of these isotopes become equal to each other.

Question 11. Define electronegativity. Name the most electronegative and the least electronegative elements.

Answer:

Electronegativity:

Scientist Pauling defined electronegativity of an element as the tendency of an atom of the element to attract the bonded pair of electrons towards itself when it is covalently bonded to another atom, the most electronegative element is fluorine (F) and the least electronegative element is caesium (Cs).

Question 12. How does the electronegativity of the elements change across a period on moving from left to right? Explain with reasons.

Answer: On moving from left to right across a period the nuclear charge of the elements increases and atomic size decreases. As a result, the nuclear force of attraction on the bonded electron pair increases.

Hence, on moving from left to right the electronegativity of elements gradually increases. The alkali metal of a particular period located at the extreme left of the period is the least electronegative while the halogen in group 17 located at the right is the most electronegative element.

Question 13. How does the electronegativity of elements change on moving down a group? Arrange the following elements in the increasing order of their electronegativity. F, Br, Cl, I.

Answer: On moving down a group, the atomic size of the elements increases. As a result, the nuclear force of attraction on the outermost electrons decreases even though the nuclear charge increases. Hence, on moving down a group electronegativity of the elements gradually decreases.

The increasing order of electronegativity of the given elements: I < Br < Cl < F

Question 14. (1) Arrange the following elements in order of electronegativity—P, Cl, Si, S.
(2)Order of electronegativity of halogens— K Br < Cl < F. Explain.
(3)Name the elements with the highest and lowest electronegativity.

Answer:
(1)Given elements belong to the 3rd period in the periodic table, we know across a period from left to right electronegativity gradually increases. Therefore the increasing order of electronegativity of the given elements- Si < P < S < Cl.

(2)Halogens belong to group 17 of the periodic table. Now down a- group, electronegativity gradually decreases from top to bottom. Therefore we have the increasing order of electronegativity as given—I < Br < Cl < P.

(3) Fluorine (F) is the most electronegative element and Caesium (Cs) is the least electronegative element.

Question 15. Discuss how the oxidising and reducing power of elements change across a period and down a group in the periodic table.

Answer:

Variation across a period: On moving from left to right across a period, the atomic number as well as a number of protons gradually increases by one unit. At the same time, number of electrons also increases in the same outermost subshell. So, on moving from left to right nuclear attractive force on the outermost electrons gradually increases and the tendency to lose the electrons decreases.

At the same time, the tendency to accept electrons increases. As a result, the elements at the left part of the periodic table show a greater tendency to release electrons while the elements at the right part of the periodic table show a greater tendency to accept electrons. Hence, on moving from left to right across a period, the reducing power of the elements decreases whereas oxidising power increases. Alkali metals in group-1 of each period are the strongest reducing agents while the halogens in group-17 of each period are the strongest oxidising agents.

Vauation down a group: On moving down a group, atomic size of the elements increases and hence attractive force between the nucleus and the outermost electrons decreases. So, on moving down a group, the tendency of the elements to lose electrons increases. Hence, on moving down a group, reducing power of elements increases whereas oxidising power decreases.

Question 16. Discuss the variation of oxidising and reducing properties of the elements across a period. Arrange the following elements as per the given direction
(1)Na, Al, Si, Mg, P, Cl, S (decreasing order of reducing power).
(2)I, Cl, F, Br (increasing order of oxidising power).

Answer: On moving from left to right across a period, the oxidising power of the elements gradually increases while the reducing power gradually decreases.

(1)Decreasing order of reducing the power of the given elements: Na > Mg>AI>Si > P > S > Cl
(2)Increasing order of oxidising power of the non-radioactive halogen is: I < Br < Cl < F

Question 17. Arrange the elements of group-1A and group-2A in the correct order with respect to the following properties—
(1)Atomic size,
(2)Ionisation energy or ionisation potential,
(3) Reducing power.

Answer: For group-1A elements,
(1)Increasing order of atomic size: H < Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs < Fr
(2)Decreasing order of ionisation energy: H > Li > Na > K > Rb > Cs > Fr
(3)Increasing order of reducing power: H < Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs < Fr

For group-2A element,
(1)Increasing order of atomic size: Be < Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba < Ra
(2)Decreasing order of ionisation energy: Be > Mg > Ca > Sr > Br > Ra
(3)Increasing order of reducing power: Be < Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba < Ra

Question 18. Arrange the halogens in the correct order with respect to the following properties
(1) Atomic size,
(2) Ionisation energy or ionisation potential,
(3) Oxidising power.

Answer: Increasing order of atomic size: F < Cl < Br < I < At
Decreasing order of ionisation energy: F > Cl > Br > I > At
Decreasing order of oxidising power: F > Cl > Br > I > At.

Question 19. Some elements of a definite -period are given in the order in which they appear in the periodic table-Li, Be, B, C, Q, F, Me
1. State the period to which the elements belong.
2. Which element of that period is absent here? Mention its position.
3. Which element among these shows III catenation?
4. Arrange F, Be and N in increasing order of electronegativity.
5. Which element among these is a halogen?
6. Which one is an alkaline earth metal?

Answer:
1. All these elements belong to 2nd period.
2. The element absent here is nitrogen. In the periodic table, it is present between C and 0.
3. C shows catenation property.
4. Increasing order of electronegativity— Be < N < F.
5. F is a halogen.
6. Be is an alkaline earth metal.

Question 20. The names of the elements of a group in the periodic table are as follows: (1) boron, (2) aluminium, (3) gallium, (4) indium, (5) thallium. Answer the following questions:
1. Which of these elements shows the maximum metallic character?
2. Which element has the highest electronegativity?
3. If the electronic configuration of aluminium is K.= 2, L = 8, M = 3, then how many valence electrons are there in thallium?
4. The atomic number of boron is 5. Write the formula of the compound formed when boron reacts with chlorine.
5. Which of these elements has the least ionisation energy?
6. How many valence electrons are there in the elements present at the right side of this group?

Answer: The answers are given below:
1. The maximum metallic character is shown by thallium.
2. Boron has the highest electronegativity.
3. Thallium also has 3 valence electrons.
4. The formula of the compound formed when boron reacts with chlorine is  BCI3.
5. Thallium has the least ionisation energy.
6. There are 4 valence electrons in the elements present at the right side of this group.

Question 21. The atomic number of three elements &V>B and C are (Z-2), Zand (Z+l) respectively. B is an inert gas. 0 Which of these elements is the most electronegative?
1. Which element has the highest ionisation energy?
2. State the nature of the compound formed by A and C and write its formula.

Answer: The atomic number of B is Z and it is an inert gas. Therefore, it has 8 electrons in its outermost shell. Hence, element A (atomic number -I- 2) has (8 – 2) = 6 electrons in its valence shell and element C (atomic number = Z+1) has 1 electron in its valence shell, i.e., C is an alkali metal. Therefore, we can conclude that

1. A is the most electronegative element.
2. B is an inert gas. Hence, it possesses the highest ionisation energy.
3. The number of electrons in the valence shell of A is 6. Hence, its valency is 8-6 = 2. Similarly, the valency of C is 1 as it has one electron in its outermost shell

Therefore, the formula of the compound formed between A and C will be C2A. C is an alkali metal and A is an electronegative element. Hence, the nature of the compound formed by A and C will be electrovalent or ionic.

Question 22. The atomic number of the elements A, B and C are respectively 3,11 and 19.
1. State the position of these elements in Mendeleev’s periodic table as well as the long form of the periodic table.
2. Which one is the most reducing in nature?
3. State whether B will form a covalent or an ionic compound with chlorine.

Answer:
1. The position of the elements in the periodic table is given below:

Element Electronic configuration Position in Mendeleev’s periodic table Position in long form of the periodic table
K L M N Period Croup Period Group
3 2 1 2nd IA 2nd 1
11B 2 8 1 3rd IA 3rd 1
19C 2 8 8 4th IA 4th 1

2. C is the strongest reducing agent.
3. The number of valence electrons in B is 1. Hence, it is an alkali metal. On the other hand, chlorine is a strongly electronegative element and a non-metal. So, B will form an ionic compound with chlorine.

Question 23. Mention the position of the following elements in the long form of the modern periodic table, 11Na, 9F,13AI

Answer:

Element Electronic configuration Position in the long form of the periodic table
K L M Period Group
11Na 2 8 1 3 1
13AI 2 8 3 3 13
9F 2 7 2 17


Question 24. Assume the symbol of two elements are A and B and their atomic numbers are 7 and 20 respectively. Predict their positions in Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Answer:

Element Electronic configuration Position in Mendeleev’s periodic table
K L M N Period Group
A(7) 2 5 2 5B
B(20) 2 8 8 2 4 2A


Question 25. Among Cl (17), Na (11), Mg (12), Ca (20), S (16) and F (9)

1. Which metallic elements belong to Group 2?
2. Which non-metallic elements belong to 3rd period of Mendeleev’s periodic table?

Answer:

Element Atomic No. Electronic configuration Position in the periodic table Metal or nonmetal
K L W N Period Group
Cl 17 2 8 7 3 7B non-metal
Na 11 2 8 1 3 1A metal
Mg 12 2 8 2 3 2A metal
Ca 20 2 8 8 2 4 2A metal
S 16 2 8 6 3 6B non-metal
F 9 2 7 2 6B non-metal

1. Mg (12) and Ca are the metals which belong to group 2 in Mendeleev’s periodic table.
2. S (16) and Cl (17) are the non-metals which belong to the 3rd period of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Question 26. The number of electrons and neutrons in an atom of an element are 17 and 18 respectively. Predict .the position of the element in the Mendeleevas periodic table.

Answer: Number of electrons = 17
Electronic configuration =2,8,7
The elements will belong to 3rd period and Group 8 B in Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Question 27. If the electronic configuration of an element is 2, 8, 8, 1, then answer the following questions
1. Write down the number of periods and groups.
2. Write down the electronic configuration of another element of this group.

Answer:
1. The element belongs to the 4th period and group- 1 in the long form of modern periodic table.
2. Electronic configuration of another element of group-1 is 2, 8,1.

Question 28. A, B, and C are three different elements. B is an inert gas. Their atomic numbers are (Z -1), Z and (Z+l) respectively
1. Except B which one is a non-metal?
2. Which one is definitely a metal?
3. Predict the group-wise position of ‘A’ in the periodic table and the valency of A.

Answer:
1. ‘A’ is definitely a non-metal.
2. ‘C’ is definitely metal.
3. Element ‘A’ belongs to Group 7B in Mendeleev’s periodic table or Group 17 in the long form of the periodic table. Being an element of Gr 17, the valency of A is 1.

Question 29. The atomic numbers of the three elements A, B, and C are 6,8, and 10 respectively. C is an inert gas.
1. Which one is most electronegative?
2. Atomic size is least for which element?
3. In which group does element B reside?

Answer:
The electronic configuration of 6A is K(2), L(A).
The electronic configuration of 8B is K(2), L(6).
Electronic configuration of 10C is K(2),L(8).

1. It is obvious from the electronic configuration that element B is the most electronegative.
2. Atomic size is least for the element B.
3. The element B belongs to the Gr-16 of the modern periodic table. It is a member of the 2nd period.

Question 30. The number of electrons in the outermost shell of elements X and Y are 2 and 7 respectively.
1. In which group of periodic table should the elements be placed?
2. Which one is an oxidising agent and which one is a reducing agent in case of forming compounds?

Answer:
1. ‘X’ should be placed in Gr-2 of the modern periodic table as the number of electrons in the valence shell is 2.
‘T’ should be placed in Gr-17 of the modern periodic table as the number of electrons, in the valence shell is 7.

2. ‘Y’ will act as an oxidising agent as it has a tendency to accept electrons.’X’ will act as reducing agent as it has a tendency to lose electrons.

Question 31. The atomic numbers of three elements A, B and C are 9, 10 and 11 respectively.
1. Which element among these is the most electronegative?
2. Metallic character is the highest for which one?
3. What will be the nature of the compound formed by the combination of A and C?

Answer:

Element Atomic No. Electronic configuration Position in the periodic table
K L M N Period Group
A 9 2 7 2 17
B 10 2 8 2 18
C 11 2 8 1 3 1

1. ‘A’ is a most electronegative element.
2. ‘C’ has the highest metallic character.
3. The compound formed by the combination of A and C will be ionic in nature.

Question 32. The atomic numbers of three elements A, B, and C are 3,11 and 19 respectively.
1. Mention the group where the elements are placed in Mendeleev’s periodic table.
2. Metallic character is the highest for which one?
3. What is the nature of the compound formed in the reaction of B and Cl2?

Answer:

Element Atomic No. Electronic configuration Position in Mendeleev’s table
K L M N Period    Group
A 3 2 1 2 IA
B 11 2 8 1 3 IA
C 19 2 8 8 1 4 IA

1. The elements belong to Gr-1A of Mendeleev’s periodic table.
2. Element ‘C has the highest metallic character.
3. The compound formed by the reaction of B and Cl2 will be ionic in nature.

Question 33. The atomic numbers of the four elements A, B, C, and D are 3, 9/11 and 17 respectively. Which one is the most electropositive element and which one is the most electronegative element?

Answer:

Element Atomic No Electronic configuration  Position in the periodic table
K L M Period Group
A 3 2 1 2 1
B 9 2 7 2 17
C 11 2 8 1 3 1
D 17 2 8 7 3 17

‘C’ is the most electropositive and ‘B’ is the most electronegative element among these elements.

Question 34. The atomic numbers of Elements A, B, C and D are 3, 9,11 and 19 respectively.
1. Which one has the highest reducing property? ‘
2. Electronegativity of which one is the highest?

Answer:

Element Atomic No. Electronic configuration Position in the periodic table
K L M  N Period Group
A 3 2 1 2 1
B 9 2 7 2 17
C 11 2 8 1 3 1
D 19 2 8 8 1 1

 

1. Reducing the property of D is the highest.
2. Electronegativity of B is the highest.

Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. Moving across a period from left to right, the atomic radii of elements
1. Gradually increases
2. Gradually decreases
3. Remains unchanged
4. Initially increases then decreases

Answer: 2. Gradually decreases

Question 2. On going down a group, the atomic radii of elements
1. Gradually decreases
2. Gradually increases
3. Remains unchanged
4. Initially increases then decreases

Answer: 2. Gradually increases

Question 3. In a given period, with decreasing atomic size of elements, the ionisation energy
1. Increases
2. Decreases
3. Remains unchanged
4. Either increases or decreases

Answer: 1. Increases

Question 4. In a given period, with an increase in nuclear charge of the atom of an element, the ionisation energy
1. Decreases
2. Increases
3. Remains unchanged
4. Either increases or decreases

Answer: 2. Increases

Question 5. The unit of electronegativity is
1. eV
2. erg
3. dyne
4. It is a unitless quantity

Answer: 4. It is a unitless quantity

Question 6. In a given period, the electronegativity is minimum for the elements of
1. Group-1
2. Group-2
3. Group-14
4. Group-17

Answer: 1. Group-1

Question 7. In a given period, the electronegativity is maximum for the elements of the group
1. 16
2. 17
3. 18
4. 14

Answer: 2. 17

Question 8. In a given period, with an increase in the atomic size of an element, its electronegativity will
1. Increase
2. Decrease
3. Increases or decrease
4. Remain unchanged

Answer: 2. Decrease

Question 9. For the elements of 2nd period, the correct order of atomic radii is
1. B > C > N > 0
2. B > N > C > 0
3. B > 0 > N > C
4. N > 0 > B > C

Answer: 1. B > C > N > 0

Question 10. The correct order of atomic radii for alkali metals is
1. Na < Rb < K < Cs
2. Na < K < Rb < Cs
3. K < Na < Cs < Rb
4. Na < Cs < K < Rb

Answer: 2. Na < K < Rb < Cs

Question 11. The least electronegative non-radioactive element is
1. Na
2. K
3. Rb
4. Cs

Answer: 4. Cs

Question 12. For the elements of 2nd period, the correct order of ionisation energy is
1. B < C < N >0
2. B < C < O < N
3. C < B < N > 0
4. N > C < B < 0

Answer: 1. B < C < N >0

Question 13. The correct order of ionisation energy for group-1 elements is
1. Li > K < Rb > Na
2. Li > Na > Rb > K
3. Li > Na > K > Rb
4. Na < Li > Rb > K

Answer: 3. Li > Na > K > Rb

Question 14. The correct order of electronegativity for the following element is
1. Li < Be < C < B
2. Li <Be < B < C
3. Li < B > Be > C
4. Be > Li < B < C

Answer: 2. Li <Be < B < C

Question 15. The correct order of reducing power of the elements in 3rd period is
1. Al < Si > P > S
2. Al > Si > S > P
3. Al > Si > P > S
4. Si < Al > S < P

Answer: 3. Al > Si > P > S

Question 16. The correct order of oxidising power of the halogens is
1. F > Br > Cl > I
2. Cl > F > Br > 1
3. Cl < F < Br < I
4. F > Cl > Br > I

Answer: 4. F > Cl > Br > I

Question 17. Most electronegative element is
1. 0
2. CL
3. F
4. Ne

Answer: 3. F

Question 18. Which one is more electronegative?
1. Na
2. K
3. Rb
4. Cs

Answer: 1. Na

Question 19. Which one of the following has the highest reducing ability?
1. K
2. Na
3. Li
4. Cs

Answer: 4. Cs

Question 20. Which halogen element has the least electronegativity?
1. F
2. Cl
3. Br
4. I

Answer: 4. I

Question 21. Which one is not a periodic property?
1. Oxidising property
2. Reducing property
3. Radioactivity
4. Atomic radius

Answer: 3. Radioactivity

Question 22. Which one of the following has the highest atomic radius?
1. K
2. H
3. Li
4. Na

Answer: 1. K

Question 23. The most oxidising element in second period of the periodic table is
1. F
2. Cl
3. Be
4. O

Answer: 1. F

Question 24. Which of the following alkali metals has the highest atomic radius?
1. Li
2. Na
3. Rb
4. Cs

Answer: 4. Cs

Question 25. Which of the following indicates the atomic number of a Gr-!A element?
1. 13
2. 17
3. 11
4. 10

Answer: 3. 11

Question 26. Which one of the following has the least electronegativity?
1. Ca
2. Mg
3. Sr
4. Ba

Answer: 4. Ba

Question 27. The correct order of reducing power is
1. Na < Al < Si < Mg
2. Na < Mg < Al < Si
3. Si < Al < Na < Mg
4. Si < Al < Mg < Na

Answer: 4. Si < Al < Mg < Na

Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements Answer In Brief:

Question 1. What is meant by ‘periodicity of elements’?
Answer:

‘Periodicity of elements’:

The recurrence of properties of the elements at definite intervals when arranged in increasing order of their atomic numbers is called the periodicity of elements.

Question 2. In the case of the 4th period, after how many elements are properties repeated?
Answer: After 18 elements, in the 19th element properties are repeated.

Question 3. What is meant by the term ‘atomic radius? Classify atomic radius.
Answer: It is the distance between the centre of the nucleus and the outermost orbit of an atom. Atomic radius is classified as:
1. Covalent radius,
2. Metallic radius and
3. Van der Waals’ radius.

Question 4. Define metallic radius.
Answer:

Metallic radius:

Half of the distance between the nuclei of two adjacent metal atoms in a metallic crystal is called the metallic radius.

Question 5. What is van der Waals’ radius?
Answer: Half of the distance between the nuclei of two non-bonded neighbouring atoms of two adjacent molecules of the same substance in solid state is known as van der Waals’ radius.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Periodic Table And Periodicity In The Properties Of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements VanderWaal's And Covalent Radii
Question 6. Arrange van der Waals’ radius, metallic radius and covalent radius in decreasing order of their values.
Answer: The decreasing order of the three atomic radii is as follows: van der Waals’ radius > metallic radius > covalent radius.

Question 7. The elements of which group in a given period of the periodic table have the largest atomic radii?
Answer: The elements of group 1 in a given period of the periodic table have the largest atomic radii.

Question 8. Whose atomic radius is smaller—Li or F?
Answer: Atomic radius of F is smaller.

Question 9. Which of the following has the smaller atom — Mg and Al?
Answer: Atoms of Al are smaller than that of Mg.

Question 10. Arrange Be, Na, Ar, S in order of atomic radius.
Answer: Ar > Na > S > Be .

Question 11. Arrange Al, Mg, Cl, Na, P, S and Si in decreasing order of their atomic radii.
Answer: Decreasing order of atomic radii: Nai > Mg > Al > Si > P > S > Cl.

Question 12. How does ionisation energy change across a period?
Answer: From left to right, across a period, the ionisation energy of elements gradually increases.

Question 13. The elements of which group in a given period of the periodic table have the lowest ionisation energy?
Answer: The elements of group 1 in a given period of the periodic table have the lowest ionisation energy.

Question 14. Name the element with highest ionisation energy.
Answer: Helium (He)’.

Question 15. Name the element with the lowest ionisation energy.
Answer: Caesium.

Question 16. Arrange the following elements in increasing order of ionisation energy—Li, Rb, K and Na.
Answer: Rb < K < Na < Li.

Question 17. What is the relation between atomic radii and electronegativity of the elements in a period?
Answer: Smaller the atomic radii of elements in a period, greater will be the electronegativity.

Question 18. Arrange F, Cl, Br and I in decreasing order of electronegativity.
Answer: Decreasing order of electronegativity: F > Cl > Br > I.

Question 19. How does the electronegativity of the Gr-1 elements change from top to bottom?
Answer: From top to bottom of group 1, electronegativity gradually decreases.

Question 20. Mention the position of the most electronegative element in the periodic table.
Answer: The most electronegative element F belongs to the 2nd period and Gr-17 in the periodic table.

Question 21. Arrange Na, Mg, Al, Cl and P is increasing order of electronegativity.
Answer: Na < Mg < Al < P < Cl.

Question 22. Arrange the following elements in increasing order of electronegativity—Na, O, N, F.
Answer: Na < N < 0 < F.

Question 23. Arrange Li, Be, B, N in decreasing order of electronegativity.
Answer: N > B > Be > Li.

Question 24. What is the relation between ionisation energy and electronegativity?
Answer: The ionisation energy of an element increases with the increase in electronegativity.

Question 25. What is the relation between ionisation energy and the reducing property of an element?
Answer: Lower the ionisation energy of an element, the stronger will be its reducing power.

Question 26. What is the relation between electronegativity and oxidising property of an element?
Answer: Higher the electronegativity of an element, the stronger will be its oxidising power.

Question 27. An element A is positioned in group 13 of the periodic table. What is the formula of its chloride?
Answer: The valency of all elements of group 13 is 3. Hence, the formula of the chloride of element A will be ACI3.

Question 28. Which elements among the halogens exhibit highest and lowest metallic property?
Answer: Among the halogens, iodine exhibits highest metallic properties while fluorine exhibits the lowest metallic properties.

Question 29. Arrange Si, Mg, P, Al, Na, S and Cl in increasing order of their oxidising power.
Answer: Increasing order of oxidising power: Na < Mg < Al < Si < P < S < Cl.

Question 30. Arrange Na/ K, Rb and Cs in increasing order of electro-positivity.
Answer: Increasing order of electro-positivity: Na < K < Rb < Cs.

Question 31. Elements of which group in the periodic table has the highest oxidising power?
Answer: Elements of group 17 of the periodic table have the highest oxidising power among the elements of the corresponding period.

Question 32. Name the strongest oxidising agent of 2nd period.
Answer: Fluorine (F) is the strongest oxidising agent of 2nd period.

Question 33. Name the element with highest reducing ability of Gr-1 in the long form of the periodic table.
Answer: Lithium (Li).

Question 34. Arrange the halogens in increasing order of reducing power.
Answer: F < Cl < Br < I.

Question 35. Arrange in decreasing order of reducing property—K, Na, Li, Rb.
Answer: Rb < K < Na> Li.

Question 36. Arrange Cl, Br, I, F in increasing order of oxidising property.
Answer: I < Br < Cl < F.

Question 37. Arrange in decreasing order of oxidising property—Al, O, F, Cl.
Answer: F > O > Cl > Al.

Question 38. Among Na, K, O and N which one is the strongest oxidising agent and strongest reducing agent?
Answer: Strongest oxidising agent is O and strongest reducing agent is K.

Question 39. Give an example of a halogen that has reducing property.
Answer: Iodine.

Question 40. Arrange the following elements in increasing order of metallic character- 11 Na, K, Rb, Cs and 0 Br, F, Cl, I.
Answer: Na < K < Rb < Cs and 0 F < Cl < Br < I

Question 41. Arrange the following in increasing order of metallic character—Mg, Na, Al, S, Si, Cl, P.
Answer: Cl < S < P < Si < Al < Mg < Na.

Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. _________is not a periodic property of elements.
Answer: Radioactivity

Question 2. In a given period the ______ have the smallest atomic radii.
Answer: Halogens

Question 3. The atomic radii of noble gases in a given period is ________ than the atomic radii of halogen atoms.
Answer: Greater

Question 4. The minimum energy required to remove the most loosely bound electron in the outermost orbit of the atom of an element is known as ________ energy of the element.
Answer: Ionisation

Question 5. The electronegativity of elements is measured in ______ scale.
Answer: Pauling

Question 6. The element _________ is the strongest oxidising agent.
Answer: Fluorine

Question 7. The higher the _________ of an element, the stronger will be its oxidising power.
Answer: Electronegativity

Question 8. Noble gases being ________ their covalent radii cannot be measured.
Answer: Mono-atomic

Question 9. The greater the tendency of an element to accept an electron greater will be its property and the greater the tendency of an element to release an electron, the greater will be its _______ property.
Answer: Oxidising, reducing

Question 10. The atomic radius of Al is ________ than SI.
Answer: Greater

Question 11. The ionisation potential of oxygen is _______ than that of nitrogen.
Answer: Less

Question 12. The ________ power of Na is less than that of Si.
Answer: Oxidising

Question 13. The reducing power of caesium is _______ than that of rubidium.
Answer: More

Question 14. The magnetic property of elements is not a ________ property.
Answer: Periodic

Question 15. Across a period from left to right atomic radius of elements gradually _______
Answer: Decreases

Question 16. Among all elements, atomic radius is the least in the case of _______
Answer: Hydrogen

Question 17. Among Al, S, Si and P, element with the highest electronegativity is _________
Answer: S

Question 18. The most reactive non-metal is _______
Answer: Fluorine

Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements Topic B Chemical Periodicity Of Elements State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. A covalent radius is always greater than a metallic radius.
Answer: False

Question 2. The correct order of atomic size is— F < Cl < Br < I < At
Answer: False

Question 3. The greater the size of an atom of an element, the greater will be its electronegativity.
Answer: False

Question 4. In the measurement of the electronegativity of different elements by the Pauling scale, the electronegativity of hydrogen is taken as 2.1.
Answer: True

Question 5. The increasing order of electropositivity is Na < K < Rb < Cs
Answer: True

Question 6. Mendeleev emphasized mainly on chemical and physical properties of elements while constructing the periodic table.
Answer: True

Question 7. Down a group atomic size of an element gradually decreases.
Answer: False

Question 8. Ionisation energy decreases with an increase in atomic size.
Answer: True

Question 9. Down a group metallic character decreases and oxidising power increases.
Answer: False

Question 10. Across a period, from left to right oxidising property decreases.
Answer: False

Question 11. Halogen elements are strong reducing agents.
Answer: False

Question 12. Order of reducing power— F > Cl > Br > I.
Answer: False

Question 13. If the number of electrons in the valence shell is 3, then the position of element in the long form of periodic table will be in group 13.
Answer: True

Periodic Table and Periodicity in the Properties of Elements Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Columns:

Question 1.

Column A Column B
Transition element 1. He
Coinage metal 2. H2
 Inert gas 3. Fe
 Rogue element 4. Ag

Answer:
Transition element:  3. Fe
Coinage metal: 4. Ag
Inert gas:  1. He
Rogue element: 2. H2

Question 2.

Column A     Column B
Alkaline earth metal 1. Te
Chalcogen 2. Rb
Representative element 3. Xe
Bridge element 4. Ra

Answer:
Alkaline earth metal: 4. Ra
Chalcogen: 1. Te
Representative element: 2. Rb
Bridge element: 3. Xe

Question 3.

Column A Column B
Highest electronegativity 1. Fe
Highest reducing power among group-1 elements 2. F
Variable oxidation state 3. He
Highest  ionisation energy 4. Cs

Answer:
Highest electronegativity:  2. F
Highest reducing power among group-1 elements: 4. Cs
Variable oxidation state: 1. Fe
Highest  ionisation energy: 3. He

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic A Electronic Concept of Valency, Ionic Bonding, and Properties of Ionic Compounds Synopsis:

The force of attraction which holds two of more constituents (atoms, ions, etc.) together in different chemical species is known as a chemical bond. It is formed either by losing or gaining electrons or by sharing pairs of electrons.

Octet rule: To attain chemical stability, an atom tends to acquire stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas, i.e., tends to attain 8 electrons in its outermost shell either by gaining or losing electrons or by sharing pairs of electrons. This tendency to acquire 8 electrons in the outermost shell of the atoms is called octet rule. There are many compounds where the constituent atoms do not follow the octet rule.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Notes

Duplet rule: The elements near helium (H, Li, Be ) in the periodic table try to attain the stable electronic configuration of He by gaining, losing or sharing electrons in their outermost shells. This tendency to acquire 2 electrons in the outermost shell of atoms is called duplet rule.

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

Electrovalency: To achieve stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas, some atoms completely give up one or more electrons from their outermost shell to form stable cations while some other atoms gain these electrons to form stable anions.

These two oppositely charged ions then combine together through the electrostatic force of attraction to form chemical compounds. The capacity of the elements for such chemical combination is known as electrovalency or ionic valency.

The bond formed between the atoms due to electrovalence is called an electrovalent bond or ionic bond and the compound formed in this way is called electrovalent or ionic compound.

Characteristics of ionic compounds: Ionic compounds do not exist as discrete molecules. They are solid crystalline substances with high melting and boiling points. They do not conduct electricity in solid state but are good conductors in a molten state or in an aqueous solution. Ionic compounds are soluble in polar solvents and react very fast in solution.

The term ‘molecular mass’ is not applicable for ionic compounds as they do not exist in molecular form. Instead, the formula mass of these compounds is determined. For covalent compounds, both molecular and formula mass are the same.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Notes

In NaCI crystal, a large number of Na+ and Cl ions remain closely packed by a strong electrostatic force of attraction. This leads to the formation of stable three-dimensional crystal lattices.

Electron structure of NaCI:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Electron Structure Of NaCl

Electron structure of CaO:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Electron Structure Of CaO

Electron structure of MgCI:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of MgCl2

Examples of electrovalent compounds include calcium oxide, magnesium chloride, sodium fluoride, lithium hydride, etc. In it, the outermost shell of each constituent atom contains one electron.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic A Electronic Concept of Valency, Ionic Bonding, and Properties of Ionic Compounds Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. Why do atoms of different elements react With each other?

Answer: The electronic configuration of the noble gases are very stable. To attain the electronic configuration of the nearest noble gases, atoms of different elements react with each other.

Question 2. Define chemical bond.

Answer:

Chemical bond:

The force of attraction which holds two or more constituents (atoms, ions etc.) together, different chemical species is .called chemical bond. It is formed either by losing or gaining electrons or by sharing pairs of electrons by atoms.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 3. What is the octet rule?

Answer:

Octet rule:

To attain chemical stability, an atom tends to acquire stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas either by gaining or losing electrons or by sharing pairs of electrons of its outermost shell. This tendency to acquire 8 electrons in the outermost shell of an atom is called the octet rule.

Question 4. state the limitations of octet rule.

Answer:

Octet rule has certain limitations. These are:

1. In some compounds, the central atom has more or less than 8 electrons, yet the molecules are highly stable. The Octet rule fails to explain this.
2. Octet rule is based on the stability and inertness of noble gases. But some noble gases specifically Xe form compounds with oxygen and fluorine.
3. This rule cannot explain the relative stability of different molecules.

Question 5. The octet rule is not always followed in case of ionic compounds. Give examples.

Answer:

The octet rule is not always followed in case of ionic compounds

The stability of ionic compounds cannot be always explained by octet rule. In case of transition metals, it is observed that octet rule is not followed. For example, in FeCl2, Fe2+ ion has 14 electrons in its valence shell, and in FeCI3, the Fe3+ ion has 13 electrons in its valence shell.

In both cases, octet rule is violated. Again, in LiH, h u+ ion and H~ ion have 2 electrons in their valence shells. Hence, octet rule is not valid for all ionic compounds.

Question 6. Show with an example that compounds can be formed without fulfillment of octet of the corresponding ions.

Answer: The stability of all ionic compounds can not be explained with the concept of sharing 8 electrons in the valence shell of the constituting ions, or the octet rule, e.g., in LiH the constituting ions Li and HΘ both have 2 electrons in their valence shell.

Moreover, in case of elements showing variable electrovalency, especially in transition metals octes rule is not obeyed in many instances. E.g., in FeCl2 or FeCI3, octet rule is not obeyed in Fe2+ and Fe3+.

Question 7. What is duplet rule?

Answer:

Duplet rule:

To attain chemical stability an atom of an element nearer to He (H, Li, Be) tends to acquire stable electronic configuration like He either by gaining or losing electrons or by sharing electron pairs of its outermost shell. This tendency to acquire 2 electrons in the outermost shell of an atom is called duplet rule.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 8. Which type of chemical bond is formed by complete transfer of electron from one atom to another atom? Explain with an example.

Answer:
1. Ionic bond or electrovalent bond is formed by complete transfer of electron from one atom to another atom.

2. Magnesium (electronic configuration: 2, 8, 2) loses 2 valence electrons to form an Mg2+ ion and attains the stable electronic configuration of nearest inert gas. On the otherhand oxygen (electronic configuration: 2, 6) accepts these two electrons to form O2- ion and attains the stable electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Complete Transfer Of Electron From One Atom To Another Atom

Therefore when Mg and O atoms combine, the former transfers its valence electron to the latter resulting in the formation of Mg2+ and O2- respectively. The two ions are then held together by strong electrostatic forces of attraction to form MgO.

Question 9. Define electrovalency.

Answer:

Electrovalency:

To achieve the stable electronic configuration of nearest noble gas, some atoms give up one or more electrons from the outermost shell completely to form stable cations while some other atoms gain these electrons to form stable anions. These two types of oppositely charged ions combine together through electrostatic force of attraction to form chemical compounds. The capacity of the elements for such chemical combination is known as electrovalency.

Question 10. How is the electrovalency of an atom measured? Explain with example.

Answer:
1. The number of electrons gained or released by an atom during the formation of an ionic compound is measured as the electrovalency of that atom.
2. For example, during formation of NaCl, a Na – atom releases one electron to form a Na ion while a Cl – atom accepts that electron and converts it to Cl ion. Hence, the electrovalency of both sodium and chlorine in NaCl is 1.

Question 11. Ionic bonds are not real bonds- Justify the statement.

Answer:

Ionic bonds are not real bonds:

In covalent compounds, two atoms share one or more pairs of electrons with each other to form bonds having definite directions. But, in electrovalent compounds, the bond between two atoms is formed due to the strong electrostatic force of attraction between the cations and the anions. Here, no electron pair is shared by the involved ions. That is why ionic bonds are not considered as real bond.

Question 12. State two important characteristics of ionic bond.

Answer:

An ionic bond shows the following characteristics:

1. An ionic bond is formed between atoms of an electropositive and an electronegative element.
2. Ionic bond is in fact an electrostatic force of attraction between oppositely charged ions. So, sometimes, it is not considered, as a real bond.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 13. Write down some properties of ionic compound.

Answer:

Some properties of ionic compound:

1. Ionic compounds form crystals of definite geometrical shape.
2. The melting and boiling points .of ionic compounds are generally very high.
3. Ionic bond is non-directional in nature.
4. Ionic compounds do not exhibit isomerism.
5. Ionic compounds do not conduct electricity in the solid state, but in the molten state or in solution in a suitable solvent (like water) conduct electricity.
6. Ionic compounds generally dissolve in polar solvents.

Question 14. Why any ionic compound possesses high boiling point and melting point?

Answer: In ionic compounds, the oppositely charged ions are held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction. The mutual attraction between large number of oppositely charged ions results in the formation of large crystal lattices. Separation of ions from these crystal lattices requires large amount of energy. Hence, ionic compounds possess high melting and boiling points.

Question 15. Discuss the physical state of ionic compounds.

Answer:

The physical state of ionic compounds:

At normal temperature and pressure all ionic compounds are crystalline solids. This is because the oppositely charged ions are held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction which results in the formation of regular three-dimensional network called crystal lattice. Ionic compounds do not exist as discrete molecules.

Question 16. Why are ionic compounds hard in nature?

Answer: In ionic compounds, large number of oppositely charged ions are held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction which results in the formation of large crystal lattices. The ions remain closely packed in the crystal and the intermolecular space between them is very small. The hardness of an ionic compound is due to the aggregation of large number of ions in a very small space.

Question 17. Ionic compounds conduct electricity in molten state or in aqueous solutions but are non-conductors in the solid state. Explain with reason.

Answer: In solid state, the cations and anions in an ionic compound are held together by a strong electrostatic force of attraction. Hence, the ions are immobile and the compound fails to conduct electricity in solid state.

However, when the compound is in a molten state or is dissolved in water, the crystal lattice breaks, and the ions are separated. Due to presence of such mobile ions, ionic compounds conduct electricity in a molten state or in an aqueous solution.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 18. Discuss with example the solubility of ionic compounds.

Answer: Ionic compounds are generally soluble in polar solvents (such as water), but are insoluble in nonpolar solvents (such as CH2, CCI4, benzene, etc). For example, NaCI is soluble in water but insoluble in benzene.

Question 19. Why does the reactions involving ionic compounds occur at a faster rate?

Answer: Reactions of ionic compounds generally take place in solutions. In solution, the ionic compounds dissociate to form ions that take part in the reaction. Due to the participation of the ions, the reactions occur at a faster rate.

Question 20. Explain why ionic compounds are soluble in polar solvents.

Answer: When an ionic compound is dissolved in a polar solvent, the negatively charged end of the polar solvent attracts the cations present in the crystal lattice of the solid. Similarly the positive end of the solvent attracts the anions.

This attraction by the solvent molecules decreases the force of attraction between cations and anions in the crystal lattice. Hence the dissociated ions are separated and are surrounded by solvent molecules in solution to get stabilised. This is why ionic compounds are soluble in polar solvents.

Question 21. Why are ionic compounds insoluble in non-polar solvents?

Answer: The molecules of a non-polar solvent cannot attract the ions of an ionic compound effectively. Hence, ionic compounds do not generally dissociate in non-polar solvent. That is why ionic compounds are generally insoluble in non-polar solvents.

Question 22. A compound has high boiling and melting point. It does not conduct electricity in solid state but is a good conductor in solution. Which type of bond is present in the compound? What is the nature of the constituent particles of the compound?

Answer:
1. The compound is an ionic or electrovalent compound. So, ionic bond is present in it.
2. The compound is composed of cations and anions.

Question 23. Describe the formation of NaCI.

Answer:

The formation of NaCl

Electronic configuration of Na-atom is K = 2, L = 8, M = 1, and that of chlorine is K= 2, L = 8, M = 7. When sodium reacts with chlorine, 1 electron from the outermost shell of a sodium atom is transferred to a chlorine atom. As a result, Na+ and Cl–  ions are formed. These ions combine by the electrostatic force of attraction to from NaCl.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of NaCl molecule

Question 24. Why the bond of sodium chloride can not be expressed as Na — Cl?

Answer: Na-atom loses its valence electron to form Na+ cation and  Clatom accepts it to form Clanion. Na+and Cl–  ions are then held together by strong electrostatic forces of attraction to form the electrovalent compound NaCI. Here no electron pair is formed and this force of attraction has no definite direction. So it can be said that the bond of sodium chloride can not be expressed as Na—Cl.

Question 25. Describe the nature of bond present in CaO.

Answer:

The nature of bond present in CaO:

Electronic configuration of Ca-atom is K= 2, L = 8, M = 8, N = 2 and that of oxygen is K = 2, L = 6 . When calcium reacts with oxygen, Ca-atom releases 2 electrons from its outermost shell to form Ca2+ ion and acquire the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas Ar [K = 2, L = 8, M = 8).

Similarly, oxygen atom accepts those electrons to form O2- ion and attains the electronic configuration of neon [K = 2, L= 8). Ca2+ ions and O2- ions then combine by electrostatic force of attraction to form crystals of CaO. Hence the bond in CaO is ionic.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Nature Of Bond Present In CaO.
Question 26. Describe the formation of MgCI2.

Answer:

The formation of MgCI2

Electronic configuration of Mg-atom is K = 2, L = 8, M = 2, and that of chlorine is K = 2, L = 8, M = 1. When magnesium reacts with chlorine, an Mg-atom releases 2 electrons from its outermost shell to form an Mg2+ ion and acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas Ne (K = 2, L = 8).

On the other hand, two Cl-atoms accept one electron each to form two Cl–  ions, and each Clion attains the electronic configuration of Ar [K= 2, L = 8, M = 8). Mg2+ ions and two Cl ions combine by the electrostatic force of attraction to form MgCI2. In the MgCI2 crystal, Mg2+ and Cl ions are present in 1: 2 ratio.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of MgCl2
Question 27. Describe how NaF is formed?

Answer: Electronic configuration of the Na-atom is K-2, L – 8, M = 1, and that of the F-atom is K = 2, L = 7. When Na reacts with F, a Na-atom releases 1 electron from its outermost shell to form a Na+ ion and acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas Ne {K = 2, L = 8). An F -atom accepts this electron to form F“ ion and attains the electronic configuration of Ne [K = 2, L = 8). These ions combine by the electrostatic force of attraction to form NaF.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of NaF

Question 28. Describe the nature of bond present in LiH.

Answer:

The nature of bond present in LiH:

Electronic configuration of Li-atom is K= 2, L = 1, and that of hydrogen is K = 1, When Li reacts with H, 1 electron is transferred from the outermost shell of Li to the outermost shell of hydrogen. Due to loss of an electron, Li is converted to Li+ ion while hydrogen becomes H ion by accepting the electron.

Both of them attain the electronic configuration of their nearest noble gas helium (K = 2). Oppositely charged Li+ and H ions combine through electrostatic force of attraction to form ionic bond.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of LiH

Question 29. Three elements X, Y, and 2 have atomic numbers 6, 9, and 12 respectively.
1. Which elements among them will form an anion and cation?
2. Which type of bond will be formed between Y and Z when they chemically combine with each other?

Answer:

Element X Y z
Atomic number 6 9 12
Electronic configuration 2,4 2,7 2,8,2

1. Y has only one electron short of the stable electronic configuration of its nearest noble gas. Hence, it will easily form an anion by accepting an electron. Z has two electrons in its outermost orbit. So, it can easily release these two electrons to form a Z2+ cation.

2. Y is an electronegative element and Z is an electropositive element. Hence, the bond formed between Y and Z will be ionic in nature. The electrovalency of Z is 2 and that of Y is 1. Hence the formula of the compound will be  ZY2.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 30. Complete the following table:

Element Na P C
Formula of chloride
Nature of bond
The physical state of chloride

Answer:

Element Na  P C
Formula    of chloride NaCI PCI3,PCI5 CCI4
Nature of bond Ionic Covalent, covalent Covalent
The physical state of chloride Solid Liquid, liquid Liquid


Question 31. Electronic configuration of two elements M and N are 2, 8, 1, and 2,7 respectively. By which type of valency will the atoms combine to form compound? What will be the probable formula of the compound?

Answer:
1. It is obvious from the electronic configurations that element M has a tendency to lose an electron from its valence shell to attain the stable electronic configuration and form M+ cation. On the other hand element, N has the tendency of accepting the electron in its valence shell to attain the stable electronic configuration and form N anion.

Therefore M+ and N ions will held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction and form compound by electrovalency.

2. The probable formula of the compound will be MN.

Question 32. Electronic configuration of two elements A and B are K(2) 1(7) and K(2) L(8) M(2) respectively. By which type of valency they will combine to form the compound? What will be the formula of the compound.

Answer:
1. Element B will lose 2 electrons to attain the stable electronic configuration and form a B cation while two atoms of elements A will accept one electron each for attaining the stable electronic configuration and form two A anions.

These ions will be hold together by strong electrostatic force of attraction to form the compound. Therefore by electrovalency or ionic valency, they will combine to form compound.

2. Formula of the compound will be BA2.

Question 33. Which one between NaCI and CHCL3 will form a white precipitate by reacting with AgNO3?

Answer: NaCI is an ionic compound. Hence it dissociates in aqueous solution to form Na+ and Clions. Due to the presence of free chloride ions in aqueous solution, it reacts with AgNO3 to produce white precipitate of AgCl.

But CHCL3 does not produce chloride ions in aqueous solution. Hence, it will not produce any precipitate when reacted with AgNO3.

Question 34. An element X combines with oxygen to form a compound X2O. If the molten oxide conducts electricity, then
1. In which group of the periodic table does the element X belong to?
2. what will be the nature and formula of the chloride if X combines with chlorine?

Answer: The molten oxide conducts electricity. Hence, the compound X2O is an ionic compound. As O is electronegative, X must be an electropositive element.

1. X should be present in . group IA of Mendeleev’s periodic table.
2. Chlorine is electronegative and X is an electropositive element. Hence, ionic bond will be formed between them. The formula of the compound will be XCI.

Question 35. Sodium is a highly reactive metal which reacts with water violently. Chlorine is also a highly reactive non-metal having strong oxidising property. But the compound NaCI is safely used as common salt. Explain with reason.

Answer: Ions are generally more stable than free atoms. During chemical combination, Na-atom loses one electron to form Na+ ion while Cl – atom easily accepts that electron to form Clion. Both Na+ and Clions have stable electronic configurations of their nearest noble gases.

In case of NaCI, a large number of Na+ and Cl ions aggregate together to form crystals of NaCI. So, free atoms of sodium and chlorine are not present in NaCI and hence the compound is not as much reactive as free sodium and chlorine atoms. Hence, we can safely use NaCI as common salt.

Question 36. When an aqueous solution of NaCI is added to a solution of AgNO3 the reaction takes place at a very fast rate. Explain why.

Answer: In the reaction between NaCI and AgNO3, AgCI is precipitated out. It is insoluble in water as well as in acid. Both NaCI and AgNO3 are ionic compounds. In aqueous solution, both the compounds completely dissociate into ions. These ions react with each other at a very faster rate in the solution. Hence ionic reactions take place rapidly.

\(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{AgNO}_3(a q) \rightarrow \mathrm{Ag}^{+}(a q)+\mathrm{NO}_3^{-}(a q) \\
\mathrm{NaCl}(a q) \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}(a q)+\mathrm{Cl}^{-}(a q) \\
\mathrm{NaCl}(a q)+\mathrm{AgNO}_3(a q) \rightarrow \mathrm{AgCl}^2+\mathrm{NaNO}_3(a q)
\end{gathered}\)


Question 37. Atomic number of two elements A and B are respectively 19 and 17. Which type of compound will be formed between A and B? Justify your answer.

Answer: Electronic configuration of A is K =2, L = 8, M = 8, N = 1, and electronic configuration of B is K = 2, Z. = 8, M = 7.

From the electronic configurations, it can easily be understood that A has a strong tendency to release a single electron from its outermost shell to acquire the stable electronic configuration of Ar. Hence A will easily form A+ ion.

On the other hand, B has only one electron short from the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas. So, it will show strong tendency to accept an electron to form B ion. These ions will bind by electrostatic force of attraction to form an ionic compound AB.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Atomic Number Of Two Elements A and B

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic A Electronic Concept of Valency, Ionic Bonding, and Properties of Ionic Compounds Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. At normal temperatures, ionic compounds exist as
1. Solids
2. Liquids
3. Gases
4. Crystalline solids

Answer: 4. Crystalline solids

Question 2. The solubility of ionic compounds are higher in
1. Water
2. Alcohol
3. Benzene
4. Ether

Answer: 1. Water

Question 3. In aqueous solution, the crystals of ionic solid dissociates to release
1. Molecules
2. Atoms
3. Cations
4. Both cations and anions

Answer: 4. Both cations and anions

Question 4. Which of the following has the highest boiling point?
1. Sugar
2. Naphthalene
3. Wax
4. NaCI

Answer: 4. NaCI

Question 5. Which of the following, though ionic, is insoluble in water?
1. CuSO4
2. CH3COOH
3. NaNO3
4. CaCO3

Answer: 4. CaCO3

Question 6. An example of a polar solvent is
1. Benzene
2. Ether
3. Chloroform
4. Water

Answer: 4. Water

Question 7. Which of the following is not characteristic of an ionic compound?
1. High melting point
2. Electrical conductivity in fused state
3. Consist of oppositely charged ions
4. Constituent ions form crystal lattice fused state

Answer: 4. Constituent ions form crystal lattice fused state

Question 8. The bond formed between the elements of group-1 (except H) and group-17 of the periodic table is
1. Ionic
2. Covalent
3. Coordinate
4. Polar covalent

Answer: 1. Ionic

Question 9. The idea of ionic bond was given by
1. Dalton
2. Lewis
3. Kossel
4. Avogadro

Answer: 3. Kossel

Question 10. The term ‘formula mass’ is applicable for
1. CH4
2. CaCl2
3. H2O
4. CH3COOH

Answer: 2. CaCl2

Question 11. In which of the following compounds, the metal ion has an incomplete octet?
1. LiH
2. NaCI
3. CaO
4. MgCI2

Answer: 1. LiH

Question 12. The electrovalency of Fe in ferrous compounds is
1. 3
2. 1
3. 2
4. 4

Answer: 3. 2

Question 13. An element has 2 electrons in its outermost shell. Which of following statements is correct for the element?
1. The element will form cation
2. The element will form anion
3. The element is capable of forming both cation and anion
4. The element will not form ions

Answer: 1. The element will form cation

Question 14. An element has 6 electrons in its outermost shell. The element will
1. Form cation
2. Form anion
3. Form both cation and anion
4. Not form ions

Answer: 2. Form anion

Question 15. Between Na and Na+, which one has a filled octet?
1. Na
2. Na
3. Both Na and Na
4. None of these

Answer: 2. Na

Question 16. Which one among O, Oand O2- most stable?
1. O
2. O
3. O2-
4. All are of equal stability

Answer: 3. O2-

Question 17. The electronic configuration of Li+ resembles which of the following noble gas?
1. He
2. Ne
3. Ar
4. Kr

Answer: 1. He

Question 18. The electronic theory of valency was proposed by
1. Lewis and Kossel
2. Born and Haber
3. Proust
4. Avogadro

Answer: 1. Lewis and Kossel

Question 19. The nature of bond present in a compound consisting of molecules will be
1. Ionic
2. Electrovalent
3. Covalent
4. Metallic

Answer: 3. Covalent

Question 20. In liquid state, a compound comprised of molecules
1. Is ionic
2. Is electrolytic
3. Conducts electricity
4. Does not conduct electricity

Answer: 4. Does not conduct electricity

Question 21. An ionic compound used in our daily life is
1. Common salt
2. Water
3. Sugar
4. Kerosene

Answer: 1. Common salt

Question 22. The atomic number of elements A, B, and C are respectively (Z- 2), Z, and (Z + 1). If B is a noble gas, the formula of compound formed by A and C will be
1. CA2
2. CA
3. C2A3
4. C2A

Answer: 4. C2A

Question 23. Which of the following electrovalent compounds is least soluble in water?
1. NaCI
2. AgCI
3. NaBr
4. Nal

Answer: 2. AgCI

Question 24. The non-directional bond is
1. Covalent bond
2. Coordinate bond
3. Electrovalent bond
4. All of these

Answer: 3. Electrovalent bond

Question 25. Which one of the following does not conduct electricity?
1. Molten NaOH
2. Molten KOH
3. Solid NaCI
4. Molten NaCI

Answer: 3. Solid NaCI

Question 26. Which one is an ionic compound?
1. HCI
2. CH4
3. MgCI2
4. NH3

Answer: 3. MgCI2

Question 27. If the atomic number of two elements X and Y be 11 and 17 respectively, then the formula of the compound formed with them
1. XY
2. X2Y
3. XY2
4. X2Y3

Answer: 1. XY

Question 28. In the compound LiH, both/Li’ and ‘H’ atom have attained the electronic configuration of the inert gas as in
1. Ar
2. He
3. Ne
4. Kr

Answer: 2. He

Question 29. The values of electronegativity of A and B are 1.2 and 3.5 respectively. What will be the nature of chemical bond formed between them?
1. Covalent
2. Coordinate
3. Metallic bond
4. Ionic bond

Answer: 3. Metallic bond

Question 30. Which of these does not exist in molecular form?
1. CO2
2. CH4
3. NaCl
4. SO2

Answer: 3. NaCl

Question 31. Solid form of which compound is made up of ions?
1. Sodium chloride
2. Hydrogen chloride
3. Naphthalene
4. Glucose

Answer: 1. Sodium chloride

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic A Electronic Concept of Valency, Ionic Bonding, and Properties of Ionic Compounds Answer In Brief:

Question 1. What happens when electricity is passed through an aqueous solution of an ionic compound?
Answer: Electrolysis takes place when electricity is passed through an aqueous solution of an ionic compound, resulting in the formation of new substances at the anode and cathode.

Question 2. Mention the nature of force that operates between constituents of an ionic compound and water molecules in an aqueous solution.
Answer: Electrostatic force of attraction operates between constituents of an ionic compound and water molecules in aqueous solution.

Question 3. If an electron is transferred from one atom to another what will be the nature of valency?
Answer: Transfer of an electron from one atom to another result in electrovalency.

Question 4. Between magnesium chloride and naphthalene, which one conducts electricity in a molten state?
Answer: Magnesium chloride, being an ionic compound, conducts electricity in molten state.

Question 5. In MgCI2, the electronic configuration of the constituent ions resembles which noble gases?
Answer: In MgCI2, electronic configuration of magnesium and chlorine ions resembles the electronic configuration of neon and argon respectively.

Question 6. What are valence electrons?
Answer: The electrons present in the outermost shell of an atom of an element takes part in bond formation. These electrons are known as valence electrons.

Question 7. Who discovered noble gases?
Answer: Scientists Ralley and Ramsay discovered noble gases.

Question 8. Find the formula mass of sodium chloride.
Answer: The formula mass of sodium chloride is (23 + 35.5) = 58.5

Question 9. The atomic number of an element is 12. What type of bond will it form with chlorine?
Answer: It will form electrovalent bond with chlorine.

Question 10. The atomic number of an element is 9. What type of bond will it form with sodium?
Answer: It will form ionic bond with sodium.

Question 11. Name the atom with which the electronic configuration of hydride ion is identical.
Answer: The electronic configuration of the hydride ion is identical with that of a helium atom.

Question 12. What is the similarity between O2- ion, and Ne-atom?
Answer: Both O2- ion and Ne-atom contain 10 electrons and hence they have identical electronic configurations, i.e., they are isoelectronic species.

Question 13. Name an electropositive element that forms both ionic as well as covalent compounds.
Answer: Hydrogen forms both ionic as well as covalent compounds.

Question 14. Write the formula of the compound formed between elements X and Y placed in group 2 and group 17 respectively in periodic table.
Answer: The formula of the compound will be XY2.

Question 15. What is an electrovalent bond?
Answer: The bond formed between the atoms due to electrovalence is called an electrovalent bond or ionic bond.

Question 16. Name an ionic compound in which the electrovalency of both the anion and cation is 3.
Answer: Aluminium nitride (AIN)

Question 17. A metallic element M forms an ionic oxide MO. How many electrons are present in the valence shell of the M- atom?
Answer: The valency of the metal M is 2. Hence it contains 2 electrons in its valence shell.

Question 18. Give example of an ionic compound where the octet rule is not applicable.
Answer: Lithium hydride (LiH).

Question 19. Give example of a stable cation in which octet is not fulfilled.
Answer: Li+.

Question 20. Write down the number of valence electrons of alkali metals and halogens.
Answer: Number of valence electrons in alkali metals and halogens are 1 and 7 respectively.

Question 21. In which type of compound molecule does not exist?
Answer: Ionic compound.

Question 22. How manyelectrons are present in the valence shell of Ca?
Answer: 2 electrons.

Question 23. Which type of chemical bond is present in CaO?
Answer: Ionic bond.

Question 24. Which type of bond is present in CaCl2.
Answer: Ionic bond.

Question 25. Atomic number of an element is 12. which type of compound will be formed by its reaction with chlorine?
Answer: Ionic compound will be formed.

Question 26. Atomic number of an element is 9. Which type of compound will be formed by its reaction with sodium?
Answer: Ionic compound will be formed.

Question 27. Which type of bond will be formed between A (2, 8, 2) and B (2, 8,7)?
Answer: Ionic bond will be formed between A and B.

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic A Electronic Concept of Valency, Ionic Bonding, and Properties of Ionic Compounds Fill In The Blanks:

 

Question 1. Ionic compounds are generally ________ and their crystals have a definite _____ shape.
Answer: Solid, geometrical

Question 2. The crystals of ionic compounds are formed by a large number of ______ and ________
Answer: Cations, anions

Question 3. Ionic compounds do not conduct electricity in ______ state.
Answer: Solid

Question 4. Ionic compounds conduct electricity in ________ state or in _______ solution.
Answer: Fused, aqueous

Question 5. Ionic compounds are soluble in _______ Solvents such as ________
Answer: Polar, water

Question 6. Ionic compounds are generally __________ in organic solvents.
Answer: Insoluble

Question 7. An element which forms a cation to achieve the electronic configuration of neon is _______
Answer: Sodium

Question 8. In ______ bonds, the particles are held together by electrostatic force of attraction.
Answer: Ionic

Question 9. An atom gains _______ by either accepting or losing electron(s).
Answer: Stability

Question 10. An ionic bond is formed between a _______ and a _______element.
Answer: Metallic,non-metallic

Question 11. Two elements form ionic bond with each other when the difference in electronegativity between the elements is _______
Answer: High

Question 12. An ionic compound is formed when a stable three-dimensional _______ is formed.
Answer: Crystal

Question 13. Electrovalency of Cu in cupric salts is _______
Answer: 2

Question 14. Greater the magnitude of the _______ energy of an ionic compound, the greater will be the ________ of its crystal.
Answer: Lattice, stability

Question 15. In ionic compounds, the ionisation potential of the element forming cation should be ________
Answer: Low

Question 16. In ionic compounds, the electronegativity of the elementforming anion should be _______
Answer: High

Question 17. In CaO, the charge of calcium ion is _______
Answer: 2+

Question 18. In LiH, the cation is _______ and the anion is ________
Answer: Li+, H–  

Question 19. _______ bond is not considered as a real bond.
Answer: Ionic

Question 20. In 1894, Scientist _______ discovered existence of Argon gas.
Answer: Lord Raley

Question 21. Except He, all the inert gases contain ________ electrons in their valence shell.
Answer: 8

Question 22. In _______ compound bond means the electrostatic force of attraction.
Answer: Ionic

Question 23. Ionic bonds are formed between _______ and _______ elements.
Answer: Metalic,non-metallic

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic A Electronic Concept of Valency, Ionic Bonding, and Properties of Ionic Compounds State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Li, Be and H obeys the octet rule.
Answer: False

Question 2. Sodium chloride All the inert gas elements are chemically inert.
Answer: False

Question 3. Duplet rule is only applicable to H, Li and Be.
Answer: True

Question 4. In ionic compounds, there is no existence of independent molecules.
Answer: True

Question 5. In electrovalency, atoms complete their octet or duplet by sharing electron pairs.
Answer: False

Question 6. Ionic compounds undergo very fast reactions in solution.
Answer: True

Question 7. Crystal lattice is found in ionic compounds.
Answer: True

Question 8. Molecular mass can be calculated for ionic compounds.
Answer: False

Question 9. BN (boron nitride) is an ionic compound.
Answer: False

Question 10. Ionic bonds are real bonds as they can form crystal lattice.
Answer: False

Question 11. An example of a compound with incomplete octet is BF3.
Answer: True

Question 12. Ionic compounds are hard as the intermolecular spaces between the constituent particles are very small.
Answer: True

Question 13. Formation of ionic bond is favoured by high electron gain enthalpy of the atom that forms the anion.
Answer: True

Question 14. Ionic compounds are good conductors of electricity in solid state as the crystal lattice of ionic compounds contain free electrons.
Answer: False

Question 15. Ionic bonds are directional and hence they can show isomerism.
Answer: False

Question 16. Distilled water can conduct electricity.
Answer: False

Question 17. Individual molecules of ionic compounds do not exist.
Answer: True

Question 18. Isomerism isnotobserved in ioniccompounds.
Answer: True

Question 19. Na and Cl atoms are combined to each other by ionic valency.

Answer: True

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic B Covalent Bonding And Properties Of Covalent Compounds Synopsis:

 

Covalency: In order to achieve the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas, equal number of electron(s) from the outermost shells of two atoms form one or more electron pairs which are evenly shared between the two atoms. The capacity of the elements for this type of chemical combination is called covalency. The bond formed between the atoms due to covalency is called a covalent bond and the compound formed in this way is called a covalent compound.

Types of covalent bonds: Covalent bonds of three types. The atoms involved in the formation of covalent bonds may share 1, 2, or 3 electron pairs equally with each other to form a single bond, double bond, and triple bond respectively.

Characteristics of covalent compounds: Covalent compounds exist as discrete molecules. These compounds may be solid, liquid or gas and have low melting and boiling points. They usually do not conduct electricity. Covalent compounds are generally soluble in non-polar solvents and the rate of the reactions involving covalent molecules are very slow.

Lewis-dot diagram is a simple representation of a covalent molecule. Here, each electron is represented by a dot, and each bond is represented by a pair of dots in between the two atoms involved in bond formation. In the Lewis-dot diagram only the bonded electron pairs are shown.

H2, N2, O2, Cl2 etc., are examples of covalent element while NH3, CO2, CH4, HF etc, are examples of covalent compounds. Single bond is present in the molecules of H2, F2, HF, HCI, H2O, NH3, CH4, etc. Molecules like CO2, C2H4, O2, etc., contain double bond while triple bond is present in areN2, C2, H2, etc.

The Lewis-dot diagram of O2 molecule does not agree with the experimental observations regarding the structure of O2. Hence, O2 is not represented by Lewis-dot structure. In fact no such Lewis-dot structure of O2 is possible which can describe the experimental observations.

 

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic B Covalent Bonding And Properties Of Covalent Compounds Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is covalency?

Answer:

Covalency:

In order to achieve the electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas, equal number of electron(s) from the outermost shells of two atoms form one or more electron pairs which are evenly shared by the two atoms. The capacity of the elements for this type of chemical combination is called covalency.

Question 2. What are covalent bonds and covalent compounds?

Answer: The bond formed between the atoms by the mutual sharing of electron pairs is called covalent bond and the compound containing covalent bonds is called a covalent compound.

Question 3. Classify covalent molecules.

Answer:

Covalent molecules are of two types. These are:

1. Covalent elementary molecules: The atoms of the same element are covalently bonded with each other to form covalent elementary molecules. H2, N2, O2 F2, etc., are examples of this type.
2. Covalent compound molecule: The atoms of different elements are covalently bonded with each other to form covalent compound molecules. NH3, CO2, HCl, and CH4 are examples of this type.

Question 4. How is a covalency covalent molecule?

Answer: During the formation of a covalent molecule, the number of electron pairs formed by an atom of an element is its covalency. For example, in methane (CH4) C-atom forms four electron pairs with 4 hydrogen atoms. Hence, covalency of carbon in methane is 4.

Question 5. Glucose is a solid but methane is a gas though both are covalent compounds. Explain.

Answer:

Glucose is a solid but methane is a gas though both are covalent compounds

The force of attraction between the molecules of a covalent compound is very weak and the attractive force increases with an increase in molecular mass.

The molecular mass of glucose is much higher than that of methane and hence the force of attraction between glucose molecules is stronger than that between methane molecules. Hence, glucose is solid at room temperature but methane Is a gas.

Question 6. Explain why naphthalene is insoluble in water but readily dissolves in benzene.

Answer: Covalent molecules are generally insoluble in polar solvents and soluble in non-polar solvents. Water is a polar solvent while benzene is a nonpolar solvent. Thus, naphthalene being a covalent compound dissolves in benzene but is insoluble in water.

Question 7. An aqueous solution of sodium chloride conducts electricity, but aqueous solution of sugar or glucose does not conduct electricity. Explain why.

Answer:

An aqueous solution of sodium chloride conducts electricity, but aqueous solution of sugar or glucose does not conduct electricity.

Sodium chloride (NaCI) being an ionic compound dissociates in aqueous solution to form Na+ and Clions. These ions are responsible for conducting electricity and hence NaCI is a good conductor of electricity in aqueous solution. On the other hand, sugar or glucose being covalent compound does not dissociate in solution and hence they do not conduct electricity.

Question 8. Though HCI is a covalent compound, its aqueous solution conducts electricity. Why?

Answer:

Though HCI is a covalent compound, its aqueous solution conducts electricity.

The electronegativity of chlorine is greater than that of hydrogen. As a result, the electron pair shared between H and Cl-atom in HCI molecule shifts more towards Cl-atom. Due to this, a partial positive charge develops on H-atom and a partial negative charge develops on Chatom.

Water is also a polar molecule in which H-atom is partially positively charged and O-atom is partially negatively charged. Due to force of attraction between the opposite charges of HCI and water molecules, HCI ionises to form H3O+ and Clions. As a result, of the formation of these ions in solution, HCI conducts electricity.

Question 9. Why are the melting and boiling point of covalent compounds generally low?

Answer: The intermolecular force acting between the molecules of covalent compounds is very weak. Hence, less energy is required to separate the molecules. So, covalent compounds generally have low melting and boiling point.

Question 10. The reactions involving covalent molecules are slow. Explain with reason.

Answer:

The reactions involving covalent molecules are slow.

In covalent molecules, the atoms are bonded by strong covalent bonds. The cleavage of these bonds requires sufficient energy, time and sometimes catalysts. That is why, reactions involving covalent molecules take place slowly. For example— fermentation of glucose to ethanol takes almost 3 days to complete.

Question 11.  Cl2 molecules are formed but Ne2 molecules do not exist. Explain why.

Answer:

Cl2 molecules are formed but Ne2 molecules do not exist.

Cl-atom has 7 electrons in its outermost shell. Two chlorine atoms contribute one electron each to form a commonly shared pair and in this way, both of them complete their octets.

The sharing of the electron pair results in the formation of Cl2 molecule. On the other hand, Ne-atoms already have filled octet and hence do not show any tendency to combine with each other to form Ne2 molecule.

Question 12. What is polar covalent bond?

Answer:

Polar covalent bond?:

When a covalent bond is formed between two atoms of different elements, due to the difference in electronegativity between the atoms the shared electron pair is attracted more towards the atom with greater electronegativity.

As a result the more electronegative atom becomes partially negatively charged. On the other hand, the less electronegative element develops a partial positive charge. This charge difference between the atoms causes polarity in the covalent bond. This type of bond is called polar covalent bond.

Question 13. Discuss about the electrical conductivity of covalent compound.

Answer:

The electrical conductivity of covalent compound:

Covalent compounds do not possess cations or anions and so cannot usually conduct electricity in the fused or dissolved state. However, some covalent compounds when dissolved in a polar solvent form ions by reacting with the solvent molecules and conducting electricity.

For example, hydrogen chloride dissolves in water and forms hydronium ions and chloride ions by reacting with water molecule. As a consequence aqueous solution of hydrogen chloride can conduct electricity.

\(\mathrm{HCl}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_3 \mathrm{O}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}^{-}\)


Question 14. Mention which of the following compounds conduct electricity and which can not—Cl2, Al2O3, an aqueous solution of HO, NaBr.

Answer: Al2O3, aqueous solution of HCI and NaBr can conduct electricity and Cl2 can not conduct electricity.

Question 15. Classify the following compound as ionic and covalent compound—CCI4, Na2SO4, CaCI2, CaO, CHCI3, C2H2, NaH, LiH, MgO, NaBry NaCI, Cl2, O2, H2O, KCI, N2, CO2, Na2O, NH3, Mg(NO3)2, K2S, C2H6, HCI, NaF, MgCI2, CH4.

Answer:
Ionic compound: Na2SO4, CaCl2, CaO, NaH, LiH, MgO, NaBr, NaCI, KCI, Na2O, Mg(NO3)2, K2S, NaF, MgCI2.
Covalent compound: CCI4, CHCI3, C2H2, Cl2, O2, H2O, N2, CO2, NH3, C2H6, HCl, CH4.

Question 16. Compare naphthalene and sodium chloride by the following properties—boiling point and solubility in water.

Answer:

Comparison between naphthalene and sodium chloride are:

Property Naphthalene Sodium chloride
Boiling point Since naphthalene is a covalent compound its boiling point is comparatively low(80.2°C). Being an ionic compound sodium chloride has a comparatively higher boiling point (801°C).
Solubility in water Naphthalene is insoluble in water. Sodium chloride is soluble in water.


Question 17. Differentiate between ionic and covalent compounds on the basis of the following properties:
1. Hardness and brittleness and
2. Melting and boiling point.

Answer:

The differences are listed below:

Property Ionic compound Covalent compound
1. Hardness and brittleness The crystals of ionic compounds are hard and brittle in nature. Most of the solid covalent compounds are very soft. However, some covalent compounds are able to form giant crystal lattices having a high degree of hardness.
2. Melting    and boiling point Ionic compounds generally have high melting and boiling point. Except for some solid covalent compounds ( SiO2 etc.), the melting and boiling point of most covalent compounds are low.


Question 18. Differentiate between ionic and covalent compounds on the basis of the following properties:
1. Electric conductance and
2. Solubility.

Answer:

The differences are listed below:

Property Ionic compound Covalent compound
1. Electrical conductance Ionic compounds are non-conductors of electricity in solid state but in aqueous solution or in molten state they conduct electricity. Pure covalent compounds are usually non-conductors of electricity. (Exception— aqueous solution of HCI conducts electricity).
2. Solubility Ionic compounds are generally soluble in polar solvents but insoluble in non-polar solvents. Covalent compounds are generally soluble in non-polar solvents but insoluble in polar solvents. However, covalent compounds such as HCl, sucrose, glucose, ethanol are soluble in water.


Question 19. Differentiate between ionic and covalent compounds on the basis of the following properties:

1. Nature of bond and
2. Electrolytic nature.

Answer:

The differences are listed below:

Property Ionic compound  Covalent compound  
1. Nature of bond Ionic compounds are formed by the electrostatic force of attraction acting between two oppositely charged ions. There is no existence of discrete molecules. Covalent compounds are formed by sharing of equal number of electron pairs between the two atoms. Covalent compounds form discrete molecules.
2. Electrolytic nature Almost all ionic compounds are electrolytes in a molten state or when dissolved in a suitable solvent. Most covalent compounds are nonelectrolytes. However, some polar covalent compounds (e.g, HCI) ionise in polar solvents and hence act as electrolytes.


Question 20. State three important differences between ionic and covalent bond.

Answer:

The three major differences between ionic and covalent bonds are discussed below:

Characteristic Ionic bond Covalent bond
1. Process of bond formation An ionic bond is formed by transfer of electron(s) from the atom of an electropositive element to the atom of an electronegative element. The atoms involved in covalent bond formation share equal number of electrons to form electron pair(s) and both of them use these electron pair(s) equally to form a covalent bond.
2. Difference in electronegativity The difference in electronegativity of the participating atoms is very high. The participating atoms have comparable electronegativity.
3. Nature of bond It is actually an electrostatic force of attraction. The force of attraction arises due to sharing of electron pairs is known as a covalent bond.


Question 21. Explain with an example how the covalent bond is formed according to Lewis’s concept.

Answer:

G.N. Lewis (1916) proposed an electronic model, according to which, when both the atoms taking part in a chemical combination are short of electrons than the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas, they can share their electrons in order to complete their octets (duplet in the case of H) to form a covalent bond.

During formation of a covalent bond, the two combining atoms contribute equal number of electrons for sharing. The shared electrons become a common property of both atoms and are responsible for holding the atoms together. Since such a combination of atoms does not involve the transfer of electrons form one atom to another, the atoms are electrically neutral.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Covalent Bond Is Formed According lewis

Example: Of the two F-atoms (electronic configuration 2, 7), one electron from each F atoms are shared to form an electron pair. This electron pair is then used by both atom to attain the stable configuration like Ne-atom. (electronic configuration: 2, 8). As a consequence, F2 molecule is formed.

Question 22. Describe the formation of hydrogen molecule using Lewis-dot structure.

Answer:

Hydrogen molecule is diatomic. Two hydrogen atoms combine with each other by single bond to form  H2 molecule. Hydrogen atom contains a single electron in its K orbit. During the formation of  H2 molecule, two hydrogen atoms share 1 electron each to form an electron pair, and this electron pair equally.

As a result, both the atoms attain the electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas He. Due to sharing of an electron pair, a single bond is formed between two H -atoms to form an H2 molecule.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of Hydrogen molecule Using Lewis Dot Structure

Question 23. Justify the Lewis-dot structure of oxygen.

Answer:

The Lewis-dot structure of oxygen

Two O-atoms combine with each other by forming covalent double bond (O=O) in which both the atoms attain the stable electronic configuration of Ne. But the Lewis-dot structure of oxygen molecule fails, to explain all the experimental observations regarding the structure of O2 molecule.

Actually, no such Lewisdot structure of O2 molecule can describe all the properties of oxygen.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Lewis-Dot structure Of Oxygen

Question 24. Describe the formation of F2 molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram. Or, Describe the formation of homonuclear diatomic molecule.

Answer: Two F-atoms combine chemically by forming a single covalent bond to form an F2 molecule. An F -atom contains 2 electrons in its K orbit and in its L orbit. During the formation of F2 molecule, each F-atom shares one electron from its valence shell equally with the other to form an electron pair. As a result, both the atoms attain the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas Ne. This results in the formation of stable F2 molecule.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of F2 molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 25. Explain how an HF molecule is formed with the help of Lewis-dot diagram.

Answer: HF molecule is formed by the chemical combination of an H-atom and an F-atom. H-atom has 1 electron in its valence shell. On the other hand, F-atom has 7 electrons in its valence shell.

During chemical combination, an H-atom and an F-atom share one electron each from their valence shell to form an electron pair which is equally shared between them. As a result, both the atoms attain the stable electronic configuration of their nearest noble gases. This results in the formation of HF molecule.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of HF molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram
Question 26. Explain how an HCI molecule is formed with the help of Lewis-dot diagram. Or, Describe the formation of a heteronuclear diatomic molecule.

Answer: An HCI molecule is formed by the chemical combination of an H-atom and a Cl-atom. H-atom has 1 electron in its valence shell. On the other hand, Cl-atom has 7 electrons in its valence shell.

During chemical combination, an H-atom and a Cl-atom share one electron each from their valence shell to form an electron pair which is equally shared between them. As a result, both the atoms attain the stable electronic configuration of their nearest noble gases. This results in the formation of HCI molecule.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of HCl molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 27. Describe the formation of molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram.

Answer:

The formation of molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram:

In H2O molecule, an O-atom is covalently bonded to two H-atoms. H-atom has 1 electron in its valence shell. On the other hand, O-atom has 6 electrons in its valence shell. During chemical combination, an oxygen atom shares its two valence electrons to separately pair with each electron of the two H-atoms.

As a result, O-atom attains the stable electronic configuration of Ne and both the hydrogen atoms attain the electronic configuration of He. Thus, two single bonds are formed between O-atom and two H-atoms. The other two pairs of electrons in the valence shell of oxygen atom do not take part in bond formation and remain as lone pairs of electrons.
WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of H2O Molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 28. Describe the formation of NH3 molecule with the heip of Lewis-tlot diagram.

Answer:

The formation of NH3 molecule with the heip of Lewis-tlot diagra

In NH3 molecule, N-atom is covalently bonded with three H-atoms. H-atom has 1 electron in its valence shell. On the other hand, N-atom has 5 electrons in its valence shell. During chemical combination, a nitrogen atom shares its three valence electrons to separately pair with each electron of the three H-atoms.

As a result, N-atom attains the stable electronic configuration of Ne and all the three hydrogen atoms attain stable electronic configuration of He. Thus, three single bonds are formed between N-atom and three H-atoms. One pair of electron in the valence shell of nitrogen does not take part in bond formation and remains as lone pair of electron.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of NH3 molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 29. Describe the formation of CH4 molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram.

Answer:

The formation of CH4 molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram:

In a CH4 molecule, a C-atom (2,4) is covalently bonded with four H-atoms. H-atom has 1 electron in its valence shell. On the other hand, C-atom has 4 electrons in its valence shell. During the chemical combination, a carbon atom shares its four valence electrons to separately pair with each electron of the four H-atoms.

As a result, C- atom attains the stable electronic configuration of Ne and all the four hydrogen atoms attain the electronic configuration of He and become stable. Thus, four single bonds are formed between C- atom and four H-atoms. This results in the formation of CH4 molecule.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of CH4 molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 30. Describe how a CO2 molecule is formed with the help of Lewis-dot diagram.

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Answer: During the formation of CO2 molecule, two electrons out of the 4 valence electrons of C-atom are shared with 2 valence electrons of an oxygen atom.

As a result, a double bond is formed between C-atom and its O-atom. C-atoms uses its remaining two valence electrons to form a double bond with another O-atom similarly. Thus, in a CO2 molecule the C-atom forms two double bonds with two oxygen atoms.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of CO2 Molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 31. Describe the formation of a C2H4 molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram.

C2h4 Covalent Bond Diagram

Answer: Ethylene molecule is formed by the combination of two C-atoms with four H-atoms. Each of the two C-atoms share two valence electron pairs with each other to form a double bond (C — C). Each of the C-atoms uses its two remaining valence electrons to form two single bonds with two hydrogen atoms. Thus, the molecule contains four C—H bonds apartfrom a C = C bond.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of C2H4 molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 32. Describe the formation of a N2 molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram.

Answer:

The formation of a N2 molecule with the help of Lewis-dot diagram

During the formation of N2 molecule by the combination of two N-atoms (2,5), each N-atom shares its three valence electrons with three valence electrons of the other N-atom. Thus, three electron pairs are formed, which are equally shared by both N -atoms. Due to sharing of three electron pairs, a triple bond is formed between two N-atoms, and N2 molecule is formed.

C2h4 Covalent Bond Diagram

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of N2 molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 33. Describe how a C2H2 molecule is formed with the help of Lewis-dot diagram.

Answer: An acetylene molecule is formed by the combination of two C-atoms with two H-atoms. Each of the two C-atoms share three electron pairs with each other to form a triple covalent bond (C = C). Each of the C-atoms uses its remaining valence electron to form single bond with a hydrogen atom, Thus, C2H2 molecule contains two C—H bonds apart from a C=-C bond.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Formation Of C2H2 molecule Using Lewis Dot Diagram

Question 34. Draw the Lewis dot structure of CCI4.

Answer:WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Lewis Dot Structure Of CCl4

 

Question 35. Through what sort of chemical bonding does chloride combines with sodium and hydrogen to form sodium chloride and hydrogen chloride- respectively? Draw corresponding electron dot structure in both cases.

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Answer: Chlorine combines with sodium through ionic bonding or electrovalent bonding and with hydrogen through covalent bonding. Electron dot structure of sodium chloride Electron dot structure of hydrogen chloride:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Electronic Dot Structure Of Sodium Chloride

Electron dot structure of hydrogen chloride:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Electronic Dot Structure Of Hydrogen Chloride

Question 36. Atomic number of the elements X, Y, and Z are respectively 9, 10, and 11.
1. Which one of them will form ionic bond only and which one will form both ionic and covalent bonds? Answer bn the basis of electronic configuration only.
2. Draw the Lewis-dot diagram of the compounds formed by the combination of these elements.

Answer:
1. Electronic configuration of X is K = 2, L = 7 . The electronic configuration of Y is AT = 2, L = 8. The electronic configuration of Z is K= 2, L = 8, and M = 1.

C2h4 Covalent Bond Diagram

X has 7 electrons in its outermost orbit. So, it will form both ionic and covalent bonds. The complete octet of Vindicates that it is chemically inert. Z has only 1 electron in its outermost shell. Hence, it can form ionic bonds only.

2. Atoms of X and Z will combine with each other to form a compound ZX.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Atoms Of X And Z Will Combine With Each Other

Two atoms of element X combine with each other to form X2 molecule.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Two Atoms Of Element X Combine With Eachother To Form X2 Molecule

Question 37. Number of valence electrons in the atoms of the elements A, B, C, and D are respectively 1, 4, 6, and 7. Form two ionic and two covalent compounds with these elements and draw their structures.

Answer:

Element A B C D
Number of valence electrons 1 4 6 7

Ionic compounds formed from these elements are:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Number Of Valence Electrons In The Atom Of Elemets

Covalent compounds formed from the these elements are:

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Covalent Compounds Formed From These Elements

Question 38. Atomic numbers of elements A, B and C are 3,11, and 19 respectively. Which type of compound, ionic or covalent, will be formed by the reaction of B with chlorine?

Answer:

Element Atomic No. Electronic configuration    
A 3 2 1
B 11 2 8 1
C 19 2 8 8 1

The atom of element B contains 1 electron in its valence shell which may be donated to attain the stable electronic configuration. On the other hand Cl (electronic configuration: 2, 8, 7) atom has the tendency to accept electron to attain the stable electronic configuration.

Hence atom of B will lose 1 electron to form the B ion and ClΘ ion. These two ions will hold together, to form BCI, by a strong electrostatic force of attraction. Hence ionic compound will be formed by the reaction of B with chlorine.

Question 39. Atomic number of the element X is 7. If two atom of X combines to form molecule, then which type of bond-ionic or covalent will be formed? Draw the electron dot structure of the molecule.

Answer: Electronic configuration of X is 2, 5. Each of the two combining atoms of X will contribute 3 electrons form their valence shell to form 3 common shared pair of electron and in this way both of them complete their octets. Hence covalent triple bond will be formed during the formation of X2 molecule.

Question 40. Assume symbols of two elements are A and B and their atomic numbers are 7 and 20 respectively. If two atom of A combine to form a molecule then which type of bonding occurs during bond formation. Draw the electron dot structure of the molecule.

Answer:
1. During the formation of molecule of A by the combination of two atoms of it will combine through covalent bonding.
2. Electronic configuration of A is 2, 5.

Now electron dot structure of the molecule A2.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Ionic And Covalent Bonds Electronic Dot structure Of the Molecule

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic B Covalent Bonding And Properties Of Covalent Compounds Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. With respect to covalent compounds, the melting points of ionic compounds are generally
1. Lower
2. Higher
3. Equal
4. Lower or higher

Answer: 2. Higher

Question 2. Which of the following is insoluble in water?
1. MgCI2
2. Na2SO4
3. CHCI3
4. HCL

Answer: 3. CHCI3

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 3. A covalent compound used in our daily life is
1. Washing soda
2. Alum
3. Water
4. Chalk

Answer: 3. Water

Question 4. Both ionic and covalent bonds can not be formed by
1. H
2. O
3. Na
4. Cl

Answer: 3. Na

Question 5. Which of the following compounds form both ionic and covalent bonds?
1. NH3
2. CCI4
3. CO2
4. CaCO3

Answer: 4. CaCO3

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 6. Which of the following, though covalent, but possesses high melting point?
1. C2H6
2. SiO2
3. C4H10
4. CO2

Answer: 2. SiO2

Question 7. The concept of covalent bonding was given by
1. Lewis
2. Arrhenius
3. Kelvin
4. Avogadro

Answer: 1. Lewis

Question 8. The Lewis structure does not justify the experimental result for
1. N2
2. NH3
3. CH4
4. O2

Answer: 4. O2

Question 9. A double bond is present in
1. H2O
2. NH3
3. CO2
4. CH4

Answer: 3. CO2

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 10. A triple bond is present in’
1. H2
2. O2
3. N2
4. F2

Answer:  3. N2

Question 11. Elements forming covalent bonds are placed in periodic table at the
1. Extreme left
2. Extreme right
3. Middle of the table
4. The bottom

Answer: 2. Extreme right

Question 12. Maximum number of covalent bonds that can be formed between two atoms is
1. 1
2. 2
3. 3
4. 4

Answer: 3. 3

Question 13. In which of the following compounds, the central atom has an expanded octet?
1. CH4
2. PCI5
3. NH3
4. NCl3

Answer: 2. PCI5

Question 14. In which of the following compounds, the central atom has an incomplete octet?
1. HCN
2. BF3
3. CO2
4. H2O

Answer: 2. BF3

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 15. Covalent bond is not formed between
1. C&CI
2. B&F
3. Cl & Cl
4. Na & F

Answer: 4. Na & F

Question 16. A triple bond is absent in
1. C2H2
2. N2
3. HCN
4. C2H4

Answer: 4. C2H4

Question 17. The nature of the bonds in HCI(g) .
1. Covalent
2. Ionic
3. Coordinate
4. Ionic and covalent

Answer: 1. Covalent

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 18. In which of the following compounds ionic, covalent and coordinate—all the three types of bond are present?
1. KCI
2. H2O
3. NH4CI
4. NaCN

Answer: 3. NH4CI

Question 19. Which of the following combines with hydrogen to form covalent compounds?
1. Ca
2. Na
3. C
4. Li

Answer: 3. C

Question 20. Which of the following is a covalent compound?
1. CaO
2. MgO
3. NaCI
4. CH4

Answer: 4. CH4

Question 21. Which of the following compound central atom contains lone pair of electron?
1. CH4
2. NH3
3. C2H2
4. C2H4

Answer: 2. NH3

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 22. A compound with covalent triple bond is
1. H2O
2. CO2
3. C2H2
4. CH4

Answer: 3. C2H2

Question 23. Compound containing covalent double bond is
1. OF2
2. N2
3. C2H4
4. C2H2

Answer: 3. C2H4

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 24. Which one of the following does not conduct electricity in molten state or in solution?
1. NaCI
2. NaF
3. CCI4
4. KCI

Answer: 3. CCI4

Question 25. True bond can be found in
1. Ionic bond
2. Covalent bond
3. Nuclear bond
4. None of these

Answer: 2. Covalent bond

Question 26. Number of covalent bonds in nitrogen molecule is
1. 1
2. 2
3. 3
4. 4

Answer: 3. 3

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 27. In which of the following compound covalent bonds are present?
1. Hydrogen chloride
2. Sodium chloride
3. Lithium hydroxide
4. Calcium oxide

Answer: 1. Hydrogen chloride

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic B Covalent Bonding And Properties Of Covalent Compounds Answer In Brief:

Question 1. Name a non-polar solvent.
Answer: Benzene is a non-polar solvent.

Question 2. Between water and benzene, which one dissolves kerosene?
Answer: Kerosene, a covalent organic substance, dissolves in a non-polar solvent like benzene.

Question 3. Name a crystalline substance that contains covalent bonds.
Answer: Diamond is a crystalline solid in which C-C covalent bonds are present.

Question 4. Name a covalent solid whose hardness is more than any ionic compound.
Answer: Diamond, a covalent compound, is the hardest substance. Its hardness is more than any ionic compound.

Question 5. How many lone pairs of electrons are present in nitrogen molecules?
Answer: Nitrogen molecule contains two lone pairs of electrons (N = N).

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 6. Define crystal lattice.
Answer: A crystal lattice is defined as a regular three-dimensional network of constituent particles (atoms, molecules, or ions) of the crystal.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 7. The atomic number of an element is 6. What type of bond will it form with the element having atomic number 17?
Answer: Both elements are non-metals. So, they will form covalent bonds.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 8. Name an electronegative element that forms both ionic and covalent compounds.
Answer: Chlorine forms both ionic and covalent compounds.

Question 9. What happens when crystals of sugar are heated?
Answer: When crystals of sugar are heated, it releases molecules of water and black particles of carbon are left behind as residue.

Question 10. Name a non-volatile covalent compound.
Answer: Sugar or cane sugar (C12H22O11) is a nonvolatile covalent compound.

Question 11. Give example of a solid and a liquid covalent compound.
Answer: A solid covalent compound is a glucose (C6H12O6) and a liquid covalent compound is water (H2O).

Question 12. Between water and ethanol, which one is more volatile?
Answer: Ethanol is more volatile than water.

Question 13. Is it possible to differentiate between solid naphthalene and solid common salt on the basis of their electrical conductivity?
Answer: In solid state, both naphthalene and common salt are bad conductors of electricity. Hence, it is not possible to differentiate between them on the basis of their electrical conductivity.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 14. How many covalent bonds can be formed between two atoms?
Answer: Two atoms can form a maximum of 3 covalent bonds between them.

Question 15. Show the structure of  C2H2 by dash formula.
Answer: H—C=C—H.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 16. Give an example of a single bonded covalent molecule which is liquid at normal temperature.
Answer: Water is a single bonded covalent molecule which is liquid at normal temperature.

Question 17. Name a gaseous hydrocarbon that contains only single bonds.
Answer: Methane (CH4) is a gaseous hydrocarbon that contains only single bonds.

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 18. Name a gaseous hydrocarbon that contains double bond.
Answer: Ethylene (C2H4) is a gaseous hydrocarbon that contains a double bond.

Question 19. Give an example of a molecule which contains an atom having a lone pair of electrons.
Answer: In ammonia (NH3) molecule, the nitrogen atom contains a lone pair of electrons.

Question 20. The electronic configuration of N-atom is 2(K), 5(L). How many electrons in the valence shell of nitrogen do not take part in the formation of N2 molecule?
Answer: 2 electrons from each N-atom do not take part in the formation of N2 molecule.

Question 21. Name a gaseous covalent compound which ionises in aqueous solution and conducts electricity.
Answer: Hydrogen chloride (HCI) is a gaseous covalent compound which ionises in an aqueous solution and conducts electricity.

Question 22. What is Lewis-dot diagram?
Answer: Lewis-dot diagram is a simple representation of a covalent molecule. Here, each electron is represented by a dot, and each bond is represented by a pair of dots in between two atoms involved in bond formation.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 23. What is the linear formula of covalent compounds?
Answer: Linear formula of a covalent compound is a simple representation in which each covalent bond is represented by a line or dash between the atoms involved in bond formation.

Question 24. How many types of covalent bonding are there?
Answer: There are three types of covalent bond single bond, double bond, and triple bond.

Question 25. Isomerism can be found in which type of compound?
Answer: Covalent compound.

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 26. Give example of a solid covalent which is good conductor of electricity.
Answer: Graphite.

Question 27. Give example of a single bonded covalent compound which is liquid at room temperature.
Answer: Water.

Question 28. Give example of two covalent compounds whose boiling and melting points are very high.
Answer: Boron carbide ( B4C) and Silica ( SiO2).

Question 29. Which one between ionic or covalent compounds are generally electrolytes?
Answer: Ionic compounds are generally electrolytes.

Question 30. Which type of chemical bond is present in hydrogen chloride molecule?
Answre: Covalent bonds are present in pure hydrogen chloride molecule.

Question 31. Draw the Lewis dot structure of F2 molecule.
Answer:

Question 32. Which type of bond is present in HF?
Answer: Covalent bonding is present in HF.

Question 33. By which type of bonding do carbon and hydrogen atoms combine to form methane?
Answer: Covalent single bond.

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic B Covalent Bonding And Properties Of Covalent Compounds Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. An example of a solid covalent crystalline compound is ______
Answer: Sugar

Question 2. The total number of valence electrons in the atoms of the molecule of HCN is _______
Answer: 10

Question 3. Ethanol is _______ in water.
Answer: Soluble

Question 4. Chloroform and water are _______ each other.
Answer: Immiscible

Question 5. An aqueous solution of glucose is a _______ of electricity.
Answer: Non-conductor

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 6. _______is a covalent substance that conducts electricity in a solid state.
Answer: Graphite

Question 7. Only _______ electrons are shown in the Lewis-dot diagram.
Answer: Bonded

Question 8. ______ is an example of a covalent compound which is widely used as a solvent.
Answer: Water

Question 9. Sugar does not ______ in aqueous solution.
Answer: Ionise

Question 10. Covalent bonds are formed due to the formation of _______
Answer: Electron-pairs

Question 11. The covalent bond in HCI is _______ in nature.
Answer: Polar

Question 12. The number of lone pairs of electrons in O atom of H2O molecule is _______
Answer: 2

Question 13. _________ is a covalent compound in which all the 4 bonds are identical.
Answer: Methane

Question 14. The number of bond pairs of electrons in CO2 is _______
Answer: 4

Wbbse Class 10 Properties Of Covalent Compounds

Question 15. Among CH4, C2H4 and C2H2, triple bond is present in _______
Answer: C2H2

Question 16. Covalent bond has a definite _______
Answer: Direction

Question 17. In NH3 molecule, N-atom has ______ lone pair of electrons.
Answer: 1

Question 18. The structure of covalent compounds are represented by ______ diagram.
Answer: Lewis-dot

Question 19. The number of single bonds present in C2H4 is a _______
Answer: 4

Question 20. Number of covalent bonds present i nitrogen molecule is _____
Answer: Three

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Topic B Covalent Bonding And Properties Of Covalent Compounds State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Lewis-dot diagram cannot explain’ the experimental observation regarding the structure of O2.
Answer: True

Question 2. Boiling and melting point of covalent compounds are high due to strong force of attraction between the covalent molecules.
Answer: False

Question 3. van der Waal’s force of attraction between two covalent molecules increases as the molecular mass increases.
Answer: True

Question 4. A coordinate bond can be found in H3O+ ion.
Answer: True

Question 5. Covalent compounds can exist as discrete molecules.
Answer: True

Question 6. Covalent compounds can be soft solid at normal temperature.
Answer: True

Question 7. Some transition metal elements can form four bonds between two atoms.
Answer: True

Question 8. Formula mass and molecular mass are not the same for covalent compounds.
Answer: False

Question 9. NaH is a covalent compound.
Answer: False

Question 10. Aqueous solution glucose can conduct electricity.
Answer: False

Question 11. Carbon tetrachloride is a polar solvent.
Answer: False

Question 12. Maximum two covalent bonds can be formed between two atoms.
Answer: False

Question 13. There are 5 covalent bonds present in ethyne molecule.
Answer: True

Ionic and Covalent Bonds Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Columns:

 

Question 1.

Column A Column B
 CaCO 1. Ionic and soluble in water
NaCI 2. Contains coordinate bond
NH4+ 3. Covalent but conducts electricity in solution
HCI 4. Ionic but insoluble in water

Answer:
CaCO3: 4. Ionic but insoluble in water:
NaCI: 1. Ionic and soluble in water
NH4+: 2. Contains coordinate bond
HCI: 3. Covalent but conducts electricity in solution

Question 2.

Column A Column B
The Duplet rule is applicable for 1. Na
Electrovalency 2. Be
Both ionic and covalent bonds are not formed by 3. PCI
Expanded octet 4. Electrostatic force of attraction

 

Answer:
The Duplet rule is applicable for: 2. Be
Electrovalency: 4. Electrostatic force of attraction
Both ionic and covalent bonds are not formed by:  1. Na
Expanded octet:  3. PCI

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic A Ammonia And Urea Synopsis:

Laboratory preparation of NH3: Ammonia (NH3) is prepared in the laboratory by heating a mixture of ammonium chloride and anhydrous slaked lime taken in a ratio of 1 : 3 by mass.

Drying and collection of NH3: Water vapour is then removed from the ammonia gas by passing the gas through a column of quick lime and then it is collected by downward displacement of air.

Physical properties of NH3: Ammonia is a colourless and pungent-smelling gas. It is highly soluble in water. A saturated aqueous solution of ammonia having a specific gravity of 0.88 is known as liquor ammonia.

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

Chemical properties of NH3:
1. The aqueous solution of ammonia is alkaline in nature.
2. Ammonia exhibits strong reducing property and can precipitate metal ions such as Fe3+, Al3+ etc., as insoluble hydroxides from their aqueous solution.
3. Nessler’s reagent turns brown in presence of ammonia.
4. When excess NH3 gas is passed through  CuSO4 solution, the solution turns deep blue.

Wbbse Class 10 Inorganic Chemistry

Industrial preparation of ammonia by Haber’s process: Ammonia is industrially prepared by Haber’s process by the direct combination of 1 volume of N2 gas and 3 volumes of H2 gas. The reaction is carried out at an optimum temperature and a pressure of 450°C and 200 atm respectively. Iron oxide is used as the catalyst and a mixture of K2O and Al2O3 is used as the promoter in this reaction.

Preparation of urea: Urea [CO(NH2)2] is commercially manufactured by heating a mixture of liquid NH3 and CO2 gas in a closed vessel at 170-190°C temperature and a pressure of about 175 atm.

Reactions:

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
2 \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{CO}_2 & \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{NCOONH}_4 \\
\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{NCOONH}_4 & \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{NCONH}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{aligned}\)

Uses of ammonia:

1. NH3 gas and aqueous solution of ammonia are extensively used in the laboratories as important reagents.
2. Liquid ammonia is used as a refrigerant in refrigerators, cold storages and ice manufacturing units.
3. Ammonia is also used to prepare urea.

Uses of urea:
1. Urea is widely used as nitrogenous fertiliser.
2. It is also used in the preparation of different medicines such as urea stibamine, barbiturates etc.
3. It is also used in the commercial preparation of nitrocellulose, cellophane etc.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic A Ammonia And Urea Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

 

Question 1. Why is concentrated H2SO4 or phosphorus pentoxide ( P2O5) or anhydrous CaCI2 not used to dry NH3 gas prepared in the laboratory?

Answer: Ammonia being a basic compound cannot be dried by using concentrated H2SO4 or P2O5 as these are acidic in nature. This is because concentrated H2SO4 and P2O5 react with ammonia to produce ammonium sulphate and ammonium phosphate respectively.

\(\begin{gathered}
2 \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow\left(\mathrm{NH}_4\right)_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \\
6 \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{P}_2 \mathrm{O}_5+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2\left(\mathrm{NH}_4\right)_3 \mathrm{PO}_4
\end{gathered}\)

 

On the other hand, anhydrous CaCI2 absorbs ammonia to form an addition compound. Hence, it is also not suitable to dry NH3 gas prepared in the laboratory.

\(\mathrm{CaCl}_2+8 \mathrm{NH}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCl}_2 \cdot 8 \mathrm{NH}_3\)
additional compound

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions


Question 2. What precautionary measures should be taken if an accident occurs due to leakage of ammonia gas in cold storages, factories or from storage tanks containing ammonia?

Answer: Ammonia is a basic gas with a characteristic strong, pungent smell. It is extremely harmful to eyes and can cause respiratory troubles if it is inhaled.

Large quantities of ammonia can dissolve in a small volume of water. So, in case of ammonia leakage, the eyes and face of the affected person should be immediately washed with plenty of water and the face of the person should be covered with a wet cloth or handkerchief to avoid further contact with ammonia.

Then the person should be immediately taken to the doctor. In addition to this, plenty of water should be sprayed at the site of the leakage so that ammonia gas present in the air is absorbed by water, thereby diminishing the chance of further harmful effects.

Question 3. State the principle and suitable chemical equation for the industrial preparation of Urea.

Answer:

The principle and suitable chemical equation for the industrial preparation of Urea

Urea is industrially prepared by heating a mixture of liquid ammonia and carbon dioxide gas in a closed vessel at around 170-190°C and under 175 atmospheric pressure.

Chemical equation: The reaction takes place in two steps—
1. In the first step, liquid ammonia and carbon dioxide gas react with each other to form ammonium carbamate (H2NCOONH4). This step is reversible in nature.

\(2 \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{CO}_2 \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{NCOONH}_4\)

 

2. In the second step, ammonium carbamate decomposes to form urea (H2NCONH2). This step is also reversible in nature.

\(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{NCOONH}_4 \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{NCONH}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

The first step almost proceeds towards completion, but in the second step only 40-60% of ammonium carbamate gets converted into urea.

Question 4. Mention some important uses of ammonia in different industries.

Answer:

Important uses of ammonia are—

1. Ammonia is used to manufacture important nitrogenous fertilisers such as ammonium sulphate, ammonium nitrate, ammonium phosphate, urea etc.
2. It is used to produce nitric acid by Ostwald’s process and sodium carbonate by Solvay process.
3. Liquid ammonia is used as a refrigerant in cold storages, ice factories, refrigerators etc.

Question 5. State some important uses of urea.

Answer:

Some important uses of urea are—

1. It is extensively used as a nitrogenous fertiliser for agricultural purposes.
2. Urea stibine, a medicine for treating of Kala-azar, is prepared from urea. Barbiturates (a kind of sedative) is also made from urea.
3. Urea is used as a raw material in the industrial preparation of cellophane papers, rayons, nitrocellulose (an explosive) etc. It is used to make urea-formaldehyde resin.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 6. State the principle and chemical reactions involved in the laboratory preparation of ammonia.

Answer:

The principle and chemical reactions involved in the laboratory preparation of ammonia

Principle: In the laboratory, ammonia is prepared by heating a mixture of ammonium chloride (NH4CI) and slaked lime [Ca(OH)2] or quick lime (CaO).

Chemical reactions:

\(\begin{gathered}
2 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{Ca}(\mathrm{OH})_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \uparrow+\mathrm{CaCl}_2+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
2 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{CaO} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \uparrow+\mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{gathered}\)

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Laboratory Preparation Of Ammonia

 

Question 7. How is water vapour removed from ammonia gas produced in the laboratory? Why is a particular drying agent used in this case?

Answer:

Water vapour removed from ammonia gas produced in the laboratory As follows:

1. Ammonia gas produced in the laboratory is passed through a column containing quick lime (CaO) with the help of a delivery tube. Quick lime absorbs water vapour present in ammonia gas and as a result, dry ammonia gas is obtained.

2. NH3, being a basic compound, cannot be dried up using acidic compounds. Hence a particular drying agent should be used to dry ammonia. Therefore a basic substance, such as quick lime (CaO) is used for drying ammonia in the laboratory.

Question 8. In the laboratory preparation of ammonia, NH4CI and Ca(OH)2 are mixed thoroughly in their dry states and then heated. Why?

Answer:

In the laboratory preparation of ammonia, NH4CI and Ca(OH)2 are mixed thoroughly in their dry states and then heated

Dry NH4CI undergoes sublimation on heating, /.e., it directly vapourises from its solid state. So, if NH4CI and Ca(OH)2 are not mixed thoroughly, NH4CI on heating will sublime and get eliminated from the reaction mixture.

The mixture of NH4CI and Ca(OH)2 is heated in their dry states because ammonia is highly soluble in water and thus, on heating its aqueous solution, ammonia gas cannot be obtained in its free state.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 9. How will you prepare ammonia gas in the laboratory at room temperature?

Answer: When liquor ammonia is added dropwise on solid caustic potash or caustic soda, water gets absorbed by the alkali thereby liberating ammonia gas.

Question 10. Why is liquid ammonia used as a refrigerant?

Answer: The latent heat of vaporisation of liquid ammonia is very high. So, it absorbs large amounts of heat from the surroundings during evaporation. This physical property of liquid ammonia makes it very useful as a refrigerant.

Question 11. We get a strong pungent smell of ammonia near laboratories and stables. Why?

Answer:

We get a strong pungent smell of ammonia near laboratories and stables.

The urine of humans and other mammals contains urea (NH2CONH2) which is decomposed by bacteria to produce ammonia. This is why we get a strong pungent smell of ammonia near laboratories and stables.

Question 12. Is it justified to term the aqueous solution of ammonia as ammonium hydroxide?

Answer: There is no existence of NH4OH molecules in the aqueous solution of ammonia. So, an aqueous solution of ammonia cannot be termed as ammonium hydroxide rather, it is justified to term it as aqueous ammonia.

Question 13. Write with equation what happens hydrogen chloride gas.

Answer: When ammonia gas comes in contact with hydrogen chloride gas, dense white fumes are formed. These fumes are actually the aggregation of fine ammonium chloride (NH4CI) particles floating in air.

\(\mathrm{NH}_3(g)+\mathrm{HCl}(g) \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}(s)\)


Question 14. Write with equation what happens when chlorine gas reacts with excess ammonia.

Answer: When chlorine gas reacts with excess ammonia, the latter gets oxidised to nitrogen while the former gets reduced to ammonium chloride.

\(8 \mathrm{NH}_3+3 \mathrm{Cl}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{N}_2 \uparrow+6 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)


Question 15. Give an example of the reducing property of ammonia.

Answer:

An example of the reducing property of ammonia

When ammonia is passed over heated cupric oxide, the latter is reduced to form red metallic copper and ammonia itself gets oxidised to nitrogen.

\(3 \mathrm{CuO}(s)+2 \mathrm{NH}_3(g) \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 3 \mathrm{Cu}(s)+\mathrm{N}_2(g)+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(g)\)


Question 16. Write with equation what happens when ammonia gas is passed over heated lead oxide.

Answer: When ammonia is passed over heated lead oxide, yellow-coloured lead oxide is reduced to form a grey precipitate of metallic lead while ammonia itself gets oxidised to nitrogen.

\(\underset{\substack{\text { (yellow) }}}{3 \mathrm{PbO}}+2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \rightarrow \underset{\text { (grey) }}{3 \mathrm{~Pb}}+\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)


Question 17. Write with equation what happens when an aqueous solution of ammonia is added to an aqueous solution of ferric chloride.

Answer: When an aqueous solution of ammonia is added to a yellow-coloured solution of ferric chloride, a brown precipitate of ferric hydroxide is produced.

\(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{FeCl}_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_3+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}(\mathrm{OH})_3 \downarrow+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl} \\
& \text { (yellow } \\
& \text { solution) } \\
&
\end{aligned}\)
Question 18. What happens when aqueous solution of ammonia is added to an aqueous solution of aluminium chloride? Give equation.

Answer: When aqueous solution of ammonia is added to a colourless aqueous solution of aluminium chloride, a white gelatinous precipitate of aluminium hydroxide is produced.

\(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{AlCl}_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_3+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{Al}(\mathrm{OH})_3 \downarrow+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl} \\
& \text { (colourless } \\
& \text { solution) } \\
&
\end{aligned}\)

Question 19. What happens when ammonia reacts With excess chlorine gas? Give equation.

Answer: When ammonia reacts with excess chlorine gas, a yellow-coloured oily explosive compound, nitrogen trichloride (NCl3) is formed along with hydrogen chloride.

Reaction: \(\mathrm{NH}_3+3 \mathrm{Cl}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{NCl}_3+3 \mathrm{HCl}\)

Question 20. What happens when ammonia is oxidised in presence of a catalyst? Give equation.

Answer: When a mixture of ammonia and excess oxygen is passed over heated platinum or a wire-gauze made of platinum-rhodium alloy (catalyst) at around 700°C, ammonia is oxidised to produce nitric oxide.

Reaction: \(4 \mathrm{NH}_3+5 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 4 \mathrm{NO}+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Question 21. What is meant by liquor ammonia’ and ‘liquid ammonia’?

Answer:
Liquor ammonia: A concentrated aqueous solution of ammonia containing 35% ammonia is known as ‘liquor ammonia’. It has a specific gravity of almost 0.88.

Liquid ammonia: Ammonia is condensed to a colourless liquid at around -33.4°C temperature and at normal atmospheric pressure. This is known as ‘liquid ammonia’.

Question 22. Why. is a bottle containing liquor ammonia cooled before opening?

Answer: In a bottle of liquor ammonia, ammonia gas is dissolved in water under high pressure. So, when the bottle is opened, the ammonia gas dissolved in water immediately comes out of the bottle with great force.

This may cause serious eye injuries. On the other hand, if the bottle is cooled, then the solubility of ammonia in water increases as a result of which the pressure inside the bottle decreases. So on opening the bottle, ammonia does not spout.

Question 23. What changes are observed when an aqueous solution of ammonia is added to an aqueous solution of copper sulphate?

Answer: When an aqueous solution of ammonia is added to a blue coloured aqueous solution of copper sulphate, initially a bluish-white precipitate is formed. On addition of the excess ammonia solution, the precipitate dissolves and the solution turns deep blue.

Question 24. What is Nessler’s reagent? What happens when ammonia comes in contact with Nessler’s reagent?

Answer:

Nessler’s reagent:

1. An alkaline solution of potassium mercuric iodide [K2Hgl4] is known as Nessler’s reagent.
2. When ammonia comes in contact with a small amount of Nessler’s reagent it forms a brown solution. When excess ammonia is passed through Nessler’s reagent, a brown precipitate is formed.

Question 25. State the principle of preparation of ammonia by Haber’s process along with suitable chemical equation.

Answer: When a mixture of nitrogen and hydrogen (in the volumetric ratio of 1:3) is heated at a temperature of about 450°C and 200 atmospheric pressure in the presence of iron oxide as catalyst and a mixture of  K2O and Al2O3 as promoter, ammonia gas is produced by the direct combination of nitrogen and hydrogen.

Chemical equation: \(\mathrm{N}_2(g)+3 \mathrm{H}_2(g) \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{NH}_3(g)+22.4 \mathrm{kcal}\)

Question 26. Why is Ca(OH)2 more acceptable than NaOH in the laboratory preparation of ammonia?

Answer: Ca(OH)2 is more acceptable than NaOH due to the following reasons:

1. Ca(OH)2 is cheaper and easily available.
2. Ca(OH)2 does not absorb moisture from air like NaOH.

Question 27. How is the dry ammonia gas collected at laboratory? Why is ammonia gas not collected by the downward displacement of water?

Answer:
1. Ammonia gas is lighter than air. Hence, at the laboratory, the dry ammonia gas is collected by the downward displacement of air in an inverted dry gas jar.
2. Ammonia gas is highly soluble in water. Hence, if it is collected by downward displacement of water it promptly gets dissolved in the water and forms ammonium hydroxide. Moreover to fill the vacuum caused by the dissolution of ammonia, water enters the hot round bottom flask. As a consequence the flask bursts. That is why ammonia is not collected by downward displacement of water.

Question 28. Why aqueous solution of ammonia can not be concentrated by heating?

Answer: On applying heat to the aqueous solution of ammonia, the dissolved ammonia gets evaporated from the solution. Hence amount of ammonia in the solution gets reduced and the solution becomes diluted instead of getting concentrated.

Question 29. Show with example that ammonia gas is basic in nature.

Answer:

Ammonia gas is basic in nature:

1. Ammonia gas turns moist red litmus paper blue.
2. Ammonia reacts with different acids like HCI, H2SO4,  HNO3 etc. to produce ammonium chloride (NH4CI), ammonium sulphate [(NH4)2SO4], ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3) etc. respectively.

\(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl} \\
\mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow\left(\mathrm{NH}_4\right)_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \\
\mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{HNO}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{NO}_3
\end{gathered}\)

The above facts proves that ammonia gas is basic in nature.

Question 30. What is vanishing ink? Why is it named so?

Answer:

Vanishing ink:

1. The aqueous solution of ammonia mixed with a few drops of phenolphthalein indicator is called vanishing ink. The solution is pink in colour.
2. The aqueous solution of ammonia is alkaline in nature. On addition of a few drops of phenolphthalein the solution turns pink. Since ammonia is volatile in nature it evaporates from the solution. As a result the solution becomes neutral is nature. As phenolphthalein is colourless in neutral medium, the pink colour of the ammonia solution vanishes after some time. Hence it is called Vanishing ink’.

Question 31. What happens when ammonia gas is passed over heated sodium metal? How the ammonia gas be regenerated from the product?

Answer: When ammonia gas is passed over heated sodium at 360°C white wax like solid sodamide or sodium amide and hydrogen gas are formed.

\(2 \mathrm{Na}+2 \mathrm{NH}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NaNH}_2+\mathrm{H}_2\)
(Sodamide)

When water is added to sodamide, pungent smelling ammonia gas is regenerated.

\(\mathrm{NaNH}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{NaOH}+\mathrm{NH}_3\)

 

Question 32. Of the two aqueous solutions one ischloride. How do you identify the ferric chloride solution by using aqueous solution of ammonia? Answer with balanced equations.

Answer: Addition of aqueous solution of ammonia to each of the results of the given solution in the formation of white gelatinous precipitate in one case and formation of brown precipitate in the other. White gelatinous precipitate is for aluminium hydroxide (AI(OH)3) and the brown precipitate is for ferric hydroxide ([Fe(OH)3]).

Hence the solution that contains ferric chloride becomes brown after addition of aqueous solution of ammonia due to the formation of ferric hydroxide.

\(\mathrm{AlCl}_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Al}(\mathrm{OH})_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)
Aluminium             Ammonium                         Aluminium
chloride                   hydroxide                          hydroxide

\(\mathrm{FeCl}_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}(\mathrm{OH})_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)
Ferric         Ammonium          Ferric
chloride     hydroxide             hydroxide

Question 33. Prove that ammonia contains hydrogen.

Answer:

Ammonia contains hydrogen:

When ammonia gas is passed over heated (360°C) sodium metal, a colourless odourless gas is formed. If a lighted splint is exposed to the gas, it starts burning with a squeaky pop and a blue flame but the flaming splint gets extinguished. Hence the gas is hydrogen and this hydrogen comes from ammonia. Hence it can be concluded that ammonia contains hydrogen.

\(2 \mathrm{Na}+2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NaNH}_2+\mathrm{H}_2\)

 

Question 34. Prove that ammonia contains nitrogen.

Answer:

Ammonia contains nitrogen:

When ammonia gas is passed over heated cupric oxide, a colourless and odourless gas is obtained. Now if a burning Mg-ribbon is introduced to the gas, it continues burning and a white residue is produced.

The white residue, such obtained, when boiled with water, a pungent smelling gas evolves which turns the alkaline Nessler’s reagent brown. Therefore, this pungent smelling gas is ammonia. Hence the white residue is of magnesium nitride and the colourless, odourless gas is nitrogen. So it can be concluded that ammonia contains nitrogen.

\(\begin{gathered}
3 \mathrm{CuO}+2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{Cu}+\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
3 \mathrm{Mg}+\mathrm{N}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2 \\
\mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{Mg}(\mathrm{OH})_2+2 \mathrm{NH}_3
\end{gathered}\)


Question 35. A chloride salt ‘A’ is heated with lime to produce a gas reacts with HCI vapour to regenerate ‘A’. Identify ‘A’ and ‘8’. Write down the corresponding equations.

Answer:

A chloride salt ‘A’ is heated with lime to produce a gas reacts with HCI vapour to regenerate ‘A’. Identify ‘A’ and ‘8’.

1. A is NH4CI (ammonium chloride)
B is NH3 (ammonia)

2. \(2 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{CaO} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

\(\mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)


Question 36. Two colourless gases react to form a pungent smelling gas which forms a dense white fume when a glass rod dipped in dilute HCI is held in it. Identify the three gases.

Answer:

Two colourless gases react to form a pungent smelling gas which forms a dense white fume when a glass rod dipped in dilute HCI is held in it.

The pungent smelling gas forms dense white fumes when the glass rod dipped in dilute HCI is held in it. Therefore the pungent smelling gas is ammonia (NH3).

Now ammonia is produced by the reaction of N2 and H2 which are colourless gases. Hence the gases are N2, H2 and NH3.

\(\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NH}_3 ; \mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)

 

Question 37. Differentiate between liquor ammonia and liquid ammonia.

Answer:

Difference between liquor ammonia and liquid ammonia:

Liquor Ammonia Liquid Ammonia
1. Concentrated aqueous solution of ammonia (specific gravity 0.88), where 35% ammonia is dissolved in water under high pressure, is termed as liquor ammonia. 1. Under normal atmospheric pressure, ammonia gas when cooled down at -33.4°C, it transforms into a colourless liquid. This liquid is known as liquid ammonia.
2. It is used as an important reagent in qualitative analysis to identify several cations. 2.  It is used as a refrigerant in cold storage and in ice factories.
3. Liquor ammonia is a solution where ammonia is solute and water is the solvent. 3. Liquid ammonia is a pure substance.

 

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic A Ammonia And Urea Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

 

Question 1. Which of the following substances is present in the urine of animals?
1. NH4CI
2. (NH4)2SO4   
3. CO(NH2)2
4. Ca(OH)2    

Answer: 3. CO(NH2)2

Question 2. Which of the following does not react with water to form ammonia?
1. Mg3N2
2. NO2
3. AIN
4. CaNCN

Answer: 2. NO2

Question 3. Ammonia is dried by using
1.  P2O
2. Anhydrous CaCl
3. Concentrated H2SO4
4. Quick lime (CaO)

Answer: 4. Quick lime (CaO)

Question 4. The nature of aqueous solution of ammonia
1. Is acidic
2. Is alkaline
3. Is neutral
4. Changes according to conditions

Answer: 2. Is alkaline

Question 5. If excess ammonium hydroxide is added to copper sulphate solution, then the solution turns
1. Deep red
2. Deep yellow
3. Deep violet
4. Deep blue

Answer: 4. Deep blue

Question 6. In the presence of Nessler’s reagent, ammonia turns
1. Black
2. Green
3. Brown
4. Yellow

Answer: 3. Brown

Question 7. The catalyst used in the catalytic oxidation of ammonia to produce NO is
1. MnO2
2. Platinum
3. Iron
4. Copper

Answer: 2. Platinum

Question 8. The amount of ammonia present in liquor ammonia is
1. 25%
2. 30%
3. 35%
4. 45%

Answer: 3. 35%

Question 9. The industrial preparation of ammonia is carried out by
1. Ostwald’s process
2. Solvay process
3. Bayer’s process
4. Haber’s process

Answer: 4. Haber’s process

Question 10. The catalyst used in the preparation of ammonia by Haber’s process is
1. MnO2
2. Platinum
3. Iron oxide
4. Copper

Answer: 3. Iron oxide

Question 11. The reaction involved in the production of ammonia by Haber’s process is a type of
1. Isochoric reaction
2. Isobaric reaction
3. Endothermic reaction
4. Exothermic reaction

Answer: 4. Exothermic reaction

Question 12. Which of the following is used as a promoter in Haber’s process of ammonia synthesis?
1. K2O, Al2O
2. Na2O, AI2(SO4)3
3. Na20, Al2O
4. K2O, AI2(SO4)3

Answer: 1. K2O, Al2O

Question 13. The volumetric ratio in which N2 and H2 are mixed in Haber’s process is
1. 2:3
2. 3:1
3. 1:3
4. 3:2

Answer: 3. 1:3

Question 14. The compound formed in the first step of the industrial preparation of urea is
1. Ammonium carbamate
2. Ammonium carbonate
3. Ammonium sulphate
4. Ammonium sulfite

Answer: 1. Ammonium carbamate

Question 15. The aqueous solution of which of the following salts does not form any precipitate when NH3 gas or NH40H solution is passed through it?
1. CuSO4
2. AlCl3
3. FeCl3
4. NH4NO3

Answer: 4. NH4NO3

Question 16. Ammonia does not react with
1. NaOH
2.  H2SO
3. HCl
4. H3PO4

Answer: 1. NaOH

Question 17. Ammonia gas is collected at laboratory by
1. Upward displacement of air
2. Upward displacement of water
3. Downward displacement of air
4. Downward displacement of water

Answer: 3. Downward displacement of air

Question 18. The optimum temperature for the industrial preparation of ammonia in Haber’s process
1. 723°C
2. 723K
3. 813K
4. 823K

Answer: 2. 723K

Question 19. On cooling ammonia gas converts to a colourless liquid at
1. 0°C
2. 25°C
3. -33.4°C
4. 30°C

Answer: 3. -33.4°C

Question 20. Which of the following metallic salt solutions reacts with aqueous solution of NH3 to form a brown precipitate?
1. Al3+ salt
2. Cu2+ salt
3. Fe3+ salt
4. Ni2+ salt

Answer: 3. Fe3+ salt

Question 21. Which of the following gases can be identified by Nessler’s reagent?
1. NH3
2. H2S
3. N2
4.  CO2  

Answer: 1. NH3

Question 22. Which of the following is obtained by heating ammonium carbamate?
1. NH3
2. CO(NH2)2
3. CO2  
4. N2

Answer: 2. CO(NH2)2

Question 23. Which of the following is obtained by heating ammonium nitrate and calcium oxide?
1.  N2  
2. NO2
3. NH3
4. NO

Answer: 3. NH3

Question 24. Which of the following forms a brown precipitate with ferric chloride solution?
1. NH4Cl
2. NH4OH
3. NaCl
4. CuSO4

Answer: 2. NH4OH

Question 25. Substance used in the preparation of medicine of human leishmaniasis is
1. Ammonia
2. Hydrogen sulphide
3. Urea
4. Sulphuric acid

Answer: 3. Urea

Question 26. Solubility of which gas in water is the highest?
1. N2  
2. NH3
3. H2S
4. CO2  

Answer: 2. NH3

Question 27. Which of the following is used in ice factories for cooling purpose?
1. NH3
2. CO2  
3. NH4OH
4. CHCl3

Answer: 1. NH3

Question 28. The gas formed by passing NH3 gas over heated CuO is
1. H2
2. O2
3. H2S
4. N2  

Answer: 4. N2

Question 29. Which of the following creates white fumes with HCI?
1. CO2
2. H2S
3. N2  
4. NH3

Answer: 4. NH3

Question 30. Formula of Nessler’s reagent is
1. K2Hgl4 + KOH
2. K2SO4.10H2O + KOH
3. K2HgCl4 + KOH
4. K2Mgl4 + KOH

Answer: 1. K2Hgl4 + KOH

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic A Ammonia And Urea Answer In Brief:


Question 1. Name the chemical substances required for the laboratory preparation of ammonia.

Answer: Ammonium chloride (NH4Cl) and dry slaked lime [Ca(OH)2] are used for the laboratory preparation of ammonia.

Question 2. What happens when moist ammonia gas is treated with phosphorus pentoxide?
Answer: Moist ammonia gas reacts with phosphorus pentoxide (P2O5) to form ammonium phosphate [(NH4)3PO4] salt.

Question 3. What is the specific gravity of liquor ammonia?
Answer: Specific gravity of liquor ammonia is 0.88.

Question 4. Write down the formula of the addition compound formed when ammonia is absorbed by anhydrous CaCI2.
Answer: The formula of the addition compound is CaCI.8NH3.

Question 5. Write the name of the oily explosive liquid that is produced by the reaction of excess chlorine with ammonia.
Answer: The oily explosive liquid .is nitrogen trichloride (NCI3).

Question 6. What can be concluded from the fountain experiment?
Answer: The fountain experiment proves that ammonia is highly soluble in water and its aqueous solution is alkaline in nature.

Question 7. Give an example of a reaction where two gases react to form a solid.
Answer: When ammonia gas reacts with hydrogen chloride gas, dense white fumes of solid ammonium chloride (NH4CI) are formed.

\(\mathrm{NH}_2(g)+\mathrm{HCl}(g) \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}(s)\)


Question 8. Which gas is produced by the combustion of ammonia gas in the presence of oxygen?

Answer: Nitrogen (N2) gas is produced.

Question 9. What is the colour of the precipitate formed when ammonia gas is passed through aqueous solution of ferric salts?
Answer: Reddish brown precipitate of ferric hydroxide [Fe(OH)3] is formed in this case.

\(\mathrm{FeCl}_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}(\mathrm{OH})_3 \downarrow+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)

 

Question 10. What is the colour of the precipitate formed when ammonia gas is passed through aqueous solution of aluminium salts?
Answer: In this case, white gelatinous precipitate of aluminium hydroxide [Al(OH)3] is formed.

\(\mathrm{AlCl}_3+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Al}(\mathrm{OH})_3 \downarrow+3 \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)


Question 11. Why should a bottle of liquor ammonia always be cooled before opening?

Answer: On cooling, the solubility of ammonia in water increases which prevents accidental spouting of NH3 gas from the bottle.

Question 12. Name an inorganic fertilizer which is prepared from ammonia.
Answer: An inorganic fertiliser which is prepared from ammonia is ammonium phosphate [(NH4)PO4].

Question 13. Name the chemical compounds that are used as raw materials for the industrial preparation of urea.
Answer: Liquid ammonia and carbon dioxide are used as raw materials for the industrial preparation of urea.

Question 14. What is the percentage of nitrogen present in urea?
Answer: The amount of nitrogen present in urea is almost 46% by mass.

Question 15. Which nitrogenous organic compound is used to prepare medicine for kala azar or black fever?
Answer: Urea is used to prepare medicine for kala azar or black fever.

Question 16. Why is liquid ammonia used as a coolant?
Answer: Liquid ammonia is used as a coolant due to its high latent heat of vaporisation.

Question 17. State whether the chemical reaction involved in Haber’s process of ammonia synthesis is exothermic or endothermic.
Answer: The chemical reaction involved in Haber’s process of ammonia synthesis is exothermic.

Question 18. Name a promoter which can be used instead of molybdenum (Mo) dust in Haber’s process of ammonia synthesis.
Answer: A mixture of  Al2O3 and K2O can be used as a promoter instead of Mo dust in Haber’s process of ammonia synthesis.

Question 19. Which nitrogenous compound is produced by the hydrolysis of calcium cyanamide?
Answer: Ammonia (NH3) is produced by the hydrolysis of calcium cyanamide.

Question 20. Which gas when passed over heated CuO produces N2 gas?
Answer: Ammonia gas when passed over heated CuO produces N2 gas.

Question 21. By the decomposition of which element, present in the urine of vertebrates, ammonia gas is released?
Answer: Urea.

Question 22. Which gas is termed as alkaline air?
Answer: Ammonia gas is termed as alkaline air.

Question 23. How is ammonia gas collected at laboratory?
Answer: Ammonia gas is collected at laboratory by the downward displacement of air.

Question 24. Name the process by which ammonia gas is prepared commercially.
Answer: Haber’s process.

Question 25. Name a gas which turns the moist red litmus paper blue?
Answer: Ammonia (NH3).

Question 26. Name a gas which forms dense white fumes when it comes in contact to HCI?
Answer: Ammonia (NH3).

Question 27. Which gas is formed by the reaction of ammonia with sodium?
Answer: Hydrogen ( H2)gas is formed by the reaction of ammonia with sodium.

Question 28. Which gas is identified using Nessler’s reagent?
Answer: Ammonia gas.

Question 29. Mention an use of liquid ammonia.
Answer: Liquid ammonia is used as a refrigerant in cold storages or in ice factories.

Question 30. What is liquor ammonia?
Answer: Concentrated aqueous solution of ammonia (specific gravity = 0.88) is termed as liquor ammonia. In liquor ammonia, almost 35% ammonia is dissolved in water under high pressure.

Question 31. Write down the name and formula of a nitrogenous organic fertiliser.
Answer: Urea (formula H2NCONH2).

Question 32. Write down the conditions for the preparation of urea from ammonia and carbon dioxide.
Answer: Urea is prepared by the reaction of liquid ammonia and carbon dioxide at around 175 atmospheric pressure and at a temperature of 170-190°C.

Question 33. Mention an use of urea.
Answer: Urea is used as a nitrogenous organic fertiliser.

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic A Ammonia And Urea Fill In The Blanks:

 

Question 1. Ammonia gas is ______ than air.
Answer: Lighter

Question 2. Anhydrous CaCI2 absorbs ammonia to form an ______ compound.
Answer: Addition

Question 3. Quicklime can be used to dry ammonia gas because it is ______ in nature.
Answer: basic

Question 4. At normal temperature and pressure _______ mL ammonia gas can dissolve in 1 mL water.
Answer: 1300

Question 5. The reaction between FeCl3 and NH4OH is a ______ reaction.
Answer: Double displacement

Question 6. Concentrated H2SO4 absorbs ammonia to from _____ salt.
Answer: (NH4)2SO4

Question 7. _____ is widely used as a non-aqueous aolvent.
Answer: Liquid ammonia

Question 8. The chemical name of urea is _____
Answer: Carbamide

Question 9. An example of a nitrogenous organic fertiliser is ______
Answer: Urea

Question 10. Ammonia can not be dried up using concentrated H2SO4 as ammonia is an ______ substance.
Answer: Alkaline

Question 11. Optimum temperature and pressure for the preparation of ammonia by Haber’s process is ____ and ______ respectively.
Answer: 450C, 200atm

Question 12. Vapour density of ammonia gas is ______
Answer: 8.5

Question 13. The latent heat of vaporisation of liquid ammonia is very ______
Answer: High

Question 14. The deep blue complex salt formed by dissolving the compound formed by adding ammonia solution in CuSO4 solution in excess NH4OH is ______
Answer: Cu(NH3)4SO4

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic A Ammonia And Urea State Whether True Or False:

 

Question 1. In the laboratory preparation of ammonia, ammonium chloride and calcium hydroxide are taken in a ratio of 3 :1 by mass.
Answer: False

Question 2. Liquor ammonia contains about 50% of ammonia.
Answer: False

Question 3. The addition compound formed due to the reaction between anhydrous calcium chloride and ammonia is CaCl2 • 10NH3
Answer: False

Question 4. Trace amount of ammonia present in air or water can be detected by its reaction with Nessler’s reagent.
Answer: True

Question 5. The chemical reaction involved in preparation of ammonia by Haber’s process is an endothermic reaction.
Answer: False

Question 6. Urea is used to prepare barbiturates which is a kind of tranquilizer.
Answer: True

Question 7. Ammonia was initially named as ‘alkaline air’ by Priestly.
Answer: True

Question 8. Nessler’s solution turns brown by absorbing ammonia gas.
Answer: True

Question 9. Liquor ammonia is aqueous solution of ammonia.
Answer: True

Question 10. In case of ammonia leakage, you have to give a splash of water in the eyes and all over your face.
Answer: True

Question 11. The required pressure in Haber’s process is 2 atm.
Answer: False

Question 12. Iron dust is used as catalyst in the industrial preparation of ammonia from  N2 and H2.
Answer: True

Question 13. Urea is used to prepare cellophane and rayon.
Answer: True

Question 14. Catalytic oxidation of ammonia produces nitric oxide.
Answer: True

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic B Hydrogen Sulphide And Nitrogen Synopsis:


Laboratory preparation of H2S:
Hydrogen sulphide (H2S) gas is prepared in the laboratory by treating ferrous sulphide with dilute H2SO4 at ordinary temperature. Hydrogen sulphide being heavier than air is collected in a gas jar by upward displacement of air. Kipp’s apparatus is used in the laboratory to get a continuous supply of H2S.

\(\mathrm{FeS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \text { (dil.) } \rightarrow \mathrm{FeSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}\)


Properties of H2S:

1. Hydrogen sulphide (H2S) is a colourless, poisonous gas having a smell similar to that of rotten eggs. The poisonous nature of the gas is due to its chemical properties.
2. The aqueous solution of H2S is mildly acidic. It is a strong reducing agent and precipitates metal ions from aqueous solutions of their salts as insoluble sulphides.
3. Freshly prepared alkaline solution of sodium nitroprusside turns violet in the presence of H2S gas. Hence, this reaction can be used for the identification of H2S gas.

Reaction of H2S with blue CuSO4 solution: \(\mathrm{CuSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{CuS} \downarrow+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4\)
(black)

Reaction of H2S with Pb(NO3)2 solution: \(\mathrm{Pb}\left(\mathrm{NO}_3\right)_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \text { PbS } \downarrow+2 \mathrm{HNO}_3\)
(black)

Reaction of H2S with acidified AgNO3 solution: \(\mathrm{AgNO}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_2 \mathrm{~S} \downarrow+2 \mathrm{HNO}_3\)
(black)

Uses of H2S: H2S is used in the preparation of different sulphide and bisulphide salts. It is used as an important laboratory reagent. It works as a precipitating reagent in the qualitative and quantitative analysis of inorganic salts.

Laboratory preparation of N2: In the laboratory, nitrogen gas is prepared by cautiously heating a concentrated aqueous solution of a mixture of sodium nitrite and ammonium chloride. The gas so formed is collected by downward displacement of water.

Step 1: \(\mathrm{NaNO}_2+\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl} \rightarrow \mathrm{NaCl}+\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{NO}_2\)

Step 2: \(\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{NO}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{N}_2+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Physical properties of N2: Nitrogen (N2) is a colourless, odourless and tasteless gas. It is sparingly soluble in water. The boiling point of liquid nitrogen is -195.8°C.

Chemical properties of N2: Nitrogen is chemically inert at normal temperatures. This is due to the high stability of N2 molecule as the two nitrogen atoms are linked to each other by a triple bond. This bond cannot be dissociated by the heat liberated during ordinary chemical reactions. Very high temperature is required to rupture this strong bond.

Reaction of N2 with Mg: N2 reacts with Mg at a very high temperature to form Mg3N2 (magnesium nitride).

\(3 \mathrm{Mg}+\mathrm{N}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2\)

Reaction of N2 with Calcium carbide: When nitrogen gas is passed over hot calcium carbide (heated at 1100°C), a grey mixture of caicium cyanamide and carbon is formed. This mixture is termed as nitrolim and is used as fertiliser.

\(\mathrm{CaC}_2+\mathrm{N}_2 \stackrel{1100^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CaNCN}+\mathrm{C}\)
(Nitrolium)

Uses of N2:
1. Nitrogen is used in the preparation of different nitrogenous fertilisers such as ammonium sulphate, ammonium nitrate, urea, nitrolim etc.
2. It is also used for the industrial preparation of NH3 and HNO3.
3. Liquid nitrogen is used as a refrigerant to preserve eye, blood, cornea etc.
4. In laboratories nitrogen is used to create inert environment.

Nitrogen fixation: The conversion of atmospheric nitrogen into several nitrogenous compounds by natural or artificial processes is called nitrogen fixation.

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic B Hydrogen Sulphide And Nitrogen Short And Long Answer Type Questions:


Question 1. Why is concentrated H2SO4 or anhydrous CaCl or quick lime (CaO) not used to dry H2S gas prepared in the laboratory?

Answer: If concentrated  H2SO4 is used in drying H2S gas, then H2S is oxidised by concentrated  H2SO4 to sulphur. So, concentrated  H2SO4 is,not suitable for drying H2S gas prepared in the laboratory.

\(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{S} \downarrow+\mathrm{SO}_2 \uparrow+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

 

On the other hand, CaCl2 reacts with H2S to form calcium sulphide and liberates hydrogen chloride gas. So, anhydrous CaCl2 is not a suitable drying agent for H2S.

\(\mathrm{CaCl}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaS}+2 \mathrm{HCl}\)

 

H2S being an acidic compound reacts with bases such as quick lime to produce calcium sulphide and water. Thus, quick lime cannot be used to dry H2S gas prepared in the laboratory.

\(\mathrm{CaO}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

 

Question 2. Why does the white colour of objects made of silver or oil paintings slowly turn black?

Answer: Atmospheric air contains traces of H2S. It slowly reacts with silver to form silver sulphide (Ag2S) which forms a black layer over the object made of silver. Hence, the object turns black with time.

\(2 \mathrm{Ag}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{H}_2\)

The white colour of oil paintings contain compounds of lead such as PbCO3, Pb(OH)2 etc. These lead compounds react with H2S present in air to form black lead sulphide (PbS). Hence, the white colour of oil paintings turn black with time.

\(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{Pb}(\mathrm{OH})_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{PbS}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
\mathrm{PbCO}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{PbS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3
\end{gathered}\)


Question 3. Write some of the important uses of H2S.

Answer:

Some important uses of H2S gas are as follows:

1. H2S is used for the preparation of different sulphide and bisulphide salts.
2. It is used as a reducing agent in laboratories.
3. It is also used as a precipitating agent for the qualitative and quantitative analysis of inorganic salts.

Question 4. Discuss the principle of preparation of nitrogen gas in the laboratory along with a suitable equation.

Answer:

The principle of preparation of nitrogen gas in the laboratory along with a suitable equation

Principle: In the laboratory, nitrogen gas is prepared by carefully heating a concentrated aqueous mixture of sodium nitrite and ammonium chloride taken in a 1:1 molar ratio. The reaction takes place in two steps-

1. In the first step, ammonium chloride and sodium nitrite reacts with each other to form ammonium nitrite and sodium chloride.

\(\mathrm{NaNO}_2+\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl} \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{NaCl}\)

 

2. Ammonium nitrite produced in the first step immediately decomposes to produce nitrogen on heating.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Laboratory Preparation Of Nitrogen

Question 5. Write some important uses of nitrogen.

Answer:

Some important uses of nitrogen are:

1. Nitrogen is used in the industrial preparation of ammonia and nitric acid.
2. It is used in the preparation of nitrogenous fertilisers such as ammonium sulphate, ammonium phosphate, ammonium nitrate, urea, nitrolim etc.
3. It is used to provide inert environment during chemical reactions.
4. Liquid nitrogen is used as a refrigerant to provide very low temperatures.

Question 6. Write with chemical equations what happens when a burning Mg-ribbon is introduced into a gas jar filled with N2 gas and the product thus obtained is boiled with water.

Answer:

When a red hot or a burning Mg-ribbon is introduced into a gas jar filled with dry N2 gas, it burns with a bright flame and magnesium nitride is produced.

\(3 \mathrm{Mg}(s)+\mathrm{N}_2(g) \rightarrow \mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2(s)\)

 

When magnesium nitride is boiled with water, it undergoes hydrolysis to produce magnesium hydroxide and liberates pungent-smelling ammonia gas.

\(\begin{array}{r}
\mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2(s)+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(\mathrm{I}) \rightarrow \\
3 \mathrm{Mg}(\mathrm{OH})_2(a q)+2 \mathrm{NH}_3(g)
\end{array}\)


Question 7. Discuss nitrogen fixation of aerial nitrogen by natural processes, or, Thunderstorms and electric discharge during rainy season are helpful for the plant kingdom—explain.

Answer:

During thunderstorms and electric discharge in the rainy season, atmospheric nitrogen and oxygen combine chemically with each other to form nitric oxide (NO).

\(\mathrm{N}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \stackrel{\text { electric discharge }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{NO}\)

 

This nitric oxide is then oxidised by aerial oxygen to form nitrogen dioxide.

\(2 \mathrm{NO}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}_2\)

 

NO2 thus formed dissolves in rain water to form nitrous acid (HNO2) and nitric acid (HNO3). These acids fall to the ground with rain water

\(2 \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{HNO}_2+\mathrm{HNO}_3\)

 

HNO3 reacts with different basic salts, such as, calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate etc., present in the soil to form water soluble nitrate salts. Plants utilise these nitrate salts for protein synthesis.

Thus, thunderstorms and electric discharge in the rainy season are helpful for the plant kingdom.

Question 8. A colourless, odourless gas A reacts with magnesium to form a compound B. When B is boiled with water, a gas C having strong pungent smell is formed. C produces white fumes of compound D when it comes in contact with a glass rod dipped in HCI. Identify A, B, C and D and write the corresponding equations.

Answer:
A: Nitrogen (N2)
B: Magnesium nitride (Mg3N2)
C: Ammonia (NH3)
D: Ammonium chloride (NH4CI)

Reactions:

\(3 \mathrm{Mg}+\mathrm{N}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{Mgg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2\) \(\mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{Mg}(\mathrm{OH})_2+2 \mathrm{NH}_3\) \(\mathrm{NH}_3+\mathrm{HCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}\)

 

Question 9. State the principle of laboratory preparation of hydrogen sulphide and give Re equation involved.

Answer:
Principle: In the laboratory, hydrogen sulphide is prepared by reacting ferrous sulphide (FeS) with dilute sulphuric acid (H2SO4) at normal temperature.

Chemical equation: \(\mathrm{FeS}(s)+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4(l) \rightarrow \mathrm{FeSO}_4(s)+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}(g) \uparrow\)

Question 10. Why is concentrated H2SO4 not used in the laboratory preparation of H2S?

Answer: Concentrated H2SO4 being an oxidising agent oxidises the produced H2S gas to S and itself gets reduced to SO2. Thus, concentrated H2SO4 is not used in the laboratory preparation of H2S.

\(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{FeS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \text { (conc) } \rightarrow \mathrm{FeSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \uparrow \\
\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \text { (conc) } \rightarrow \mathrm{S} \downarrow+\mathrm{SO}_2 \uparrow+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{gathered}\)

 

Question 11. Why is HNO3 not used in the laboratory preparation of H2S?

Answer: HNO3 being an oxidising agent oxidises the produced H2S gas to sulphur and itself gets reduced to  NO2. Hence, HNO3 is not used in the laboratory preparation of H2S.

\(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{FeS}+2 \mathrm{HNO}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}\left(\mathrm{NO}_3\right)_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \\
\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+2 \mathrm{HNO}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{S} \downarrow+2 \mathrm{NO}_2 \uparrow+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{gathered}\)

 

Question 12. What type of gases can be prepared in the Kipp’s apparatus? What is the advantage of using the Kipp’s apparatus?

Answer:

1. The gases which can be produced at room temperature without heating the reactants (such as, CO2, H2, H2S etc.) can be prepared in the Kipp’s apparatus. In case of such gases the reactants start reacting whenever they come in contact to each other. Moreover in order to prepare a gas in Kipp’s apparatus, one of the two reactants must be in liquid phase.

2. The advantage of using the Kipp’s apparatus in the laboratory is that a continuous supply of the gas, prepared in the Kipp’s apparatus, can be conveniently obtained. Moreover by using Kipp’s apparatus a gas can be prepared as per the requirement and the production of the gas can be stopped as soon as the requirement is over.

 

Question 13. Hydrogen sulphide is a toxic gas— explain.

Answer:

Hydrogen sulphide is a toxic gas

Hydrogen sulphide is a colourless toxic gas with a strong smell similar to that of rotten eggs. It causes burning sensation in eyes, headache, nausea etc. On inhaling the gas, one may become unconscious and may even die on prolonged inhalation of the gas.

So, inhaling air containing more than 5 ppm of H2S adversely affects our health. The toxic effect of H2S is basically due to its reaction with the essential proteins of the body cells.

Question 14. Under what conditions, combustion of H2S produces S and SO2 respectively? Give the corresponding chemical equation for each case.

Answer: H2S burns with a blue flame in presence of oxygen or air. Combustion of H2S in limited supply of oxygen produces yellow powder of sulphur. However, in presence of sufficient oxygen, SO2 and water are formed as the products.

\(\begin{aligned}
& 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{O}_2 \text { (insufficient) } \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{~S}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
& 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+3 \mathrm{O}_2 \text { (excess) } \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{SO}_2+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{aligned}\)

 

Question 15. H2S behaves as a dibasic acid in aqueous medium—explain.

Answer:

H2S behaves as a dibasic acid in aqueous medium

H2S partially ionises in water to produce H + ions. The ionisation takes place in two steps.

\(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{HS}^{-} ; \mathrm{HS}^{-} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{S}^{2-}\)

Hence, it behaves as a dibasic acid in aqueous medium.

In aqueous medium, H2S reacts with a base and produces two different types of salts. For example, when aqueous solution of H2S reacts with NaOH, sodium bisulphide (NaHS) which is an acidic salt and sodium sulphide (Na2S) which is a normal salt are formed.

Question 16. A water sample saturated with H2S gas turns turbid when it is left in the open air for a long period of time. Why?

Answer:

A water sample saturated with H2S gas turns turbid when it is left in the open air for a long period of time.

When a water sample saturated with H2S gas is left in the open air for a long period of time, the dissolved H2S gas is partially oxidised by aerial oxygen to form insoluble sulphur which remains in water as colloidal particles. Consequently the solution turns turbid.

\(2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{~S} \downarrow+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

 

Question 17. Give an example of the reducing property of H2S.

Answer:

An example of the reducing property of H2S

When H2S gas is passed through an orange coloured solution of acidified potassium dichromate solution, H2S reduces potassium dichromate to green chromic salt [Cr2(SO4)3] due to which the solution turns green. H2S itself gets oxidised to form sulphur (S).

Question 18. What happens when H2S gas is passed through an aqueous solution of copper sulphate? Give balanced chemical equation.

Answer: When H2S gas is passed through a blue coloured aqueous solution of copper sulphate, a black precipitate of copper sulphide is formed.

\(\mathrm{CuSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{CuS} \downarrow+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4\)
(blue solution)    (black)


Question 19. What happens when H2S gas is passed through an aqueous solution of lead nitrate? Give balanced chemical equation.

Answer: When H2S gas is passed through a colourless aqueous solution of lead nitrate, a black precipitate of lead sulphide is formed.

\(\mathrm{Pb}\left(\mathrm{NO}_3\right)_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{PbS} \downarrow+2 \mathrm{HNO}_3\)
(Colorless solution)    (black)

Wbbse Class 10 Inorganic Chemistry


Question 20. What happens when H2S gas is passed through an aqueous solution of silver nitrate? Give balanced chemical equation.

Answer: When H2S gas is passed through a colourless aqueous solution of silver nitrate, a black precipitate of silver sulphide is formed.

\(2 \mathrm{AgNO}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_2 \mathrm{~S} \downarrow+2 \mathrm{HNO}_3\)
(Colourless Solution)     (black)

 

Question 21. Why does a paper soaked in lead acetate solution turn black in presence of H2S gas?

Answer: A paper soaked in lead acetate solution turns black in presence of H2S gas because lead acetate reacts with H2S to form a black precipitate of lead sulphide. As a result, the paper turns black.

\(\mathrm{Pb}\left(\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}\right)_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \underset{\text { (black) }}{\mathrm{PbS} \downarrow}+2 \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}\)

 

Question 22. How is hydrogen sulphide identified by an alkaline solution of sodium nitroprusside?

Answer: The gas to be identified is passed through an aqueous solution of caustic soda followed by addition of freshly prepared alkaline sodium nitroprusside solution. If the colourless solution turns violet, then it is confirmed that the unknown gas is hydrogen sulphide.

Na2[Fe(CN)5NO] + H2S + 2NaO(H)  → Na4[Fe(CN)5NOS] + 2H2O

Question 23. A black solid A reacts with dilute H2S04 to produce a gas B having a characteristic smell. When B is passed through acidified potassium dichromate solution, compound C is produced due to which the orange colour of the solution turns green. Identify A, B and C and write the corresponding chemical equations.

Answer:
A: Ferrous sulphide (FeS)
B: Hydrogen sulphide (H2S)
C: Chromic sulphate [Cr2(SO4)3]

Wbbse Class 10 Inorganic Chemistry

Chemical reactions:
1. \(\mathrm{FeS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{FeSO}_4+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \uparrow\)

2. K2Cr2O7 + 3H2S + 4H2SO4 → Cr2(SO4)3 + K2SO4 + 3S↓ + 7H2O

Question 24. Nitrogen gas is not produced by directly heating ammonium nitrate. Why?

Answer:

Nitrogen gas is not produced by directly heating ammonium nitrate

Ammonium nitrite is an unstable compound and its thermal decomposition occurs very rapidly. So, if ammonium nitrite is directly heated, explosion may occur due to the high rate of the reaction. In order to avoid this, a saturated solution containing ammonium chloride and sodium nitrite is heated to produce nitrogen.

First step: \(\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{NaNO}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{NaCl}+\mathrm{N}_2 \uparrow+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Second step: \(\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{NO}_2 \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{N}_2 \uparrow+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Question 25. N2 is not Produced by heating a dry mixture of solid NH4CI and NaNO2, rather a saturated aqueous solution of these two substances are taken. Why?

Answer:

N2 is not Produced by heating a dry mixture of solid NH4CI and NaNO2, rather a saturated aqueous solution of these two substances are taken.

Solid NH4CI undergoes sublimation, i.e., it directly converts into its vapour state on heating. So,  N2 is not produced by heating a dry mixture of solid NH4CI and NaN O2. As nitrogen is almost insoluble in water, it is produced by heating a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride and sodium nitrite.

Question 26. Write some important uses of liquid nitrogen.

Answer:

Some important uses of liquid nitrogen:

Liquid nitrogen can create very low temperatures, even lower than -196°C. This property of liquid nitrogen makes it useful to act as a refrigerant in preserving blood, the cornea of eye etc. Nowadays, it is also used as a refrigerant for storing different food items.

Question 27. Why is nitrogen chemically inert at ordinary temperature?

Answer: In a nitrogen molecule, two adjacent nitrogen atoms are linked to each other by a triple covalent bond which is highly stable in nature: To break such a strong bond, large amount of energy is required which cannot be obtained from chemical reactions occurring at ordinary temperature. So nitrogen does not participate in chemical reactions at ordinary temperature.

Question 28. What happens when nitrogen reacts with oxygen? Give the balanced chemical equation and proper condition of the reaction.

Answer: When a mixture of nitrogen and oxygen is heated around 3000°C in an electric arc, nitric oxide (NO) is obtained as a product. The reaction is reversible and endothermic in nature.

\(\mathrm{N}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{NO}-43.3 \mathrm{kcal}\)

Wbbse Class 10 Inorganic Chemistry

Question 29. What happens when nitrogen reacts with hydrogen? Give the balanced chemical equation and proper condition of the reaction.

Answer: When a mixture of nitrogen and hydrogen is heated at a temperature of about 450°C under 200 atm pressure in presence of iron oxide as catalyst and a mixture of K2O and Al2O3 as promoter, ammonia is produced. The reaction is reversible and exothermic in nature.

\(\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{NH}_3+22.4 \mathrm{kcal}\)

 

Question 30. How is nitrolim prepared?

Answer: When nitrogen gas is passed over calcium carbide heated around 1100°C, a grey mixture of calcium cyanamide (CaNCN) and carbon is obtained. This mixture is known as nitrolim.

\(\mathrm{CaCl}_2(s)+\mathrm{N}_2(g) \rightarrow \underbrace{\operatorname{CaNCN}(s)+\mathrm{C}(s)}_{\text {Nitrolim }}\)

 

Question 31. How does nitrolim act as a fertiliser?

Answer: Nitrolim slowly hydrolyses to form ammonia which gets oxidised to nitrate salts by atmospheric oxygen in presence of bacteria. These nitrate ‘salts are water soluble and are consumed by the roots of plants as food.

\(\mathrm{CaNCN}(s)+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(I) \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCO}_3+2 \mathrm{NH}_3(g)\) \(2 \mathrm{NH}_3+2 \mathrm{O}_2 \stackrel{\text { Bacteria }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{NO}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

 

Question 32. Why is H2S gas collected by downward displacement of hot water instead of downward displacement of cold water?

Answer: H2S gas is soluble in cold water but insoluble in hot water. Moreover H2S is lighter than water. That is why it can be collected by downward displacement of hot water. H2S is 1.2 times heavier than air and due to this it can also be collected in the gas jar by the upward displacement of air.

Question 33. Mention a chemical reaction which shows that H2S gas is acidic in nature.

Answer: H2S forms salt and water by reacting with alkalis which shows that H2S gas is acidic in nature.

\(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{NaOH} \rightarrow \mathrm{NaHS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \\
& \mathrm{NaHS}+\mathrm{NaOH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{aligned}\)

NaHS is the acid salt and Na2S is the neutral salt.

Wbbse Class 10 Inorganic Chemistry

Question 34. Write down the change in colour that takes place when H2S gas is passed through Cu(NO3)2 solution.

Answer: When H2S gas is passed through blue Cu(NO3)2 solution, a black precipitate of copper sulphide (CuS) is obtained.

\(\mathrm{Cu}\left(\mathrm{NO}_3\right)_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{CuS} \downarrow+2 \mathrm{HNO}_3\)

 

Question 35. Write down with equation what happens when H2S gas is passed through chlorine water.

Answer: When H2S gas is passed through chlorine water, chlorine is reduced by H2S to produce hydrochloric acid (HCI) and H2S itself gets oxidised to elemental sulphur.

\(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{HCl}+\mathrm{S} \downarrow\)

 

Question 36. How would you prove that hydrogen sulphide contains hydrogen?

Answer: A colourless gas is produced when heated copper, lead etc. react with hydrogen sulphide gas. This gas burns in the air with a blue flame and water is produced when it burns in presence of oxygen. Therefore, the colourless gas is nothing but hydrogen. Therefore, it can be said that hydrogen sulphide contains hydrogen.

\(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{Cu}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{CuS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow \\
\mathrm{Pb}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S} \rightarrow \mathrm{PbS}+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow \\
2 \mathrm{H}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{gathered}\)

 

Question 37. Prove that H2S contains sulphur.

Answer: When a burning splint is inserted in a gas jar containing H2S, the gas starts to burn with a blue flame and the flaming splint gets extinguished. The yellow powder obtained in the gas jar produces a suffocating gas with a smell of gunpowder on burning.

This suffocating gas when passed through orange K2Cr2O7 solution (acidified by dilute H2SO4), colour of the solution turns green. So the suffocating gas is SO2 which is formed by burning of yellow powder.

Therefore the yellow powder is sulphur which is obtained during the combustion of H2S. So it can be concluded that H2S contains sulphur.

\(2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}+2 \mathrm{~S} \downarrow\) \(\mathrm{S}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{SO}_2 \uparrow\)

3 SO2 + K2Cr2O7 + H2SO4 → K2SO4+ Cr2(SO4)3 + H2O

Question 38. How do you Identify H2S by chemical reaction?

Answer:
1. If a paper moistened with lead acetate turns black when it comes in contact with a gas smelt like a rotten egg, it can be said that the gas is definitely hydrogen sulphide.

H2S  + (CH3COO)2Pb → PbS↓ + 2CH3COOH

2. If the freshly prepared alkaline sodium nitroprusside solution turns violet when a gas is passed through it, then the gas can be identified as hydrogen sulphide.

Question 39. Why is a bit of brown fumes observed when the connection between a tram when pantograph and an electric wire gets disconnected?

Answer: A lightning spark is generated when the connection between a tram pentograph and an electric wire gets disconnected. This causes a very high temperature. At this high temperature N2 and O2 present in the atmosphere combine to form nitric oxide (NO). This NO is then oxidised by the oxygen of air to form nitrogen dioxide (NO2) which is brown in colour. As a result brown fumes can be observed.

\(\mathrm{N}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO} ; 2 \mathrm{NO}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}_2\)

 

Question 40. What happens when calcium cyanamide is hydrolysed by extremely hot steam?

Answer: Pungent smelling ammonia gas is evolved when calcium cyanamide is hydrolysed by extremely hot steam.

\(\mathrm{CaCN}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{CaCO}_3+2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \uparrow\)


Question 41. How can you identify a gas as nitrogen?

Answer: A burning Mg-ribbon is inserted in a colourless, odourless, non-combustible gas and the Mg- ribbon continues burning with glowing flame. A white powder is obtained as residue. The residue forms pungent smelling ammonia gas on reaction with hot water. Hence the colourless, odourless, non-combustible gas is nothing but nitrogen.

\(\begin{gathered}
3 \mathrm{Mg}+\mathrm{N}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2 \\
\mathrm{Mg}_3 \mathrm{~N}_2+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{Mg}(\mathrm{OH})_2+2 \mathrm{NH}_3 \uparrow
\end{gathered}\)

Wbbse Class 10 Lab Preparation Of Ammonia

Question 42. Why is H2 gas used in electric bulb instead of air?

Answer: ln order to create an inert atmosphere nitrogen gas is used in electric bulbs. Air can oxidise the tungsten metal of the filament and as a result the filament will burn. That is why nitrogen gas is used instead of air as nitrogen will not undergo any reaction with the filament, hence the filament will remain intact.

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic B Hydrogen Sulphide And Nitrogen Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

 

Question 1. Which of the following is used in the laboratory preparation of hydrogen sulphide?
1. FeSO4 and concentrated  HNO3  
2. FeS and concentrated  H2SO
3. FeS and dilute  H2SO
4. FeSO4 and dilute HNO3  

Answer: 3. FeS and dilute  H2SO

Question 2. Dilute HCr is not used in the laboratory preparation of hydrogen sulphide because,
1. It is an oxidising agent
2. It is a reducing agent
3. It reacts very slowly
4. It is a volatile substance

Answer: 4. It is a volatile substance

Question 3. In aqueous solution, H2S behaves as a
1. Weak monobasic acid
2. Weak dibasic acid
3. Weak monoacidic base
4. Strong dibasic acid

Answer: 2. Weak dibasic acid

Wbbse Class 10 Lab Preparation Of Ammonia

Question 4. The aqueous solution of ‘which of the following salts does not produce black precipitate when H2S gas is passed through it?
1. ZnSO4
2. CuSO4  
3. AgNO3
4. Pb(NO3)2

Answer:  1. ZnSO4

Question 5. Combustion of H2S in inadequate supply of oxygen produces
1. SO2
2.  H2SO
3. S
4. Both 1 and 2

Answer: 3. S

Question 6. If  HNO3 is used in the laboratory preparation of H2S, then the produced H2S gas will get oxidised to
1. SO2
2. SO3
3. H2SO4
4. S

Answer: 4. S

Question 7. Which of the following solutions turns violet on passing H2S gas through it?
1. Alkaline sodium nitroprusside
2. Sodium argentocyanide
3. Nessler’s reagent
4. Potassium dichromate solution

Answer: 1. Alkaline sodium nitroprusside

Wbbse Class 10 Lab Preparation Of Ammonia

Question 8. H2S is a poisonous gas, because it
1. Affects the central nervous system
2. Decreases the efficiency of lungs
3. Causes brain haemorrhage
4. Reacts with the essential proteins of our body

Answer: 4. Reacts with the essential proteins of our body

Question 9. When H2S gas is passed through an acidified solution of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7), the solution turns
1. Yellow
2. Green
3. Black
4. Orange

Answer: 2. Green

Question 10. When H2S gas is passed through an aqueous solution of lead nitrate, the colour of the precipitate formed is
1. White
2. Brown
3. Green
4. Black

Answer: 4. Black

Question 11. Which of the following is not present as an impurity in N7 gas prepared in the laboratory?
1. Cl2
2. NH3
3. Water vapour
4. H2S

Answer:

Question 12. Which of the following compounds N2 gas is trapped?
1. Gunpowder
2. Bauxite
3. Chile saltpetre
4. Haematite

Answer: 3. Chile saltpetre

Question 13. Nitrogen is fixed in the soil as
1. N2  
2. NH3
3. Metallic nitrates
4. None of these

Answer: 3. Metallic nitrates

Wbbse Class 10 Lab Preparation Of Ammonia

Question 14. Which of the following gases is not prepared in Kipp’s apparatus?
1. CO2
2. H2
3. O2
4. H2S

Answer:  3. O2

Question 15. Which of the following gas is collected by the downward displacement of water?
1. NH3
2. H2S
3. N2
4. HCl(g)

Answer: 3. N2

Question 16. Nitrolim is used as a
1. Fertiliser
2. Explosive
3. Medicine
4. None of these

Answer: 1. Fertiliser

Question 17. Which of the following gases can not be identified by its colour?
1. CI2
2. NO2
3. H2S
4. None of these

Answer: 3. H2S

Question 18. Which of the following gases is used to detect the basic radicals present in a salt in laboratory?
1. CO2
2. N
3. H2
4. H2S

Answer: 4. H2S

Question 19. Which of the following gases can be prepared by using Kipp’s apratus?
1. N
2. H2S
3. HCl
4. NH3

Answer: 2. H2S

Question 20. Which of the following gases has a brown colour?
1. NO
2. N2O3
3. N2O
4. NO2

Answer: 4. NO2

Question 21. H2S burns with a flame of which colour?
1. Green
2. Yellow
3. Red
4. Blue

Answer: 4. Blue

Question 22. Which of the following is used to dry moist H2S?
1. H2SO4(conc.)
2. H2SO4 (dilute)
3. P2O5
4. Anhydrous CaCI2  

Answer: 3. P2O5

Wbbse Class 10 Lab Preparation Of Ammonia

Question 23. In order to remove acid vapour, H2S gas is passed through
1. HCI (dilute)
2. H2SO (dilute)
3. NaOH solution
4. NaHS solution

Answer: 4. NaHS solution

Question 24. Which of the following gases is heavier than air?
1. H2S
2. NH
3. N2
4. All of the above

Answer: 1. H2S

Question 25. Which of the following is formed when nitrogen is passed over heated CaC2?
1. CaCN2
2. Ca(CN)2
3. CaCN
4. Ca2CN

Answer: 1. CaCN2

Question 26. Which of the following is used to prepare nitrogen in laboratory?
1. NH4CI and CaO.
2. NH4OH and HNO3
3. NH3 and NaNO2
4. NH4CI and NaNO2

Answer: 4. NH4CI and NaNO2

Question 27. Which of the following is used to preserve eye-cornea?
1. NO
2. H2S
3. N2
4. NO2

Answer: 3. N2

Question 28. Ag turns black in contact with which gas?
1. HNO3 vapour
2. NH3 vapour
3. H2S vapour
4. H2SO4 vapour

Answer: 3. H2S vapour

Question 29. In the first step of nitrogen fixation, which of the following gases is prepared through lightning?
1. NO
2. NO2
3. N2O5
4. HNO3  

Answer: 1. NO

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic B Hydrogen Sulphide And Nitrogen Answer In Brief:

Question 1. Write the formula of hydrosulphuric acid.
Answer: The formula of hydrosulphuric acid is H2S.

Question 2. Name the types of salts produced by H2S.
Answer: H2S   can produce two types of salts – acid salts like NaHS and neutral salts like  Na2S.

Question 3. What happens when H2S gas is passed through an alkaline solution of sodium nitroprusside?
Answer: When H2S gas is passed through an alkaline solution of sodium nitroprusside, the solution turns violet.

Question 4. Why does an orange solution of acidified potassium dichromate turns green when H2S gas is passed through it?
Answer: When H2S gas is passed through an orange solution of acidified potassium dichromate K2Cr2O7, the later is reduced by H2S to form green coloured chromic sulphate [Cr2(SO4)].

Question 5. Under what conditions does H2S undergo combustion to produce powdered sulphur?
Answer: H2S undergoes combustion in limited supply of air (oxygen) to produce powdered sulphur.

Question 6. Name the only stable hydride of sulphur.
Answer: The only stable hydride of sulphur is hydrogen sulphide (H2S).

Question 7. In the laboratory preparation of nitrogen, the first step is the formation of NH4NO2. Which type of reaction is this?
Answer: It is a double decomposition reaction.

Question 8. State the temperature at which calcium carbide reacts with N2 to produce nitrolim.
Answer: At 1100°C calcium carbide reacts with nitrogen to produce nitrolim.

Question 9. During lightning, which compound is formed due to the reaction between atmospheric N2   and O2?
Answer: During lightning, atmospheric N2 and O2 react with each other to form nitric oxide

Question 10. Name two major gases that play a vital role in acid production.
Answer: Nitrogen (N2) and oxygen (O2) are the major gases that play a vital role in acid production.

Question 11. Using which apparatus one can get H2S gas as and when required?
Answer: Kipp’s apparatus is used to get H2S gas as and when required.

Question 12. Smell of which gas can be sensed from black salt?
Answer:  H2S gas.

Question 13. How does H2S gas smell like?
Answer: H2S gas smells like rotten egg.

Question 14. Is H2S gas heavier than air or lighter than air?
Answer: H2S gas is heavier than air.

Question 15. What is the colour of the flame when H2S burns in the air?
Answer: H2S burns in the air with a blue flame.

Question 16. Name a gas which is reducing as well as acidic in nature.
Answer: Hydrogen sulphide (H2S) gas.

Question 17. Write down the formula of the black precipitate formed by passing H2S gas through lead nitrate solution.
Answer: Lead sulphide (PbS).

Question 18. Old oil paintings turn black on contact with which gas of air?
Answer: Hydrogen sulphide (H2S) gas.

Question 19. Write down the name and colour of the precipitate obtained by passing H2S through AgNO3 solution.
Answer: Black precipate of silver sulphide (Ag2S) is formed.

Question 20. Why do nickel or silver substances gradually turn black?
Answer: H2S, present in air reacts very slowly with nickel or silver present in these substances and forms corresponding metallic sulphides which are black in colour. This metallic sulphides form a coating on the substances. As a result they turn black.

Question 21. Solution of which substance is mixed with aqueous solution of ammonium chloride and heated to form nitrogen at laboratory?
Answer: Aqueous solution of sodium nitrite.

Question 22. Write down the boiling point of nitrogen.
Answer: Boiling point of nitrogen is -195.8°C .

Question 23. How can ammonia and nitrogen gas be distinguished by their physical properties?
Answer: Ammonia gas is pungent smelling while nitrogen gas is odourless. So by this physical property these two gases can be distinguished.

Question 24. Write down the name of the product formed by the reaction of nitrogen gas with magnesium at high temperature.
Answer: Magnesium nitride.(Mg3N2).

Question 25. Which gas can be obtained by hydrolysis of calcium cyanamide?
Answer: Ammonia (NH3)

Question 26. What is nitrolim?
Answer: The grey mixture of calcium cyanamide and carbon.

Question 27. Write down the use of nitrolim.
Answer: Nitrolim is used as a fertiliser.

Question 28. Which gas is used in gas thermometer?
Answer: Nitrogen gas.

Question 29. Mention the use of liquid nitrogen.
Answer: Liquid nitrogen is used as refrigerant to preserve cornea, eye and blood.

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic B Hydrogen Sulphide And Nitrogen Fill In The Blanks:

 

Question 1. H2S gas can be dried by using _______ as the dehydrating agent.
Answer: P2O5

Question 2. The poisonous nature of H2S is related to its ______ property.
Answer: Chemical

Question 3. The sulphide compound used in the laboratory preparation of H2S is ______
Answer: FeS

Question 4. The acid which cannot be used in the laboratory preparation of H2S is ______
Answer: HNO3

Question 5. H2S being ______ in nature cannot be dried using _____ dehydrating agents.
Answer: Acidic, alkaline

Question 6. H2S gas is _____ than air.
Answer: Heavier

Question 7. The basicity of hydrogen sulphide is ______
Answer: 2

Question 8. H2S is ______ in cold water but _____ in hot water.
Answer: Soluble, insoluble

Question 9. H2S itself is a ______ substance but does not combustion.
Answer: Compustible, support

Question 10. Zinc sulphide is _____ in colour but silver sulphide is ______ in colour.
Answer: White, black

Question 11. H2S gas is identified by using alkaline _______ solution.
Answer: Sodium nitroprusside

Question 12. Magnesium nitride reacts with hot water to produce _____
Answer: Ammonia

Question 13. Nitric acid forms ______ salts while react with the alkaline substances present in the soil.
Answer: Nitrate

Question 14. Solubility of nitrogen in water is very _____
Answer: Low

Question 15. N2 itself is _____ and _____ supprt combustion.
Answer: Incombustible

Question 16. The grey mixture of ______ And carbon is known as nitrolim.
Answer: Calcium cyanamide

Question 17. When metal nitrides are boiled with water the smell of _______ gas is found.
Answer: Ammonia

Question 18. Vapour density of H2S is ______
Answer: 17

Question 19. ______ is formed by combustion of H2S in excess air.
Answer: SO2

Question 20. The antidote of H2S toxicity is dilute ______ solution.
Answer: Chlorine

Question 21. Formula of neither is ______
Answer: KNO3

Question 22. The formed N2 gas is passed through cone, ______ solution to free form moisture.
Answer: H2SO

Question 23. N2 gas is ______ at normal temperature.
Answer: Inert

Question 24. A stable covalent _____ bond is present between two N-atoms of nitrogen molecule.
Answer: Triple

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic B Hydrogen Sulphide And Nitrogen State Whether True Or False:

 

Question 1. Hydrogen sulphide reacts with sodium hydroxide to form sodium sulphide only.
Answer: False

Question 2. Hydrogen sulphide gas itself is a combustible substance but not a supporter of combustion.
Answer: True

Question 3. H2S gas reacts with a colourless aqueous solution of silver nitrate to form a black precipitate of silver sulphide.
Answer: True

Question 4. Kipp’s apparatus is used for the preparation of those gases which are prepared in the laboratory by heating the reactants.
Answer: False

Question 5. At ordinary temperature, nitrogen is chemically very reactive due to the presence of triple bond.
Answer: False

Question 6. In order to remove chlorine, present as impurity, from nitrogen gas prepared in the laboratory,  N2 is passed through concentrated caustic soda solution.
Answer: True

Question 7. Nitrogen gas is adsorbed by active charcoal.
Answer: True

Question 8. Concentrated H2SO4 is used in the laboratory to prepare hydrogen sulphide gas.
Answer: False

Question 9. Old oil paintings turn black in presence of ammonia gas.
Answer: False

Question 10. Components of nitrolim are CaC2 and C.
Answer: False

Question 11. Nitrolim is used as a pesticide in agricultural field.
Answer: False

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic C [Industrial preparation of HCI, HNO3 and H2SO4] Synopsis:

 

Industrial preparation of HCI: Hydrogen chloride gas is produced by the combustion , of equal volumes of H2 and Cl2 gas in a chamber made of silica. The produced gas is cooled and is then dissolved in water to form a saturated solution of hydrochloric acid.

\(\mathrm{H}_2+\mathrm{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{HCl}\)


Industrial preparation of HNO3:
Nitric acid is industrially manufactured by Ostwald’s process. In this process, nitric oxide (NO) is produced by catalytic oxidation of ammonia in the presence of aerial oxygen at 700-800°C temperature and 5-7 atm pressure. NO thus obtained is oxidised to form  NO2 gas and it is then dissolved in water to produce  HNO3

Step 1: \(4 \mathrm{NH}_3+5 \mathrm{O}_2 \frac{\mathrm{Pt} \text { (catalyst) }}{5-7 \mathrm{~atm}, 700-800^{\circ} \mathrm{C}} 4 \mathrm{NO}+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Step 2: \(2 \mathrm{NO}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}_2\)

Step 3: \(3 \mathrm{NO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{HNO}_3+\mathrm{NO}\)

Industrial preparation of H2SO4: The industrial preparation of sulphuric acid is carried out by the contact process. In the first step, elemental sulphur or iron pyrites (FeS2) is burnt in air to produce SO2 which is then oxidised to SO3 by aerial oxygen in the presence of V2O5 or platinised asbestos catalyst.

SO3 thus obtained in the second step is absorbed by 98% concentrated H2SO4 to produce oleum (H2S2O7). Oleum is then diluted by adding required amount of distilled water to produce 98% concentrated H2SO4.

Step 1: \(\begin{aligned}
& 4 \mathrm{FeS}_2+11 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3+8 \mathrm{SO}_2 \\
& \mathrm{~S}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{SO}_2
\end{aligned}\)

Step 2: \(2 \mathrm{SO}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{SO}_3+\text { heat }\)

Step 3: \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4+\mathrm{SO}_3 \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}_2 \mathrm{O}_7 \text { (oleum) } \\
& \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}_2 \mathrm{O}_7+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4
\end{aligned}\)

 

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic C [Industrial preparation of HCI, HNO3 and H2SO4] Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. Describe briefly the industrial preparation of hydrochloric acid.

Answer:

The industrial preparation of hydrochloric acid:

Nowadays hydrochloric acid is commercially prepared by modern synthetic method. The major steps of the method are discussed below—

1. Almost equal volumes of hydrogen gas and chlorine gas are taken in a combustion chamber made up of silica. When this mixture silica made is combusted hydrogen and chlorine combine with each other to form HCI gas.

\(\mathrm{H}_2(g)+\mathrm{Cl}_2(g) \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{HCl}(g)\)

 

 

2. The produced hydrogen chloride is cooled by passing it through a coiled tube within a condenser.
3. The condensed gas is then absorbed in water to produce a saturated solution of hydrochloric acid.

Question 2. Describe the principle of industrial Ipreparation of nitric acid by Ostwald’s process and give the corresponding chemical equations.

Answer: The steps involved in the Ostwald’s process are as follows—

First step: A mixture of pure and dry ammonia and dust-free air taken in a ratio of 1: 7.5 by volume is rapidly passed over Pt or a Pt-Rh wire gauze (which acts as a catalyst) at 800-900°C under 5-7 atm pressure.

The time of contact between the gas mixture and the catalyst should not be more than 0.0014 sec. As a result, ammonia is oxidised by aerial oxygen to produce nitric oxide (NO). The reaction is reversible and exothermic in nature.

\(\begin{aligned}
4 \mathrm{NH}_3(g)+5 \mathrm{O}_2(g) \rightleftharpoons 4 \mathrm{NO}(g) & +6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(g) \\
& +216 \mathrm{kcal}
\end{aligned}\)

Second step: NO gas thus obtained is cooled (by bringing the temperature down to 50°C) and is then oxidised by aerial oxygen to form nitrogen dioxide (NO2).

\(2 \mathrm{NO}(g)+\mathrm{O}_2(g) \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{NO}_2(g)+27.2 \mathrm{kcal}\)

Third step: NO2 gas thus produced is dissolved in water to produce 50% nitric acid. It is then heated to 120°C and distilled with concentrated H2SO4 to obtain 98% HNO3.

\(3 \mathrm{NO}_2(g)+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(l) \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{HNO}_3(a q)+\mathrm{NO}(g)\)

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Inustrial Preparation Of HNO3

NO gas evolved in this step can be reused ti prepare nitric acid.

Question 3. Discuss the principle of industrial preparation of sulphuric acid by contact process and give the corresponding chemical equation for each step.

Answer: The industrial preparation of sulphuric acid by contact process is as follows—

1. Elementary sulphur or iron pyrites (FeS2) is burnt in excess air to produce SO2.

\(\mathrm{S}(s)+\mathrm{O}_2(g) \rightarrow \mathrm{SO}_2(g)\)

 

4FeS2(s) + 11O2 (g) → 2Fe2O3(s) + 8 SO2(g)

2.  SO2 gas is then purified and mixed with excess amount of pure and dust-free air. It is then heated around 450°C under 1.5 atm pressure and passed over platinised asbestos . or vanadium pentoxide (V2O5) catalyst. Consequently,  SO2 is oxidised by aerial oxygen to form sulphur trioxide ( SO3). The reaction is reversible & exothermic in nature.

\(2 \mathrm{SO}_2(g)+\mathrm{O}_2(g) \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{SO}_3(g)+45 \mathrm{kcal}\)

 

3.  SO3 gas thus produced is then cooled and passed through the absorption tower filled with coke pieces. Here, it gets absorbed in 98% H2SO4 and oleum or pyrosulphuric acid (H2S2O7) is obtained as the product. It is collected in a tank coated with lead.

\(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4(l)+\mathrm{SO}_3(g) \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}_2 \mathrm{O}_7(l)\)

 

4. Finally, proportionate amount of distilled water is added to oleum to produce 98% concentrated sulphuric acid.

\(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}_2 \mathrm{O}_7(l)+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(l) \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4(l)\)

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Industrial Preparation Of H2SO4

Question 4. Why is SO3 not directly dissolved into water during industrial preparation of H2SO4 by contact process?

Answer:
1. Dissolution of  SO in water is a very rapid and exothermic process. Consequently, it leads to an increase in temperature due to which the solubility of  SO in water decreases and most of  SO gas, instead of getting absorbed by water, comes out of the absorption tower.
2. At such a high temperature, water vapour and H2SO4 droplets form a kind of dense white mist which does not easily condense into liquid and causes various problems.
3. Due to the generation of large amount of heat, H2SO4 produced partially decomposes to S03 and oxygen. Hence, production of H2SO4 gets reduced.

Question 5. Why are the catalysts used in the industrial preparation of ammonia, sulphuric acid or nitric acid taken in powdered form?

Answer: In all the cases, gaseous reactants react in presence of solid catalysts. Catalysts are taken in their powdered form in order to increase their surface area. When gases react in the presence of a solid catalyst, the gas molecules are adsorbed on the surface of the catalyst.

This increases the probability of effective collisions among the reactant molecules and hence, the rate of reaction increases. Greater the surface area of the catalyst, greater will be the number of adsorbed reactant molecules on the surface of the catalyst and hence the reaction will take place at a faster rate.

Question 6. Why should the mixture of ammonia and air used for the preparation of nitric acid by Ostwald’s process be pure and dust free?

Answer: In Ostwald’s process, platinum is used as the catalyst which is very expensive. If the mixture of air and ammonia is contaminated with dust, then the dust particles accumulate on the surface of the catalyst, thereby reducing its efficiency. Thus, the dust as well as impurities act as catalyst poison in this case.

Question 7. Why is the mixture of ammonia and air rapidly passed over platinum gauze catalyst for the preparation of nitric acid by Ostwald’s process?

Answer: The mixture of ammonia and air is rapidly passed over Pt-gauze catalyst for the preparation of nitric acid by Ostwald’s process. This is because the time of contact between the reactant mixture and the catalyst should not be longer than 0.0014 seconds. If the time of exposure exceeds this limit, then ammonia gets oxidised to form nitrogen instead of forming NO.

\(4 \mathrm{NH}_3+3 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{~N}_2+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

 

Question 8. How can we concentrate the dilute nitric acid produced by Ostwald’s method?

Answer: The dilute nitric acid (almost 50%) produced by Ostwald’s process can be first concentrated by heating it to 120°C. First of all it is concentrated up to 68% (by mass) on distillation. Then this acid is concentrated by performing distillation in . presence of concentrated H2SO4 to produce 98%  HNO3.

Question 9. Name the substance which is used as the catalyst in the contact process for manufacturing H2SO4. Why is the process so named?

Answer: Any one of the given compounds can be used as the catalyst in the contact process for manufacture of H2SO4:
1. Platinised asbestos or
2. vanadium pentoxide (V2O5).

As the reactants react with each other in contact with the solid surface of the catalyst, the process for the industrial preparation of H2SO4 is called contact process.

Question 10. Why is V2O5 preferably used as the catalyst in contact process?

Answer: Even though platinised asbestos is more efficient than  V2O5 as a catalyst, the efficiency of the former decreases considerably in presence of even trace amount of impurities. On the other hand,  V2O5 is cheaper and has less chance of getting contaminated in presence of impurities. Hence,  V2O5 is preferably used as the catalyst in the contact process.

Question 11. Why is the mixture of SO2 and Oused in the preparation of sulphuric acid by . icontact process, needed to be free of dust and impurities?

Answer: The mixture of SO2 and Oused for the preparation of sulphuric acid by contact process is needed to be free of dust and impurities (mainly arsenious oxide) because there are several impurities which can act as catalyst poison and reduce the efficiency of the catalyst.

Question 12. Why is the mixture of NO and O2 gases being cooled before passing through oxidation chamber?

Answer: In Ostwald process, the mixture of NO and O2 gases is being cooled before passing through the oxidation chamber. The main objective of this measure is’ to reduce the probability of decomposition of the nitrogen dioxide (NO2) which is to be formed by the reaction of NO and O2 in the oxidation chamber.

Question 13. What is the advantage of being exothermic in nature of the catalytic oxidation of ammonia in Ostwald process.

Answer: In Ostwald process the catalytic oxidation of ammonia is an exothermic process, so there is no need to heat the oxidation chamber once the oxidation reaction has started. Hence the fuel for heating the oxidation chamber is thus saved.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 14. Convert: Iron pyrites to sulphur dioxide.

Answer: Iron pyrites can be converted to sulphur dioxide by burning it in excess air.

\(4 \mathrm{FeS}_2+11 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3+8 \mathrm{SO}_2 \uparrow\)


Question 15. What is oleum?

Answer: Pyrosulphuric acid is commonly known as oleum. It is a light yellow oily liquid with the chemical formula of H2S2O7. It is also known as fuming sulphuric acid. When sulphur trioxide is absorbed by 98% concentrated sulphuric acid, oleum is obtained.

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic C [Industrial preparation of HCI, HNO3 and H2SO4] Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

 

Question 1. Which of the following reactions is endothermic?
1. \(\mathrm{N}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NH}_3\)
2. \(\mathrm{N}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}\)
3. \(4 \mathrm{NH}_3+5 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 4 \mathrm{NO}+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)
4. \(2 \mathrm{SO}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{SO}_3\)

Answer: 2. \(\mathrm{N}_2+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NO}\)

Question 2. Which of the following acids reacts with skin proteins to form xanthoproteic acid?
1. Sulphuric acid
2. Hydrochloric acid
3. Nitric acid
4. Nitrous acid

Answer: 3. Nitric acid

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 3. Which of the following compounds is commercially manufactured by Leblanc process?
1. Nitric acid
2. Ammonia
3. Sulphuric acid
4. Soda ash

Answer: 4. Soda ash

Question 4. In Leblanc process, the gas produced as a by-product in the first step is
1. HCI
2. SO2
3. NH3
4. H2S

Answer: 1. HCI

Question 5. The formula of pyrosulphuric acid is
1. H2S2O8
2. H2S2O6
3. H2S2O7
4. H2S2O5

Answer: 3. H2S2O7

Question 6. The type of reaction involved in the industrial preparation of hydrochloric acid is
1. Synthesis reaction
2. Substitution reaction
3. Double decomposition reaction
4. Decomposition reaction

Answer: 1. Synthesis reaction

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 7. In the industrial preparation of nitric acid by Ostwald’s process, the catalyst used is
1. Ni
2. Pt
3. Fe
4. Cu

Answer: 2. Pt

Question 8. The starting materials used in the industrial preparation of nitric acid by Ostwald’s process are
1. N2 and O2
2. NO and O2
3. NH3 and O2
4. N2O and O2

Answer: 3. NH3 and O2

Question 9. Optimum temperature for the 1st step of the Ostwald process of HNO3 preparation is
1. 400°C-500°C
2. 600°C-700°C
3. 700°C-800°C
4. 1000°C-1200°C

Answer: 3. 700°C-800°C

Question 10. The catalyst used in the contact process of H2SO4 preparation
1. Platinised asbestos
2. V2O5         
3. Ni-dust
4. 1 or 2

Answer: 4. 1 or 2

Question 11. In which of the following phases, efficiency of the solid catalyst increases?
1. Solid particle
2. Fused state
3. Dust
4. None of the above

Answer: 3. Dust

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 12. The optimum temperature of the contact process for H2SO4 preparation
1. 623°C
2. 623K
3. 723°C
4. 723K

Answer: 4. 723K

Question 13. Which of the following acid is known as ‘oil of vitriol’?
1. HNO3
2. H2SO4
3. HCI
4. HBr

Answer: 2. H2SO4

Question 14. The oxide formed by catalytic oxidation of ammonia for the industrial preparation of nitric acid
1. NO2
2. N2O4
3. N2O5
4. NO

Answer: 4. NO

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic C [Industrial preparation of HCI, HNO3 and H2SO4] Answer In Brief:

 

Question 1. Name the industrial process by which nitric acid is prepared from ammonia.
Answer: Industrially nitric acid is prepared from ammonia by Ostwald’s process.

Question 2. HCI gas produces white fumes in moist air. Why?
Answer: HCI gas combines with water vapour to form tiny particles of acid which float in air producing white fumes.

Question 3. What happens when a mixture of ammonia and air is passed over heated platinum?
Answer: When a mixture of ammonia and air is passed over heated platinum, nitric oxide (NO) and water vapour are formed.

Question 4. Which acids are produced when NO2 gas is absorbed in water?
Answer: When NO2 gas is absorbed in water, nitric acid (HNO3) and nitrous acid (HNO2) are formed.

Question 5. Name the process for the industrial preparation of H2SO4.
Answer: Contact process is used for the industrial preparation of H2SO4.

Question 6. In the industrial preparation of H2SO4, which mineral of iron undergoes combustion in air to produce  SO2?
Answer: In the industrial preparation of H2SO4, iron pyrites (FeS2) undergoes combustion in air to produce  SO2.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 7. What is the chemical formula of fuming sulphuric acid or oleum?
Answer: The chemical formula of fuming sulphuric acid or oleum is H2S2O7.

Question 8. In what form catalysts are usually used in the industrial preparations of different compounds?
Answer: During industrial preparations of different compounds, catalysts are usually used in their powdered form.

Question 9. Which inorganic acid is secreted in the stomach?
Answer: Hydrochloric acid (HCI).

Question 10. Write down the formula of muriatic acid?
Answer: Formula of muriatic acid is HCI.

Question 11. Which gas is evolved in the reaction of common salt with concentrated H2SO4?
Answer: Steamy fumes of hydrogen chloride (HCI) gas is evolved.

Question 12. Write down the formula of ‘aquafortis’?
Answer: Formula of ‘aqua fortis’ is HNO3 .

Question 13. Name the industrial process for the preparation of nitric acid from ammonia.
Answer: Ostwald process.

Question 14. Which catalyst is used in the conversion of SO2 to SO3 in contact process?
Answer: Vanadium pentoxide (V2O5).

Question 15. Write down one use of oleum.
Answer: Oleum is used as a reagent (especially in organic reactions) in chemical laboratory.

Question 16. What is sulphan?
Answer: Sulphan is 100% oleum. In other words sulphan or oleum is a mixture of concentrated sulphuric acid that has been saturated with excess sulphur trioxide.

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic C [Industrial preparation of HCI, HNO3 and H2SO4] Fill In The Blanks:

 

Question 1. When an electric spark is passed through a mixture of Nand O2 at 3000°C, ______ is formed as the product.
Answer: NO

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 2. In the industrial preparation of HNO3 by Ostwald’s process, ammonia is first oxidised to _____
Answer: NO

Question 3. The chemical name of fuming sulphuric acid is ______
Answer: Pyrosulphuric acid

Question 4. ______ is mixed with fuming sulphuric acid to produce sulphuric acid solution.
Answer: Water

Question 5. _______ gas is formed by the combustion of the mixture of equal volume of H2 and CI2 gas.
Answer: HCl

Question 6. ______ is used as catalyst in the industrial preparation of HNO3 by Ostwald process.
Answer: Platinum

Question 7. ________ acid is prepared by contact process.
Answer: Sulphuric

Question 8. The conversion of SO2 to SO3 by contact process is ______ and _______ is nature.
Answer: Reversible, exthermic

Question 9. The formula of pyrosulfuric acid is ______
Answer: H2S2O7

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Topic C [Industrial preparation of HCI, HNO3 and H2SO4] State Whether True Or False:

 

Question 1. The anhydride of nitric acid is nitrogen pentoxide (N2O5).
Answer: True

Question 2. The oxidation of SO2 to SO3 in the contact process is carried out at a temperature of 450°C under 1.5 atm pressure.
Answer: True

Question 3. The first step of the contact process involves reduction of iron pyrites to form sulphur dioxide.
Answer: False

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 4. The industrial preparation of HCI involves combustion of a mixture of equal volumes of hydrogen and chlorine gases.
Answer: True

Question 5. In contact process of H2SO4 preparation, SO3 is directly dissolved in water to form sulphuric acid.
Answer: False

Question 6. Greater the surface area of a catalyst, higher will be the number of reactant molecules adsorbed on the surface of the catalyst.
Answer: True

Question 7. If the contact time between reactants and the catalyst becomes longer in the first step of the Ostwald’s process then nitrogen is formed by incomplete oxidation of ammonia.
Answer: True

Question 8. HCI is obtained as a byproduct in the first step of Leblanc process.
Answer: True

Inorganic Chemistry In Laboratory And Chemical Industry Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Column:

 

Question 1.

Column A Column B
NH4CI and Ca(OH)2 1. Laboratory preparation of hydrogen sulphide
FeS and dil. H2SO4 2. Industrial preparation of urea
NH4CI and NaNO2 3. Laboratory preparation of ammonia
NH3 + CO2 4. Laboratory preparation of nitrogen

 

Answer:
NH4CI and Ca(OH)2: 3. Laboratory preparation of ammonia
FeS and dil. H2SO4: 1. Laboratory preparation of hydrogen sulphide
NH4CI and NaNO2: 4. Laboratory preparation of nitrogen
NH3 + CO2: 2. Industrial preparation of urea

Question 2.

Column A Column B
Pyrosulphu-ric acid 1. Chemical name of urea
Smelling salt 2. Mixture of calcium cyanamide and carbon
Nitrolim 3. A mixture of ammonium carbonate and lime water
Carbamide 4. Oleum

 

Answer:
Pyrosulphu-ric acid: 4. Oleum
Smelling salt: 2. Mixture of calcium cyanamide and carbon
Nitrolim: 1. Chemical name of urea
Carbamide: 3. A mixture of ammonium carbonate and lime water

Question 3.

Column A     Column B
Nessler’s reagent 1. Used in making gas thermometers
Vanadium pentoxide 2. Alkaline solution of potassium mercuric iodide
Nitrogen 3. Catalytic oxidation of ammonia to produce NO
Ostwald’s process 4. Catalyst used in contact process of H2SO4 synthesis

 

Answer:
Nessler’s reagent:  2. Alkaline solution of potassium mercuric iodide
Vanadium pentoxide: 4. Catalyst used in contact process of H2SO4 synthesis
Nitrogen:  1. Used in making gas thermometers
Ostwald’s process: 3. Catalytic oxidation of ammonia to produce NO

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic A Electrolyte And Electrolysis Synopsis:

1. Compounds, in their molten state or in solution undergo chemical decomposition to yield their respective ions and are called electrolytic substances or electrolytes. Acids such as HCI, H2SO4 etc., bases such as KOH, NaOH etc., and an aqueous solution of salts such as NaCI, KCI etc., are some examples of electrolytes.

On the other hand, compounds which do not conduct electricity in their molten state or in solution are called non-electrolytes. Sugar, wax, glucose, butter etc., are some examples of non-electrolytes.

2. Electrolytes which dissociate almost completely into their constituent ions in molten state or in solution and thus have high electrical conductivity are called strong electrolytes.

For example, HCI, NaOH, NaCI etc. are strong electrolytes. On the other hand, electrolytes that dissociate partially into their constituent ions in molten state or in solution and thus have low electrical conductivity are known as weak electrolytes. For example, CH3COOH, NH4OH etc., are weak electrolytes.

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

3. Electrolytes dissociate spontaneously in solution to form cations and anions which are responsible for conduction of electricity. Undissociated molecules are non-conductors of electricity. In fact, electrons do not play any role in conduction of electricity through an electrolyte.

4. The number of cations and anions produced due to the dissociation of an electrolyte in a solution may not be equal but the total positive charge of the cations at any moment during the conduction of electricity must be equal to the total negative charge of the anions.

5. The fraction of total number of molecules of an electrolyte that ionise in molten or dissolved state under a particular condition is called the degree of dissociation of that electrolyte.

Obviously, the degree of dissociation of a strong electrolyte at any point is more (almost equal to one) than that that of a weak electrolyte (less than one). With the increase in the degree of dissociation, the conductance of the corresponding electrolyte also increases.

6. In solid metallic conductors, free electrons conduct electricity, but in case of electrolytic solutions, the ions produced due to dissociation of the electrolyte conduct electricity.

The metal atoms do not change their position while conducting electricity but the ions in the electrolytic solution change their positions while conducting electricity. Besides, the conductivity of a metallic conductor is almost 106 times than that of an electrolytic solution.

7. The process by which an electrolyte in its molten state or in solution undergoes chemical decomposition to form new substances due to passage of electricity is known as electrolysis.

8. The apparatus in which electrolysis is carried out is known as voltameter. The setup consists of a vessel (generally made of glass or fibre) in which the electrolytic solution (either molten or dissolved in a suitable solvent) is taken along with the corresponding
electrodes.

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

9. The two metallic rods or plates that are partially immersed in the electrolytic solution are known as electrodes. Generally the metals which are good conductors of electricity such as platinum, copper, iron etc., are taken as electrodes.

10. Graphite, although being a non-metal is also used as an electrode because of its ability to conduct electricity. The electrode which is connected to the negative terminal of a battery is called the cathode while the other electrode which is connected to the positive terminal of the battery is known as the anode.

11. Electrolysis takes place when direct current (DC) is passed through an electrolyte in its molten or dissolved state with the help of the electrodes. The cations move towards the cathode and are converted into neutral atoms or radicals by accepting electrons i.e.,
reduction occurs at the cathode.

12. On the other hand, the anions move towards the anode and are converted into neutral atoms or radicals by releasing electrons i.e., oxidation occurs at the anode.

13. Pure water is a non-conductor of electricity. However, in the presence of a trace amount of acid or base, water can conduct electricity. Electrolysis of water produces hydrogen at the cathode and oxygen at the anode.

14. When an aqueous solution of CuSO4 is electrolysed using copper electrodes, copper atoms from the anode are oxidised to Cu2+ ions which passes into the solution whereas Cu2+ ions from the solution are reduced to Cu atoms by accepting electrons and get deposited at the cathode. Consequently, the anode gradually dissolves into the solution while the cathode becomes thicker.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic A Electrolyte And Electrolysis Short And Long Answer Type Questions:


Question 1. What are electrolytes and nonelectrolytes? Give example.

Answer:

Electrolytes: An electrolyte is a compound which conducts electricity in molten state or in aqueous solution and thus dissociates to form ions in solution.

Example:

Acid: HCI, HNO3, H2SO4, CH3COOH etc.
Base: NaOH, KOH,Ca(OH)2 etc.
Salt: NaCl, AICI3, CuSO4 etc.

Non-electrolytes: The compounds which do not conduct electricity in molten state or in solution are called non-electrolytes. Non-electrolytes do not form ions in molten state or in solution.

Example: pure water, glucose, urea etc.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 2. Discusscs.

Answer:

The important characteristics of electrolytic substance:

1. Electrolytes dissociate into ions in their molten state or in solution. The cations and anions produced due to ionization move randomly in the solution.
2. Due to the presence of ions, the solution of an electrolyte can conduct electricity.
3. The conductivity of an electrolytic solution depends on the following factors- nature of electrolyte, concentration of solution and temperature.

Question 3. Classify the following substances as electrolytes and non electrolytes-sugar solution, fused sodium chloride, liquid HCI, mercury, kerosene, fused KCI, aqueous solution of sodium chloride.

Answer:

Electrolytes Non-electrolytes
Fused sodium chloride, fused KCI, and aqueous solution of sodium chloride. Sugar solution, mercury, liquid HCI, kerosene.


Question 4. State the differences between electrolytes and non-electrolytes.

Answer:

The differences are listed below:

Electrolytes Non-electrolytes
Almost all ionic compounds and some polar covalent compounds act as electrolytes. Non-electrolytes are mainly covalent compounds.
Electrolytes are soluble in polar solvents, e.g. water. Non-electrolytes are generally soluble in non-polar solvents. Exception— glucose, sugar etc.
They produce ions in a molten state or in solution. They do not produce ions either in molten state or in solution.
These substances conduct electricity in molten state or in solution. Solution of non-electrolytes are non-conductors of electricity.
These substances undergo chemical changes during electrolysis. These are non-conductors, so do not undergo chemical change during electrolysis.

 

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 5. Describe the major differences in conduction of electricity by a metallic conductor and a solution of an electrolyte.

Answer:

The major differences are:

Metallic conductor Electrolyte
During the conduction of electricity through a metallic conductor only physical changes take place in the conductor. During conduction of electricity, an electrolyte undergoes chemical change to produce new substances.
Free electrons conduct electricity. Cations and anions produced by the electrolyte conduct electricity.
Metallic conductors conduct electricity both in solid or liquid states e.g. mercury. Electrolytes conduct electricity only in molten state or in solution.
The atoms do not change their positions during the conduction of electricity. Ions migrate towards the electrodes to conduct electricity.
With increasing temperature, resistance of metallic conductor increases and hence Hurtiwity decreases. With increasing temperature electrolytes increases.
The conductivity of metalic conductors are higher than that of electrolytes. Electrolytic solutions generally have low conductivity compared to metalic conductors.


Question 6. Discuss the factors on which tonductance of an electrolyte depends.

Answer:

Conductance of electrolyte depends on:

1. Nature of electrolyte: A strong electrolyte dissociates almost completely in solution and hence the solution contains large number of ions. So the conductance of strong electrolytes is generally higher. On the other hand, a weak electrolyte dissociates only partially and hence it produces less number of ions in the solution. Therefore, the solution of a weak electrolyte conducts less electricity.

2. Concentration of solution: Higher the concentration of a solution, more ions will be produced in the solution and hence the conductance will increase.

3. Temperature: With increasing temperature kinetic energy of ions increases and hence cations and anions move quickly towards the electrodes. This increases the conductance of the solution.

Question 7. What is degree of dissociation? How is conductance of an electrolyte related to its degree of dissociation?

Answer:
1. The fraction of total number of moles of an electrolyte that dissociates in solution or in molten state is known as degree of dissociation of that electrolyte. Degree of dissociation of strong electrolytes is high and that of weak electrolytes is low.
2. With an increase in the degree of dissociation, the conductance of an electrolyte increases.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 8. Why do electrolytes conduct electricity only in solution or in molten state but not in solid state?

Answer: Electrolytic substances are generally crystalline solids at normal conditions. In a crystalline state, the cations and anions are strongly held together by the electrostatic force of attraction.

As the ions cannot move in a solid state they cannot conduct electricity. In solution, the ions are separated and the force of attraction becomes weak. Hence the mobility of the ions increases. As a result, the solution conducts electricity.

Question 9. Among mercury and acidified water which one is an electrolyte and why?

Answer: Although mercury conducts electricity in liquid state, yet it is not termed as an electrolyte. Because mercury is an element and no chemical changes occur during conduction of electricity through it.

On the other hand during electrical conduction of acidified water, it chemically decomposes and produces hydrogen and oxygen at cathode and anode respectively. That is why it is called an electrolyte.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 10. Hydrogen chloride can not conduct electricity in its liquid state whereas sodium chloride can conduct electricity in its fused state—explain.

Answer: Being a covalent compound hydrogen chloride does not ionise in liquid state. it exists as a molecule and acts as a non-electrolyte. Hence liquid HCI can not conduct electricity.

On the other hand, sodium chloride is an ionic compound and ionises in the fused state to form Naand ClΘ ions. Due to the presence of such ions, it is considered as an electrolyte and can conduct electricity.

Question 11. An aqueous solution of HCI conducts electricity although it is a covalent compound—explain. Why CC14 is not an electrolyte?

Answer:
1. Hydrogen chloride (HCI) is a covalent gaseous substance that can not conduct electricity. But in aqueous solution HCI ionises to form H3O(hydronium ion) and Cl ion-

\(\mathrm{HCl}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_3 \mathrm{O}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}^{-}\)

Due to presence of such ions aqueous solution of HCI conducts electricity.

2. Carbon tetrachloride (CCI4), being a covalent compound does not dissociate into ions and hence can not conduct electricity.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 12. Define strong electrolyte and weak electrolyte. Give example.

Answer: The electrolytes which dissociates almost completely in solution are called strong electrolytes. Acids like HCI, H2SO4 bases like NaOH, KOH and salts like NaCI, KCI, CaCl2 etc act as strong electrolytes.

The electrolytes which dissociate partially in solution and most of the molecules remain undissociated are called weak electrolytes etc., Weak acids like H2CO3, HCOOH, CH3COOH etc.., and weak bases like NH4OH, Mg(OH)2 etc., are examples of weak electrolyte.

Question 13. State the differences between a strong electrolyte and a weak electrolyte.

Answer:

The major differences are listed below:

Characteristic Strong Electrolyte Weak
Conductance These substances are good conductors of electricity. Conductance is relatively low as compared to strong electrolytes.
Number of ions in solution These substances dissociate almost completely in solution and hence produce large number of ions. These substances dissociate only partially and hence the number of ions produced in solution is relatively less.
Nature These are generally ionic compounds. Example—NaCI, NaOH etc.  Exception—HCI is a covalent compound. However it is a strong electrolyte. These are generally covalent compounds. Example—ammonia (NH3); acetic acid (CH3COOH) etc.
Constituent particles in solution The solution only contains ions. The solution contains ions as well as undissociated molecules.


Question 14. Explain why NaOH is a strong electrolyte but NH4OH is a weak electrolyte.

Answer: In molten state or in aqueous solution, NaOH dissociates almost completely to give Na+ and OH ions. Due to the presence of greater number of ions in the solution, the conductivity of NaOH solution is high. Hence, NaOH is a strong electrolyte.

\(\mathrm{NaOH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\)

On the other hand, NH4OH dissociates partially in solution and most of the molecules remain undissociated. As a result, the number of ions present in NH4OH solution is less. Hence, it is a weak electrolyte.

\(\mathrm{NH}_4 \mathrm{OH} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{NH}_4^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\)

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions


Question 15. A metal undergoes physical changes during conduction of electricity—explain with example.

Answer:

A metal undergoes physical changes during conduction of electricit

When electricity is passed through a metallic conductor, it becomes hot. This is known as heating effect of electricity. Sometimes the metal glows due to conduction of electricity.

For example, if electricity is passed through a tungsten filament of an electric bulb, the filament gets illuminated and radiates light. When the flow of electricity is stopped, the filament comes back to its initial state. Thus, it is a physical change.

Question 16. What is electrode? What is cathode and anode?

Answer:

Electrode: Two metallic (eg: Cu or Ag) or non-metallic (eg: graphite, gas carbon) rods that are partially immersed in the electrolytic solution or fused electrolyte are known as electrodes. When the electrodes are connected with the battery electricity passes through the electrolytes.

Cathode: The electrode which is connected with the -ve end of a battery is called cathode. During electrolysis reduction occurs here.
Anode:The electrode which is connected with the +ve end of a battery is termed as anode. During electrolysis oxidation occurs here.

Question 17. Define electrolysis. Is electrolysis of fused wax possible?

Answer:

Electrolysis:

The process by which an electrolyte in its molten state or in solution dissociates into its constituent ions on passing electricity through it, is known as electrolysis. Electrolysis of fused wax is not possible as wax is not an electrolyte.

Question 18. Write the differences between cathode and anode.

Answer:

The major differences between cathode and anode are listed below:

Cathode Anode
Cathode is connected to the negative end of the battery. Anode is connected to the positive end of the battery.
Cations are released at cathode. Anions are released at anode.
At the cathode, cations are reduced to free atom by accepting electrons. At anode, anions give up electrons and are oxidised to free atoms or radicals.


Question 19. Is electrolysis of an element possible? Justify.

Answer:

During electrolysis, a substance is decomposed to produce new substances when electricity is passed through the molten state or solution of the substance in an appropriate solvent. In solution, the process of electrolysis takes place due to the presence of cations and anions formed by the dissociation of the electrolyte.

Obviously, the electrolyte must produce oppositely charged ions in solution Elements do not dissociate into oppositely charged ions. Hence electrolysis of an element is not possible.

Question 20. Describe the ionic theory of electrolysis.

Answer:

The ionic theory of electrolysis:

Electrolytes dissociate into ions in a molten state or in solution. When electricity is passed through the solution, cations move towards the cathode and anions move towards the anode. At the cathode, cations accept electrons and form neutral atoms or radicals.

Similarly anions, at the anode, give up electrons to form neutral atoms or radicals. For example, when molten NaCI is electrolysed using a graphite anode and iron cathode, chlorine gas is produced at anode and metallic sodium is deposited at cathode.

\(\mathrm{NaCl} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}^{-}\)

At cathode: \(\mathrm{Na}^{+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}\)

At anode: \(\mathrm{Cl}^{-} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cl}+e ; \mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{Cl} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cl}_2\)

Question 21. During electrolysis, the solution of an electrolyte contains large number of cations and anions. Yet the solution remains neutral—explain.

Answer: Electrolytes dissociate into cations and anions in their molten state or in solution. The number of cations present in the solution at any moment may not be equal to the number of anions. But the total positive charge carried by the cations and total negative charge of the anions are equal. For example, dissociation of one molecule of Na2SO4 gives two Na+ ions and one 4SO2- ion.

Here, total positive charge = 2 x (+1) = +2 and total negative charge = 1 x (-2) = -2 . Again, during electrolysis, the number of electrons accepted by the cations per second at cathode is equal to the number of electrons lost by the anions per second at anode. Thus, at any moment, total positive charge in the solution is equal to total negative charge and hence electrical neutrality of the solution is maintained.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Electrical Neutrality Of Electrolytic Solution

Question 22. Electrolysis is basically a redox reaction—justify the statement.

Answer: According to the electronic theory of oxidation and reduction, oxidation is a process of loss of one or more electrons by an atom or ion and reduction is the gain of one or more electron(s) by an atom or ion.

When electricity is passed through the solution of an electrolyte, cations produced due to dissociation of the electrolyte move towards the cathode while anions move towards the anode. At the cathode, cations accept electrons and form neutral atoms or radicals.

So, we can say that the cations are reduced at the cathode. Similarly anions, at the anode, give up electrons to form neutral atoms or radicals. So, anions undergo oxidation at anode. Therefore, we can say that electrolysis is an oxidation-reduction reaction or redox reaction.

Question 23. Discuss the principle of electrolysis of acidified water using platinum electrodes with equations.

Answer:
Principle: Pure water is a non-conductor of electricity. But if a few drops of acid (H2SO4) is added to water, it becomes a good conductor. In this condition, water molecules ionize to produce H+ and OHions.

\(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\)


Electrolyte:
Water containing trace amount of H2SO4.
Electrodes: Cathode and anode made of platinum.

Cathode reaction: When electricity is passed through acidified water, H+ ions move towards the cathode. At cathode, an H+ ion accepts one electron and forms H-atom. H-atoms being unstable, combine with each other to form diatomic H2 molecules. As a result, hydrogen gas is liberated at cathode.

\(\mathrm{H}^{+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{H}, \mathrm{H}+\mathrm{H} \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)


Anode reaction:
On passing electricity, OH ions move towards the anode. At anode, each OH ion releases an electron to form OH radical. These OH radicals then combines together to form H2O and oxygen (O2). As a result oxygen gas is liberated at the anode.

\(\mathrm{OH}^{-} \rightarrow \mathrm{OH}+e, 4 \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}+\mathrm{O}_2 \uparrow\)

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Electrolysis Of Acidified Water
At a given temperature and pressure, the volume of hydrogen gas produced at the cathode is twice the volume of oxygen gas produced at the anode.

Question 24. How do you identify the gases formed by the electrolysis of water?

Answer: The gases formed at the cathode and anode can be identified in the following way:

1. When a burning stick is introduced into the gas accumulated at the cathode, the fire in the stick extinguishes but the gas burns with a bluish flame. This indicates that the gas is hydrogen.
2. When a burning stick without a flame is introduced into the gas accumulated at the anode, the stick catches fire and burns strongly with a flame but the gas itself does not burn. This indicates that the gas formed at anode is oxygen.

Question 25. Describe the electrolysis of CuSO4 solution using platinum electrode.

Answer: The ionisation process occurred in aqueous solution of CuSO4 is:

\(\mathrm{CuSO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\) \(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\)

Since the tendency of accepting electron is greater in case of Cu2+ ion than H+ ion, Cu2+ ions move towards Pt-cathode, during electrolysis and deposited as metallic Cu by accepting two electrons at the cathode.

On the other hand tendency of losing electron is greater in case of OHion than 4SO2- ion.
Hence OHions moves towards Pt-anode and get neutralised by losing electron to form OH radical. These OH radicals react with each other to form H2O and O2.

Reaction at cathode: \(\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}\)

Reaction at anode: \(\mathrm{OH}^{-} \rightarrow \mathrm{OH}+e ;\), \(4 \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}+\mathrm{O}_2 \uparrow\)

H+ and 4SO2- ions remain in the solution. Hence the residual solution becomes acidic in nature.

Question 26. Describe the process, of electrolysis of aqueous solution of copper sulphate (CuSO4) using copper electrodes.

Answer:
Electrolyte: An aqueous solution of copper sulphate (CuSO4).
Electrode: Both cathode and anode are made of copper.
In aqueous solution, CuSO4 dissociates into Cu2+ and 4SO2- ions. Water molecules also dissociate partially to produce H+ and OHions.

\(\mathrm{CuSO}_4 \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\) \(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\)


Cathode reaction:
When electricity is passed through the solution, both Cu2+ and H+ ions are migrated towards the cathode. As tendency of Cu2+ ions to discharge at cathode is more than H+ ions, it accepts 2 electrons to form Cu-atom. The produced atoms are deposited at cathode and hence the mass of cathode increases.

\(\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu} \text { (reduction) }\)

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Electrolysis Of CuSO4 Solution Using Cu Electrodes
Anode reaction:
Though both the anions present in the solution are migrated towards the anode, neither of them is discharged, instead, Cu-atoms from the anode are oxidised to Cu2+ ions, which dissolves in the solution. Thus, the anode plate begins to erode gradually.

\(\mathrm{Cu} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e \text { (oxidation) }\)

At any instant, the amount of Cu deposited at cathode is equal to the amount of Cu dissolved in the solution from anode. Hence, the concentration of Cu2+ ions in solution does not change.

Question 27. During electroplating, DC of low intensity should be applied for longer period of time. Explain. What will happen if AC is applied instead Of DC?

Answer: During electroplating, DC current of low intensity is applied for a longer period of time. Due to low supply of current, the solution does not become hot. At the same time, it helps in the formation of a uniform coating over the article.

If AC is applied instead of DC, the electrodes continuously change their nature. As a result, movement of ions in solution is restricted and electrolysis does not take place. Hence, alternating current is not suitable for electroplating.

Question 28. During electrolysis of CuSO4 solution using Cu-electrodes, the mass of anode gradually decreases while the mass of cathode increases. Explain.

Answer: Aqueous solution of CuSO4 contains Cu2+ and H+ ions as cations and 4SO2- and OHions as anion. When aqueous solution of CuSO4 is electrolysed using Cu-electrodes, the Cu2+ ions are preferably discharged over H+ ions at the cathode. Consequently Cu2+ ions accept electrons to form Cu-atoms, which deposit over the cathode.

Hence, the mass of the cathode increases. On the other hand, the copper rod acts as an anode. At the anode, each copper atom loses two electrons to form Cu2+ ions, which go into the solution. So, the anode is gradually dissolved into the solution and its mass decreases.

Cathode reaction:\(\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}\)

Anode reaction: \(\mathrm{Cu} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e\)

Question 29. Does the concentration of the solution change during electrolysis of CuSO4 solution using Gu-electrodes?

Answer: During electrolysis of an aqueous solution of CuSO4 using Cu-electrodes, at any moment the amount of copper deposited at cathode is equal to the amount of copper brought into solution from the anode. Hence, the concentration of Cu2+ ions in solution remains the same. So, the colour of the solution also does not change.

Cathode reaction: \(\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}\)

Anode reaction: \(\mathrm{Cu} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e\)

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic A Electrolyte And Electrolysis Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. Electrolytes conduct electricity in
1. Solid state
2. Molten state
3. Aqueous solution
4. Both 2 and 3

Answer: 4. Both 2 and 3

Question 2. An example of a strong electrolyte is
1. H2CO3
2. HNO3
3. NH4OH
4. HCOOH

Answer: 2. HNO3

Question 3. An example of an inorganic salt which acts as a weak electrolyte is
1. KNO3
2. ZnCl2
3. CaCl2
4. Ca3(PO4)2

Answer: 4. Ca3(PO4)2

Question 4. The aqueous solution of a weak electrolyte contains
1. Only molecules
2. Only ions
3. Both ions and molecules
4. None of these

Answer: 3. Both ions and molecules

Question 5. The solution of a non-electrolyte contains
1. Only molecules
2. Only ions
3. Both ions and molecules
4. None of these

Answer: 1. Only molecules

Question 6. Which of the following is a non-electrolyte?
1. Acetic acid
2. Carbonic acid
3. Chloroform
4. Formic acid

Answer: 3. Chloroform

Question 7. With the rise in temperature, the conductance of a metallic conductor
1. Increases
2. Decreases
3. Remains unchanged
4. May either increase or decrease

Answer: 2. Decreases

Question 8. When an aqueous solution of an electrolyte is heated, the velocity of ions in the solution
1. Decreases
2. Increases
3. Either decreases or increases
4. Remains unchanged

Answer: 2. Increases

Question 9. The conductance of metallic conductors when compared to that of electrolytes is
1. Low
2. High
3. Either low or high
4. Equal

Answer: 2. High

Question 10. During electrolysis, the temperature of the electrolyte
1. Increases
2. Decreases
3. Shows no change
4. Either increases or decreases

Answer: 1. Increases

Question 11. Which of the following compounds containing-OH group acts as an electrolyte?
1. Phenol (C6H5OH)
2. Methanol (CH3OH)
3. Ethanol (C2H5OH)
4. 2-propanol (CH3CHOHCH3)

Answer: 1. Phenol (C6H5OH)

Question 12. Which of the following compounds does not conduct electricity in its solid state?
1. NaCI
2. PbBr2
3. Ice
4. All of these

Answer: 4. All of these

Question 13. Aqueous solution of which of the following compounds contains both ions and molecules of the compound?
1. NaCI
2. CH3COOH
3. CH3CH2OH
4. CHCI3

Answer: 2. CH3COOH

Question 14. Which of the following compounds is not an electrolyte?
1. NaCI
2. H2SO4
3. KOH
4. Glucose

Answer: 4. Glucose

Question 15. Which of the following compounds is an electrolyte?
1. Urea (H2NCONH2)
2. Ethanol (C2H5OH)
3. Acetic acid (CH3COOH)
4. Distilled water

Answer: 3. Acetic acid (CH3COOH)

Question 16. Which of the following pairs of bases acts as weak electrolytes?
1. Mg(OH)2,Fe(OH)2
2. KOH, NH4OH
3. NaOH, Mg(OH)2
4. NaOH, KOH

Answer: 1. Mg(OH)2,Fe(OH)2

Question 17. The ratio of the mass of hydrogen to oxygen produced during electrolysis of water, is
1. 1:8
2. 2:1
3. 2:3
4. 3:1

Answer: 1. 1:8

Question 18. The ions discharged at the anode during the electrolysis of dilute and concentrated HCI are respectively
1. OH–   & Cl– 
2. Cl–  & OH–  
3. Cl–  in both cases
4. OHin both cases

Answer: 1. OH–   & Cl– 

Question 19. The relative tendency of an ion to discharge at a particular electrode depends on the
1. Position of the ion in the electrochemical series
2. Concentration of the ion in the solution
3. Nature of the electrode
4. All of these

Answer: 4. All of these

Question 20. During electrolysis of CuS04 solution using Pt-electrode
1. The anode gradually dissolves into the solution while cathode becomes thicker
2. The anode becomes thicker while the cathode gradually dissolves into the solution
3. Both cathode and anode become thicker
4. Both cathode and anode remain unchanged

Answer: 4. Both cathode and anode remain unchanged

Question 21. Which has the maximum tendency to get reduced at the cathode?
1. K+
2. Na+
3. H+
4. Ag+

Answer: 4. Ag+

Question 22. Which of the following cations does not exist in free state in its aqueous solution?
1. H+
2. Na+
3. K+
4. Cu2+

Answer: 1. H+

Question 23. The metal which can be extracted by electrolysis of its molten salt is
1. Fe
2. AI
3. Cu
4. Ag

Answer: 2. AI

Question 24. Electrolysis of which of the following aqueous solutions will discharge the corresponding metal at the cathode?
1. NaCl
2. KCI
3. CuSO4
4. AICI3

Answer: 3. CuSO4

Question 25. When CuSO4 solution is electrolysed using copper electrodes, blue colour of solution
1. Deepens
2. Fades
3. Remains unchanged
4. Becomes colourless

Answer: 3. Remains unchanged

Question 26. When CuSO4 solution is electrolysed using Pt-electrodes, product obtained at anode is
1. Cu
2. Cu2+
3. O2
4. H2

Answer: 3. O2

Question 27. When CuSO4 solution is electrolysed using either copper or Pt-electrodes, the product obtained at the cathode is
1. H2
2. Cu
3. O2
4. Cu2+

Answer:  2. Cu

Question 28. Aqueous solution of which one is an weak electrolyte?
1. CH3COOH
2. NaOH
3. H2S04
4. NaCl

Answer: 1. CH3COOH

Question 29. Which one of the following can conduct electricity?
1. Fused NaCl
2. Liquid HCI
3. Solid NaCl
4. Aqueous solution of glucose

Answer: 1. Fused NaCl

Question 30. Which of the following is an electrolyte?
1. Mercury
2. Aqueous solution of sugar
3. Salt solution
4. Bromine water

Answer: 3. Salt solution

Question 31. 1.12 L of a gas is formed at cathode in the electrolysis of water. The amount of gas formed at anode at same temperature and pressure will be
1. 5.6 L
2. 11.2 L
3. 22.4 L
4. 44.8 L

Answer: 1. 5.6 L

Question 32. Which of the following reaction occurs at anode during the electrolysis of CuS04 using Cu-electrode?
1. \(4 \mathrm{OH}^{-} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}+\mathrm{O}_2+4 e\)
2. \(\mathrm{Cu}^2+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}\)
3. \(2 \mathrm{H}^{+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_2\)
4. \(\mathrm{Cu} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e\)

Answer: \(\mathrm{Cu} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e\)

Question 33. The container or the vessel where electrolysis is done is termed as
1. Voltameter
2. Ammeter
3. Thermometer
4. Voltmeter

Answer: 1. Voltameter

Question 34. During electrolysis the reaction occurs at anode is
1. Oxidation
2. Reduction
3. Substitution
4. None of these

Answer: 1. Oxidation

Question 35. Which of the following is formed at cathode during electrolysis of aqueous NaCI solution?
1. Na
2. H2
3. Cl2
4. O2

Answer: 2. H2

Question 36. Which of the following is formed at anode during electrolysis of water?
1. H2S
2. H2
3. O2
4. H2O2

Answer: 3. O2

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 37. During electrolysis of CuSO solution using Cu-electrode
1. No change in concentration of CuSO4 occurs
2. Concentration of CuSO4 in solution increases
3. Concentration of CuSO4 in solution first increases and then decreases
4. Concentration of CuSO4 in solution first decreases and then increases.

Answer: 1. No change in concentration of CuSO4 occurs

Question 38. Which of the following energy conversion takes place during electrolysis?
1. Chemical energy → electrical energy
2. Chemical energy → sound energy
3. Electrical energy → chemical energy
4. Electrical energy → light energy

Answer: 3. Electrical energy → chemical energy

Question 39. Nature of the current used in electrolysis is
1. DC
2. AC
3. DC or AC
4. Not specific

Answer: 1. DC

Question 40. The nature of the residual solution during electrolysis of aqueous solution of CuS04 using Pt-electrode is
1. Neutral
2. Acidic
3. Basic
4. Firstly acidic and then basic

Answer: 2. Acidic

Question 41. Which of the following is not a characteristic of electrolysis?
1. DC is used in electrolysis
2. ions of the electrolyte conduct electricity
3. Metallic ions are reduced and non metallic ions are oxidised
4. Oxidation takes place at cathode and reduction takes place at anode

Answer: 4. Oxidation takes place at cathode and reduction takes place at anode

Question 42. During electrolysis, electricity is conducted by
1. Free electrons
2. ions
3. Metal
4. Non-metal

Answer: 2. ions

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic A Electrolyte And Electrolysis Answer In brief:


Question 1. What do you mean by conductors of electricity?

Answer: Substances through which electricity can pass are called conductors of electricity. For example—different metals.

Question 2. What do you mean by non-conductors of electricity or insulators?
Answer: Substances through which electricity cannot pass are called non-conductors of electricity or insulators. For example—wood, glass etc.

Question 3. Name a non-metallic solid element which is a non-conductor of electricity.
Answer: Sulphur.

Question 4. Between NaCI and HCI, which one is a nonelectrolyte in its pure state?
Answer: HCI.

Question 5. Name an organic compound which can conduct electricity in its aqueous solution. Or, Give example of a compound whose aqueous solution is an weak electrolyte.
Answer: Acetic acid (CH3COOH)

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 6. Name a liquid which can conduct electricity though it is not an electrolyte.
Answer: Mercury.

Question 7. Name an compound.
Answer: Silica (SO2)

Question 8. Name a liquid element which is a nonconductor of electricity.
Answer: Bromine.

Question 9. Name a non-metallic substance which can conduct electricity but does not ionise. Or, Give example of a non electrolytic conductor of electricity.
Answer: Graphite.

Question 10. State whether an aqueous solution of sugar containing small amount of salt will conduct electricity or not.
Answer: An aqueous solution of sugar cannot conduct electricity but an aqueous solution of salt is an electrolyte. Hence, the aqueous solution of sugar containing a pinch of salt will conduct electricity.

Question 11. Give an example of a non-metallic cation.
Answer: Ammonium ion (NH4+).

Question 12. Give an example of a liquid non-electrolyte compound which is soluble in water.
Answer: Ethyl alcohol.

Question 13. What are the constituents of the solution of a strong electrolyte?
Answer: The solution of a strong electrolyte contains cations and anions formed by the dissociation of the electrolyte. As a strong electrolyte dissociates completely, there is no undissociated molecules of the electrolyte in the solution.

Question 14. What are the constituents of the solution of a weak electrolyte?
Answer: The solution of a weak electrolyte contains cations and anions formed by the dissociation of the electrolyte along with the undissociated molecules of the electrolyte.

Question 15. Identify the strong electrolytes and weak electrolytes from the given compounds— fused NaOH, aqueous solution of KCl, H2CO3, CH3COOH, HCN, ZnSO4 solution, Al(OH)3.
Answer:
Strong electrolytes: Fused NaOH, aqueous solution of KCl, and ZnSO4 solution.
Weak electrolytes: H2CO3,CH3COOH, HCN, Al(OH)3.

Question 16. Give an example of a weak electrolytic salt.
Answer: Sodium carbonate (Na2CO).

Question 17. Is the number of cations and anions formed due to the dissociation of an electrolyte always equal?
Answer: The number of cations in the solution of an electrolyte may or may not be equal to the number of anions. For example, in case of NaCI, it is same whereas, for Na2SO4, it is not.

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 18. How the degree of dissociation of an weak electrolyte can be increased?
Answer: Degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte can be increased up to a certain limit by diluting the solution of the weak electrolyte.

Question 19. Liquids like benzene, chloroform do not conduct electricity. Why?
Answer: Chloroform or benzene exists in liquid state, but they do not dissociate into cations and anions. Thus, they cannot conduct electricity.

Question 20. Though HCI is a covalent compound, it acts as a strong electrolyte in aqueous solution. Explain with reasons.
Answer: HCI is a covalent compound. But, HCI molecule is polar and it ionises in polar solvent like water to produce hydronium ion (H3O+) and chloride ion (Cl–  ).

\(\mathrm{HCl}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_3 \mathrm{O}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}^{-}\)

Due to the presence of these ions in aqueous solution, HCI acts as a strong electrolyte.

Question 21. What is a voltameter?
Answer: The apparatus in which the electrolysis of an electrolyte is carried out is known as a voltameter. It consists of a vessel (generally made of glass or fibre) in which the electrolytic solution is taken along with the corresponding electrodes.

Question 22. What is electrolytic dissociation?
Answer: Electrolytic substances dissociate spontaneously in molten state or in solution partially or completely to form their constituent ions. This phenomenon is known as electrolytic dissociation.

Question 23. Which type of current is used in electrolysis?
Answer: Direct current or DC.

Question 24. In which direction does the current flow through the electrolytic solution during electrolysis?
Answer: During electrolysis, electric current flows from the battery to the anode and again passes into the battery through the cathode.

Question 25. State whether electrolysis will take place if alternating current (AC) is passed through an electrolytic solution?
Answer: No, electrolysis will not take place.

Question 26. Which energy is responsible for chemical reaction occurring during electrolysis?
Answer: Electrical energy.

Question 27. Which is responsible for conducting of electricity during electrolysis of electrolytes?
Answer: Corresponding cations and anions of the electrolyte.

Question 28. Where do the cations migrate during electrolysis?
Answer: Towards the cathode.

Question 29. Where do the anions migrate during electrolysis?
Answer: Towards the anode.

Question 30. Mention the volumetric ratio of the gases produced at the cathode and anode during electrolysis of acidified water.
Answer: 2:1.

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 31. Which metal is used as cathode during electrolysis of water?
Answer: Platinum (Pt) metal.

Question 32. Between Na+ and Na, which one is more stable?
Answer: Na+ ion.

Question 33. Which substance is formed at anode during electrolysis of concentrated NaCI solution?
Answer: Chlorine gas.

Question 34. Which one of OHand Na+ ion will be neutralised at anode?
Answer: OHion.

Question 35. Which one of Cu2+ and H+ ion has the higher tendency to be neutralised at cathode?
Answer: Cu2+ ion.

Question 36. What can be observed during electrolysis of CuSO4 using Cu-electrode?
Answer: Cu-anode gets thinner while Cu-cathode gets thicker.

Question 37. What happens to the colour of the solution when an aqueous solution of CuSO4 is electrolysed using Pt-electrodes?
Answer: The blue colour of the solution gradually fades away.

Question 38. What happens to the colour of the solution when an aqueous solution of CuSO4 is electrolysed using Cu-electrodes?
Answer: The blue colour of the solution remains unchanged.

Question 39. Which ions are present in an aqueous solution of CuSO4?
Answer: Cu2+, 4SO2-, H+ and OH.

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic A Electrolyte And Electrolysis Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. Electrolytic compounds are generally ________ in nature.
Answer: Ionic

Question 2. Generally, ________ compounds are non-electrolytes.
Answer: Covalent

Question 3. The gas produced at _____ during electrolysis of water burns with a bluish flame.
Answer: Cathode

Question 4. The conductivity of water increases on the addition of a small amount of _______ or ______
Answer: Acide, base

Question 5. _______ is a non-metal that can be used as electrode.
Answer: Graphite

Question 6. At the cathode, cations get _______ by accepting _______
Answer: Reduced, electron

Question 7. At the anode, anions get _______ by releasing ________
Answer: Oxidised, electron

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 8. At the electrodes, ions lose their _______
Answer: Charge

Question 9. _______ is a covalent compound which acts as an electrolyte in its aqueous solution.
Answer: Hcl

Question 10. Strong electrolytes dissociate _______ to produce ions in aqueous solutions.
Answer: Completely

Question 11. In aqueous solution, very few molecules of a weak electrolyte undergo _______
Answer: Dissociation

Question 12. NaCI does not conduct electricity in _______ state.
Answer: Solid

Question 13. Electrolytes dissociate into their corresponding _______ in polar solvents.
Answer: ions

Question 14. ________ are responsible for conduction of electricity through metals.
Answer: Free electrons

Question 15. _______ are not transferred during conduction of electricity through metals.
Answer: Atoms

Question 16. The ions ______ from one part of the solution to another part during electrolysis.
Answer: Move

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 17. The _______ of the electrolyte is maintained at any instant during electrolysis.
Answer: Electrical neutrality

Question 18. The tendency of H+ ions to be discharged at the cathode is _______ than that of Na+.
Answer: Greater

Question 19. Electrolysis of a dilute aqueous solution of NaCI using mercury electrodes produces _______ at the cathode.
Answer: Sodium-amalgam

Question 20. In an electrolytic cell, _______ energy is converted into ________ energy.
Answer: Chemical, Electrical

Question 21. Electrolysis is a _______ process.
Answer: Redox

Question 22. In an electrolytic cell, the electric current flows from _______ to _______ within the electrolyte.
Answer: Cathode, anode

Question 23. HCI does not conduct electricity in _______ solvents.
Answer: Non-polar

Question 24. If an electrolyte is added to pure water, then its electrical conductivity ______ compared to that of pure water.
Answer: Increase

Question 25. During electrolysis of CuSO4 solution using Cu electrodes, the ________ gets gradually eroded while the ________ becomes thicker.
Answer: Anode, cathode

Question 26. HCOOH is ________ electrolyte.
Answer: Weak

Question 27. Na+ is deposited at ______
Answer: Cathode

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 28. _________ gas is formed at anode during electrolysis of water.
Answer: Oxygen

Question 29. _______ is formed at anode during electrolysis of copper sulfate solution using Cu-electrode.
Answer: Cu2+

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic A Electrolyte And Electrolysis State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Electrolytes conduct electricity in solid state.
Answer: False

Question 2. H2CO3 is a strong electrolyte.
Answer: False

Question 3. The solution of a weak electrolyte contains both ions and molecules.
Answer: True

Question 4. With the rise in temperature, the conductance of an aqueous solution of an electrolyte remains unchanged.
Answer: False

Question 5. Distilled water conducts electricity.
Answer: False

Question 6. HCI is an electrolyte in its pure state.
Answer: False

Question 7. During electrolysis of acidified water, H2 gas is produced at the cathode.
Answer: True

Question 8. Electrolysis takes place if alternating current (AC) is passed through the solution.
Answer: False

Question 9. Reduction takes place at cathode whereas oxidation takes place at anode.
Answer: True

Question 10. Copper is an example of an inert electrode.
Answer: False

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 11. During electrolysis of CuSO4 solution using Cu electrodes, the anode gets gradually eroded while the cathode gets thicker.
Answer: True

Question 12. When CuSO4 solution is electrolysed using Pt-electrodes, the blue colour of the solution remains unchanged.
Answer: False

Question 13. Mercury can conduct electricity but it is a non-electrolyte.
Answer: True

Question 14. The number of cations and anions present in an electrolyte is always equal.
Answer: False

Question 15. Voltameter is used to measure the potential difference between any two points of an electrical circuit.
Answer: False

Question 16. Lower the position of a metal in the electrochemical series, lower will be the tendency of the cations of that metal to get discharged at the cathode.
Answer: False

Question 17. Electrolytes conduct electricity through electron during electrolysis.
Answer: False

Question 18. CH3COOH is a strong electrolyte.
Answer: False

Question 19. NH4OH is weak electrolyte.
Answer: True

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 20. H2 gas is formed at cathode during electrolysis of aqueous solution of NaCI.
Answer: True

Question 21. O2 gas is formed at cathode during electrolysis of water.
Answer: False

Question 22. Mass of the cathode gradually increases during electrolysis of copper sulfate solution (aqueous) using copper electrode.
Answer: True

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic B Application Of Electrolysis Synopsis:

1. The process of electrolysis is used in the extraction of metals, refining of metals and in electroplating.
2. When a molten mixture of alumina, cryolite and fluorspar is electrolysed using graphite as anode and gas carbon as cathode, pure aluminium is deposited at the cathode.

Electrorefining of copper is carried out by taking an aqueous solution of CuSO4 containing small amount of H2SO4 as the electrolyte in a container coated with lead, the impure copper rod as anode and a thin plate of pure copper as cathode.

3. During electroplating, the object on which electroplating is to be done is taken as the cathode, a plate of pure metal to be deposited on the object is taken as the anode and an aqueous solution of a salt of the metal to be deposited is taken as the electrolyte.

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic B Application Of Electrolysis Short And Long Answer Type Questions:


Question 1. Mention the practical uses of electrolysis.

Answer:
1. Strong electro-positive metals like Na, K, Ca, Mg, Al etc are extracted using electrolysis.
2. Electrolysis is used in the purification process of some metals like Cu, Ag and Al.
3. Electrolysis is used in the industrial preparation of several substances like oxygen, chlorine, sodium hydroxide etc.
4. Electrolysis is used in the process of electroplating.

Question 2. What do you mean by the term ‘extraction of metal’? Which type of metals can be extracted by electrolytic reduction and why?

Answer:
1. Separation of a metal from its ores using a series of physical and chemical processes is known as extraction of metal. The processes are employed to obtain the pure metal by removing the impurities present in the ore of the metal.
2. Highly reactive metals like Na, K, Ca, Al, Mg etc., are extracted from their ores by electrolytic reduction. The oxides of these metals are highly stable and hence carbon reduction process is not suitable for extraction of these metals. Thus, they are extracted by electrolysis of their molten chloride salts or sometimes their molten oxides (e.g. Al).

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 3. Describe the process of extraction of aluminium from alumina by electrolytic method.

Answer:
Electrolyte used: A molten mixture of pure alumina (Al2O3), cryolite (Na3AIF6) and fluorspar ( CaF2) is used as the electrolytic solution.
Voltameter and electrodes: An iron tank is used as container in which the electrolyte is taken. The inner walls of the container are lined with gas carbon which acts as cathode. Some graphite rods are partially immersed into the solution. These rods act as anode.

Process: In the tank, a molten mixture of the electrolyte containing 60% cryolite (Na3AIF6), 20% pure alumina(Al2O3) and 20% fluorspar (CaF2) is taken. The melting point of pure alumina is 2050°C, but in the mixture the melting point decreases considerably to 900°C.

The surface of the electrolytic mixture is covered with powdered coke to prevent the oxidation and resulting corrosion of the graphite anode. Aluminium is liberated at the cathode in molten state which deposits at the bottom of the vessel from where it is taken out through the outlet. At anode, oxygen is produced. The aluminium thus obtained is about 99.95% pure.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Extraction Of AI By Electrolytic Method
Electrolytic dissociation:
\(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{Al}_2 \mathrm{O}_3 \rightleftharpoons 2 \mathrm{Al}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{O}^{2-} \\
& \text { (molten) }
\end{aligned}\)

Cathode reaction: \(\mathrm{Al}^{3+}+3 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Al}\)

Anode reaction: \(3O^{2-} \rightarrow 3O+6 e\); \(3 \mathrm{O}+3 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_2 \uparrow\)

Question 4. Why is cryolite and fluorspar added to alumina during the extraction of aluminium by electrolytic method?

Answer: During electrolysis of aluminium by electrolytic method, cryolite and fluorspar are added to pure alumina because of the following:

1. Alumina has a melting point of about 2050°C. At such a high temperature, most of the aluminium produced is wasted due to evaporation. Also, it requires a large amount of electricity to carry out the reaction. When cryolite and fluorspar are added to pure alumina the melting point of the mixture drops to 900°C . Hence, the cost of production decreases.

2. Fluorspar decreases the viscosity of the solution. Therefore, ions can move freely in solution and the conductivity increases.

Question 5. Electrolysis of acidified solution of CuS04 deposits Cu at cathode. But, electrolysis of acidified solution of an Al-salt does not deposit Al at cathode. Explain with reasons.

Answer: Acidified solution of CuSO4 contains Cu2+ and H+ ions as cations. Tendency of Cu2+ ions to get discharged at cathode is more than that of H+ ions. Hence, Cu2+ ions migrate preferentially to cathode and accept electrons to form Cu-atoms.

On the other hand, aqueous solution of an Al-salt contains Al3+ and H+ ions. But, the tendency of H+ ions to get discharged at cathode is more than that of Al3+ ions. So, H+ ions migrate preferentially towards cathode and are reduced to H-atom. Hence, Al-atoms are not discharged at cathode.

Question 6. What do you mean by electrorefining of metals? Discuss the principle of electrolytic refining.

Answer:

Electrorefining of metals:

The process of removal of impurities from a metal extracted from its ore and its conversion to pure metal by electrolysis is known as electro-refining of metal.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

In electrolytic refining, a block of impure metal is taken as an anode and a plate or rod of pure metal is taken as cathode. An aqueous solution of a salt of that metal is taken as an electrolyte. On electrolysis, metal atoms at anode are oxidized to ions and dissolve into solution. The cations of the metal are discharged at cathode and deposited on the cathode in pure state.

Question 7. Briefly describe the electrolytic refining of copper.

Answer:
Electrolyte: Aqueous solution of copper sulphate (CuSO4) mixed with dilute H2S04.
Electrodes: A thin plate of pure copper is used as the cathode and a plate of impure copper is used as the anode.

Process: The electrolyte is taken in a container lined with lead and electricity is passed through the solution. At anode (impure Cu block), Cu- atoms are oxidised to Cu2 + ions and dissolves into the solution.

These Cu2 + towards the cathode (pure Cu plate) and each accepts 2 electrons to form Cu-atom. The produced atoms are deposited at the cathode. The copper obtained in this method is almost 99.99% pure.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Electrolytic Refining Of Copper

Electrolytic dissociation: \(\mathrm{CuSO}_4 \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\)

Cathode reaction: \(\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}\)

Anode reaction: \(\mathrm{Cu} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+2 e\)

Question 8. What is important.

Answer:
1. During the electrorefining of copper, the more electropositive metals (Fe, Ni, Zn etc.) present as impurities in the impure copper anode, move into the solution and the less electropositive metals (Au, Ag, Pt etc.) deposit with other impurities below the anode as mud. This is known as anode mud.
2. Anode mud contains precious metals like gold, silver, platinum etc.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 9. What is electroplating? Describe the principle.

Answer:

Electroplating:

1. The process of formation of a uniform coating of a less reactive metal (such as iron, copper etc.) over a relatively more reactive metal (such as silver, gold, nickel etc.) by electrolytic method is known as electroplating.

2. The article which is to be electroplated is taken as cathode and a pure block of the metal which is to be used as coating is taken as anode. A solution of a water-soluble salt of the metal which is used as coating is taken as electrolytic solution.

For example, while a silver article is electroplated with gold, the silver article is taken as cathode, a block of pure gold is taken as anode and an aqueous solution of potassium aurocyanide is taken as the electrolytic solution.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Electroplating
Question 10. What are the purposes of electroplating?

Answer:

The purposes of electroplating:

1. A reactive metal or its alloys are easily attacked by atmospheric oxygen, water vapour or C02 and undergo corrosion. To prevent corrosion, the article is electroplated by a less reactive metal.
2. The physical appearance can be made more attractive by electroplating. For example, when silver jewellery are electroplated with gold, they become more attractive and beautiful.
3. Metal surface can be made more rigid and corrosion of metal due to friction can be avoided by electroplating.

Question 11. What precautions should be during electroplating?

Answer:

Precautions should be taken during electroplating

1. The concentration of metal ions in electrolytic solution should be high.
2. The solution should be of high conductivity.
3. The salt (electrolyte) should be stable, i.e., it should not react with air.
4. There should be considerable rate of dissolution at the anode so that concentration of the solution remains constant.
5. Direct current (DC) of low intensity should be applied to the solution for a longer period of time.
6. The metal surface on which the electroplating is to be done should be smooth and clean.

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 12. Name the electrodes arid electrolytic solution used in electroplating an article with the following metals:
1. Copper, 2. Silver, 3. Tin, 4. Nickel, 5. Chromium, 6. Gold.

Answer: Answers are given in the given table:

The metal used for electroplating Cathode Anode (metal plate) Electrolyte (aqueous solution)
1. Copper The article which is to be electroplated A thin plate of pure copper Copper sulphate (CuSO4)
2. Silver A thin plate of pure silver Potassium argentocyanide K[Ag(CN)2]
3. Tin A thin plate of pure tin Stannous chloride ( SnCI2)
4. Nickel A thin plate of pure nickel Nickel sulphate (NiSO4)
5. Chromium A thin plate of pure chromium Chromic sulphate [Cr2(SO4)3] and chromic acid (H2CrO4)
6. Gold A thin plate of pure gold Potassium aurocyanide K[Au(CN)2]

 

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic B Application Of Electrolysis Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. The process of electrolysis is applied in
1. Electroplating
2. Electrorefining
3. Extraction of metals
4. All of these

Answer: 4. All of these

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 2. During electroplating by nickel, the electrolyte used is
1. Ni Br2 solution
2. NiSO4.(NH4)2SO4.6H2O solution with small amount of H2SO4
3. Molten nickel oxide (NiO)
4. NiCI2 solution

Answer: 2. NiSO4.(NH4)2SO4.6H2O solution with small amount of H2SO4

Question 3. The objective of electroplating is to
1. Protect metallic object from weathering
2. Make the metallic object more attractive
3. Increase the metallic mass of the object
4. Both A and B

Answer: 4. Both A and B

Question 4. During the electroplating of an object by silver, a pure silver plate is used as the
1. Cathode
2. Anode
3. Either anode or cathode
4. Electrolyte

Answer: 2. Anode

Question 5. During electroplating, electrical conductivity of electrolytic solution used should be
1. High
2. Low
3. Moderate
4. Of any value

Answer: 1. High

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 6. During electroplating
1. The cathode is eroded
2. The anode is eroded
3. Neither cathode nor anode is eroded
4. Both the electrodes are eroded.

Answer: 2. The anode is eroded

Question 7. Which is not present in the anode mud deposited during electrorefining of copper?
1. Au
2. Ag
3. Pt
4. Fe

Answer: 4. Fe

Question 8. During electrorefining of copper, the electrolyte used is
1. Pure CuSO
2. Aqueous solution of pure CuSO
3. Mixture of aqueous solution of CuS04 and small amount of H2SO4
4. None of these

Answer: 3. Mixture of aqueous solution of CuS04 and small amount of H2SO4

Question 9. Which of the following is used as cathode to electroplate iron substances with copper?
1. Iron substance
2. Copperplate
3. Carbon substance
4. Nickel substance

Answer: 1. Iron substance

Question 10. Which of the following is used as cathode to electroplate on a substance with gold (gold plating)?
1. Pure gold plate
2. The substance on which gold plating is to be done
3. Platinum plate
4. Copperplate

Answer: 2. The substance on which gold plating is to be done

Question 11. Which of the following is used as anode in the electrorefining of copper?
1. Copper
2. Graphite
3. Platinum
4. Steel

Answer: 1. Copper

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 12. Which one of the following is used as anode to electroplate a spoon of silver by gold?
1. Pt
2. Ag
3. Au
4. Graphite

Answer: 3. Au

Question 13. Which of the following metal is obtained from anode mud?
1. Au
2. Mg
3. Al
4. Na

Answer: 1. Au

Question 14. Which of the following metal can not be extracted by electrolysis?
1. Na
2. Zn
3. Al
4. K

Answer: 2. Zn

Question 15. On which of the following metal can anodizing be done?
1. Iron
2. Aluminium
3. Copper
4. Zinc

Answer: 2. Aluminium

Question 16. Which of the following is used as anode to electroplate iron with nickel ?
1. Iron
2. Nickel sulfate
3. Nickel
4. NiSO4 + H2SO4

Answer: 3. Nickel

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic B Application Of Electrolysis Answer In Brief:


Question 1. Mention some important practical applications of electrolysis.

Answer: Some of the important practical applications of electrolysi are:
1. Electroplating, electrorefining and
2. Metal extraction by electrolytic reduction.

Question 2. Which compounds are used as cathode and anode during the extraction of aluminium from bauxite?
Answer: Graphite as anode and gas carbon as cathode.

Question 3. Which substances are added to alumina during extraction of aluminium by electrolytic reduction?
Answer: Cryolite (AIF3 • 3NaF) and fluorspar (CaF2)

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 4. Name a metal which is extracted by electrolytic process.
Answer: Aluminium.

Question 5. What is the melting point of the electrolytic mixture containing alumina, cryolite and fluorspar?
Answer: 900°C.

Wbbse Class 10 Current Electricity Questions And Answers

Question 6. Name a metal other than aluminium which is extracted by electrolytic reduction.
Answer: Sodium.

Question 7. How many electrons are exchanged between the cathode and anode during aluminium extraction?
Answer: 6 electrons are exchanged between the cathode and anode during aluminium extraction.

Cathode:\(2 \mathrm{Al}^{3+}+6 e \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Al}\)

Anode: \(3O^{2-} \rightarrow 3O+6 e\)

Question 8. What are the products obtained during aluminium extraction form alumina?
Answer: Aluminium metal is obtained at cathode and oxygen gas is obtained at anode.

Question 9. State the composition of the electrolytic mixture used in the extraction of aluminium by electrolytic method.
Answer: 20% alumina (AI2O3),60% cryolite (Na3AIF6) and 20% fluorspar (CaF2).

Question 10. Name the electrolyte used during electroplating of a metallic object by gold?
Answer: Potassium aurocyanide, K[Au(CN)2].

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 11. As which electrode the impure copper rod is taken during the purification of copper in electrolytic method?
Answer: A thick slab of impure copper is taken as an anode.

Question 12. Name an element present in anode mud.
Answer: Gold (Au).

Question 13. What should be used as the electrolyte to electroplate an iron spoon with chromium?
Answer: A mixture of chromic sulphate solution and a little amount of chromic acid i.e., Cr2(SO4)3 + H2CrO4.

Question 14. Name the electrolyte used during electroplating of copper on any subject.
Answer: Aqueous copper sulphate solution along with a little amount of sulfuric acid.

Question 15. What substance do you take as electrolyte to electroplate a silver spoon with gold?
Answer: Potassium aurocyanide (K[Au(CN)2]) .

Question 16. What should be the electrolyte for the electroplating of an iron spoon by nickel?
Answer: A mixture of nickel sulphate and a little amount of boric acid.

Question 17. What can be taken as cathode while electroplating a copper spoon with silver?
Answer: The copper spoon.

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic B Application Of Electrolysis Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. During electroplating, metal plate with which the electroplating is to be done is taken as the ________
Answer: Anode

Question 2. During electroplating, the object on which the plating is to be done is taken as the ________
Answer: Cathode

Question 3. During electroplating, a _______ electric current should be passed through the solution for ______ period of time.
Answer: Small,long

Question 4. Highly _________ renderer metals are extracted from their ores by electrolytic reduction method.
Answer: Electropositive

Question 5. Almost ________ pure copper is obtained by electrorefining.
Answer: 99.9%

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 6. To reduce the melting point of the electrolyte in aluminium extraction _______ are mixed with alumina.
Answer: Cryolite,fluorspar

Question 7. The electrolyte used in Al-extraction melts at ______
Answer: 900C

Question 8. ______ metal can be purified by electrolytic method.
Answer: Copper

Question 9. By electroplating coating of ______ metal is done on ______ reactive metal.
Answer: Less, more

Question 10. During silver plating rod of pure _______ is used as anode.
Answer: Silver

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Topic B Application Of Electrolysis State Whether True Or false

Question 1. During extraction of aluminium from bauxite, graphite is used as anode and gas carbon is used as cathode.
Answer: True

Question 2. During electroplating of an object by nickel, the electrolyte used is NiCI2 solution.
Answer: False

Question 3. In case of electrorefining, a rod of impure metal is taken as anode while a rod of pure metal is taken as cathode.
Answer: True

Question 4. Less reactive metals are generally extracted from their ores by electrolytic reduction.
Answer: False

Question 5. Ag, Au, Pt etc, metals can be found in anode mud.
Answer: True

Question 6. Coating of more reactive metal is done on less reactive metal by electroplating.
Answer: False

Question 7. The substance on which electroplating is to be done is used as cathode.
Answer: True

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 8. Gold plate is used as cathode electroplating silver jewellery by gold.
Answer: False

Electric Current And Chemical Reactions Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Columns:


Question 1.

Column A Column B 
Liquid non-conductor 1. Hg
Solid conductor 2. Sulphur
Solid non-conductor 3. Br2
Liquid conductor 4. Graphite

 

Answer:
Liquid non-conductor: 3. Br2
Solid conductor: 4. Graphite
Solid non-conductor:  2. Sulphur
Liquid conductor:  1. Hg

Question 2.

Column A Column B
Non-metallic electrode 1. Pure water
Anode 2. K[Ag(CN)2]
Electroplating by gold 3. Graphite
Non-conductor 4. Oxidation occurs

 

Answer:
Non-metallic electrode: 2. K[Ag(CN)2]
Anode: 4. Oxidation occurs
Electroplating by gold: 1. Pure water
Non-conductor: 3. Graphite

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy

Metallurgy Topic A Ores, Minerals And Alloys Synopsis:

1. Metals such as, iron, copper, zinc, aluminium etc., have immense practical applications in our daily life.
2. Naturally occurring inorganic substances derived from the earth’s crust which contain metals in their free state or in the form of compounds along with earthy and rocky impurities are called minerals.
3. Minerals from which high-grade metals can be conveniently and economically extracted on a large scale are called ores.
4. All ores are minerals, but all minerals are not ores.
5. A homogeneous or heterogeneous mixture of two or more metals or a metal and a nonmetal having different characteristic properties than the constituent elements is called an alloy.
6. Alloys are stronger, have greater tensile strength and are less reactive than the individual constituent metals or non-metals. These properties make them less susceptible towards corrosion and weathering.

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

Metallurgy Topic A Ores, Minerals And Alloys Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. Classify iron on the basis of carbon content. Which among these is the purest?

Answer:

Classification Of iron on the basis of carbon content

1. On the basis a carbon content, iron is divided into three categories—cast iron (C: 2-4.5%), wrought iron (C: 0.1-0.15%) and steel (C: 0.151.5%).
2. Wrought iron is the purest form of iron.

Question 2. Write some uses of cast iron.

Answer:

Cast iron is used in the making of

1. Wrought iron and steel
2. Tubes, iron, railing, cauldron, lamp post etc.

Question 3. Write some uses of wrought iron.

Answer:

Wrought iron is used in the making of

1. Core of electromagnet
2. Wires, nails, rods, chains etc.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 4. Write some uses of steel.

Answer:

Some uses of steel:

Steel finds extensive use in modern civilization. It is used in the making of
1. Automobiles, rails, knives, scissors, surgical instruments, ships, blades tankers etc.
2. Cooking utensils,
3. Alloy steel is made by adding other metals with steel.

Question 5. Why is copper used in the making of electrical wires and instruments?

Answer: Copper is a metal of low resistance and high malleability. Thus, it has a high value of electrical conductance and also it can be easily shaped into wires . Hence, it is used in the making of electrical wires and instruments.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy

Question 6. Copper is a good conductor – of heat— state one application of this property.

Answer:

Copper is a good conductor – of heat

1. Copper is used in making cooking utensils because it is a good conductor of heat.
2. Copper is used in the construction of a calorimeter which is quite helpful in measuring the amount of absorbed or released heat.
3. Copper is used in the making of boilers in factories. Being a good conductor it helps in boiling of water quickly.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 7. Write some important uses of zinc.

Answer:

Some important uses of zinc:

1. Zinc is used as a reagent in the laboratory for the preparation of hydrogen.
2. It is used in electrochemical cells and batteries.
3. It is also used in making of zinc white.
4. Zinc is coated over iron to protect it from rusting.

Question 8. Aluminium is a light non-corrosive metal—state application of this property.

Answer:

Aluminium is a light non-corrosive metal

1. Being a light metal aluminium is used in the manufacture of body parts of machines.
2. As it is non-corrosive and light, it is used in making the body of automobiles, aeroplanes, window frames, buckets, tanks, boxes etc.

Question 9. Some properties of aluminium are mentioned below. State the applications of these properties.
1. Aluminium is a good conductor of electricity.
2. Aluminium can be easily beaten into thin sheets.

Answer:
1. Aluminium is a good conductor of electricity. Hence, it is used for making electrical wires and electrical instruments.
2. Aluminium can be easily beaten into thin sheets. Due to this property, aluminium is used in making packing foils.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 10. What is an alloy? Name a common alloy and state its composition.

Answer:

Alloy:

1. An alloy is a homogeneous or heterogeneous mixture of two or more metals or sometimes of metals and non-metals having characteristic properties different from their constituent elements.
2. A common and widely used alloy is brass. It is made of copper (60-80%) and zinc (20-40%).

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Bronze

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy German Silver

 

Question 11. State two important characteristics of alloys.

Answer:

Some important characteristics of alloys are discussed below—

1. An alloy may be homogeneous or heterogeneous in nature.
2. An alloy has different characteristic properties than its constituent metals.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 12. Write down the advantages of using alloys.

Answer:

The advantages of using alloys are—

1. Alloys have more tensile strength than their constituent elements. E.g., brass or bell metal is more tensile than copper.
2. Metals melt at very high temperatures. When a pure metal is alloyed with another metal or non-metal, its melting point generally reduces.
3. Metals are extremely susceptible to chemical and weather attacks. Alloys are more resistant to corrosion. When a metal is alloyed, it becomes less reactive, thereby enhancing its corrosion resistance.
4. To increase or decrease the conductivity of metals, alloying can be done. E.g., specific resistance of nichrome is greater than its component metals, i.e., conductivity of nichrome is less than that of its component metals and thus it is used in an electric heater.

Question 13. Name two alloys of iron, state their compositions and mention some uses of these alloys.

Answer:

Composition and uses of alloys of iron are:

Alloy Composition Uses
Stainless steel Fe: 73%, Cr: 18%, Ni: 8%, C: 1% In making of utensils, knife, scissors, surgical instruments, machine parts etc.
Nickel steel Fe: 96-98%, Ni: 2-4% Manufacturing automobile parts, gear, propellers of aircraft, cables etc.


Question 14. Give the composition And uses of two alloys containing both copper and zinc as their constituents.

Answer: Brass and bronze contain both copper and zinc as their constituents.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Alloy Composition Uses
Brass Cu: 60-80%, Zn: 20-40% Making parts of telescopes, barometer etc., utensils, pipes, statues etc.
Bronze Cu: 80%, Sn: 18%, Zn: 2% Making statues, coins, utensils, medals etc.


Question 15. Write down the name of the main component of brass. Why is the use of brass more advantageous than that of its main component?

Answer:

The main component of brass is copper (Cu: 6080%, Zn: 20-40%). The advantages of using brass compared to copper are as follows—

1. Brass has more tensile strength than soft metal copper.
2. Reactivity of brass is less than that of copper and hence brass is less corrosive in nature.

Question 16. Write down the name, composition and uses of some alloys of aluminium.
Answer:

The name, composition and uses of some alloys of aluminium are—

Alloy Composition Use
Magnelium Al = 90-95%, Mg = 5-10% Parts of aeroplanes, balance and scientific apparatus are made with magnelium.
Duralumin Al = 95%, Cu = 4%, Mg = 0.5%, Mn = 0.5% Parts of aeroplane and motor car, pressure cookers are made with duralumin.
Aluminium- bronze Al = 10%, Cu = 90% Coin, statues, flower vases, and cooking utensils are made with aluminium bronze.
Alnico Fe = 60%, Ni = 20%, Al = 12%, Co = 8% Permanent magnets of high power are made with alnico.


Question 17. What do you mean by amalgam and give example; Mention some uses of mercury alloys.

Answer:

Amalgam:

The alloys which contain mercury (Hg) as one of their constituents are commonly known as amalgams. E.g., sodium amalgam (Na-Hg), magnesium amalgam (Mg-Hg) etc.

The uses of mercury alloys, i.e., amalgams are as follows—
1. Tin-amalgam (Sn-Hg) is used in the preparation of the mirror.
2. Sodium-amalgam (Na-Hg) and zinc-amalgam (Zn-Hg) are used as reagents (reductants) in organic reactions.
3. Silver amalgam (Ag-Hg) is used in dental treatment.

Question 18. Define minerals and give examples.

Answer:

Minerals:

Minerals may be defined as the naturally occurring inorganic substances found in the earth’s crust or on earth surface which contains metals in their native state or in the form of compounds mixed with other impurities. For example—red haematite (Fe2O3), magnetite (Fe2O4), and iron pyrites (FeS2) are minerals containing iron.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Red Haematite

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Malachite


Question 19. Define ores and give examples.

Answer:

Ores:

The minerals from which a metal can be conveniently and economically extracted are known as ores of the metal. For example—High quality iron can be conveniently and economically extracted from red haematite (Fe2O3). Hence, red haematite is an ore of iron.

Similarly, malachite [CuCO3 • Cu(OH)2 ] is an ore of copper.

Question 20. Differentiate between monerals and ores.

Answer:

The major differences between minerals and ores are:

Minerals Ores
Minerals    are inorganic substances found in the earth’s crust containing one or more metals, in their native state or as their compounds, along with impurities. For example, copper pyrites (Cu2S-Fe2S3) is a mineral of copper. The minerals from which a metal can be conveniently and    economically extracted involving less complex-    chemical methods are called ores of that metal. For example, red haematite (Fe2O3) and iron pyrites (FeS2) both are minerals of iron but only iron pyrites is the ore of iron not haematite.
All minerals are not ores. All ores are minerals.


Question 21. All ores are minerals, but all minerals are not ores – justify the statement.

Answer:

All ores are minerals, but all minerals are not ores

Minerals are the naturally occuring inorganic substances which contain one or more metals, in their native state or as their compounds, along with impurities.

On the other hand, the minerals from which a metal can be conveniently and economically extracted are called ores of that metal. Obviously, all ores are minerals.

But, we cannot extract metals from any mineral by convenient and cheap methods. Hence, all minerals cannot be called ores.

For example, both bauxite and china-clay are the minerals of aluminium. But, only bauxite is considered as the ore of aluminium, not china-clay.

Question 22. Why zinc belend can be termed as both mineral and ore?

Answer: Zinc blend (ZnS) is a solid metal compound which can be found in earth crust or in mines. Hence it can be termed as mineral of zinc. Moreover, high quality metallic zinc can be extracted from zinc blend using easier metallurgical technique. Hence zinc blend can be termed as ore of zinc metal, too.

Question 23. Write down the name and formula of important ores of copper.

Answer: Oxide ore — cuprite (Cu2O)
Sulphide ore — copper pyrites (Cu2S-  Fe2S3 or CuFeS2), copper glance – (Cu2S)
Carbonate ore — malachite [CuCO3 • Cu(OH)2]

Question 24. Write down the names of important ores of iron.

Answer: Oxide ore — red haematite (Fe2O3), magnetite (Fe2O4)
Carbonate ore — spathic iron orsedarite (Fe2O3)

Question 25. Write down the names of important ores of zinc.

Answer: Oxide ore — zincite (ZnO)
Sulphide ore — zinc blend (ZnS)
Carbonate ore — calamine (ZnCO3)

Question 26. Write down the names of important ores of aluminium.

Answer: Oxide ore — bauxite ( Al2O3 • H2O), gibbsite (Al2O3-3H2O)
Fluoride ore — cryolite (AIF3 • 2NaF)

Metallurgy Topic A Ores, Minerals And Alloys Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

 

Question 1. The core of an electromagnet is made of
1. Cast iron
2. Steel
3. Wrought iron
4. Magnetite

Answer: 3. Wrought iron

Question 2. The metal used in making of electrolytic cells and dry cells is
1. Al
2. Sn
3. Zn
4. Cu

Answer: 3. Zn

Question 3. Which of the following is the purest form of iron?
1. Cast iron
2. Wrought iron
3. Steel
4. Invar

Answer: 2. Wrought iron

Question 4. The amount of carbon present in steel is
1. 0.01-0.2%
2. 0.15-1.5%
3. 2-4.5%
4. 5-5.6%

Answer: 2. 0.15-1.5%

Question 5. Which of the following is not a constituent of the alloy, duralumin?
1. Copper
2. Magnesium
3. Manganese
4. Nickel

Answer: 4. Nickel

Question 6. The percentage of silver in German silver is
1. 2-5%
2. 5-10%
3. 10-15%
4. 0%

Answer: 4. 0%

Question 7. Which of the following alloys does not contain zinc as a constituent metal?
1. Brass
2. German silver
3. Bell metal
4. Gem metal

Answer: 3. Bell metal

Question 8. Which of the following alloys does not contain nickel as a constituent metal?
1. Stainless steel
2. Manganese steel
3. German silver
4. Invar

Answer: 2. Manganese steel

Question 9. Which of the following minerals is not an ore?
1. Red haematite
2. Zinc blende
3. Bauxite
4. Iron pyrites

Answer: 4. Iron pyrites

Question 10. The oxide ore of zinc is
1. Calamine
2. Zinc blende
3. Zincite
4. Willemite

Answer: 3. Zincite

Question 11. Tin-amalgam is used
1. To make spectacles
2. As a reducing agent
3. To make mirrors
4. To make thermometers

Answer: 3. To make mirrors

Question 12. Which of the following is a mineral of iron but not its ore?
1. Red haematite
2. Magnetite
3. iron pyrites
4. Siderite

Answer: 3. iron pyrites

Question 13. Gibbsite is the ore of
1. Al
2. Cu
3. Zn
4. Fe

Answer: 1. Al

Question 14. Calamine is the ore of
1. Iron
2. Copper
3. zinc
4. Aluminium

Answer: 3. zinc

Question 15. Components of German silver are
1. Cu, Zn, Sn
2. Al, Cu, Mg, Mn
3. Fe, Cr, Ni, C
4. Cu, Zn, Ni

Answer: 4. Cu, Zn, Ni

Question 16. Which one of the following is the ore of aluminium?
1. Red haematite
2. Malachite
3. Chalcopyrites
4. Bauxite

Answer: 4. Bauxite

Question 17. Main component of duralumin is
1. Al
2. Mg
3. Cu
4. Sn

Answer: 1. Al

Question 18. Chalcopyrites is the ore of
1. Zn
2. Fe
3. Mg
4. Cu

Answer: 4. Cu

Question 19. Which of the following is a sulphide ore?
1. Bauxite
2. Zincite
3. Haematite
4. Zinc blende

Answer: 4. Zinc blende

Question 20. Composition of brass is
1. Cu and Sn
2. Zn and Cu
3. Cu and Pb
4. Cu and Al

Answer: 2. Zn and Cu

Question 21. Which of the following is not an ore of Cu?
1. Haematite
2. Chalcocite
3. Azurite
4. Malachite

Answer: 1. Haematite

Question 22. Which of the following metal pair is present in both bronze and bell metal?
1. Iron, nickel
2. Copper, tin
3. Zinc, copper
4. Iron, tin

Answer: 2. Copper, tin

Question 23. Among the components of amalgam, one must be
1. Fe
2. Ag
3. Au
4. Hg

Answer: 4. Hg

Question 24. The amount of carbon is highest in
1. Steel
2. Wrought iron
3. Cast iron
4. Chrome steel

Answer: 3. Cast iron

Question 25. The alloy used in preparation of the structure of aeroplane is
1. German silver
2. Bronze
3. Invar
4. Duralumin

Answer: 4. Duralumin

Question 26. Haematite is the ore of
1. Copper
2. Aluminium
3. Iron
4. Zinc

Answer: 3. Iron

Question 27. Which one of the following metal is present in china clay?
1. Cu
2. Al
3. Fe
4. Zn

Answer: 2. Al

Question 28. Which one of the following contains aluminium?
1. Bronze
2. Bell metal
3. German silver
4. Duralumin

Answer: 4. Duralumin

Question 29. Percentage of carbon in wrought iron is
1. 0.1-0.15%
2. 0.16-0.6%
3. 2-2.5%
4. 3-3.5%

Answer: 1. 0.1-0.15%

Question 30. The main component of magnelium is
1. Mn
2. Al
3. Mg
4. C

Answer: 2. Al

Question 31. Which one of the following alloys contains zinc?
1. Bell metal
2. Brass
3. Bronze
4. Duralumin

Answer: 2. Brass

Question 32. Which of the following is the formula of bauxite?
1. Al2O3  
2. Al2O3 .H2O
3. Al2O3 .2H2O
4. AlF3.3NaF

Answer:

Metallurgy Topic A Ores, Minerals And Alloys Answer In Brief:


Question 1. Arrange wrought iron, steel and cast iron in the order of increasing carbon content present in them.

Answer: Wrought iron < steel < cast iron.

Question 2. Which metal is present in each of bronze, brass and bell metal?
Answer: In each of bronze, brass and bell metal, copper is present.

Question 3. What are the major constituents of stainless steel?
Answer: The major constituents of stainless steel are iron (73%), chromium (18%) and nickel (8%).

Question 4. Name any two alloys of aluminium.
Answer: Two alloys of aluminium are—
1. Magnelium (Mg, Al) and
2. Alnico (Al, Ni, Co, Fe).

Question 5. Name any two alloys of iron.
Answer: Two alloys of iron are—
1. Stainless steel (Fe, Cr, Ni and traces of carbon) and
2. Invar(Fe, NO.)

Question 6. Name any two alloys of zinc.
Answer: Two alloys of zinc are 0 brass (Cu, Zn) and 0 german silver (Cu, Zn, Ni).

Question 7. Name some important ores of iron.
Answer: Some important ores of iron are red haematite (Fe2O3), magnetite (Fe2O4), siderite (Fe2O3) etc.

Question 8. Name some important ores of copper with their formulas.
Answer: Some important ores of copper are copper pyrites [(Cu2S • Fe2S3) or CuFeS2], copper glance (Cu2S), malachite [CuCO3 • Cu(OH)2] , cuprite (Cu2O) etc.

Question 9. Name the major ores of zinc with their respective formulas.
Answer: The major ores of zinc are zinc blende (ZnS), calamine (ZnCO3), zincite (ZnO) etc.

Question 10. Name the major ores of aluminium with their respective formulas.
Answer: The major ores of aluminium are bauxite. (Al2O3-2H2O), gibbsite (Al2O3 • 3H2O), cryolite (AlF3• 3NaF) etc.

Question 11. Name a mineral of aluminium which is not considered as its ore.
Answer: China-clay ( Al2O3 • 2SiO2• 2H2O) is a mineral of aluminium but is not considered as its ore.

Question 12. Name a metal which is found in nature in its free state.
Answer: Gold (Au) is found in nature in its free state.

Question 13. Why is invar used in making metre scale?
Answer: Invar is used in making metre scale because its coefficient of linear expansion is very small.

Question 14. What are noble metals? Give examples.
Answer: The metals which are chemically not so reactive are known as noble metals. Example: Gold, platinum.

Question 15. Write down the percentage of carbon in wrought iron.
Answer: The percentage of carbon in wrought iron is 0.1-0.15%.

Question 16. Which type of iron is used to prepare electric iron?
Answer: Cast iron is used to prepare electric iron.

Question 17. Which metallic powder is mixed with ammonium nitrate to prepare the explosive called ‘ammonal’?
Answer: Aluminium powder.

Question 18. Why is copper used as an electrode in electrical cells?
Answer: Due to its high electrical conductivity.

Question 19. Which metal is used to prepare calorimeter and why?
Answer: Copper, due to its high conductivity of heat, is used to prepare calorimeter.

Question 20. Which metal is used in print-block?
Answer: Zinc is used to prepare print blocks.

Question 21. Mention the metallic components of bronze?
Answer: Copper (80%), tin (18%) and zinc (2%).

Question 22. Name the metal pair which is present in both of bronze and bell metal.
Answer: Copper and tin.

Question 23. Which metal is common in brass and bronze?
Answer: Copper.

Question 24. Name the non-transition metal present in bell-metal.
Answer: Tin (Sn).

Question 25. Percentage of which metal is higher in brass?
Answer: Copper (60-80%).

Question 26. Write down the composition of German silver.
Answer: Cu: 50%, Zn: 20%, Ni: 30%

Question 27. Write down the name of the main component of duralumin.
Answer: Aluminium (95%).

Question 28. Which alloy is used to prepare the structure of aeroplane?
Answer: Duralumin is used to prepare the structure of aeroplane

Question 29. Give examples of two alloys made up of four metals.
Answer: Duralumin (Al + Cu + Mn + Mg) and alnico (Fe + Ni + Al + Co).

Question 30. Which alloy is used to prepare permanent magnet?
Answer: Alnico (Fe + Ni + Al + Co).

Question 31. Which alloy is used to prepare pressure cooker?
Answer: Duralumin.

Question 32. Which one of iron pyrites and red haematite, is the ore of iron?
Answer: Red haematite is the ore of iron.

Question 33.Write down the name and formula of a substance which is a mineral of iron but not its ore.
Answer: Iron pyrites (FeS2).

Question 34. Calamine is the ore of which metal?
Answer: Calamine (ZnCO3) is the ore of zinc.

Question 35. Write down the formula of zinc white?
Answer: Chemical formula of zinc white is ZnO.

Question 36. Write down the formula of the ore— Gibbsite.
Answer: The formula of Gibbsite is Al2O3 • 3H2O.

Metallurgy Topic A Ores, Minerals And Alloys Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. An explosive is prepared by mixing _______ powder with ammonium nitrate.
Answer: Aluminium

Question 2. The percentage of carbon in wrought iron is ______ %.
Answer: 0.1-0.15

Question 3. The non-metal present in stainless steel is _______
Answer: Carbon

Question 4. The carbonate ore of iron is ________
Answer: Siderite

Question 5. The amalgam of _______ metal is used as a reducing agent in organic reactions.
Answer: Sodium

Question 6. The alloy of aluminium used in making electromagnets is _______
Answer: Alnico

Question 7. Metals can be extracted conveniently and economically from their ______
Answer: Ores

Question 8. Cryolite is an ore of _______
Answer: Aluminium

Question 9. The oxide ore of copper is ______
Answer: cuprite

Question 10. ________ foil is used for packaging of food.
Answer: Aluminium

Question 11. German silver is the alloy of ____ and nickel.
Answer: Copper(Cu2O)

Question 12. Percentage of silver in German silver is _______
Answer: Zero

Question 13. The main component of duralumin is ______
Answer: Aluminium

Question 14. If one of the components of an alloy be mercury, then the alloy is termed as an ________
Answer: Amalgam

Question 15. ________ is the ore of aluminium.
Answer: Gibbiste/Bauxite

Question 16. All the ores are minerals, but all of the minerals are not _____
Answer: Ores

Question 17. Name of the sulphide ore of copper is ______
Answer: Copper glance

Question 18. Formula of baixite is _______
Answer: Al2O

Metallurgy Topic A Ores, Minerals And Alloys State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. All minerals are ores, but all ores are not minerals.
Answer: False

Question 2. Calamine is the chief ore of zinc.
Answer: True

Question 3. Cast iron is the purest form of iron.
Answer: False

Question 4. Zincite is the oxide ore of zinc.
Answer: True

Question 5. The percentage of silver present in the alloy German silver is 2-5%.
Answer: False

Question 6. Tin-amalgam is used to make spectacles.
Answer: False

Question 7. The alloy named invar is used to prepare metre-scale.
Answer: True

Question 8. A component of bell-metal is zinc.
Answer: False

Question 9. Components of brass are Cu and Sn. Chalcosite is the ore of copper.
Answer: False

Question 10. Chalcosite is the ore of copper.
Answer: True

Metallurgy Topic B Principles Of Metal Extraction And Oxidation-Reduction Synopsis:

 

1. A chemical reaction in which an atom, an ion or a molecule loses one or more electrons is called an oxidation reaction.
2. A chemical reaction in which an atom, an ion or a molecule gains one or more electrons is called a reduction reaction.
3. Extraction of a metal from its corresponding oxide by elimination of oxygen is known as reduction.
4. Extraction of metals such as iron, chromium, manganese etc., from their oxides by heating the oxides with aluminium powder at a high temperature is known as Goldschmidt’s thermite process.
5. A mixture of 3 parts of Al2O3 and 1 part of aluminium powder is known as thermite mixture.
6. The vertical arrangement of metals in decreasing order of their relative reactivity is known as metal activity series.
7. A metal occupying a higher position (more reactive) in the metal activity series can displace another metal occupying a relatively lower position(less reactive) from the aqueous solution of its salt.
8. Metals present in the middle of the activity series such as Zn, Fe etc., can be extracted from their ores by carbon reduction process.
9. Metals present at the top of the metal activity series are extracted by electrolysis of their fused salts.

Metallurgy Topic B Principles Of Metal Extraction And Oxidation-Reduction Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

 

Question 1. How does oxidation occur?

Answer: Oxidation takes place in three different ways—
1. Oxidation takes place when an atom loses electron(s).
Example—\(\mathrm{Na}+\rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+e ; \mathrm{Al} \rightarrow \mathrm{Al}^{3+}+3 e\)

2. Oxidation takes place when a cation loses electron(s).
Example— \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{Cu}^{+} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+e \\
& \mathrm{Fe}^{2+} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}^{3+}+e
\end{aligned}\)

3. Oxidation takes place when an anion loses an electron(s).
Example— \(\mathrm{S}^{2-} \rightarrow \mathrm{S}+2 e ; 2 \mathrm{Cl}^{-} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cl}_2+2 e\)

Question 2. How does reduction occur?

Answer: Reduction takes place in four different ways—
1. Reduction takes place when an atom accepts electron(s).
Example: \(\mathrm{Cl}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cl}^{-} ; \mathrm{O}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{O}^{2-}\)

2. Reduction takes place when a cation accepts electron(s).

Example: \(\mathrm{Na}^{+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Na} ; \mathrm{Mg}^{2+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Mg}\)

3. Reduction takes place when an anion of lower charge accepts electron(s) and is converted into an anion of higher charge.

Example: \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_4^{2-} \\
& \mathrm{O}^{-}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{O}^{2-}
\end{aligned}\)

4. Reduction takes place when a cation of higher charge accepts electron and is converted into another cation of lower charge.

Example: \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{Fe}^{3+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}^{2+} ; \\
& \mathrm{Sn}^{4+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{Sn}^{2+}
\end{aligned}\)

Question 3. Discuss the electronic theory of oxidation and reduction.

Answer:

The electronic theory of oxidation and reduction

Oxidation: The process of removal of one or more electrons from an atom or ion is known as oxidation.

Example: \(\mathrm{Na} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+e, \mathrm{Fe}^{2+} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}^{3+}+e\)

Reduction: The process of acceptance of one or more electrons by an atom or ion is known as reduction.

Example: \(\mathrm{Cl}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Cl}^{-}, \mathrm{Na}^{+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}\)

Question 4. Identify which one is oxidation and which one is reduction— \(\mathrm{Ca} \rightarrow \mathrm{Ca}^{2+}+2 e ; \mathrm{O}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{O}^{2-}\)

Answer: \(\mathrm{Ca} \rightarrow \mathrm{Ca}^{2+}+2 e\) – In this reaction a Ca-atom loses two electrons to form Ca2+ ion. Hence it is an oxidation reaction as loss of electrons means oxidation.

\(\mathrm{O}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{O}^{2-}\) —In this reaction an O-atom gains two electrons to form O2- ion. Since gaining of electrons is termed as reduction, so this reaction is a reduction process.

Question 5. With the help of electronic theory, show that oxidation and reduction occur simultaneously in the following reaction: \(2 \mathrm{Fe}^{3+}+\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}^{2+}+\mathrm{Sn}^{4+}\)

Answer: \(2 \mathrm{Fe}^{3+}+\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}^{2+}+\mathrm{Sn}^{4+}\)

 

Here each Fe3+ ion accepts an electron to form Fe2+ ion. Hence it is a reduction process as gaining of electron is termed as reduction.

\(\mathrm{Fe}^{3+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}^{2+}\)

 

Again each Sn2+ ion loses 2 electrons from its valence shell. Hence the process is oxidation as losing of electron in termed as oxidation.

\(\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} \rightarrow \mathrm{Sn}^{4+}+2 e\)

 

Hence, it can be said that oxidation and reduction occur simultaneously.

Question 6. Extraction of metals from their ores is basically a reduction process—explain with example.

Answer:

Extraction of metals from their ores is basically a reduction process

In the ore, metal remains in a positive oxidation state but, after extraction of the metal, the oxidation number becomes zero. Thus, during extraction of the metal, the metal ion accepts electron to become a free atom. Hence, we can say that extraction of metals from its ores is a reduction process.

\(\mathrm{M}^{n+}(\text { metal ion })+\text { ne } \rightarrow \mathrm{M}(\text { free metal })\)

 

Example: Zinc oxide (ZnO) is mixed with excess coke and heated at a temperature of about 1300-1400°C in a retort when zinc oxide is reduced to metallic zinc.

\(\mathrm{ZnO}+\mathrm{C} \rightarrow \mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{CO} \uparrow\)

 

Question 7. What do you mean by metal activity series? Name the metals at the top and bottom of the series.

Answer:

Metal activity series:

1. The series obtained by vertically arranging the metals from top to bottom in decreasing order of their electropositivity or decreasing order of chemical reactivity is called metal activity series.
2. The metal placed at the top of the series is potassium (K) while gold (Au) is placed at the bottom.

Question 8. Arrange Cu, Fe, Ag and Zn in increasing order of their reactivity on the basis of the following reactions.
1. CuSO4+ Fe → FeSO4 + Cu
2. 2AgNO3 + Cu → Cu(NO3)2+ 2Ag
3. FeSO4 + Zn → ZnSO4+ Fe

Answer: A more reactive metal replaces a less reactive metal from its salt. So, according to reaction,
1. Fe is more reactive than Cu. According to reaction,
2. Cu is more reactive than Ag. According to reaction,
3. Zn is more reactive than Fe

Hence, the order of increasing reactivity: \(\mathrm{Ag}<\mathrm{Cu}<\mathrm{Fe}<\mathrm{Zn}\)

Question 9. How are the metals placed at the top of the metal activity series extracted?

Answer: These metals are usually extracted by electrolytic method. The molten hydroxide or chloride salts of the metal is electrolysed using suitable electrodes, and the metal deposits on the cathode.

For example, sodium is extracted by electrolysing a molten solution of sodium chloride using iron cathode and graphite anode. Sodium is deposited at the cathode.

Dissociation of NaCI: \(\mathrm{NaCl} \text { (molten) } \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}^{-}\)

Reaction at cathode: \(\mathrm{Na}^{+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}\)

Reaction at anode: \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{Cl}^{-} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cl}+e \text { (oxidation); } \\
& \mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{Cl} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cl}_2 \text { (reduction) }
\end{aligned}\)

Question 10. Describe the extraction of aluminium from pure alumina by electrolytic method.

Answer:

The extraction of aluminium from pure alumina by electrolytic method

Aluminium is generally extracted from bauxite ore  Al2O3 -2H2O. At first, bauxite is converted into pure alumina. Pure alumina is then mixed with proportionate amount of cryolite (CaF2) and fluorspar (AIF3 • 3NaF) and the mixture is heated at around 900°C. When electricity is passed through the fused mixture, aluminium is deposited at the cathode.

Electrolytic dissociation: \(\left.\mathrm{Al}_2 \mathrm{O}_3 \text { (molten }\right) \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Al}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{O}^{2-}\)

Cathode reaction: \(2 \mathrm{Al}^{3+}+6 e \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Al}\)

Anode reaction: \(\begin{aligned}
& 3 \mathrm{O}^{2-} \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}+6 e \\
& 3 \mathrm{O}+3 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_2
\end{aligned}\)

Question 11. Why are the strong electropositive metals like Na, K etc., not extracted from the aqueous solution of their salts?

Answer: An aqueous solution of a salt of a strong electropositive metal contains H+ ions formed due to dissociation of water, along with the metal cations. Now, the tendency of H+ ions to be discharged at cathode is stronger than that of metals like Na, K etc.

Hence, on electrolysis of the aqueous solution, H+ ions will be reduced at cathode instead of metal ions. Hence, hydrogen gas will be produced at cathode instead of desired metal. This is why a strong electropositive metal is extracted from its salt by electrolysis of the fused salt but not the aqueous solution of the salt.

Question 12. Which method is suitably used for the extraction of metals (such as Fe, Zn etc.) occupying the middle part of the metal activity series? Explain with reasons.

Answer: The metals occupying the middle part of the metal activity series are moderately reactive and hence have relatively less tendency than carbon to combine with oxygen. Therefore, these metals can be extracted from their oxides by carbon reduction process at high temperature.

Example: \(\mathrm{ZnO}+\mathrm{C}(\text { coke }) \rightarrow \mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{CO}\)

Question 13. When an iron nail is dipped into an aqueous solution of copper sulphate, a reddish-brown layer is developed over the nail. Explain why.

Answer: A metal occupying a higher position relative to another metal in the metal activity series can replace the latter from the solution of it’s salt. In metal activity series, iron is placed above copper.

Hence iron can replace copper from copper sulphate solution. So, when an iron nail is dipped into an aqueous copper sulphate solution, reaction takes place between them at the surface of iron nail and hence a reddish brown layer of metallic copper is formed over the iron nail.

\(\mathrm{Fe}+\mathrm{CuSO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{FeSO}_4+\mathrm{Cu} \downarrow \text { (red) }\)

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Precipitation Of Cu From CuSO4 Solution By Fe

 

Question 14. What happens when a piece of zinc is added to an aqueous solution of copper sulphate?

Answer: In the metal activity series, zinc is placed above copper. Hence zinc can replace copper from copper sulphate solution. So, when a small piece of zinc is dipped in copper sulphate solution, reaction takes place between zinc and copper sulphate and copper is precipitated. The precipitated copper deposits on the surface of zinc and hence a reddish brown layer is formed over zinc.

\(\mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{CuSO}_4 \rightarrow \mathrm{ZnSO}_4+\mathrm{Cu} \downarrow \text { (red) }\)

 

Question 15. What is carbon reduction process metal extraction?

Answer: Reduction of a metal oxide by heating the mixture of metal oxide with carbon at a very high temperature in a blast furnace is called carbon reduction process. ‘Coke powder’ is used as a reducing agent for this process. Besides, CO produced due to incomplete oxidation of carbon also acts as reducing agent.

Question 16. Aluminium cannot be extracted by carbon reduction process. Explain with reasons.

Answer:

Aluminium cannot be extracted by carbon reduction process.

Aluminium occupies the top portion of the metal activity series. Hence, it is a highly reactive metal and possesses strong reducing property. Carbon reduction process is applicable for the extraction of those metals which have relatively greater tendency to combine with carbon than oxygen.

However, aluminium has a greater tendency to combine with oxygen than carbon and also the oxide of aluminium (Al2O3) is more stable as compared to the oxides of carbon. Thus aluminium cannot be extracted by carbon reduction process. Al is generally extracted by electrolysis of molten alumina (Al2O3).

Question 17. How is zinc extracted by carbon reduction process?

Answer: During zinc extraction by carbon reduction process, the zinc ore, i.e., zinc blende (ZnS) or calamine (ZnCO3) is converted into zinc oxide. Zinc oxide is then mixed well with excess coke powder.

The mixture is then taken in a retort made of fireclay and heated at a temperature of about 1300-1400°C. At this temperature zinc oxide is reduced to metallic zinc and carbon monoxide (CO) is evolved.

\(\mathrm{ZnO}+\mathrm{C} \rightarrow \mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{CO} \uparrow\)

 

Coke acts as a reducing agent in this reaction.

Question 18. Write down advantages and disadvantages of carbon reduction process.

Answer:

Advantages of carbon reduction process:

1. The reductant used in this process, i.e., coke, is easily available and cheap.
2. Large amount of metal oxide can be reduced using a comparatively smaller amount of coke.
3. CO gas, formed in the reaction acts as reducing agent in addition to coke, in this process.

Disadvantages of carbon reduction process:

1. Highly electropositive metals like Na, K, Al, Mg etc., cannot be extracted by this process.
2. A few metals like Ca, Al etc., react with coke at higher temperature to form carbide compounds.

Question 19. Describe the principle of thermite process with example.

Answer:

The principle of thermite process with example:

Al has strong affinity for oxygen at high temperature. When oxides of relatively less reactive metals such as Fe, Mn, Cr etc., are heated with Al powder at a very high temperature, the oxides are reduced by Al to the corresponding metal.

This is the basic principle of Goldsmith’s thermite process. The process produces large amount of heat and the reaction temperature reaches as high as 2000°C. At this temperature, the extracted metal is obtained in molten state.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Thermite Process


Question 20. What is thermite mixture? Write two practical applications of thermite process.

Answer:

Thermite mixture

A mixture of 3 parts of ferric oxide (Fe2O3) by mass with 1 part of powdered aluminium is known as thermite mixture.

Some important applications of thermite process are discussed below—

1. Thermite process is applied in repairing broken parts of rails, tram lines, ship, machines made of iron etc.
2. Metals like chromium, manganese etc., are extracted by thermite process.

Question 21. What is used as reducing agent in thermite process? What is ignition mixture?

Answer:

1. Aluminium powder is used as reducing agent is thermite process.
2. In thermite process, thermite mixture is taken in a crucible made of fire clay (high temperature resistant). A mixture of magnesium powder and barium peroxide or potassium chlorate is taken over the thermite mixture which is then ignited with a burning magnesium ribbon. The mixture of magnesium powder and potassium chlorate or barium peroxide is called ignition mixture.

Question 22. State three advantages of thermite process.

Answer:

Three advantages of thermite process:

1. Metal extraction by thermite process doesn’t require large machineries. Metals can be extracted in small scale by this method for different purposes.

2. Broken parts of large machineries, rail lines, tram lines, ships can be repaired by thermite process. But, it .is not required to transport the damaged parts to the factories.

3. A huge quantity of Al2O3 is produced as a byproduct. This can be used for the preparation of emery powder used in metal polishing and manufacture of bricks used in the inner layer of furnace.

Question 23. Why are the metals occupying lower positions in the metal activity series often found in nature in their native state?

Answer: The metals occupying lower position in the metal activity series (Hg, Ag, Au) have very little chemical reactivity. Hence, they are not easily affected by atmospheric oxygen, water vapour, CO2 etc., and thus exist in nature in their native state.

Question 24.
1. What happens when Al reacts with cone. NaOH solution?
2. What happens when steam is passed over red hot iron?Write down with equation.

Answer:
1. When Al reacts with cone. NaOH solution, sodium aluminate and hydrogen gas are formed.

\(2 \mathrm{Al}+2 \mathrm{NaOH}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{NaAlO}_2+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

 

2. When steam is passed over red hot iron, ferrosoferric oxide and hydrogen gas are formed.

\(3 \mathrm{Fe}+4 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_3 \mathrm{O}_4+4 \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

 

Question 25. Write down the reaction occurs at cathode when an aqueous solution of MSO4 (M = Metal) is electrolysed. State with reason whether the reaction is oxidation or reduction.

Answer: M2+ and H+ ions are present as cations in aqueous solution of MSO4 due to following ionic dissocation:

\(\begin{aligned}
\mathrm{MSO}_4 & \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{M}^{2+}+\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-} \\
\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} & \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}
\end{aligned}\)

 

Therefore, the probable reactions at cathode:

\(\mathrm{M}^{2+}+2 e \rightarrow \mathrm{M} ; \mathrm{H}^{+}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{H} ; \mathrm{H}+\mathrm{H} \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

 

M2+ or H+ ion accepts electron to become electrically neutral at cathode. Hence reduction reaction takes pace at cathode.

Metallurgy Topic B Principles Of Metal Extraction And Oxidation-Reduction Very Short Answer Type Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. During extraction of aluminium, alumina is reduced by
1. H2
2. Carbon
3. H2S
4. Electrolysis

Answer: 4. Electrolysis

Question 2. During extraction of zinc, ZnO is reduced by
1. H2
2. Carbon powder
3. H2S
4. Electrolysis

Answer: 2. Carbon powder

Question 3. In thermite mixture, the ratio of Fe203 and Al powder is
1. 1:2
2. 2:1
3. 1:3
4. 3:1

Answer: 4. 3:1

Question 4. In thermite process, the substances present apart from the thermite mixture are
1. Fe, Cr
2. ZnO, Mg
3. BaO2, Mn
4. BaO2, Mg

Answer: 4. BaO2, Mg

Question 5. Which of the following metals react with boiling water to evolve H2 but does not do so with cold water?
1. Ca
2. K
3. Al
4. Na

Answer: 3. Al

Question 6. Which of the following metals is placed below Pb and above Hg in the metal activity series?
1. Sn
2. Ag
3. Cu
4. Au

Answer: 3. Cu

Question 7. Which of the following reactions is feasible?
1. \(\mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{FeSO}_4 \rightarrow\)
2. \(\mathrm{MgSO}_4+\mathrm{Fe} \rightarrow\)
3. \(\mathrm{CuSO}_4+\mathrm{Ag} \rightarrow\)
4. \(\mathrm{ZnSO}_4+\mathrm{Pb} \rightarrow\)

Answer: 1. \(\mathrm{Zn}+\mathrm{FeSO}_4 \rightarrow\)

Question 8. Which of the following metals can be extracted by thermite process?
1. Fe
2. Cu
3. Zn
4. Al

Answer: 1. Fe

Question 9. In thermite process, the metal used as the reducing agent is
1. Al
2. Ni
3. Zn
4. Fe

Answer: 1. Al

Question 10. Metals placed at the top of the metal activity series are usually extracted by
1. Carbon reduction method
2. Reduction by H2
3. Self-reduction
4. Electrolytic reduction

Answer: 4. Electrolytic reduction

Question 11. Metals placed at the middle region of the metal activity series are usually extracted by
1. Carbon reduction method
2. Reduction by H2
3. Self-reduction
4. Electrolytic reduction

Answer: 1. Carbon reduction method

Question 12. Metals which can exist in free state in nature are
1. Placed at the top of the metal activity series
2. Placed at the middle of the metal activity series
3. Placed at the bottom of the metal activity series
4. Not included in the metal activity series

Answer: 3. Placed at the bottom of the metal activity series

Question 13. Which of the following orders correctly represents the reactivity of metals?
1. Pb < Fe < Mg
2. Mg > Ca > Zn
3. Ag < Zn < Pb
4. Al > Cu > Fe

Answer: 1. Pb < Fe < Mg

Question 14. Which of the following metal pairs reacts with both acids and alkalies to produce hydrogen gas?
1. Cu, Zn
2. Na, Cu
3. Pb, Zn
4. Al, Zn

Answer: 4. Al, Zn

Question 15. Na cannot be extracted from its oxide by carbon reduction process because
1. Oxide of Na is unstable
2. Na does not exist in its oxide form
3. Oxide of Na is more stable
4. Oxide of Na is volatile

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

Answer: 3. Oxide of Na is more stable

Question 16. Metals placed at the top of the metal activity series are
1. Strong reducing agents
2. Weak reducing agents
3. Strong oxidising agents
4. Weak oxidising agents

Answer: 1. Strong reducing agents

Question 17. In the metal activity series, the only non-metal present along with the metals is
1. Carbon
2. Hydrogen
3. Chlorine
4. Iodine

Answer: 2. Hydrogen

Question 18. Up Thermite mixture is
1. Fe2O3+ Al
2. Fe2O3 + Cu
3. FeO + Al
4. FeO + Cu

Answer: 1. Fe2O3+ Al

Question 19. In which of the following change incolouration can be observed when an iron nail is immersed in it
1. ZnSO4
2. Al(SO4)
3. FeSO4
4. CuSO4

Answer: 4. CuSO4

Question 20. Which of the following metals does not react with boiling water, but forms H2 in reaction with steam?
1. Mg
2. Zn
3. Fe
4. Al

Answer: 3. Fe

Question 21. Which of the following metals forms H2 when boiled with strong alkali?
1. Fe
2. Al
3. Cu
4. Mg

Answer: 2. Al

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

Question 22.Which of the following is used as reductant in the carbon reduction process of iron extraction?
1. Al
2. CO
3. CO2
4. CO32-

Answer: 2. CO

Question 23. In which of the following containers ferrous sulphate solution cannot be kept?
1. Copper container
2. Aluminium container
3. Silver container
4. None of the above

Answer: 2. Aluminium container

Question 24. The most reactive metal is
1. Fe
2. Ag
3. K
4. Cu

Answer: 3. K

Question 25. Which of the following metals reacts with water at normal temperature?
1. Na
2. Cu
3. Fe
4. Zn

Answer: 1. Na

Question 26. Which of the following metals cannot be extracted by electrolytic method?
1. Na
2. Zn
3. Al
4. Ca

Answer: 2. Zn

Question 27. Which of’the following can be extracted by carbon reduction method?
1. Al
2. Mg
3. Zn
4. Mn

Answer: 3. Zn

Question 28. The process of metal extraction by another metal is
1. Self-reduction
2. Electrolytic reduction
3. Thermite process
4. All of the above

Answer: 3. Thermite process

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

Question 29. The process of extraction of metal from ore is
1. Oxidation
2. Reduction
3. Redox
4. None of the above

Answer: 2. Reduction

Question 30. The oxidising agent in the thermite process is
1. Al
2. Mg-tape
3. Fe2O3
4. KClO3

Answer: 3. Fe2O3

Metallurgy Topic B Principles Of Metal Extraction And Oxidation-Reduction Answer In Brief:


Question 1. Give an example of a reduction process where an anion accepts an electron.

Answer: \(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}+e \rightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_4^{2-}\)

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

In this reaction an anion accepts an electron and gets reduced.

Question 2. \(\mathrm{Cu}^{2+}+\mathrm{Zn} \rightarrow \mathrm{Cu}+\mathrm{Zn}^{2+}\)—

Identify the oxidant and reductant in the given reaction.

Answer: In the given reaction, Zn acts as the reductant while Cu2+ acts as the oxidant.

Question 3. Name some metals other than iron that can be extracted by thermite process.
Answer: Some metals other than iron that can be extracted from their oxides by thermite process are chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti), manganese (Mn) etc.

Question 4. Why is aluminium used in thermite process?
Answer: At high temperatures, aluminium exhibits strong reducing power, i.e., it has a strong affinity towards oxygen. For this reason, aluminium is used in thermite process.

Question 5. Name the element beiow which copper is placed in the metal activity series.
Answer: The element below which copper is placed in the metal activity series is hydrogen.

Question 6. Arrange Pb, Ca, Cu, Zn, Mg in increasing order of their reactivity.
Answer: Cu < Pb < Zn < Mg < Ca .

Question 7. Which metals are extracted , by carbon reduction method?
Answer: Metals which are placed in the middle region of the metal activity series are extracted by carbon reduction method.

Question 8. Arrange Na, Al, Fe, Pb in increasing order of their reducing power.
Answer: The increasing order of reducing power of the given elements is— Pb < Fe < Al < Nai.

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

Question 9. Between aluminium and tin, which one occupies a higher position in the metal activity series?
Answer: Aluminium occupies a higher position than tin in the metal activity series.

Question 10. Name a metal which reacts only with acids to produce hydrogen (H2).
Answer: Tin (Sn) reacts only with acids to produce hydrogen (H2).

Question 11. Give the equation of the reaction in which Mn+ ion is converted into metal M at the cathode during electrolysis of a fused salt containing Mn+ ion.
Answer: The equation is: Mn+ + ne → M.

Question 12. What happens during the electrolytic reduction of fused NaCI?
Answer: During the electrolytic reduction of fused NaCI, Na is deposited at the cathode and CI2 gas is liberated at the anode.

Question 13. Give example of a metal which can form H2 in reaction with steam.
Answer: Iron (Fe) forms H2 in reaction with steam.

Question 14. Which one among Fe, Cu, Zn and Al does not form H2 in reaction with dil H2SO4?
Answer: Cu is present in a lower position than H in metal activity series and thus does not form H2 in reaction with dil. H2SO4.

Question 15. Write down the principle of Goldschmidt’s thermite process.
Answer: The fundamental principle of Goldschmidt’s thermite process is the reduction of the oxide of a less electropositive metal by another metal with higher electropositivity.

Question 16. Which substance is used as oxidant in thermite process?
Answer: Oxides of Fe, Cr, Mn etc., are used as oxidant in thermite process.

Question 17. Write down the reaction temperature of thermite process.
Answer: 2000°C.

Question 18. Write down an use of thermite process.
Answer: Thermite process is used in welding broken parts of heavy machineries, rail lines, tram lines, ships etc.

Question 19. Write down the equation of extraction of iron from red haematite by thermite process.
Answer:

\(\mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3+2 \mathrm{Al} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{Fe}+\mathrm{Al}_2 \mathrm{O}_3\)

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

Question 20. Give example of two metals which cannot be extracted by carbon reduction process.
Answer: Sodium (Na) and aluminium (Al).

Question 21. Write down the general equation for carbon reduction process.
Answer:

\(\mathrm{MO}+\mathrm{C} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{M}+\mathrm{CO}(\mathrm{M}=\text { metal) }\)

Question 22. What is the name of the gas formed along with metals in carbon reduction process?
Answer: Carbon monoxide (CO).

Question 23. Which process of metal extraction is applied for the extraction of K, Ca, Na etc.?
Answer: Electrolytic process.

Question 24. In which electrode metal atoms are deposited in the electrolytic reduction method of metal extraction?
Answer: Cathode.

Question 25. Write down the name of two metals that can be extracted by electrolytic reduction method.
Answer: Aluminium (Al) and calcium (Ca).

Metallurgy Topic B Principles Of Metal Extraction And Oxidation-Reduction Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. During electrolysis, metal cations move towards the cathode and get ______ by ______ accepting .
Answer: Reduced,electrons

Question 2. A metal oxide gets ______ removed from it.
Answer: Reduced

Question 3. On moving down the metal activity series, reducing power of the metals gradually _______
Answer: Decreases

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

Question 4. The extraction of a metal from the corresponding metal compound is always a ______ process.
Answer: Reduction

Question 5. The metal occupying the topmost position in the metal activity series is ______
Answer: Potassium

Question 6. _____ is also known as zinc white.
Answer: ZnO

Question 7. The constituents of thermite mixture are ______ and ______
Answer: Fe2O3, Al-powder

Question 8. Less reactive metals are found in nature in their ______ state.
Answer: Free

Question 9. In aqueous solution, a more reactive metal can ______ or _____ a less reactive metal from its salt.
Answer: Precipitate, reduce

Question 10. Metals placed at the top of the metal activity series have ______ affinity towards oxygen.
Answer: High

Question 11. In the metal activity series, Zn is placed_____ CU.
Answer: Above

Wbbse Class 10 Metallurgy Of Iron

Question 12. Among Fe, Cu, Zn and Al, ______ occupies the highest position in the metal activity series.
Answer: Al

Question 13. _____ dust is used as reductant in thermite process.
Answer: Aluminium

Question 14. Generally ______is used as reductant in carbon reduction process.
Answer: Coke

Question 15. Example of a metal that can be extracted by carbon reduction process is _____
Answer: Zinc

Question 16. The metal occupying the last position in the metal activity series is ______
Answer: Gold

Question 17. In the reaction, 2Fe3+ + Sn2+ → 2Fe2+ + Sn4+, Fe3+ acts as the ______ while Sn2+ acts as the ______
Answer: Oxidant, reductant

Metallurgy Topic B Principles Of Metal Extraction And Oxidation-Reduction State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Fe can be extracted by thermite process.
Answer: True

Question 2. Metals placed at the top of the metal activity series are extracted by carbon reduction procedure.
Answer: False

Question 3. Metals placed at the top of the metal activity series are strong oxidising agent.
Answer: False

Question 4. Extraction of metal from ore is mainly oxidation.
Answer: False

Question 5. Thermite reaction is endothermic.
Answer: False

Question 6. Carbon is used as reductant in thermite process.
Answer: False

Question 7. Zinc cannot be extracted by carbon reduction process.
Answer: False

Question 8. Metals are obtained at cathode in electrolytic reduction process.
Answer: True

Metallurgy Topic C Corrosion Of Metals Synopsis:

1. If an iron object is left in moist air for a long time, then a reddish-brown layer of hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3 -xH2O) is formed over the object at ordinary temperature which is commonly known as rust.
2. Rusting of iron is accelerated in the presence of ions like CI, SO42- Thus, rusting becomes a major problem in case of ships and underground pipelines.
3. Some practical methods of preventing rusting of iron are—painting the surface of the iron object, coating the surface of the object with varnish, galvanisation or attaching a magnesium block to the iron object (sacrificial protection). Consequently, rusting of iron is prevented.
4. When an aluminium article comes in contact with moist air, a thin non-conducting layer of Al2O3 is formed over it, which protects it from further corrosion.
5. If copper objects are left in moist air for a long time, a green layer (basic copper carbonate) is formed over those objects.
6. Food items or fruits containing acids should not be stored or processed in containers made up of Al, Zn or Cu as it may lead to toxicity of food.

Metallurgy Topic C Corrosion Of Metals Short And Long Answer Type Questions:


Question 1. What is corrosion of metal?

Answer:

corrosion of metal:

When a piece of metal is kept in open air for a long time, the metal chemically reacts with atmospheric oxygen, CO, water vapour etc., and is converted into other substances. As a result the metal piece erodes. This natural phenomenon is known as corrosion of metal.

Question 2. Why impure metals undergo quicker weathering as compared to the pure metals?

Answer: When a piece of impure metal is kept in open air, the impurities present in the metal acts as tiny electrochemical cells on the surface of the metal. Hence, it can be affected readily by atmospheric oxygen, water vapour etc. Pure metal generally does not form such cells and thus they are not weathered easily.

Question 3. What do you mean by rusting of iron? Why are metal articles corroded due to rusting?

Answer:

Rusting of iron:

1. When iron or iron objects are kept in moist air for a few days, a reddish brown layer of hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3-xH2O) is formed over the objects. This reddish brown layer is called rust and the process is called rusting.
2. The volume of rust is generally greater than the volume of pure iron. Hence, after the formation of rust, the surface becomes flaky and comes out of the metal easily. Therefore, the objects undergo corrosion.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy A Rusted Leash

Question 4. Explain the mechanism of rusting.

Answer:

Mechanism of rusting

Rusting of iron is basically an electrochemical reaction. Due to the presence of impurities and rough surface, the oxidation of iron atoms do not take place uniformly. Some parts of iron gets readily oxidised than some other parts.

The part where oxidation takes place easily is called the anode region while the part where oxidation does not take place easily is called the cathode region. At anode region, Fe-atoms give up electrons and gets oxidised to Fe2+ ions which dissolve in water.

The released electrons move to the cathode region. At cathode region, O2 dissolved in water accept these electrons and is reduced to water. The reduction takes place in presence of H+ ions that are obtained from the dissociation of carbonic add (H2CO3).

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Rusting Of Iron

Anode reaction: \(2 \mathrm{Fe} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}^{2+}+4 e\)

Cathode reaction: \(\begin{aligned}
& 4 \mathrm{H}^{+}+4 e \rightarrow 4 \mathrm{H} \\
& 4 \mathrm{H}+\mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}
\end{aligned}\)

Net reaction: \(2 \mathrm{Fe}+\mathrm{O}_2+4 \mathrm{H}^{+} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Fe2+ ions produced at anode are further oxidised by aerial oxygen to form hydrated ferric oxide or rust (Fe2O3-xH2O).

\(\begin{aligned}
& 4 \mathrm{Fe}^{2+}+\mathrm{O}_2+4 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3+8 \mathrm{H}^{+} \\
& \mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3+x \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_2 \mathrm{O}_3 \cdot x \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \text { (rust) }
\end{aligned}\)

 

Question 5. What are the factors which accelerates the process of rusting?

Answer:

The process of rusting is accelerated by the following factors—

1. Presence of less electropositive metals in iron as impurity.
2. The presence of gases like CO2, SO2, SO3, NO, NO2 etc.
3. Presence of chloride (CI) or sulphate (SO42- ) ions in water.

Question 6. Discuss the harmful effects of rusting.

Answer:

The harmful effects of rusting

1. Rusting affects the metallic lustre of iron.
2. Ironisusedtopreparesubstancesforhousehold works, transportation, agricultural and defence instruments. These substances corrode due to rusting causing huge economic losses.
3. Flouses, bridges etc. contain iron pillars. Similarly bodies of ships are made of iron. Rusting, makes them weak and brittle, which may lead to accidents.

Question 7. Why is rusting called “slow combustion’?

Answer: In the presence of aerial oxygen and water vapour, iron is oxidised to hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3 xH2O) or rust. During this process, small amount of heat is also produced. Hence, it is sometimes called a ‘slow combustion’.

Question 8. Give some methods to prevent rusting of iron.

Answer:

Some methods to prevent rusting of iron

1. The iron articles can be protected from rusting by coating their surfaces with varnishes, paints or coal tar.
2. Rusting can be prevented by electroplating iron with zinc, tin or chromium.
3. When steam is passed over red hot iron, a thin layer of ferrosoferric oxide (Fe3O4) is formed on the surface of iron which protects it from rusting.
4. The underground oil pipelines through water, made of iron are protected by using Mg- blocks.

Question 9. Why do the oil or water pipelines through oceans and seas tend to form rust readily? How are they protected from rusting?

Answer:
1. Ocean and sea water contains dissolved chloride (CI) and sulphate (SO42-) ions. These ions facilitate the process of rusting. Hence, oil or water pipelines through oceans and seas tend to form rust readily.
2. To protect the underground or underwater pipelines from rusting, a block of more electropositive metal (like Mg) is connected to the pipe through an insultated wire. In this case, the iron pipes act as cathode, the magnesium block as anode and water as electrolyte. Magnesium being more reactive than iron is readily oxidised and hence prevents iron from rusting. The Mg block needs to be replaced after sometime as it corrodes gradually.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Use Of Mg Block To Prevent Rusting

 

Question 10. Several magnesium blocks are attached to the bottom of ships. Why?

Answer:

Several magnesium blocks are attached to the bottom of ships.

The salty water of seas and oceans accelerates the process of rusting. The magnesium blocks attached to the bottom of the ships protect the iron parts of ships from rusting. Here, the ship acts as an electrochemical cell.

Mg is placed above iron in the metal activity series and hence, Mg acts as anode while iron acts as cathode. The salty water of ocean acts as an electrolytic solution. As oxidation takes place at anode, Mg is preferably oxidised to Mg2+ ions.

Thus iron remains unaffected as long as Mg blocks are present. New blocks replaces the already attached blocks that gets corroded.

Question 11. What do you mean by galvanisation?

Answer:

Galvanisation:

To protect iron from rusting and corrosion, sometimes a zinc coating is applied over iron objects mainly by electrolytic method. This is known as galvanisation. Iron coated with zinc is called galvanised iron.

Question 12. Why is zinc used in galvanisation to prevent rusting?

Answer: In the metal activity series zinc is placed above iron. Hence, zinc is more electropositive than iron and it is more easily oxidised than iron. So, when iron is coated with zinc, zinc is more readily affected by oxygen and water vapour. This protects iron from being oxidised. Thus, rusting is prevented.

Question 13. Zinc is more electropositive than iron, so it should be corroded more readily than iron. But, this doesn’t happen. Instead, zinc is coated over iron to prevent rusting. How will you explain this?

Answer: When zinc is exposed to air it is affected by oxygen, CO2 and water vapour present in the air to form a layer of basic [Zn(OH)2 • ZnCO3].

This layer shields zinc from atmospheric air and hence further corrosion is prevented. This is why zinc is used to protect iron from rusting.

Question 14. Wilt it be justified to coat an iron cauldron/ used for cooking, with zinc to protect the cauldron from rusting?

Answer: The melting point of zinc is 420°C. while that of iron is 1525°C, i.e., zinc has a much lower melting point than iron. At about 250°C, zinc becomes brittle and the layer may break on application of higher temperature. Hence, it is not suitable to coat an iron cauldron, used for cooking, with zinc to protect the cauldron from rusting.

Question 15. To protect iron from rusting which one between zinc-plating and tin-plating is more effective and why?

Answer: When a crack on the surface of zinc-plated iron exposes the metallic iron, the metallic iron remains unaffected by the action of moist air and does not corrode. This is because, zinc is more reactive than iron(zinc is at higher position than iron in metal activity series) and hence zinc is affected by moist air more readily than iron.

On the other hand, any crack on the surface of tinplated iron which exposes iron makes the iron part vulnerable to rusting. This is because iron is more reactive than tin and hence iron is affected by moist air more readily than tin.This is why zinc-plating is more effective in preventing rust than tin-plating.

Question 16. Explain why tin-plated utensils are use- instead of zinc plated utensils to store food.

Answer: Zinc is more effective in preventing rusting and corrosion. Yet, tin-plated containers are more widely used to store food than zinc-plated containers because zinc may react with some acids present in food to produce toxic substances which may cause food poisoning. Tin does not produce such toxic substances. Hence, it is safer to use tinplated containers to store food.

Question 17. Why is aluminium protecting metal?

Answer:
1. When metallic aluminium is kept in moist air, it reacts oxygen and water vapour to form a nonconducting thin layer of aluminium oxide (Al2O3) over it’s surface. As a result, the metallic lustre is lost. But, the layer formed is in-soluble in water and protects the metal from further oxidation. Hence, corrosion of the metal is prevented. This is why aluminium is called a ‘self- protecting’ metal.

Question 18. Copper objects turn green when kept in air for a long time. Explain.

Answer:

Copper objects turn green when kept in air for a long time.

When exposed to moist air for a long period of time, copper is oxidised by aerial oxygen to copper oxide (CuO) which deposits on the surface of the object. Due to presence of H2S in the air of industrial area, black layer of copper sulphide (CuS) is formed on the surface of the article. This layer is further oxidised to form green coloured basic copper sulphate [CuSO4– 3Cu(OH)2 ].

Sometimes, copper is also oxidised by O2, CO2 and water vapour to green coloured basic copper carbonate [CuCO3 • Cu(OH)2]. Due to the formation of these compounds, the object turns green.

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Physical And Chemical Properties Of Elements Metallurgy Corrosion Of Copper Coin


Question 19. Copper vessels are sometimes cleaned with lemon or tamarind. What is the possible reason for this?

Answer:

Copper vessels are sometimes cleaned with lemon or tamarind

Copper vessels are oxidised by O2, CO2   and water vapour to form a thin layer of green-coloured basic copper carbonate [CuCO3 • Cu(OH)2] . Lemon or tamarind contains organic acids. These organic acids react with basic copper carbonate and remove the green patches. Hence; the green patch or stain gets removed from the vessels.

Question 20. Copper utensils which are not used fora long time should be used only after thorough cleaning—explain.

Answer:

Copper utensils which are not used fora long time should be used only after thorough cleaning

Green coating of basic copper carbonate is formed on copper utensils which are not used for a long time as a result of reaction of copper with atmospheric oxygen, carbon dioxide and water vapour, Basic copper carbonate is toxic in nature.

It causes toxicity if it is consumed along with food. Moreover, several micro-organisms which can cause diseases may be present on those utensils. That is why these copper utensils should be used only after thorough cleaning.

Question 21. Gold ornaments are often covered with green patches on their surfaces. Why?

Answer:

Gold ornaments are often covered with green patches on their surfaces

To increase the strength of gold for making ornaments, copper is added as an impurity. In moist air, this copper is slowly oxidised over a long period of time to form green coloured basic copper sulphate [CuSO4 • Cu(OH)2] or basic copper carbonate [CuCO3 • Cu(OH)2]. The green patches on the gold ornaments appears due to the formation of these compounds.

Question 22. Explain why it is harmful to eat pickles or chutneys kept in an aluminium foil.

Answer: Vinegar is generally used as an ingredient for making pickles or chutneys. Vinegar is nothing but an aqueous solution of acetic acid (CH3COOH). Thus, it reacts with aluminium to form poisonous aluminium salt. Hence, it is harmful to eat pickles or chutneys kept in aluminium foil as it may cause food poisoning.

Question 23. Food or fruits haying sour taste should not be stored in containers made of aluminium, zinc or copper. Why?

Answer:

Food or fruits haying sour taste should not be stored in containers made of aluminium, zinc or copper.

Food or fruits having sour taste contains organic acids. These organic acids reacts with aluminium or zinc to form water soluble salts. Similarly, copper may also form water soluble salts with organic acids in the presence of oxygen. Some of the produced salts are toxic and may cause food poisoning. Hence, it is advisable not to store food or fruits having sour taste in containers made of aluminium, zinc or copper.

Metallurgy Topic C Corrosion Of Metals Very Short Answer Type Question Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. The chemical formula of rust is
1. FeO•xH2O
2. Fe2O4
3. FeO3
4. Fe2O3 •xH2O

Answer: 4. Fe2O3 •xH2O

Question 2. Presence of which of the following ions accelerates the process of rusting?
1. Na+
2. Ca2+
3. CI– 
4. O2-

Answer: 2. Ca2+

Question 3. Which of the following is used to protect the iron parts of ships from rusting?
1. Copper blocks
2. Aluminium blocks
3. Zinc blocks
4. Magnesium blocks

Answer: 4. Magnesium blocks

Question 4. Which of the following methods does not prevent rusting?
1. Painting the surface
2. Galvanisation
3. Using a Mg-block
4. Immersing in MgCl2 solution

Answer: 4. Immersing in MgCl2 solution

Question 5. During rusting, presence of which of the following ions in water causes the reduction of dissolved 02 ?
1. Fe2+ 
2. Fe3+ 
3. H
4. Self-reduction occurs in this case

Answer: 3. H

Question 6. To prevent rusting, Mg-block is attached to iron pipes because
1. Mg is more electropositive than Fe
2. Mg has a greater tendency to get oxidised than Fe
3. Both 1 and 2
4. None of these

Answer: 3. Both 1 and 2

Question 7. Galvanised iron is actually
1. Zn-coated iron
2. Sn-coated iron
3. Ni-coated iron
4. Cr-coated iron

Answer: 1. Zn-coated iron

Question 8. Green layer formed over copper and most of its alloys when exposed to moist air, is of
1. Basic copper nitrate
2. Acidic copper hydroxide
3. Basic copper carbonate
4. Acidic copper sulphate

Answer: 3. Basic copper carbonate

Question 9. Which of the following metals can protect itself from corrosion?
1. Al
2. Fe
3. Na
4. Cu

Answer: 1. Al

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 10. The white layer formed over metallic aluminium in presence of moist air is of
1. AlCl3
2. Al (OH)3
3. Al2O3
4. AIN

Answer: 3. Al2O3

Question 11. Which metal protects itself by forming a coat of oxide?
1. Cu
2. Al
3. Fe
4. Zn

Answer: 2. Al

Question 12. Necessary component required for rust formation is
1. N2 ,O2
2. N2 ,H
3. O2,H2O
4. CO2, H2O

Answer: 3. O2,H2O

Question 13. Which of the following is formed by the reaction of Al or Zn with organic acidic substances?
1. Soluble metallic salts
2. Insoluble metallic salts
3. Addition compound
4. Metallic hydroxides

Answer: 1. Soluble metallic salts

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 14. Which of the following metals is used for galvanisation?
1. Fe
2. Ca
3. Zn
4. Mg

Answer: 3. Zn

Question 15. Rusting is a
1. Oxidation process
2. Reduction process
3. Redox process
4. Neutralisation reaction

Answer: 3. Redox process

Question 16. Rapid rusting of iron occurs in presence of Cl- because
1. Dissociation of water molecule increases
2. Dissociation of water molecule decreases
3. Chlorine gas reacts with iron
4. None of the above

Answer: 1. Dissociation of water molecule increases

Metallurgy Topic C Corrosion Of Metals Answer In Brief:


Question 1. Apart from aerial oxygen, which other component of the atmosphere is responsible for rusting of iron?

Answer: Apart from aerial oxygen, water vapour is responsible for rusting of iron.

Question 2. Which type of impurity facilitates the rusting of iron?
Answer: Presence of less electropositive metals in iron as impurities facilitates rusting.

Question 3. Name an electrochemical process.
Answer: Rusting of iron is an electrochemical process.

Question 4. Write the reactions that occur at the anode and cathode during rusting of iron.
Answer:
Anode reaction: \(2 \mathrm{Fe} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}^{2+}+4 e\)

Cathode reaction: \(\mathrm{O}_2+4 \mathrm{H}^{+}+4 e \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Question 5. Name a metal apart from zinc that can be used as a coating over iron to protect it from rusting?
Answer: Apart from zinc, tin can be used as a coating over iron to protect it from rusting.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 6. The presence of chloride ions facilitate rusting of iron. Mention one practical disadvantage of it.
Answer: Underwater pipelines made of iron are easily corroded by rusting due to the presence of CIions in sea water.

Question 7. How can you protect iron from rusting?
Answer: If steam is passed over red hot iron, a thin layer of ferrosoferric oxide (Fe3O4) is formed over iron, which protects it from rusting.

Question 8. Write the composition of the green coloured layer formed on copper and most copper alloys when exposed to moist air for a long time.
Answer: Basic copper carbonate [CuCO3-Cu(OH)2].

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 9. What are the necessary conditions required for rusting?
Answer: The process of rusting requires
1. Presence of atmospheric oxygen,
2. Presence of water vapour.

Question 10. Why does rusting not occur in pure iron?
Answer: Many electrochemical cells are formed on iron during rusting. In absence of impurities these cells cannot be formed and hence rust is not formed on pure iron.

Question 11. Presence of which ion accelerates rusting?
Answer: Presence of CIion accelerates rusting.

Question 12. Why does rusting accelerate in presence of CO2?
Answer: CO2 forms carbonic acid by dissolving in water which increases the rate of dissociation of water. Hence rusting is accelerated.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 13. Name a process which protects iron from rusting.
Answer: Galvanisation.

Question 14. Which metal is used in galvanisation?
Answer: Zinc (Zn).

Question 15. What is “galvanised iron”?
Answer: Iron coated with metallic zinc is termed as ‘galvanised iron’ or G.l.

Question 16. Write down the advantage of galvanisation.
Answer: Galvanisation protects iron from rusting and corrosion.

Question 17. Which metal is used in cathodic protection of iron?
Answer: Magnesium is used in cathodic protection of iron.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 18. What is used as a suicidal electrode to prevent rust on a ship?
Answer: Magnesium block.

Question 19. What is passive iron?
Answer: A coating of iron oxide is formed over iron when it comes in contact with cone, nitric acid. This makes iron chemically inert and this type of iron is called passive iron.

Question 20. Which metal is called “self protecting metal”?
Answer: Aluminium is called ‘self protecting metal’.

Question 21. Which compounds are responsible for the formation of green coating on copper containers?
Answer: Basic copper carbonate [CuCO3 • Cu(OH)2] and basic copper sulphate [Cu SO4 • 3Cu(OH)2] .

Question 22. What is patina?
Answer: A green film of basic copper carbonate [Cu SO• Cu(OH)2] formed by the reaction of metallic copper with O2, CO2 and water vapour on the surface of copper made substances is called patina.

Question 23. Write down the formula of basic zinc carbonate.
Answer: ZnCO3 • 3Zn(OH)2 .

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Metallurgy Topic C Corrosion Of Metals Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. During rusting/oxygen dissolved in water gets reduced to form ______
Answer: H2O

Question 2. Presence of ______ substances prevents rusting of iron.
Answer: Alkaline

Question 3. Rusting can be prevented if iron is kept in contact with _____ electropositive metals than iron.
Answer: More

Question 4. A thin non-conducting layer of _____ over Al prevents the metal from getting attacked by atmospheric 02 and moisture.
Answer: Al2O3

Question 5. Acidic food or fruits should not be kept in containers made of _____ or _____
Answer: Al, Zn

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 6. Different weather conditions causes metallic objects to lose their ______
Answer: Lustre

Question 7. Rust do not occur in ______ iron.
Answer: Pure

Question 8. Rate of rusting _______ with increase in temperature.
Answer: Increase

Question 9. Process of coating ______ on iron substances is called galvanisation.
Answer: Zinc

Question 10. Mg-block attached with iron pipes for oil transportation, acts as _____
Answer: Anode

Question 11. The fine coating formed on Al metal in presence of moist air is of ______
Answer: Al2O3

Question 12. __________ coloured patches occur on copper containers if they are kept in opne air.
Answer: Green

Question 13. Due to formation of basic _____ in presence of moist air,zinc becomes faded.
Answer: Zinc carbonate

Question 14. Mg-blocks attached to underground pipes carrying oil act as the ______
Answer: Anode

Metallurgy Topic C Corrosion Of Metals State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Cl ion accelerates the process of rusting.
Answer: True

Question 2. Objects made of copper turn green on prolonged exposure to air due to the formation of basic copper carbonate.
Answer: True

Question 3. It is justified to coat an iron cauldron used for cooking, with zinc to protect the cauldron from rusting.
Answer: False

Question 4. Ni-coated iron is known as galvanised iron.
Answer: False

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 5. Chemical formula of rust formed on iron is FeO•x H2O.
Answer: False

Question 6. Rusting occurs in the presence of water only.
Answer: False

Question 7. Pure metals are weathered more readily compared to impure metals.
Answer:False

Question 8. Rusting is a mild combustion.
Answer: True

Question 9. No atmospheric corrosion occurs aluminium if it is kept in open air.
Answer: True

Question 10. Aluminium pot is very useful for storing pickles and sauces.
Answer: False

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 11. Sour fruits should not be kept cut in zinc coated containers.
Answer: True

Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Column:


Question 1.

Column A Column B
China clay 1. Ore of Cu
Magnetite 2. Ore of Zn
Calamine 3. Mineral of Al
Malachite 4. Mineral of Fe

 

Answer:
China clay: 3. Mineral of Al
Magnetite: 4. Mineral of Fe
Calamine: 2. Ore of Zn
Malachite: 1. Ore of Cu

Question 2.

Column A Column B
K 1. Used to protect iron parts of ships from rusting
Zn 2. Reacts with both acid and base to produce H2
Au 3. Strong reducing agent
Mg 4. Obtained in free state in nature

 

Answer:
K: 3. Strong reducing agent
Zn: 2. Reacts with both acid and base to produce H2
Au: 4. Obtained in free state in nature
Mg: 1. Used to protect iron parts of ships from rusting

Question 3.

Column A Column B
Ca 1. Reacts with steam in red hot state to produce hydrogen
Pb 2. Reacts with cold water to produce hydrogen
Cu 3. Reacts only with acids to produce hydrogen
Zn 4. Does not produce hydrogen on reaction with acid

 

Answer:
Ca: 2. Reacts with cold water to produce hydrogen
Pb: 3. Reacts only with acids to produce hydrogen
Cu:  4. Does not produce hydrogen on reaction with acid
Zn:  1. Reacts with steam in red hot state to produce hydrogen

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic A Radioactivity Synopsis:

1. Radioactive elements are those elements whose atoms spontaneously emit a type of special invisible radiation and get converted into atoms of new elements.

2. Radioactivity was discovered by Henri Becquerel in uranium salt in the year 1896.

3. Radioactivity is the property due to which some elements with high atomic mass numbers spontaneously emit a type of special invisible radiation and get converted into atoms of new elements.

4. All the elements with atomic numbers greater than 82 are naturally radioactive.

5. Some non-radioactive elements may be converted into radioactive elements artificially. The radioactivity of these new elements produced artificially is called artificial radioactivity.

6. The phenomenon of spontaneous emission of rays from an unstable nucleus is called
radioactive decay.

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

7. radioactive element or atom that exhibits radioactivity is called a parent atom. The atom that is left behind after the emission of radioactive radiation is called the daughter atom.

8. No radioactive sample can emit all three radiations simultaneously.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

8. Three types of rays are emitted in radioactivity.

α – ray: It is a stream of positively charged particles.

β – ray: It is a stream of negatively charged particles.

γ – ray: It is an electromagnetic wave.

9. Charge of an or α-particle is twice the charge of a proton, its symbol is \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\), mass is 6.642 x10-27 kg (or 4.0015 u).

10. Charge of a β-particle is equal to the charge of an electron, i.e., -1.6 x 10-19 C. Its symbol is \({ }_{-1}^0 \beta,\) mass is 9.1 x 10-31 kg.

11. If an atomic nucleus undergoes α-decay, the atom is transformed into an atom with a mass number that is reduced by four units and an atomic number that is reduced by two units.
\(
{ }_Z^A X \longrightarrow{ }_{Z-2}^{A-4} Y+{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}
\)
(parent)  (daughter)

12. If an atomic nucleus undergoes β-decay, the atom is transformed into another atom whose mass number remains unchanged, and the atomic number increases by one unit.
\(
{ }_Z^A p \longrightarrow{ }_{Z+1}^A Q+{ }_{-1}^0 e
\)
(parent) (daughter)

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

13. If γ-ray is emitted from a nucleus, the mass number and an atomic number of the atom remain unchanged.

14. Radioactive isotopes are used for the treatment of cancer, leukemia, and diseases of the thyroid. In addition, the radioisotope of carbon 14C is used for determining the age of a fossil or archaeological object.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic A Radioactivity Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is radioactivity? Which: eSemerit does show radioactivity?
Answer:

Radioactivity:

1. Radioactivity is the property due to which some elements with high atomic mass numbers spontaneously emit a type of special invisible radiation and get converted into atoms of new elements.
2. In Elements in which the ratio of neutrons and protons in the nuclei is more than 1.5, the nuclei are unstable. These elements emit radioactive radiation spontaneously and try to become stable. Only that element shows radioactivity whose mass number is 210 or more than that.

Question 2. What are the characteristics of radioactivity?
Answer:

The characteristics of radioactivity are:

1. Radioactive rays emit spontaneously and ceaselessly from a radioactive element.
2. No effect does occur in the emission of radioactive rays even in the application of heat, pressure, light, electric field, or magnetic field on the radioactive substance.
3. If radioactive elements undergo a chemical change and form other compounds, there is no change in their radioactive nature.
4. Radioactivity of an element is a phenomenon fully associated with its nucleus, there is no connection with its electronic configuration.
5. Structure of the nucleus changes as a result of the emission of radioactive rays. In other words, the numbers of protons and neutrons in the nucleus change, and as a result, a new element is formed.

Question 3. Write down three characteristics of radioactive radiation.
Answer:

Characteristics of radioactive radiation:

1. The radiation has a high penetrating power. For example, gamma rays require a 1 cm thick lead slab to reduce their intensity by 50%.
2. Radioactive rays can ionize a gas.
3. This radiation affects the photographic plates.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 4. What is artificial radioactivity? Name three artificial radioactive elements.
Answer:

Artificial radioactivity:

1. Some non-radioactive elements may be converted into radioactive elements artificially. The radioactivity of these new elements produced artificially is called artificial radioactivity.
2. Three artificial radioactive elements are

Question 5. Radioactivity of any element is completely a nuclear phenomenon-explain?
Answer:

Radioactivity of any element is completely a nuclear phenomenon:

1. The property of radioactivity of radioactive elements remains unchanged even when they form other compounds after their chemical change. For example, radium chloride, a compound of radioactive radium, is also radioactive.
2. The chemical properties of an element depend on the electronic configuration in its different orbits. As the radioactivity of a radioactive element remains present after chemical changes, so there is no relation between radioactivity and the electronic configuration of the element.
3. Furthermore, an element with new properties is formed as a result of the emission of radioactive rays. This is possible only if there is a change in the structure of the nucleus, i.e., a change in the number of neutrons and protons in the nucleus. This is why it is said that the radioactivity of any element is completely a nuclear phenomenon.

Question 6. Define parent atom and daughter atom. What is the position of a daughter atom in the periodic table when one a -particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element? What is the position of a daughter atom in the periodic table when one β-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element?
Answer:
1. Parent atom of the radioactive element is that atom that undergoes radioactive decay. The atom of the new element which is produced after the emission of the radioactive rays is called the daughter atom.
2. If one α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element, the atomic number of the daughter atom is reduced by two units. So the daughter element moves 2 places to the left in the periodic table compared to the parent atom.
3. If one β-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element, the atomic number of the daughter atom is increased by one unit. So the daughter element moves 1 place to the right in the periodic table compared to the parent atom.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 7. Compare α-ray, β-ray, and γ-ray on the basis of their masses.
Answer:

Comparison among α-ray, β-ray, and γ-ray on the basis of their masses is discussed below:

α-ray β-ray γ-ray
The mass of one α-ray-particle is nearly 4 times greater than the mass of a proton. Its mass is 6.642 X 1027     kg. The mass of one β-ray particle is nearly equal to the mass of an electron or 9.1 x 10-31  kg. γ-ray is a type of electromagnetic radiation signifying that its mass is zero.


Question 8
. Compare α-ray, β-ray, and γ-ray on the basis of their charges.
Answer:

Comparison among α-ray, β-ray, and γ-ray on the basis of their charges discussed below:

  α-ray β-ray γ-ray
α-ray is a stream of positively charged particles. The nature ofα-ray particle is similar to that of a helium ion (He2+) with 2 units of positive charge. The charge of an a-particle is 3.2 x 10-19 C. It is twice the charge of a proton.  β-ray is a stream of negatively charged particles. The charge of a β-ray particle is equal to the charge of an electron i.e., -1.6 x 10-19 C. γ-ray is a type of electromagnetic wave with a small wavelength. This is not the stream of any particle. γ-ray is electrically neutral.


Question 9. Compare α-ray, β-ray-ray, and γ-ray on the basis of their penetrating power.

Answer:

Comparison among α-ray, β-ray, and γ-ray on the basis of their penetrating power discussed below:

α-ray β-ray γ-ray
α-ray has less penetrating power than β-ray and γ-ray In practice, after progressing a few centimeters through the air, an α-ray particle becomes motionless. The penetrating power of β-ray is greater than that of α-ray but less than that of γ-ray. An aluminum foil of 5 mm thickness can stop β-ray. The penetrating power of γ-ray is many times more than those of α-ray and β-ray. γ-ray can penetrate an aluminum sheet of thickness 100 cm.


Question 10. Compare α-ray, β-ray, and γ-ray on basis of their ionising power.

Answer:

Comparison among α-ray, β-ray, and γ-ray on the basis of their ionising power discussed below:

α-ray β-ray γ-ray
α-ray has the maximum power to ionise gases. The ratio of power to ionise gases of α, β and γ-rays is  10000: 100 :1 β-ray has more power to ionise gases than γ-ray but less than that of α -ray. γ-ray has less power to ionise gases than α-ray and β-ray.


WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Basics Of Ionising Power

Question 11. How does the nucleus of a radioactive atom change after the emission of an α-particle? Radium ( \({ }_{88}^{226} Ra\)) is converted into radon (Rn) by emission of one α-particle. Calculate the mass number and an atomic number of radon.
Answer:
1. If an α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive atom, a new nucleus is formed whose mass number is reduced by 4 units and atomic number is reduced by 2 units.
\({ }_Z^A \mathrm{X} \stackrel{-\alpha \text {-particle }}{\longrightarrow}{ }_{Z-2}^{A-4} Y\)
(parent atom)  (daughter atom)

2. In this case, mass number of radon = 226-4 = 222 and atomic number = 88 – 2 = 86

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 12. What is the ratio of masses of an α- particle and β-particle which are emitted from a radioactive atom? There is no electron in the nucleus of an atom. Then how is an electron emitted as a β-particle from atom of a radioactive element?
Answer: Mass of an α-particle/ Mass of a β-particle

= \(\frac{\text { mass of four protons (approx.) }}{\text { mass of one electron }}\)

= \(\frac{4 \times 1.6605 \times 10^{-27} \mathrm{~kg}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}}\)

= 0.7299 x 104 = 7299 (approx.)

In the phenomenon of emission of a (β -particle from the nucleus of a radioactive atom, a neutron (n) is disintegrated to produce one proton (p) and one electron (e). The produced proton remains within the nucleus and the electron comes out of the nucleus with a very high velocity. This is the reason why an electron is emitted as a β-particle from the atom of a radioactive element, in spite of the fact that there is no electron in the nucleus.

Question 13. How does the nucleus of a radioactive atom change after emission of a β-particle? Thorium (\({ }_{90}^{234} Th\)) is converted into protactinium (Pa) by emission of one β particle. Calculate the mass number and atomic number of protactinium.
Answer: If a β-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive atom, a new nucleus is formed whose mass number remains unchanged but the atomic number increases by one unit.
\({ }_Z^A X \stackrel{-\beta \text {-particle }}{\longrightarrow}{ }_{Z+1}^A Y\)
(parent atom)  (daughter atom)

In this case, mass number of protactinium = 234 and atomic number = 90 + 1 = 91

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 14. What is the ratio of charges of α-particle and β-particle? Why is lead present in the mineral of any radioactive metal?
Answer: Charge of α-particle / Charge of β-particle
= \(\frac{\text { charge of } 2 \text { protons }}{\text { charge of } 1 \text { electron }}\)
[∴ charge of 1 proton = charge of 1 electron]

Due to successive radioactive emissions from any radioactive element, it is ultimately converted into a non-radioactive isotope of lead (82Pb). After this, there is no further radioactive decay. This is why lead is available in the mineral of any radioactive metal.

Question 15. Write down the differences between an β-particle and an ordinary electron?
Answer: Differences between an β-particle and an ordinary electron:

β-particle Ordinary electron
1. β-particle is emitted instantaneously after its creation in the nucleus of a radioactive atom. 1. Ordinary electrons remain in different orbits outside the nucleus of the atom.
2. After the emission of an β-particle from the nucleus of a radioactive element, the mass number of the new element remains the same but the atomic number increases by one unit. 2. An atom is converted into a positively charged ion after the emission of an ordinary electron from the atom.


Question 16. Write down the differences between a radioactive change and a chemical change.

Answer: The differences between a radioactive change and a chemical change:

Radioactive change Chemical change
1. Radioactive change is a nuclear phenomenon 1. Chemical change is a phenomenon involving valence electrons in the orbits of the atom.
2. Radioactive change is not influenced by external pressure, light, catalyst, electric field or magnetic field. 2. Chemical change is influenced by external pressure, light, catalyst etc.
3. Radioactive change is a irreversible change. 3. Chemical change may be irreversible as well as reversible.
4. A new element is- formed in a radioactive change. 4. No news element is formed in a chemical change.
5. Huge amount of energy is produced in a radioactive change. 5. Amount of energy produced in a chemical change is less than that produced in a radioactive change. Moreover in some cases, energy is absorbed in a chemical change.


Question 17. An an α-particle is emitted from a nucleus X in the following way: \({ }_{92}^A X \longrightarrow \frac{228}{z} Y+\alpha\).
Calculate the values of A and Z from the above reaction. Why is helium gas available in the mines of some radioactive metals?
Answer:
1. The new atom that is formed from the radioactive nucleus after emission of an α-particle gets its mass number and atomic number reduced by 4 units and 2 units, respectively.
A = 228+4 = 232 and Z= 92-2 = 90

2. α-particle that emits from a radioactive element in a mine of radioactive metals ionises the gas. The α-particle is converted into a helium atom by acquiring 2 electrons from the surroundings and remains inside the mine as helium gas.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 18. Mention three applications of radioactivity
Answer:

Applications of radioactivity:

Radioactive elements are used at present in many areas including medical science.
1. Radioactive elements radium, cobalt ( 60Co) are used to destroy those cells which are affected by cancer. Radioactive phosphorus (32P) is used for the treatment of leukemia and brain tumour. Radioactive iodine (131I) is used for the treatment of the disease of the thyroid.

2. Radioactive elements are used to determine the suitability of certain raw materials used in different industrial units.
3. A smoke detector has been manufactured on the basis of a special characteristic of the radioactive material {americium-241). This instrument can detect smoke which is emitted due to an accidental fire, and alarm the people by the sound of a siren.

Question 19. What is the mass number and atomic number of the new elementary particle that is produced when 8 α-particles and 6 β-particles are emitted successively (one after another) from the nucleus of \({ }_{92}^{238} U\)?
Answer: If one α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of any radioactive element, its mass number is reduced by 4 units and its atomic number is reduced by 2 units. If one β-particle is emitted, the mass number remains unchanged but the atomic number increases by 1 unit.

Since 8 α-particles and 6 β-particles are emitted 238 from the nucleus of \({ }_{92}^{238} U\), the mass number of the new element = 238 – (4 x 8) = 206 and atomic number = 92 – (2 x 8) + (1 x 6) = 92 – 16 + 6 + 82

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic A Radioactivity Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. Among the following rays, which one has the maximum power to ionise gases?
1. α
2. β
3. γ
4. Visible ray

Answer: 1. α

Question 2. Among the following rays, which one has the maximum penetrating power?
1. α
2. β
3. γ
4. Visible ray

Answer: 3. γ

Question 3. Among the following isotopes, which one is radioactive?
1.12C
2. 14C
3. 16O
4. 23Na

Answer: 2. 14C

Question 4. Speed of γ – ray in vacuum is
1. 2 x 10m/s
2. 3 x 10m/s
3. 1.5 x 10m/s
4. 2.5 x 10m/s

Answer: 2. 3 x 10m/s

Question 5. Charge of an a-particle is
1. 1.6 x 10-19 C
2. 3.2 x 10-19 C
3. 4.8 x 10-19 C
4. 6.4 x 10-19 C

Answer: 2. 3.2 x 10-19 C

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 6. What is the mass of a β-particle, if the mass of an electron is m?
1. m
2. 2m
3. 3m
4. 4m

Answer: 1. m

Question 7. Which of the following is used determination of the age of fossils?
1. 60Co
2. 131I
3. 32P
4. 14C

Answer: 4. 14C

Question 8. Who discovered radioactivity?
1. Ernest Rutherford
2. Madame Curie
3. Pierre Curie
4. Henry Becquerel

Answer: 4. Henry Becquerel

Question 9. If a powerful static electric field is applied in a perpendicular direction to the path of radioactive rays, which ray does bend towards the positively charged terminal?
1. α
2. β
3. γ
4. None of these

Answer: 2. β

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 10. If a powerful static electric field is applied in a perpendicular direction to the path of radioactive rays, which ray. does bend towards the negatively charged terminal?
1. α
2. β
3. γ
4. None of these

Answer: 1. α

Question 11. The value of e/m of an α-particle is m of that of an ionised hydrogen.
1. Two times
2. Four times
3. Half
4. Equal

Answer: 3. Half

Question 12. If a powerful static electric field is applied in a perpendicular direction to the path of radioactive rays, which ray does not deviate?
1. α
2. β
3. γ
4. None of these

Answer: 3. γ

Question 13. The particle that escapes when β-decay (\({ }_{-1}^0 \mathrm{e}\)) takes place from the nucleus of an atom is
1. Neutrino
2. Antineutrino
3. Meson
4. Positron

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Answer: 2. Antineutrino

Question 14. The new nucleus that is formed due to β- the decay of the nucleus of a \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\) atom is
1. \({ }_6^{13} \mathrm{C}\)
2. \({ }_7^{14} \mathrm{~N}\)
3. \({ }_5^{14} \mathrm{~B}\)
4. \({ }_8^{14} \mathrm{O}\)

Answer: \({ }_6^{13} \mathrm{C}\)

Question 15. Which of the following has a speed equal to that of light?
1. α-ray
2. β-ray
3. γ-ray
4. None of these

Answer: 3. γ-ray

Question 16. If an α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of \({ }_Z^A X\) atom thereby producing Y element, then the mass number and atomic number of Y are
1. A,2-2
2. A – 2, Z — 2
3. A – 4, Z- 2
4. 4-4, Z

Answer: 3. A – 4, Z- 2

Question 17. If a β-particle is emitted from the nucleus of \({ }_Z^A X\)atom thereby producing Y element, then the mass number and atomic number of Y are
1. A, Z
2. A+ 1,Z+l
3. A, Z + 1
4. A-1, Z-l

Answer: 3. A, Z + 1

Question 18. How many αparticles in succession to one α particle need to be emitted from the nucleus of an atom of X to make the new element an isotope of X?
1. 1
2. 2
3. 3
4. 4

Answer: 2. 2

Question 19. Which of the following is not radioactive?
1. 32P
2. 14C
3. 40K
4. 23Na

Answer: 4. 23Na

Question 20. If m is the mass of an electron, then the mass of a positron is
1. m
2. m/2
3. 2m
4. 4m

Answer: 1. m

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 21. Particles that can be added to the nucleus of an atom without changing its chemical properties are
1. Neutrons
2. Electrons
3. Protons
4. Positrons

Answer: 1. Neutrons

Question 22. Which of the following particles are constituents of the nucleus?
1. Protons and electrons
2. Neutrons and electrons
3. Electrons and positrons
4. Neutrons and protons

Answer: 4. Neutrons and protons

Question 23. The mother and daughter elements with the emission of β-rays are
1. Isotopes
2. Isobars
3. Isomers
4. Isodiaphers

Answer: 2. Isobars

Question 24. The mother and daughter elements with the emission of γ-rays are
1. Isotopes
2. Isobars
3. Isomers
4. Isodiaphers

Answer: 3. Isomers

Question 25. The nuclei of \({ }_6^{13} \mathrm{C}\) and \({ }_7^{14} \mathrm{~N}\) can be described as
1. Isodiaphers
2. Isotones
3. Isobars
4. Isotopes

Answer: 2. Isotones

Question 26. 1 Curie is
1. 1 dps
2. 3 Χ1010  dps
3. 3.7 Χ1010  dps
4. 106 dps

Answer: 3. 3.7 Χ1010  dps

Question 27. In \({ }_{88}^{226} R\) nucleus, there are
1. 138 protons and 88 neutrons
2. 138 neutrons and 88 protons
3. 226 protons and 88 electrons
4. 226 neutrons and 138 electrons

Answer: 2. 138 neutrons and 88 protons

Question 28. An atomic number of a nucleus is 2 and its atomic mass is M. The number of neutrons is
1. M-Z
2. M
3. Z
4. M + Z

Answer: 1. M-Z

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic A Radioactivity Answer In Brief:

Question 1. α-ray is composed of which type of electrically charged particles?
Answer: α-ray is composed of positively charged particles.

Question 2. β-ray is composed of which type of electrically charged particles?
Answer: β-ray is composed of negatively charged particles.

Question 3. Among α-ray, β-ray, and γ-rays, which one is electrically neutral?
Answer: γ-ray is electrically neutral.

Question 4. Is α-ray scattered by an electric field?
Answer: Yes, α-ray is scattered by an electric field.

Question 5. What are radioactive elements?
Answer: Radioactive elements are those elements whose atoms spontaneously emit a type of special invisible radiation and get converted into atoms of new elements.

Question 6. Write down the names of three natural radioactive elements.
Answer: Polonium (Po), radium (Ra) and uranium (U) are three natural radioactive elements.

Question 7. Write down the names of two radioactive elements whose Z < 20.
Answer: \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\) and \({ }_6^{14} C\) are two radioactive elements whose Z < 20.

Question 8. In between \({ }_6^{12} C\) and \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\), which one is radioactive?
Answer: \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\) is radioactive.

Question 9. Arrange the following rays according to the descending order of penetrating power: α-ray/ β-ray,γ-ray.
Answer: α-ray>β-ray>γ-ray

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Question and Answers

Question 10. Arrange the following rays according to the ascending order of power to ionise gases: α-ray/ β-ray,γ-ray.
Answer: α-ray<β-ray<γ-ray

Question 11. Write down the name of an instrument that measures radioactivity.
Answer: G-M Counter (Geiger-Muller Counter) measures radioactivity.

Question 12. Which element is responsible for the radioactivity of potassium uranyl sulphate?
Answer: Uranium is responsible for the radioactivity of potassium uranyl sulphate.

Question 13. What is the effect of radioactivity on the cells of a living organism?
Answer: The effect of radioactive rays on a cell may be fatal as it may destroy active cells.

Question 14. How many protons in the nucleus are reduced if one α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element?
Answer: Two protons are reduced in the nucleus if one α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element.

Question 15. How many neutrons in the nucleus are reduced if one α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element?
Answer: Two neutrons are reduced in the nucleus if one α-particle is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive element.

Question 16. How many types of ray are emitted from a radioactive substance? Write down their names.
Answer: Three types of ray are emitted from a radioactive substance, namely alpha (α) ray, beta (β) ray, and gamma (γ) ray.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 17. Among the rays which are emitted from a radioactive material, which is an electromagnetic wave?
Answer: Among the rays which are emitted from a radioactive material, a gamma ray is an electromagnetic wave.

Question 18. Of all the rays emitted from a radioactive material, which rays have particle nature?
Answer: Of all the rays emitted from radioactive material, α-ray and β-ray are streams of particles with masses and thus, have a particle nature.

Question 19. Which is massless among α, β, and γ-rays?
Answer: γ-ray is massless.

Question 20. Where does radioactive change take place inside an atom?
Answer: Radioactive change takes place in the nucleus of the atom.

Question 21. Is a radioactive change unidirectional or bidirectional?
Answer: A radioactive change is always unidirectional.

Question 22. A compound of a radioactive element is formed a chemical reaction. Is there any change does occur in radioactivity?
Answer: Radioactivity remains unchanged even if a compound of a radioactive element is formed in a chemical reaction.

Question 23 A is a radioactive element. A is converted to element B by emitting successively one α-particle and two β-particles. What is the relation between A and B?
Answer: If the atomic number of element A is Z, then the atomic number of element B becomes Z-2 + 1 + 1-Z.
∴ A and B are isotopes of each other.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 24. What is the SI unit of radioactivity?
Answer: SI unit of radioactivity is becquerel (Bq).

Question 25. The atomic number is not changed by which type of radioactive decay?
Answer: γ – decay.

Question 26. Helium ions and α-particles are the same or different?
Answer: Helium ions and α-particles are the same.

Question 27. What type of radioactive decay is caused when there are too many neutrons in the nucleus?
Answer: β-decay.

Question 28. Which part of an atom undergoes a change in the process of radioactive decay?
Answer: The nucleus of an atom undergoes a change in the process of radioactive decay.

Question 29. Name the radioactive radiation which have the least penetrating power.
Answer: ‘α’-radiation have the least penetrating power.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 30. A radioactive substance is oxidised. What change takes place in the nature of radioactivity?
Answer: No change takes place.

Question 31. Name the positively charged particle that emanates from an uranium nucleus.
Answer: The positively charged particles that emanate from an uranium nucleus is ‘α’- particle.

Question 32. Name a negatively charged radioactive – particle.
Answer: A negatively charged radioactive particle is β-particle.

Question 33. Why are emissions of α-particles, β-particles, and γ-rays called nuclear phenomenon?
Answer: These emissions are entirely nuclear phenomenon because that happens due to internal changes in the nucleus.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic A Radioactivity Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. After emission of one _______ particle, \({ }_{13}^{28} \mathrm{Al}\) is transformed into \({ }_{14}^{28} \mathrm{Si}\).
Answer: β

Question 2. γ-ray is a type of ______  wave.
Answer: Electromagnetic

Question 3. The atom of the radioactive element which undergoes radioactive decay is called ______ atom.
Answer: Parent

Question 4. The atom of the new element that is produced after emission of a radioactive ray from the nucleus is called a ______  atom.
Answer: Daughter

Question 5. The rest mass of γ-ray is ______.
Answer: Zero.

Question 6. The age of a fossil and an archaeological object is determined by measuring the ratio of _______ and 12C in it.
Answer: 14C.

Question 7. The charge of an α-particle is_______ of that of a hydrogen ion.
Answer: Twice

Question 8. If an α-ray falls on a screen coated with zinc sulfide, it creates ______.
Answer: Fluorescence

Question 9. α-particle is the nucleus of a  atom.
Answer: Helium

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 10. Atomic number of a radioactive nucleus is not affected due to emission of ______ ray from it.
Answer: γ

Question 11. Charge of the positron is ______.
Answer: +1.6 10-19 C

Question 12. Radioactivity is totally a ______  phenomenon.
Answer: Nuclear

Question 13. When a radioactive element emits one alpha particle, its atomic no ______ by 2 and mass number ______ by 4.
Answer: Decreases and Decreases

Question 14. The radioactive, nature of two uranium isotopes \({ }_{92}^{235} U\) and \({ }_{92}^{238} U\) are ______.
Answer: Different.

Question 15. When a radioactive element emits one ______  particle, its atomic number increases by 1.
Answer: β

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 7 Question And Answers

Question 16. 131I isotope is used to test the activity of ______  gland.
Answer: Thyroid

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic A Radioactivity State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. Nucleon is a collective name for two particles, the neutron, and proton.
Answer: True

Question 2. An electron has a greater mass than a proton.
Answer: False

Question 3. When an or-particle is ejected, the atomic number of the atom decreases by 2.
Answer: True

Question 4. β-ray has the highest penetrating power.
Answer: False

Question 5. Isotopes are the atoms having same atomic number but different mass number.
Answer: False

Question 6. β-rays and cathode rays are identical in nature.
Answer: True

Question 7. No radioactive sample can emit all three radiations α, β and γ-simultaneously.
Answer: True

Question 8. γ rays can be completely absorbed in 1/10mm thick aluminum plate.
Answer: False

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic B Nuclear Energy Synopsis:

1. The mass of a nucleus is slightly less than the mass of the sum of protons and neutrons present in the nucleus. This difference between the two masses is called the mass defect(Δm).

The atomic number and the mass number of the atom are Z and A respectively. If the masses of the proton and the neutron are mp and mn respectively and the mass of the nucleus of the atom is M, then mass defect, \(\Delta m=Z \cdot m_p+(A-Z) m_n-M\).

2. Binding energy is defined as the minimum energy required to disassemble a nucleus of an atom into its constituent particles. It is the equivalent amount of energy of mass defect.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 7 Question And Answers

If Δm is mass defect then according to Einstein’s mass-energy relation binding energy =Δmc2

3. Binding energy per nucleon is the average energy required to release a nucleon from the nucleus. Binding energy per nucleon ∝ stability of the nucleus.

4. The Einstein equivalent of mass and energy can be stated as: If the mass m of a body is completely converted to energy, then the measure of the energy is
E=mc2, c = speed of light in vacuum.

5. Unified atomic mass unit: 1/12th of the mass of a 12C atom is called 1 amu or 1 u.

∴ \(1 \mathrm{u}=\frac{1}{12} \times \frac{12}{6.022^{\prime} \times 10^{23}} \mathrm{~g}\)= 1.6605 x 10-27 kg

6. If 1 u mass is completely converted into energy, the amount of energy produced
E = mc2, m = 1 u = 1.6605 x 10-27 kg,c = 2.998 x 10 ms-1 = 1.6605 x 10-27 x (2.998 x 108)2J =14.920008 X 10-11 J
≈ 931 MeV (1 eV= 1.6602 x 10-19 J, 1 MeV = 106 eV)

7. Nuclear Fission is the process of splitting of a heavy nucleus into two lighter nuclei of almost equal masses with the liberation of energy.
Example: When \({ }_{92}^{235}U\) nuclei bombarded with slow neutrons, exploded into two fragments 56Ba and 36Kr.

\(\begin{array}{r}
{ }_{92}^{235} U+{ }_0^1 \mathrm{n} \rightarrow{ }_{92}^{236} \mathrm{U}^\rightarrow{ }_{56}{ }^{141} \mathrm{Ba}+{ }_{36}^{92} \mathrm{Kr}+{ }_{30}^1 \mathrm{n} \\ +\text { energy } \end{array}\)

The energy released in \({ }_{92}^{235}U\) fission is about 200 MeV. A nuclear reaction sustained by the product of the initial reaction leading from one reaction to the other consecutively, is called chain reaction.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 7 Question And Answers

When one neutron is bombarded on \({ }_{92}^{235}U\) target then 3 neutrons are released. They are j slowed down to thermal neutron. Now they are used for further fission of \(3_{92}^{235}U\) nuclei releasing 9 new neutrons and so on.

8. A nuclear reactor is a device in which nuclear fission can be carried out through a sustained and controlled chain reaction. Main component of a nuclear reactor: Uranium isotopes (U235), Thorium isotope (Th232) etc are most commonly used fuels in the reactor.

10. Moderator is used to slow down the fast moving neutrons. Most commonly used moderators are graphite and heavy water (D2O).
11. Control material is used to control the chain reaction and to maintain a stable rate of reaction. Cadmium rods are used as control material. (Steel rod with a coating of boron is also used as a control rod)

12. Most commonly used coolants are water, N2,CO2.
13. Uses of nuclear reactor are:
(1)In electric power genertaion
(2) To produce radioisotopes etc.

14. Nuclear Fusion is a process in which two light nuclei are fused or combined at a very high temperature to form a heavy nucleus. This process releases a large amount of energy. High pressure (≈ 106 atm) and high temperature (≈ 107 K to 108K are required for fusion. So the fusion reaction is called a thermonuclear reaction.

Examples:
1. \(
{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}+{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H} \stackrel{\text { Fusion }}{\longrightarrow}{ }_2^3 \mathrm{He}+{ }_1^0 \mathrm{n}+\text { energy }
(3.7 MeV)\)

Two \({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\) nuclei are fused to produce a \({ }_2^3 \mathrm{He}\) nucleus, a neutron, and energy (3.7 MeV approx).

2. In the Sun and some stars the source of energy is the fusion of protons to form a helium nucleus, positrons, and energy.

\(\begin{array}{r}
{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}+{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}+{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}+{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H} \stackrel{\text { Fusion }}{\longrightarrow}{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}+2{ }_1^{\mathrm{O}} \mathrm{e} \\
+\text { energy (26 MeV) }
\end{array}\)

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic B Nuclear Energy Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is nuclear reaction? Write down Einstein’s principle of equivalence of mass and energy.
Answer:

Nuclear reaction:

1. Nuclear reaction is a process in which two nuclei, or else a nucleus of an atom and a subatomic particle from outside the atom, collide to produce one or more nuclides that are different from the initial nuclide(s).

2. According to Einstein’s theory of relativity, mass is concentrated energy. It is possible to convert mass into energy and energy into mass. If an amount of mass m of a substance is converted fully into energy, then an amount of energy E=mc2 is released where c = 2.998 x 108m/s = speed of light in vacuum.

Question 2. What is mass defect? Calculate the mass defect of the nucleus with mass M .Given, the mass of a proton = mp and the mass of a neutron = mn.
Answer:

Mass defect:

1. The mass of a nucleus is slightly less than the mass of the sum of protons and neutrons present in the nucleus. This difference between the two masses is called the mass defect.

2. According to the above question, the atomic number and the mass number of the atom are Z and A, respectively. If the masses of the proton respectively and the mass of the nucleus of the atom is M, then the total mass of the nucleons = Z • mp + (A – Z)mn.
∴ mass defect = Z • mp + (A – Z)mn – M

Question 3. What is binding energy? Calculate the binding energy of the nucleus with mass M. Given the mass of a proton = mp and the mass of a neutron = mn.
Answer:

Binding energy:

1. Binding energy is defined as the minimum energy required to disassemble a nucleus of an atom into its constituent particles. It is the equivalent amount of energy of mass defect.

2. According to the above question, the atomic number and the mass number of the atom are Z and A, respectively. If the masses of the proton and the neutron are mp and mn, respectively and the mass of the nucleus of the atom is M, then total mass of the nucleons = Z • mp + (A-Z)mn
∴ mass defect = Z • mp + (A – Z)mn– M and hence binding energy = {Z-mp + (A-Z)mn-M}c2
∴ where c is the speed of light in vacuum.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 7 Question And Answers

Question 4. Calculate the equivalent amount of energy when 1 u of mass is converted fully into energy. Calculate the binding energy of a 4He2 nucleus. Given, mn = 1.007276 u,mn = 1.008665, mass of  4He2 nucleus = 4.001505u.
Answer:
1. Here, m = 1u = 1.66 x 10-27 kg
According to the equation E=mc2, the equivalent amount of energy = 1.66 x 10-27 x (2.998 x 108)2 = 14.92008 x 10-13nJ
Again, 1 MeV = 1.6022 x 10-13 J

\(E=\frac{14.92008}{1.6022} \times \frac{10^{-11}}{10^{-13}} \mathrm{MeV}\)= 931.2 MeV or, 1 u =931.2 MeV.

2. Mass defect of 4He2 nucleus = (2mp+2 mn)-M = (2 X 1.007276 + 2 X 1.008665) – 4.001505 = 0.0304 u (approx.)
∴ binding energy of 4He2 nucleus = 0.0304 x 931.2 MeV = 28.3 MeV (nearly)

Question 5. What do you mean by a chain reaction? What is a nuclear reactor?
Answer:

Chain reaction:

1. In nuclear fission due to the bombardment of neutrons on each 235U atom, high speed neutrons are ejected from the reaction. These are called secondary neutrons. These secondary neutrons interact with the surrounding uranium nucleus.

If sufficient fissile fuel is present, some of these neutrons may be absorbed and cause more fissions. Thus, the cycle repeats and the process of nuclear fission continues spontaneously. This type of spontaneous reaction is called a chain reaction.


2. A nuclear reactor is an arrangement used to initiate and control a sustained nuclear chain reaction. Nuclear reactors are used at nuclear power plants mainly for electricity generation.

Question 6. What is nuclear fission?

\(
{ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}+{ }_0^1 \mathrm{n} \longrightarrow{ }_{54}^{134} \mathrm{xe}+{ }_{38}^{100} \mathrm{Sr}+{ }_2^1 \mathrm{n}
[235.0439u] [1.0087u] [133.9054u] [99.9354u] +
energy \)

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 7 Question And Answers
How much mass is reduced in the given nuclear fission?
Answer: Breaking up of a heavy nucleus into two nuclei of almost equal masses is called nuclear fission.

In the given equation, initial mass before reaction,
m1 = mass of U-235 nucleus + mass of a neutron = 235.0439 + 1.0087 = 236.0526 u

Final mass after reaction, m2 = mass of (Xe-134 + Sr-100 + 2 neutrons)= 133.9054 + 99.9354 + 2 x 1.0087 = 235.8583U

∴ reduction of mass, m = m1 -m2 = 236.0526 – 235.8583 = 0.1944 u

Question 7. Write down the names of some non conventional sources of energy other than atomic energy. What are the advantages in the production of atomic energy?
Answer: Some sources of non-conventional energy other than atomic energy are solar energy, wind energy tidal energy etc. Production of atomic energy is not affected by any natural event like cyclones, storms, rain, earthquakes etc. Atomic energy can be produced day and night over all the year. But this advantage is not there in the case of the production of other energies. This is the advantage of the production of atomic energy.

Question 8. What are the advantages of atomic energy as a fuel compared to fossil fuel?
Answer:

Advantages of atomic energy over energy from fossil fuel:

Energy from fossil fuel  Atomic Energy
1. Due to the rampant use of fossil fuels (like coal, petrol, diesel, kerosene etc.), amount. of carbon dioxide and other Greenhouse gases is increasing in the atmosphere. 1. Production of harmful gases reduce owing to the use of atomic energy.
2. The amount of fossil fuel used to get a certain amount of energy is slowly pushing us towards a serious fuel crisis. This is a major problem at present for human civilisation. 2. A huge amount of energy is available due to nuclear fission from a very small amount of material. This is not possible from any other source and also is a great savior compared to any other fuel. For example, nearly 3000 tons of coal have to be burnt to get the same amount of energy (nearly 7.4 x 1010J) that is available from fission of only 1 g of U-235.


Question 9. Why is a fission reaction carried out before a fusion reaction? Several lacs of people were killed in Japan in 1945 due to the explosion of an atomic bomb. In 1986, the nuclear reactor at Chornobyl of Ukraine went out of control and the residents of that town suffered nearly the same fate. Is.there any difference in the scientific causes of these two incidents?

Answer:
1. 107°C to 108°C temperature is required for fusion of the nuclei. This high temperature cannot be produced in a simple way This high temperature can be produced by the process of takes place before a fusion reaction.

2. The first incident was due to the bad intention of a class of warmongers. Due to uncontrolled nuclear fission, huge amount of heat energy is produced in this type of atomic explosion. Radioactive radiation is also emitted in it. Due to these two reasons, a lot of people were killed.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Harmful Effect Of Radioactivity Due To Nuclear Accidents
The second one was simply an undesirable accident. In a nuclear reactor, heat energy is converted into electrical energy by causing controlled nuclear fission. In other words, atomic energy is utilised in a peaceful way through this process for the welfare of mankind.

But unfortunately, on 26th April 1986, the process of nuclear fission in a nuclear reactor at Chornobyl of Ukraine went out of control and emitted a huge amounts of radioactive rays. As a result, the residents of the city became the victims of radioactivity for a long time.

Question 10. What are used as:
1. Fuel,
2. Moderator,
3. Control rods and
4. Coolant in a nuclear reactor and what are their functions?

Answer:

Name of the part Main material used Function
1. Fuel Uranium (a radioactive element) [U-235] U-235 is bombarded with thermal neutrons bringing about fission.
2. Moderator Heavy water (D2O ) or graphite Neutrons with high kinetic energy generated due to nuclear reactions are slowed down by it
3. Control rods Cadmium (Cd), hafnium (Hf), or boron (B) coated steel rods To absorb excess thermal neutrons that are not required.
4. Coolant Generally water To absorb heat energy that is produced in the core due to nuclear reactions

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Nuclear Reactor

Question 11. Explain nuclear fusion with an example. Explain the main source of energy for sun and other stars.
Answer:
1. An example of nuclear fusion is given below.

\({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}+{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H} \longrightarrow{ }_2^3 \mathrm{He}+{ }_0^1 \mathrm{n}+\text { energy }\)

Here, two deuterium nuclei combine together to form one helium ( 3He2) nucleus and one neutron. The sum of the masses of helium ( 3He2) and neutron is slightly less than the sum of the masses of two deuteriums. This reduced mass is converted into energy.

2. The main process of producing energy for any star like sun is nuclear fusion. The main fuel of a star is hydrogen. The process of fusion in a star is brought about through some cycles. Generally, it is said that in each cycle, four hydrogen (1H1) nuclei join to produce one helium (4He2) and two positrons (0e1).

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

\(4_1^1 \mathrm{H} \longrightarrow{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}+2_1^0 \mathrm{e}\)

The sum of the masses of one helium (4He2 ) and two positrons (0e1) is less than the combined mass of four hydrogen nuclei. This decrease in mass is transformed into energy. In sun 12 crore tons of hydrogen is converted into helium in every minute and a huge amount of heat energy is thus produced. The sun has been radiating heat energy in this way for the last 460 crore years.

Question 12. What is nuclear fusion?
\(\begin{aligned}
& { }_1^2 \mathrm{H}+{ }_1^2 \mathrm{H} \longrightarrow{ }_2^3 \mathrm{He}+{ }_0^1 \mathrm{n} \text { +energy } \\
& {[2.015 \mathrm{u}]} \\
&
\end{aligned}\)
Calculate the amount of energy released in this process by talking 1u = 931.2 MeV.
Answer:
1. Nuclear fusion is a process in which two light nuclei are fused or combined at a very high temperature to form a heavy nucleus. This process releases a large amount of energy.

2. Mass of 2 deuterons in the given equation before reaction, m1 = 2 x 2.015 = 4.030 u.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Nuclear Fusion
Final mass after reaction, m2 =\({ }_2^3 \mathrm{He}+{ }_0^1 n\) = 3.017 + 1.009 = 4.026 u decrease in mass, m = m1 – m2 = 4.030-4.026 = 0.004 u
amount of energy released = 0.004 u equivalent amount of energy = 931.2 x 0.004 = 3.725 MeV (approx.)

Question 13. Write down the diffreneces between nuclear fission and nuclear fussion.
Answer:

The differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion are:

Nuclear fission  Nuclear fusion
1. A heavy nucleus is split into two nuclei of almost equal masses in this process. 1. A few light nuclei are fused together to form a heavy nucleus in this process.
2. The energy produced in this process is less than the energy produced by the fusion of materials of equal masses. 2. The energy produced in this process is more than the energy produced by fission of equal masses.
3. Thermal neutrons are required in this process to bombard the target nucleus. 3. No bombarding particle is required in this process.
4. This process takes place at normal -temperature. 4. This process takes place at a temperature between 107oC and 108oC.
5. Radioactive rays are emitted in this process. 5. No radioactive rays are emitted in this process.

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic B Nuclear Energy Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. The main cause of solar energy is
1. Nuclear fission and fusion
2. Nuclear fission
3. Nuclear fusion
4. Chemical reaction

Answer: 3. Nuclear fusion

Question 2. \({ }_{92}^{235} U+{ }_0^1 n \longrightarrow{ }_{56}^{141} B a+{ }_{36}^{92} \mathrm{Kr}+{ }_0^1 n\)
1. 1
2. 2
3. 3
4. 4

Answer: 3. 3

Question 3. What is the average binding energy of each nucleon inside a nucleus to make the nucleus stable?
1. Nearly 2 MeV
2. Nearly 2.5 MeV
3. Nearly 3 MeV
4. Nearly 8 MeV

Answer: 4. Nearly 8 MeV

Question 4. 1 eV = how many J?
1. 3.2 x 10-19
2. 1.6 x 10-19
3. 4.8 X 10-19
4. 6 4 X 10-19

Answer: 2. 1.6 x 10-19

Question 5. 1 MeV = how many J?
1. 1.6 x10-13
2. 3.2 x 10-13
3. 4.8 x 10-13
4. 6.4 x 10-13

Answer:  1. 1.6 x10-13

Question 6. Binding energy per nucleon is maximum in
1.60Ni
2. 56Fe
3. 58Fe
4. 62Ni

Answer: 4. 62Ni

Question 7. Value of binding energy per nucleon of 62Ni is approximately
1. 8.0 MeV
2. 9.2 MeV
3. 8.8 MeV
4. 8.2 MeV

Answer: 3. 8.8 MeV

Question 8. How many times more energy is released during fusion of 1 g of hydrogen than during fission of lg of uranium ( 235U92)?
1. 2.3
2. 4.3
3. 7.3
4. 10.3

Answer: 3. 7.3

Question 9. How much energy is produced if 0.1 u amount of mass is converted into energy?
1. 186.3 MeV
2. 46.575 MeV
3. 93.12 MeV
4. 372.6 MeV

Answer: 3. 93.12 MeV

Question 10. Size of the nucleus is of the order of
1. 10-10 m
2. 10-15 m
3. 10-12 m
4. 10-19 m

Answer: 2. 10-15 m

Question 11. Nuclear binding energy is equivalent to
1. Mass of proton
2. Mass of neutron
3. Mass of nucleus
4. Mass defect of nucleus

Answer: 4. Mass defect of nucleus

Question 12. The energy equivalent to 1 kg of matter is about
1. 10-15 J
2. 10 J
3. 10-10 J
4. 1017 J

Answer: 4. 1017 J

Question 13. Average binding energy per nucleon in the nucleus of an atom is approximately
1. 8eV
2. 8 keV
3. 8 MeV
4. 8J m

Answer: 3. 8 MeV

Question 14. A moderator is used in nuclear reactor in order to
1. Slow down the speed of the neutrons
2. Accelerate the neutrons
3. Increase the number of neutrons
4. Decrease the number of neutrons

Answer: 1. Slow down the speed of the neutrons

Question 15. The control rod in a nuclear reactor is made of
1. Uranium
2. Cadmium
3. Plutonium
4. Graphite

Answer: 2. Cadmium

Question 16. The process by which a heavy nucleus splits into light nuclei is known as
1. Fission
2. Fusion
3. Chain reaction
4. Meltdown

Answer: 1. Fission

Question 17. During the nuclear fusion reaction
1. A heavy nucleus breaks into two fragments by itself
2. A light nucleus bombarded by thermal neutrons breaks up
3. A heavy nucleus bombarded by thermal neutrons breaks up
4. Two light nuclei combine to give a heavier nucleus and possible other products

Answer: 4. Two light nuclei combine to give a heavier nucleus and possible other products

Question 18. Fusion reaction takes place at high temperature because
1. Atoms are ionised at high temperature
2. Molecules break up at high temperature
3. Nuclei break up at high temperature
4. Kinetic energy is high enough to overcome repulsion between nuclei

Answer: 4. Kinetic energy is high enough to overcome repulsion between nuclei

Question 19. The explosion of the atomic bomb takes place due to
1. Nuclear fission
2. Nuclear fusion
3. Melting
4. Evaporation

Answer: 1. Nuclear fission

Question 20. The mass equivalent of 931 MeV energy is
1. 1.66 x 10-27 kg
2. 6.02 x 10-24 kg
3. 1.66 x 10-20 kg
4. 9.11 x 10-31 kg

Answer: 1. 1.66 x 10-27 kg

Question 21. A chain reaction continues due to
1. Large mass defect
2. Large energy
3. Production of more neutrons in fission
4. High temperature

Answer: 3. Production of more neutrons in fission

Question 22. Heavy water ( D2O) is used as moderator in a nuclear reactor. The function of the moderator is
1. To control the energy released in the reactor
2. To absorb neutrons and stop chain reaction
3. To cool the reactor fast
4. To slow down the speed of neutrons

Answer: 4. To slow down the speed of neutrons

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic B Nuclear Energy Answer In Brief:

Question 1. What is the temperature required to bring about nuclear fusion?
Answer: Nuclear fusion takes place at a temperature of 107oC to 108oC.

Question 2. What is the main source of energy for the sun and the stars?
Answer: Nuclear fusion is the main source of energy for the sun and the stars

Question 3. Name one radioactive material which is much used as fuel in a nuclear reactor.
Answer: Uranium, a radioactive material, is generally used as fuel in a nuclear reactor.

Question 4. What is the role of heavy waters in a nuclear reactor?
Answer: Heavy water is used in a nuclear reactor to slow down the speed of neutrons.

Question 5. The binding energy of the 4Henucleus is 28.2 MeV. What do you understand by this statement?
Answer: The given statement means that a minimum energy of 28.2 MeV is required to separate 2 protons and 2 neutrons from a helium nucleus to make them free.

Question 6. Which element has the highest binding energy per nucleon?
Answer: 62Ni has the highest binding energy per nucleon.

Question 7. What do you understand by mass defect?
Answer: The mass of a nucleus is slightly less than the mass of the sum of protons and neutrons present in the nucleus, this difference of two masses is called the mass defect.

Question 8. What is binding energy of a nucleus?
Answer: Nuclear binding energy is the minimum energy that is required to disassemble the nucleus of an atom into its component parts, i.e., neutrons and protons.

Question 9. Who did invent the formula of equivalence of mass and energy?
Answer: Albert Einstein invented the formula.

Question 10. Write down Einstein’s formula for mass-energy equivalence.
Answer: Formula: E=mc2, where m = mass of material, c – speed of light in vacuum, and E is the amount of energy equivalent to mass m.

Question 11. What is nuclear fission?
Answer: Nuclear fission is the process of splitting of a heavy nucleus into two lighter nuclei of comparable masses with the liberation of energy.

Question 12. What is the main source of energy gained in nuclear fusion or fission?
Answer: The main source of energy gained in nuclear fusion or fission is a decrease or reduction in mass.

Question 13. Which nuclear process was followed to manufacture an atomic bomb?
Answer: Nuclear fission was followed to manufacture an atom bomb.

Question 14. Which particle is used as a bombarding particle to bombard the target nucleus in the process of nuclear fission?
Answer: Neutron is used as a bombarding particle.

Question 15. How much energy is produced if 1 u amount of mass is converted into energy?
Answer: 931.2 MeV (approx.) energy is produced if lu amount of mass is converted into energy.

Question 16. What is a thermal neutron?
Answer: A neutron with a high kinetic energy of about 10-2 eV is called thermal neutron.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 17. Write down an use of thermal neutron.
Answer: Thermal neutron is used to split a heavy nucleus into two or more lighter nuclei in nuclear fission.

Question 18. Is the Particle produced in nuclear fusion radioactive or non-radioactive?
Answer: The particle produced in nuclear fusion is non-radioactive.

Question 19. Which process is carried out in a nuclear reactor?
Answer: The process of nuclear fission is carried out in a controlled way in a nuclear reactor.

Question 20. Can nuclear fission process be controlled?
Answer: Yes, the process of nuclear fission can be controlled.

Question 21. Complete the following reaction: \({ }_{88}^{226} R a \longrightarrow ?+{ }_{86}^{222} R n\)
Answer: \({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra} \rightarrow{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}+{ }_{86}^{222} \mathrm{Rn}\)

Question 22. Complete the following reaction: \({ }_6^{14} C \longrightarrow ?+{ }_7^{14} N\)
Answer: \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C} \rightarrow{ }_{-1}^0 \mathrm{e}+{ }_7^{14} N\)

Question 23. Complete the following reaction: \({ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th} \longrightarrow{ }_{91}^{234} \mathrm{~Pa}+?\)
Answer: \({ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th} \rightarrow{ }_{91}^{234} \mathrm{~Pa}+{ }_{-1}^0 \mathrm{e}\)

Question 24. Complete the following reaction: \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U} \longrightarrow ?+{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\)
Answer: \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U} \rightarrow{ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th}+{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\)

Question 25. What is the amount of nuclear binding energy corresponds to mass defect Am?
Answer: Nuclear binding energy corresponds to mass defect Δm is = Δm . c2, c = speed of light in vacuum.

Question 26. The expected mass of a helium nucleus is 4.0320 u and its actual mass is 4.0015 u. Find its mass defect.
Answer: Mass defect of a helium nucleus is Δm = 4.0320 – 4.0015 = 0.0305 u.

Question 27. What is the relation between mass defect and nuclear binding energy?
Answer: Nuclear binding energy is energy equivalent to the mass defect of a nucleus.

Question 28. Is the law of conservation of mass applicable in case of nuclear reaction?
Answer: In case of nuclear reaction the law of conservation of mass is not applicable.

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 29. Is the law of conservation of mass number and the law of conservation of atomic number applicable in case of nuclear reaction?
Answer: Yes, the law of conservation of mass number and the law of conservation of atomic number are applicable in case of nuclear reaction.

Question 30. What is a nuclear reactor?
Answer: A nuclear reactor is an arrangement used to initiate and control a sustained nuclear chain reaction.

Question 31. What is the role of moderators in a nuclear reactor?
Answer: Moderator is used to slowing down the speed of neutrons.

Question 32. What is the role of the control rod in a nuclear reactor?
Answer: The control rod absorbs surplus thermal neutrons.

Question 33. What material is generally used as a control rod in a nuclear reactor?
Answer: Cadmium rod or steel rod with a coating of boron is generally used as a control rod.

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic B Nuclear Energy Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. The mass of a nucleus is slight ______ than the sum of the masses of neutrons and protons present in that nucleus.
Answer: Less

Question 2. The process of nuclear ______  is carried out before nuclear fusion takes place.
Answer: Fission

Question 3. Mass of the nucleus of deuterium (2H1) is ______ than the sum of masses of one proton and one neutron.
Answer: Less

Question 4. The chain reaction is observed in nuclear fission.
Answer:

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 5. The main cause in producing energy for the sun is nuclear ________.
Answer: Fusion

Question 6. The fusion process occurs at a very high temperature. Such a process is called a _______  reaction.
Answer: Thermonuclear

Question 7. ________  is used as a projectile particle in a nuclear fission reaction.
Answer: Thermal/Slow

Question 8. Heavy water (D2O) is used as a _______ in nuclear reactors.
Answer: Moderator

Question 9. The greater is the binding energy the more ______  is the nucleus.
Answer: Stable

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Topic B Nuclear Energy State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. High-energy neutrons are used in a nuclear reactor to initiate the fission reaction.
Answer: False

Question 2. Cadmium rods are used as moderators in a nuclear reactor.
Answer: False

Physical Science Class 10 West Bengal Board

Question 3. The higher the mass defect the higher is the stability of the nucleus.
Answer: False

Question 4. \({ }_0^1 \mathrm{n}+{ }_7^{14} \mathrm{~N} \longrightarrow{ }_1^0 \mathrm{H}+{ }_6^{15} \mathrm{C}\)
Answer: False

Question 5. The conversion of lu of mass results in 931.2 x 106 eV of energy.
Answer: True

Question 6. In sun and other stars, the energy is produced by nuclear fusion.
Answer: True

Question 7. Mass defect is always positive.
Answer: True

Question 8. Electron is used as an ideal particle for bombarding.
Answer: False

Question 9. Hydrogen bomb is made on the basis of nuclear fission reaction.
Answer: False

Question 10. The Fukushima nuclear plant disaster was a nuclear accident caused by a natural disaster tsunami.
Answer: True

Chapter 7 Atomic Nucleus Miscellaneous Type Questions Match The Columns:

Question 1.

Column A Column B   
α-particle 1. Electromagnetic radiation
β-particle 2. 1H2
γ-ray 3. He2+
Deuteron 4. e-

Answer:
α-particle:
3. He2+
β-particle:
4. e- 
γ-ray:
1. Electromagnetic radiation
Deuteron:
2. 1H2

Question 2.

Column A  Column B
α-decay 1. Unchanged nucleus
β -decay 2. Decrease in mass number
γ-decay 3. Increase in atomic number

Answer:
α-decay: 2. Decrease in mass number
β -decay:  3. Increase in atomic number
γ-decay: 1. Unchanged nucleus

Question 3.

Column A Column B
1 u 1. 6.642 X 10-24 g
Mass of α-particle 2. E = mc2
Equivalence of mass and energy 3. 1H2 + 1H2 →2He3  + 0n1
Nuclear fusion 4. 931.2 MeV


Answer:
1 u:
4. 931.2 MeV
Mass of α-particle:
 1. 6.642 X 10-24 g
Equivalence of mass and energy:
2. E = mc2
Nuclear fusion:
3. 1H2 + 1H2 →2He3  + 0n1

WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic A Thermal Expansion of Solid, Liquid and Gas Synopsis:

1. If the temperature of a solid substance is increased, its area and volume also expand: This phenomenon is called the thermal expansion of a solid substance.

2. Thermal expansion of a solid is of three types:
(1)Expansion of length
(2)Expansion of area
(3)Expansion of volume.

3. The coefficient of linear expansion of a solid is the fractional increase in its length per degree rise in temperature. It is generally denoted by or. If l1 and lare the lengths of a solid substance (say a metallic rod) at temperatures t1 and t2 respectively, then \(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

Read and Learn Also WBBSE Solutions for Class 10 Physical Science and Environment

4. Unit of coefficient of surface expansion, \(=\frac{\text { unit of length }}{\text { unit of length } \times \text { unit of temperature }}\),\(=\frac{1}{\text { unit of temperature }}\)

Therefore, unit of a is independent of unit of length and it depends on the unit of temperature. So, CGS unit of α is °C-1 , in SI it is K-1 and in FPS system its unit is °F-1.

5. The change in temperature by 1°F = 5/9°C change in temperature.
∴ value of α in Fahrenheit scale (αF) = 5/9 X value of or in Celsius scale (αc).

6. The change in temperature by 1K = 1°C change in temperature
∴ Value α in Kelvin ( αk) = value of α in Celsius scale (αc).
i..e., αkc= 9/5αF

7. The coefficient of surface expansion of a solid is the fractional increase in its surface area per degree rise in temperature. It is generally denoted by β. If S1 and S2 are the surface areas of a solid at temperatures t1 and t2 respectively, then \(\beta=\frac{S_2-S_1}{S_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\).

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

8. Unit of coefficient of surface expansion \(=\frac{\text { unit of area }}{\text { unit of area } \times \text { unit of temperature }}\) , \(=\frac{1}{\text { unit of temperature }}\)

Unit in CGS system is °C-1  , in SI it is K-1, and in FPS system it’s unit is °F-1 .

9. The coefficient of volume expansion of a solid is the fractional increase in its volume per degree rise in temperature. It is usually denoted by γ. if V1 and V2 are the volumes of a solid at t1 and t2 respectively, then coefficient of volume expansion, \(\gamma=\frac{V_2-V_1}{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

10. Unit of coefficient of volume expansion γ, \(=\frac{\text { unit of volume }}{\text { unit of volume } Χ \text { unit of temperature }}\) = \(=\frac{1}{\text { unit of temperature }}\)

Unitin CGS system is °C-1  , in SI it is K-1, and in FPS system its unit is °F-1.

10. Relation among α, β and γ is α = β/2 = γ/2

11. ln case of a liquid kept in a vessel, if the expansion of the vessel is neglected, the expansion of the liquid that is obtained is the apparent expansion of the liquid. In the case of the same liquid kept in a vessel, if the expansion of the vessel is taken into consideration along with the apparent expansion of the liquid, then the expansion of the liquid is called the real expansion of the liquid.

12. The coefficient of real expansion of a liquid is the ratio of actual expansion in volume to its original volume for each degree rise in temperature.

13. The coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid is the ratio of apparent expansion in volume to its original volume for each degree of rise in temperature. The relation between the coefficients of real and apparent expansions of a liquid is given by γr = γa + γg

where γr and γa are the respective, coefficients of real and apparent expansions of the liquid and γg is the coefficient of volume expansion of the substance of the vessel in which the liquid is kept.

14. The units of coefficient of apparent or real expansion of a liquid depend only on the unit of temperature and not on the unit of volume. The unit of each is °C-1  or °F-1 or K-1  and the dimensional coefficient is Θ-1.

15. By keeping the pressure on a definite mass of gas constant, if the temperature is raised from 0°C to 1°C, then the ratio of expansion in volume to the initial volume of a gas is called coefficient of volume expansion of that gas and it is expressed as γp.

Suppose, V0 and Vt are the respective volumes of a definite mass of gas at 0°C and t°C at constant pressure. Then we can write, \(\gamma_p=\frac{V_t-V_0}{V_t t} \text { or, } V_t=V_0\left(1+\gamma_p t\right)\).

16. Coefficient of volume expansion of an ideal gas, \(\gamma_p=\frac{1}{273}{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}^{-1}\)

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic A Thermal Expansion of Solid, Liquid and Gas Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is the thermal expansion of a solid substance? There are two scales for measurement of length (distance). One is made of invar and the other of iron. Which one of these two is more suitable for measuring accurately the distance between two definite places in different times of the year Give a reason for your answer.

Answer:
1. If the temperature of a solid substance is increased, the volume of the substance expands. This expansion due to the increase of temperature is called the thermal expansion of a solid substance.

2. The temperature of a place is different during different seasons of the year. The distance between two places does not depend on the temperature. But if the measuring scale is made of a metal, the length of the scale changes according to the temperature. As a result, different readings are found for the same length at different times of the year with this scale.

3. Invar has a coefficient of linear expansion (1.2 x 10-6K-1 at 20°C) which is much lower than the coefficient of linear expansion of iron (11.8 x 10-6K-1 at 20°C). This means that the change in length of a scale made of invar is insignificant compared to the change in length of an equal scale made of iron. For this reason, a scale made of invar is more suitable for the measurement of distance.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 2. Write the expression for the coefficient of linear expansion of a solid. What do you mean by the statement that the coefficient of linear expansion of iron is 12 x 10-6/°C?

Answer:
1. Suppose l1 is the length of a solid substance at temperature t1 and the length becomes lwhen the temperature is raised to t2 . If α is the coefficient of linear expansion of the solid substance, then according to the definition, \(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

The above statement means that if the temperature, of an iron rod is increased by 1°C, 12 x 10-6 part of its original length increases.

Question 3. There are several rods of same length and made of the same substance. What is the change in their lengths for a different increase in their temperatures? Show that: the unit of coefficient of linear expansion does not depend on the unit of length but depends only on the unit of temperature.

Answer:
1. The change in lengths of the rods made of the same substance and having the same length is directly proportional to the change in temperature. Therefore more the temperature is increased, the more is the change in length of the rod. The ratio between the change in temperature and the change in this length is constant.

Mathematically, change in length ex-change in temperature or, (l1-l2) ∝ (t2 -t1)

2. Suppose, l1 is the 1ength of a rod at temperature t1. It is heated to a higher temperature t2 when its length becomes l2. Hence, the coefficient of linear expansion,

∴ \(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

\(\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1}\) is the ratio of two quantities having the same dimension. So it has no unit. Therefore, the coefficient of linear expansion depends only on the unit of (tt1), i.e., on the unit of temperature.

Wb Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 4. There are several rods of different, lengths made of the same substance. If the temperature of the rods Is increased by the same amount, what is the change in their lengths? A stopper made of steel gets stuck firmly in the mouth of a bottle made of brass. How can you open it?

Answer:
1. The change in length of the rods made of the same substance and of different lengths is directly proportional to the lengths of the rods for the same increase of temperature, in other words, more the initial length of the rod, more is the change of length of the rod. The ratio between the initial length and the change in length is constant.

∴ Mathematically, change in length ∝ initial length or, (l1-l2) ∝ l1

2. The coefficient of linear expansion for brass is greater than that for steel. If the system is heated, the expansion of brass is more than that of steel. As a result, the stopper is stuck all the more. But if the system is cooled, the contraction of brass is more than that of iron. Hence, the stopper loosens and comes out.

Question 5. How does the length of a rod depend on the initial length of the expanding rod (l2) and on difference of temperature (Δt)? Establish a relationship between the coefficients of linear expansion in the Celcius and Fahrenheit scales.

Answer: Expansion of length (Δl) is directly proportional to the initial length of the rod and increase in temperature (Δt), i.e. Δl ∝Δl1 [when Δt remains the same] and Δl ∝ Δt [when l1 is constant]
∴ Δl ∝ l1Δt[when both l1 and Δt change]

Let us assume that the coefficient of linear expansion of a solid substance, α = x/°C.
Again, we know that, change by 1°C = change by 9/5°F

\(\alpha=\frac{x}{\frac{9}{5} \circ \mathrm{F}}=\frac{5}{9} x /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{F}\)

Hence, if the coefficients of linear expansion are αc and αF respectively, then = αF 5/9 αc.

Question 6. Explain what happens when a bimetallic strip made of brass and iron is heated.

Answer: For the same increase in temperature, different solid substances of the same length have different amount of expansion. The coefficient of linear expansion of brass is more than that of iron. The lengths of brass and iron are the same in the bimetallic strip. As the linear expansion of brass is more than that of iron for the same rise in temperature, the bi-metallic strip bends with brass remaining outside.

Question 7. There Is one rod of iron, one iron scale and one invar scale in a room. The temperature of the room changes every hour. By which scale, the length of the rod is to be measured so that no change of length is observed? Establish the condition to maintain a constant difference in the lengths of two rods at all temperatures.

Answer: For the same change in temperature, change in length of invar is negligible compared to the change in length of iron which is much more. As the rod is made of iron, its change in length per unit length is equal to the change in length per unit length of the scale, with the same change in temperature. As a result, no change in length of the rod is noticed if the length of rod is measured with the iron scale.

Let us assume that at temperature t1, lengths of the two rods are l1 and l2 ( l1 > l2 ). After the temperature increases to t2, the lengths of these two rods become l’1  and l’2 respectively. Let the coefficients of linear expansion of these rods be α1 and α2 respectively.

According to the given condition,

\(l_1-l_2=l_1^{\prime}-l_2^{\prime}\) or, \(l_1^{\prime}-l_1=l_2^{\prime}-l_2\)

or, \(l_1 \alpha_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)=l_2 \alpha_2\left(t_2-t_1\right)\)

or, \(l_1 \alpha_1=l_2 \alpha_2\) or, \(\frac{l_1}{l_2}=\frac{\alpha_2}{\alpha_1}\)

This is the required condition.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 8. An iron rod is fixed along the diameter of a circular iron ring. If the system is heated uniformly, does the ring remain circular? Explain.

Answer: Suppose, the length of the iron rod, is l1 =1.
Let the length of the iron ring be l2.
So, the diameter of the circle = l and the length of the iron ring, l2 = πl

∴\(\frac{l_2}{l_1}=\frac{\pi l}{l}=\pi\)

Suppose, increase in temperature of the system = t
Now, the length of the iron rod, l’1  = l(1+ αt) [where a is the coefficient of linear expansion of iron] and length in the iron] and length in the iron ring l’2 = πl(1 +αt)

∴ \( \frac{l_2^{\prime}}{l_1^{\prime}}=\frac{\pi l(l+\alpha t)}{l(l+\alpha t)}=\pi\)

As the ratio of the circumference of the circle and diameter remain the same in both cases, the ring remains circular.

Question 9. Write the expression for the coefficient of surface expansion for solid. Show that the unit of coefficient of area expansion does not depend on the unit of area but only on the unit of temperature.

Answer: Let the coefficient of surface expansion be denoted by β.

If S1 and S2 are the surface areas of a solid at temperatures t1 and trespectively, then the increase in surface area is (S2 – S1) with a rise in temperature of ( t2 – t1).

∴ \(\beta=\frac{S_2-S_1}{S_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

Here \(\frac{\left(S_2-S_1\right)}{S_1}\) is a ratio of two similar quantities and thus does not have any unit. Therefore, the unit of coefficient of surface expansion depends only on the unit of ( t2 – t1) i.e., on the unit of temperature.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 4 Question Answer

Question 10. On which factors and how does the surface expansion of a solid depend? Why is some gap left between two iron plates in a joint of a bridge?

Answer: Suppose, the surface area of a solid is S1 at temperature t1. If the temperature is increased to t2, the area becomes S2 .
Thus, expansion of area = (S2 – S1) and increase of temperature = (t2 – t1).

Therefore, the expansion of area is directly proportional to the initial area of the solid and also on the increase in temperature.
∴ (S2 – S1) α S1 [when (t2 – t1) remains the same] and (S2 – S1) ∝ (t2 – t1) [when S1 is constant]
i.e., S2 – S1 ∝ t2 – t1 [when both Sand (t2 – t1) are changing]

A solid get expansion due to an increase of temperature. The iron plates of the joints of a bridge are heated by the sun’s rays and require sufficient space for expansion. For this reason, some gap is left between the two plates. Without this gap, one iron plate puts pressure on another due to thermal expansion. As a result, the bridge may get damaged.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Thermal Expansion

Question 11. Write down the expression for the coefficient of volume expansion of solid. Show that the unit of coefficient of volume expansion does not depend on the unit of volume but depends only on the unit of temperature.

Answer:
1. Let the expression be denoted by γ. If V1 and V2 are the volumes of a solid at temperatures t1 and t2 respectively, then the increase in volume is (V2 – V1) with a rise in temperature of (t2 – t1).

∴\(\gamma=\frac{V_2-V_1}{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

\(\gamma=\frac{\text { increase in volume }}{\text { initial volume } \times \text { increase in temperature }}\)

 

Therefore, unit of coefficient of volume expansion \(=\frac{\text { unit of volume }}{\text { unit of volume } \times \text { unit of temperature }}\) = \(=\frac{1}{\text { unit of temperature }}\)

Hence, unit of coefficient of volume expansion depends only on the unit of temperature.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 12. What do you mean by the statement that the coefficient of volume expansion of iron is 36 x 10-6/°C? A roof casting generally needs rods of iron but not of any other metal explain why?

Answer:
1. The coefficient of volume expansion of iron is 36 x 10-6/°C means that with a rise of temperature of 1°C, the volume increases by 36 x 10-6 of its initial volume.

Alternative answer: The coefficient of volume expansion of iron is 36 x 10-6/°C. Thus, if the temperature of 1cm3 or 1m3 of iron is increased by 1°C, the volume of iron increases by  36 x 10-6cm3 or 36 x 10-6m3.

2. During casting, iron rods are entered into concrete. In summer, temperature is high and so both concrete and rod undergo thermal expansion. On the other hand, temperature is low in winter and both of them contract. It has been found that the coefficient of expansion for both are almost equal. That is why only iron rods are used during casting. Expansion or compression of any other metal does not match with that *of concrete and as a result, cracks develop in the casting.

Question 13. Two Identical sheets, one of copper and the other of iron, are riveted together. What happens if this system is heated? What happens if the temperature of this system is decreased?

Answer: The coefficient of linear expansion of copper is greater than that of iron. So, with the same increase in temperature, linear expansion of copper is more than that of iron. As the two sheets are riveted together, this pair of sheets bend. Expansion of copper being more, it remains outside.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Bending Due to heating

With the decrease in temperature, this pair of sheets bend. Contraction of copper being more, it remains inside copper.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Bending Due To Cooling

Question 14. Establish the relation between apparent and real expansions of a liquid with the help of a simple experiment.

Answer:
Experiment: At first, a glass flask fitted with a stopper is taken. A thin glass tube is entered through the stopper and a scale is fixed with the tube. A portion of the tube and the entire glass flask are filled with a coloured liquid. Let the initial level of liquid in the tube be A.

Now this flask is immersed in a vessel filled with hot water. It can be observed that the level of liquid comes down from A to B. Then the level of liquid goes up slowly to C.

Conclusion: When the flask is immersed in hot water, glass gathers heat from water and expands itself. This is the reason why the level of liquid in the tube comes down from A to B. Then heat is transmitted to liquid through glass and liquid expands so that its level in the tube goes up.

From this experiment, it is clearly understood that the volume of the liquid in the glass tube between points A and B is the measure of expansion of the vessel and the volume of the liquid in the glass tube between points, S and C is the measure of real expansion of the liquid. If we ignore the expansion of the vessel, the expansion of the liquid is called apparent expansion.

Therefore, the volume of the liquid in the glass tube between points A and C represents the apparent expansion of liquid.
Here, BC = AB+AC
Hence, real expansion of the liquid = expansion of volume of the vessel + apparent expansion of the liquid.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Real And Apparent Expansion
Question 15. What is the coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid? What are the factors on which the apparent expansion of a liquid depends?

Answer: The coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid is the ratio of apparent expansion in volume to its original volume for each degree rise in temperature.

The apparent expansion of a liquid depends on the following factors:
1. Initial volume of the liquid
2. Increase of temperature
3. Nature of the liquid
4. Substance of the vessel.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 16. Write the expression for the coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid. A right circular cylinder contains liquid. If the cylinder is heated, the level of liquid in it remains unchanged. How is it possible?

Answer:
1. Suppose, the volume of a definite mass of a liquid is V1 at temperature t1 and if the temperature is increased to t2, its apparent volume is V2.

Therefore, coefficient of real expansion of the liquid \(\gamma_r=\frac{V_2-V_1}{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

2. Unit of the coefficient of real expansion of a liquid is °C-1  or °F-1 or K-1  .

Question 17. What is the coefficient of real expansion of a liquid? What are the factors on which the real expansion of a liquid depends?

Answer:

1. The coefficient of real expansion of a liquid is the ratio of actual expansion in volume to its original volume for each degree rise in temperature.

2. The real expansion of a liquid depends on the following factors:
(1)Initial volume of the liquid 0 Increase in temperature
(2)Nature of the liquid.

Question 18. Between the coefficients of apparent and real expansions, which does measure the inherent property of a liquid?

Answer:

1. To measure the coefficient of thermal expansion of a liquid, it must be kept in a vessel. The coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid depends on the coefficient of volume expansion of the vessel.

2. For different vessels made of different substances, coefficients of apparent expansion are different; but the coefficient of real expansion remains unchanged. Therefore, between the coefficients of apparent and real expansions, coefficient of real expansion measures the inherent property of a liquid.

Question 19. Write the expression for the coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid. A right circular cylinder contains liquid. If the cylinder is heated, the level of liquid in it remains unchanged. How is it possible?

Answer:

Suppose, the volume of a definite mass of a liquid is V1 at temperature t1 and if the temperature is increased to t2, its apparent volume is V’2.

Therefore, coefficient of apparent expansion of the liquid, γa = \(\gamma_a=\frac{V_2^{\prime}-V_1}{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

If the cylinder and the liquid equally expand for a increase in temperature, no change occurs in the level of liquid in the cylinder. In this case, the coefficient of apparent expansion of the liquid is zero.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science And Environment

Question 20. Write the expression for coefficient of volume expansion of a gas and calculate its value with the help of Charles’ law.

Answer:

Suppose, the volume of a definite mass of gas at 0°C is V/Q. Under constant pressure if the temperature is increased to t°C, the volume becomes Vt.

By definition of coefficient of volume expansion, we may write \(\gamma_p=\frac{V_t-V_0}{V_0 t}\) ……(1)

From equation (1), we get, Vt – V0 =V0 γpt or, Vt=V0pt or, Vt= V0(l + γpt)
Again, we get from Charles’ law, \(V_t=V_0\left(1+\frac{t}{273}\right)\) …..(3)

By comparing equations (2) and (3), we get the value of coefficient of volume expansion of a gas as \(\gamma_p=\frac{1}{273}{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}^{-1}=3.663 \times 10^{-3 \circ} \mathrm{C}^{-1}\).

Question 21. What do you mean by apparent expansion and real expansion of liquid? A liquid has coefficient of apparent expansion but in case of a gas, why is the coefficient of apparent expansion not taken into consideration?

Answer:

Apparent expansion of liquid: In case of a liquid kept in a vessel, if the expansion of the vessel is neglected, the expansion of the liquid that is obtained is called the apparent expansion of the liquid.

Real expansion of liquid: In case of a liquid kept in a vessel, if the expansion of the vessel is taken into consideration along with the apparent expansion of the liquid, the expansion of the liquid is called the real expansion of the liquid.

Both liquid and gaseous substances have to be kept inside a vessel and then heated. As a result, expansion of the vessel also takes place along with the expansion of liquid or gas. Expansion of solid is less than the expansion of liquid but, it cannot be neglected. But in case of a gas, expansion of the vessel is not considered as the expansion of solid is 1/100th part of the expansion of a gas taken in it. For this reason, coefficient of apparent expansion of gas is not taken into account.

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic A Thermal Expansion of Solid, Liquid and Gas Very Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. Unit of coefficient of surface expansion depends
1. Only on the unit of area
2. Only on the unit of temperature
3. On the units of area and temperature
4. On the units of temperature and time

Answer: 2. Only on the unit of temperature

Question 2. Dimensional formula of coefficient of volume expansion is
1. L3 Θ-1  
2.Θ-2
3. LΘ-1 
4. Θ-1

Answer: 4. Θ-1

Question 3. The value of the coefficient of volume expansion of gas is
1. 1/273 °C-1 
2. 2/273 °C-1 
3. 4/273 °C-1 
4. 1/91 °C-1 

Answer:1. 1/273 °C-1 

Question 4. The initial temperature at the time of expansion of gas is taken as
1. Any temperature
2. 0K
3. 0°C
4. 4°C

Answer: 3. 0°C

Question 5. Which of the following liquids displays anomalous expansion?
1. Mercury
2. Kerosene
3. Glycerine
4. Water

Answer: 4. Water

Question 6. Expansion of the length of a solid depends on
1. Initial length
2. Increase in temperature
3. The material
4. All of the above

Answer: 4. All of the above

Question 7. If the coefficient of linear expansion of a solid substance is 27xlO-6/°C, what is the value in Fahrenheit scale?
1. 12 x 10-6°F-1
2. 16 X 10-6°F-1
3. 15 X 10-6°F-1
4. 18 X 10-6°F-1

Answer:  3. 15 X 10-6°F-1

Question 8. Which of the following has practically no expansion in spite of increase in temperature?
1. Iron
2. Nickel
3. Steel
4. Invar (nickel-iron alloy)

Answer: 4. Invar (nickel-iron alloy)

Question 9. If α, β and γ are the coefficients of linear expansion, surface expansion and volume expansion of a solid substance respectively, then
1. α has the highest value
2. β has the highest value
3. γ has the highest value
4. α, (β and γ have equal values

Answer: 3. γ has the highest value

Question 10. If the lengths of a solid substance with α as the coefficient of linear expansion are l1 and l2 at temperatures. t1 and t2 respectively (where t2 > t1 ), then
1. \(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{t_2-t_1}\)
2. \(\alpha=\frac{l_1}{\left(l_2-l_1\right)\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)
3. \(\alpha=\frac{\left(l_2-l_1\right)^2}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)
4. \(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

Answer: 4. \(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

Question 11. If the surface areas of a solid substance with β as the coefficient of surface expansion are S1 and S2 at temperatures t1 and t2 respectively (where t2 > t1 ), then
1. \(\beta=\frac{S_2-S_1}{t_2-t_1}\)
2. \(\beta=\frac{S_2}{\left(S_2-S_1\right)\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)
3. \(\beta=\frac{S_2-S_1}{S_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)
4. \(\beta=\frac{S_2}{S_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

Answer: 3. \(\beta=\frac{S_2-S_1}{S_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

Question 12. If the volumes of a solid substance with γ as the coefficient of volume expansion are V1 and V2 at temperatures and t2 respectively (where t2 > t1), then
1. \(\gamma=\frac{V_2-V_1}{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)
2. \(\gamma=\frac{V_2-V_1}{t_2-t_1}\)
3. \(\gamma=\frac{V_2\left(t_2-t_1\right)}{\left(V_2-V_1\right)}\)
4. \(\gamma=\frac{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}{\left(V_2-V_1\right)}\)

Answer:1. \(\gamma=\frac{V_2-V_1}{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

Question 13. If the temperature of a metallic rod of length 4 m is increased by 2°C, its length increases by 88 x 10-6m . α of this rod is
1. 9 x 10-6 °C-1 
2. 10 x 10-6 °C-1
3. 11 X 10-6 °C-1
4. 12 x 10-6 °C-1

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Answer: 3. 11 X 10-6 °C-1

Question 14. If the coefficients of linear expansion of a solid substance are ac and aF in Celcius and Fahrenheit scales respectively, then
1. αF = 5/9 αc
2. αF = 9/5 αc
3. αF = 5/8 αc
4. αF = 5/6 αc

Answer: 1. αF = 5/9 αc

Question 15. The temperatures of two iron rods of lengths 1 m and 2 m are increased to the same extent. What is the ratio of expansion of their lengths?
1. 1:2
2. 1:4
3. 1:8
4. 2:1

Answer: 1. 1:2

Question 16. If any solid substance is heated, which parameter is extended?
1. Only length
2. Only area
3. Only volume
4. All the three

Answer: 4. All the three

Question 17. There are two rods made of the same substance, each of length l. But their radii are r and 2 r, respectively. If the temperatures of both the rods are increased by the same amount, then
1. The length of the first rod increases more
2. The length of the second rod increases more
3. Both increase by the same length
4. It is not possible to predict their expansion

Answer: 3. Both increase by the same length

Question 18. There is a hole in the middle of a metal sheet. What happens if the temperature is increased?
1. Radius of the hole decreases
2. Radius of the hole increases
3. Radius of the hole remains unchanged
4. It is not possible to say whether the radius of the hole will increase or decrease

Answer: 2. Radius of the hole increases

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 19. There are two spheres made of the same substance and having the same radii, one is solid but the other is hollow. If the temperature of both the spheres is increased by the same amount, then
1. Expansion of the hollow sphere is more
2. Expansion of the solid sphere is more
3. Both have the same expansion
4. It is not possible to say which sphere will have more expansion

Answer: 3. Both have the same expansion

Question 20. There are two holes of radii r1 and r2 (r1 > r2) inside a metallic plate. If the metallic plate is heated
1. Value of r1 increases, value of r2 decreases
2. Values of both r1 and r2 increase
3. Values of both r1 and r2 decrease
4. value of r1 decreases, value of r2 increases

Answer: 2. Values of both r1 and r2 increase

Question 21. A metallic rod is attached along the diameter of a circular metal plate. Both are made of the same element. If the system is heated, the ratio of the circumference and the diameter of the circle is
1. π
2. π/2
3. π/4
4. π/6

Answer: 1. π

Question 22. The dimension of the coefficient of surface expansion of a solid is
1. 1 in length, 2 in mass, 1 in temperature
2. 1 in length, 2 in time, 1 in temperature
3. -1 in temperature
4. 2 in temperature

Answer: 3. -1 in temperature

Question 23. The dimension of the coefficient of volume expansion of a solid is
1. 2 in length, 1 in temperature
2. 2 in mass, 1 in temperature
3. 1 in length, 1 in temperature
4. -1 in temperature

Answer: 4. -1 in temperature

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Solutions

Question 24. Volume expansion of a solid depends
1. Only on the initial volume
2. Only on the rise of temperature
3. Only on the coefficient of volume expansion
4. On all the above

Answer: 4. On all the above

Question 25. Surface expansion of a solid depends
1. Only on the initial surface area
2. Only on the rise of temperature
3. Only on the coefficient of surface expansion
4. On all the above

Answer: 4. On all the above

Question 26. For accurate measurement during expansion of a liquid, initial temperature is taken as
1. 0°c
2. 0K
3. 4°c
4. 10°c

Answer: 1. 0°c

Question 27. If the thermal conductivity of glass, k = 0.0025 cal •cm-1 • °C-1  • s-1, then its value in SI is
1. 1.05 W • m-1 • K-1
2. 1.1 W • m • K-1
3. 1 W • m-1• K-1
4. 1.2 W • m-1 • K-1

Answer: 1. 1.05 W • m-1 • K-1

Question 28. If the temperatures on the two sides of a heated rod are the same, then the value of thermal conductivity of the rod (in the unit cal •cm-1 • °C-1  • s-1) is
1. 1
2. 0.5
3. 1000
4. ∞

Answer: 4. ∞

Question 29. There are two rods A and B of lengths lt and l2, and coefficients of linear expansion a± and az, respectively. What is the condition for the difference between the two lengths to remain unchanged at any temperature?
1. \(I_1 \alpha_1^2=I_2 \alpha_2^2\)
2. \(l_1^2 \alpha_1=I_2^2 \alpha_2\)
3. \(I_1 \alpha_2=I_2 \alpha_1\)
4. \(I_1 \alpha_1=I_2 \alpha_2\)

Answer: 4. \(I_1 \alpha_1=I_2 \alpha_2\)

Question 30. The volume of an iron sphere is 1000 cm3. What is the new volume of the sphere if the temperature is increased by 4°C? 7 for iron = 36 x lO-6^-1.
1. 0.15 cm3
2. 0.144 cm3
3. 0.154 cm3
4. 0.16 cm3

Answer: 2. 0.144 cm3

Question 31. When an aluminium ball is heated, the largest percentage increase will occur in its
1. Diameter
2. Area
3. Volume
4. Density

Answer: 3. Volume

Question 32. A bar of iron is 100 cm long at 20°C. At 19°C it will be (a of iron = 11 x 10-6 /°C)
1. 11 x 10-5 cm longer
2. 11 x 10-6 cm shorter
3. 11 x 10-4 cm shorter
4. 11 x 10-4 cm longer

Answer: 3. 11 x 10-4 cm shorter

Question 33. A solid ball of metal has a concentric spherical cavity within it. If the ball is heated, the volume of a cavity will
1. Increase
2. Decrease
3. Remain unaltered
4. First increases then decreases

Answer: 1. Increase

Question 34. When a bimetallic strip is heated, it
1. Does not bend at all
2. Get twisted in the form of a helix
3. Bends in the form of an arc with the more expandable metal outside
4. Bend in the form of an arc with the more expandable metal inside

Answer: 3. Bends in the form of an arc with the more expandable metal outside

Question 35. The coefficient of superficial expansion of a solid is 2×10-5/°C- It’s coefficient of linear expansion is
1. 4 x 10-5/°C
2. 3 x 10-5/°C
3. 2 x 10-5/°C
4. 1 x 10-5/°c

Answer: 4. 1 x 10-5/°c

Question 36. If the length of a cylinder on heating increases by 2%. The area of the base will increase by
1. 0.5%
2. 2%
3. 1%
4. 4%

Answer: 4. 4%

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic A Thermal Expansion of Solid, Liquid and Gas Answer In Brief:

Question 1. The container has no role in the expansion of which—solid or liquid?
Answer: The container has no role in the expansion of solid.

Question 2. There are two spheres made of the same substance and also have equal radii. One of them is solid and the other is hollow. If the same amount of heat is given to both the spheres, which one expands more?
Answer: The hollow sphere expands more.

Question 3. What is the unit of coefficient of linear expansion of solid?
Answer: The unit of coefficient of linear expansion of solid is °C-1  or °F-1 or K-1.

Question 4. Write one use of a bimetallic strip.
Answer: Bimetallic strip is used as thermostat.

Question 5. A bimetallic strip is made up of two metals A and B. The coefficient of linear expansion of A is more than that of B. If the bimetallic strip is heated, it bends. Which metal remains inside the curvature?
Answer: Metal B remains in the inside portion of the curvature.

Question 6. A bimetallic strip is made up of two metals A and B. The coefficient of linear expansion of A is more than that of B. If the bimetallic strip is cooled, it bends. Which metal remains inside the curvature?
Answer: Metal A remains in the inside portion of the curvature.

Question 7. What is the coefficient of linear expansion of a solid?
Answer: The coefficient of linear expansion of a solid is the fractional increase in length per degree rise in temperature.

Question 8. Does the unit of coefficient of linear expansion of a solid depend on the unit of length?
Answer: No, it does not depend on the unit of length.

Question 9. What is the coefficient of surface expansion of a solid?
Answer: The coefficient of surface expansion of a solid is the fractional increase in area per degree rise in temperature.

Question 10. Does the unit of coefficient of surface expansion of a solid depend on the unit of area?
Answer: No, it does not depend on the unit of area.

Question 11. Define the coefficient of volume expansion of a solid substance.
Answer: The coefficient of volume expansion of a solid is the fractional increase in volume per degree rise in temperature.

Question 12. Does the unit of coefficient of volume expansion of a solid depend on the unit of volume?
Answer: No, it does not depend on the unit of voiume.

Question 13. A scale made of brass is graduated at 0°C. What error may arise in the measurement of a certain distance with this scale at 30°C?
Answer: If a distance is measured by the given scale at 30°C, the reading obtained is less than the actual length.

Question 14. A scale made of brass is graduated at 0°C. 1 What error may arise in the measurement of a certain distance with this scale at 10°C?
Answer: If a length is measured by the given scale at 10°C, the reading obtained is more than the actual length.

Question 15. Why can a platinum wire be easily sealed l with glass by application of heat? 
Answer: As the coefficient of linear expansion of glass and platinum are nearly equal, a platinum wire can be easily sealed with glass by, application of heat.

Question 16. Why cannot a copper wire be sealed with glass by application of heat?
Answer: As the coefficient of linear expansion of copper is greater than that of glass, a copper wire cannot be sealed with glass by application of heat.

Question 17. Name an alloy whose coefficient of thermal expansion is much less than the same of its constituents.
Answer: Invar, an alloy with 36% nickel and 64% iron, has very low coefficient of thermal expansion compared to that of its constituent elements.

Question 18. A liquid is kept in a vessel whose coefficient of volume expansion is 5 x 10-6 °C-1. if the real coefficient of expansion of the liquid is 20 x 10-5 °C-1, then what is the value of apparent coefficient of expansion?
Answer: Coefficient of apparent expansion of the liquid = coefficient of real expansion of the liquid — coefficient of volume expansion of the substance of the vessel = (20 x 10-5– 5 x 10-6) °C-1 = 19.5 X 10-5 °C-1

Question 19. A liquid is kept in two vessels A and B separately and then both are heated. The coefficient of volume expansion of the substance A is greater than that of B. The coefficient of apparent expansion of the liquid is greater in which vessel?
Answer: The coefficient of apparent expansion of the liquid is greater in the vessel B.

Question 20. A spherical metallic ball is heated. Among the radius, surface area and volume, which has the highest percentage increase?
Answer: The volume of the sphere has the highest percentage increase.

Question 21. A spherical metallic ball is heated. Among the radius, surface area and volume, which has the lowest percentage increase?
Answer: The radius of the sphere has the lowest percentage increase.

Question 22. Which coefficient of expansion of a liquid does not depend on the expansion of the container?
Answer: The coefficient of real expansion of a liquid does not depend on the expansion of the container.

Question 23. Which coefficient of expansion of a liquid depends on the expansion of the container?
Answer: The coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid depends on the expansion of the container.

Question 24. What is the nature of the coefficient of volume expansion of a substance whose volume decreases with increase in temperature?
Answer: The coefficient of volume expansion of a substance, whose volume decreases with increase in temperature, is negative.

Question 25. The coefficient of volume expansion of water is negative in the temperature range of 0°C-4°C. Does the volume of water increase or decrease with an increase in temperature, in the given temperature range?
Answer: The volume of water decreases with an increase in temperature, in the given temperature range.

Question 26. Name one liquid substance whose coefficient of volume expansion is negative in a definite temperature range.
Answer: The value of coefficient of volume expansion of water is negative in the temperature range of 0°C-4°C.

Question 27. Name one solid substance whose coefficient of volume expansion is negative in a definite temperature range.
Answer: The value of coefficient of volume expansion of pure silicon (a solid substance) is negative in the temperature range of -153°C to -255°C.

Question 28. What is the dimensional formula of the coefficients of apparent and real expansion of a liquid?
Answer: The dimensional formula of the coefficients of apparent and real expansion of a liquid is Θ-1.

Question 29. Define volume coefficient (γp) of a gas.
Answer: If the temperature of a gas is raised from 0°C to 1°C by keeping the pressure on a definite mass of gas constant, then the expansion in volume per unit volume of the gas is called the volume coefficient of that gas and it is expressed as γp.

Question 30. What is the unit of volume coefficient of gas?
Answer: The unit of volume coefficient of gas is °C-1  or °F-1 or K-1.

Question 31. What is the dimensional formula of volume coefficient of gas?
Answer: The dimensional formula of volume coefficient of gas is Θ-1.

Question 32. What is the value of volume coefficient of gas?
Answer: The value of volume coefficient of the gas, γp= 1/273 °C-1

Question 33. Is the volume coefficient of gas different for different gases?
Answer: No, the volume coefficient of gas is the same for different gases.

Question 34. The figure 1/273 used in Charles’ law denotes the value of which coefficient of expansion?
Answer: The figure 1/273 used in Charles’ law denotes the value of the coefficient of volume expansion of gas.

Question 35. A beaker at 4°C temperature is filled with a liquid to the brim. The liquid overflows if the temperature is increased. Is the coefficient of volume expansion of the liquid positive or negative?
Answer: The coefficient of volume expansion of the liquid is positive.

Question 36. A beaker at 4°C temperature is filled with a liquid to the brim. The liquid overflows if the temperature is decreased. Is the coefficient of volume expansion of the liquid positive or negative?
Answer: The coefficient of volume expansion of the liquid is negative.

Question 37. Between the coefficients of apparent and real expansion of a liquid, which one has greater value?
Answer: The coefficient of real expansion of a liquid is greater than the coefficient of apparent expansion.

Question 38. Is it possible to construct a liquid thermometer with a glass tube if the coefficients of volume expansion of the liquid and glass are the same?
Answer: No, it is not possible because the level of liquid in the tube remains unchanged with increase in temperature.

Question 39. If value of a in Celcius and Fahrenheit scale are αc and αF respectively, then what is the relation between αc and αF?
Answer: αc = 9/5 . αF

Question 40. Name the substance whose length remains unchanged with the change in temperature.
Answer: Invar.

Question 41. Coefficient of apparent expansion in case of gas is not taken into account’ Why?
Answer: Because volume expansion coefficient of a gas is nearly 100 times more than that of solid.

Question 42. What do you mean by linear expansion coefficient of iron which is or = 12 x 10-6 /°C ?
Answer: Linear expansion coefficient for iron is a = 12 x 10-6 /°C means that an iron rod of length 1cm or 1ft or 1 m, when heated through 1°C, will expand by 12 x 10-6 cm or 12 x 10-6 ft or 12 x 10-6 m respectively.

Question 43. If αc of copper is 17.0 x 10-6/°C, what is the volume of αk ?
Answer: As αc = αk  Hence aK of copper is =17 x 10-6 /K.

Question 44. Which one is fundamental property of a liquid-coefficient of apparent expansion or coefficient of real expansion?
Answer: Coefficient of real expansion of liquid is fundamental property of a liquid.

Question 45. What is the coefficient of linear expansion of iron if its coefficient of volume expansion is 36 x 10-6/°C?
Answer: The coefficient of linear expansion of iron (α) = 1/3 the coefficient of linear expansion of iron (γ) = 1/3 x 36 x10-6 = 12 x 10-6/°c

Question 46. Mention a name of an electrical appliance in which thermostat is used.
Answer: Refrigerator.

Question 47. Among solids, liquids and gases which expands less on application of heat?
Answer: Among solids, liquids and gases solids expand less on application of heat.

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic A Thermal Expansion of Solid, Liquid and Gas Fill In The Blanks:

Question 1. The unit of coefficient of linear expansion of any solid substance depends only on the unit of_______
Answer: Temperature

Question 2. If the coefficient of linear expansion of any solid substance in Celcius scale is 18 x 10-6 /°C, then its value in Fahrenheit scale is ________
Answer: 10 x 10-6 /°F

Question 3. Thermal expansion of solid is of _______ types.
Answer: Three

Question 4. Increase of length of a solid substance = ________ x coefficient of linear expansion x increase in temperature.
Answer: Initial length

Question 5. If a stopper made of brass is stuck in a bottle made of steel, the bottle has to be _________ in order to open the stopper.
Answer: Heated

Question 6. The coefficient of ________ expansion of a liquid is its inherent property.
Answer: Real

Question 7. If the coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid is zero, then the level of liquid in a tube remains ________
Answer: Unchanged

Question 8. For accurate measurement during expansion of a gas, volume at ________ is taken as the initial volume.
Answer: 0°C

Question 9. While measuring the coefficient of volume expansion of a gas, pressure remains _________
Answer: Constant

Question 10. Coefficient of real expansion of liquid = coefficient of real expansion of container ________
Answer: Coefficient of apparent expansion

Question 11. ______ is the device which is used for automatic temperature control.
Answer: Thermostat.

Question 12. The coefficient of real expansion is an ________ property of a liquid.
Answer: Intrinsic

Question 13. On heating a bimetallic strip, made by riveting together with a strip of iron and an equal strip of brass, bends so that, the is on _______ the convex side of the curve.
Answer: Brass

Question 14. Density of liquids ________ with increase in temperature.
Answer: Decrease

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic A Thermal Expansion of Solid, Liquid and Gas State Whether True Or False:

Question 1. The coefficient of volume expansion at constant pressure is the same for all ideal gases.
Answer: True

Question 2. The unit of coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid depends on the unit of temperature.
Answer: True

Question 3. The unit of coefficient of real expansion of a liquid depends on the unit of volume.
Answer: False

Question 4. Thermal expansion of invar is less than that of all other metals or alloys.
Answer: True

Question 5. The thermal expansion of a liquid is generally greater than the thermal expansion of an equal volume of a solid for the same increase in temperature.
Answer: True

Question 6. The thermal expansion of a liquid is generally greater than the thermal expansion of an equal volume of a gas for the same increase in temperature.
Answer: False

Question 7. Coefficient of real expansion of water from 0°C to 4°C is positive.
Answer: False

Question 8. The value of the volume coefficient of a gas is 1/273 °C-1
Answer: True

Question 9. The value of the pressure coefficient of a gas is 1/273 °C-1
Answer: True

Question 10. In case .of heat conduction through a bi-metallic strip, the rate of thermal conduction for the two plates remains the same.
Answer: True

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic A Thermal Expansion of Solid, Liquid and Gas Numerical Examples:

1. If the length of a rod at temperature t1 is l1 and the length becomes l2 when the temperature is raised to t2.

(1)Coefficient of linear expansion, \(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)
(2) If the initial temperature t1 = 0°C and the corresponding length of the rod is l1 = l0, then at temperature t°C length of the rod is  lt = l0( 1 + αt) .

2. If the value of α in Celsius and Fahrenheit scales are αc and αF then, αc= 9/5 αF

3. If the surface area of a solid at temperature t1 is S1 and that at temperature t2 is S2 then, coefficient of surface expansion, \(\beta=\frac{S_2-S_1}{S_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)
(1) St = S0(1 +βt)
(2) βc = 9/5  βF

4. If the volume of a solid at temperature t1 is Vand that at temperature t2 is V2 then, coefficient of volume expansion, \(\gamma=\frac{V_2-V_1}{V_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\)

(1)Vt = V0(1+γT)
(2)γc= 9/5 γF
(3)α = β/2 = γ/2

5. The coefficient of real expansion of a liquid (γr) = the coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid (γa ) + the coefficient of volume expansion of the material of the container (γg ) . ie. γr = γa + γg
6. At constant pressure the volume of a fixed mass of gas at a 0°C and t°C are V0 and Vt respectively, then Vt  = V0 (1 + γpt) and, \(\gamma_p=\frac{V_t-V_0}{V_0 t}\)
∴γp = coefficient of  volume expansion at fixed pressure

Question 1. The lengths of an iron rod are 50 cm and 50.03 cm at 0°C and S0°C respectively. What is the value of coefficient of linear expansion of iron?

Answer: Initial temperature of iron rod (t1) = 0°C and initial length (l1) = 50 cm
Final temperature (t2) = 50°C and final length (l2) = 50.03 cm
Hence, coefficient of linear expansion of iron,

\(\alpha=\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1\left(t_2-t_1\right)}\) or, \(\alpha=\frac{50.03-50}{50(50.0)}\) or, \(\alpha=\frac{0.03}{50 \times 50}\) or, α = 12 Χ 10-6 °C

Question 2. The radius of a circular ring of copper is 5 cm. What is the new radius if the temperature is increased by 200°C ? Coefficient of linear expansion of brass, α =17 x 106/°C

Answer: Initial radius of the ring (r1 ) = 5 cm
Increase of temperature (t) = 200°C

Thus, final radius of the ring,  r2= r1( 1 + αt) or, r2 = 5(1 + 17 x 10-6 x 200) = 5.017cm

Question 3. The distance between two railway stations 10 km. The temperature of the place fluctuates between 10°C and 45°C in the whole year. If railway lines are to be laid in between these two stations, how much gap has to be given for safety of the line? Coefficient of linear expansion of steel, α = 12 x 10-6/°C.

Answer: Length of rail line (L) – 10 km = 10000 m Difference between highest and lowest temperature (t) = (45 – 10)°C = 35°C
Suppose, a gap of Z has to be kept for safety of railway lines.
∴ I = L α t or, l = 10000 x 12 x 10-6 x 35 or, l= 4.2 m .

Question 4. If the temperature of a metal sphere is increased by 50° C, its volume increases by 03%. What is the value of coefficient of volume expansion of the metal?

Answer: If the initial volume of the sphere is V, then expansion of volume = 0.3V/100 and increase in temperature = 50°C
Hence, value of coefficient of volume expansion of this metal,

\(\gamma=\frac{\frac{0.3 V}{100}}{V \times 50}\) or, γ = 60 x 10-6/(°C)

Question 5. With reference to glass, the coefficient of volume expansion of mercury is 15.3 X 10-5/°C. If the coefficient of volume expansion of glass is 27 x 10-6/°C, what is the value of coefficient of real expansion of mercury?

Answer: Coefficient of apparent expansion of mercury, 15.3 X 10-5/°C
Coefficient in volume expansion of glass, yg = 27 X 10-6/°C = 2.7 X 10-5/°C

∴ coefficient of real expansion of mercury,γr = γa + γor, γr =15.3 x 10-5 + 2.7 x 10-5 = 18 x 10-5/°C

Question 6. There is 500 cm3 of mercury at 0°C in a glass vessel. If the apparent and real expansion of mercury at 100 °C are 7,65 cm3 and 9 cm3 respectively, calculate the coefficients of apparent and real expansion of mercury.

Answer: Initial volume of iron = 500 cm3
Increase in temperature = (100-0)°C = 100°C
Apparent expansion of mercury = 7.65 cm3
Real expansion of mercury = 9 cm3

The coefficient of real expansion of mercury,

\(\gamma_a=\frac{\text { apparent expansion }}{\begin{array}{c}
\text { initial volume } \times \\
\text { increase in temperature }
\end{array}}=\frac{7.65}{500 \times 100}\) = 15.3 x 10-5/°C

The coefficient of real expansion of mercury,

\(\gamma_r=\frac{\text { apparent expansion }}{\begin{array}{c}
\text { initial volume } \times \\
\text { increase in temperature }
\end{array}}=\frac{9}{500 \times 100}\) = 18 x 10-5/°C

Question 7. The volume of a definite mass of a gas at . 0°C is 100 cm3 and its volume at constant pressure and 20°C is 107.33 cm3. Calculate the coefficient of volume expansion of gas.

Answer: Volume of the gas (V0 ) at 0°C = 100 cm3
Final temperature (t) = 20°C
Final volume (Vt) = 107.33 cm3

Hence, coefficient of volume expansion of the gas,

\(\gamma_p=\frac{V_t-V_0}{V_0 t}\) or, \(\gamma_p=\frac{107.33-100}{100 \times 20}\) or, γp = 3.665 x 10-3/°C

Question 8. The volumes of a definite mass of a gas at constant pressure and at 50°C and 100°C temperature are 323 cm3 and 373cm3, respectively. Calculate the coefficient of volume expansion of the gas.

Answer: Suppose, volume of the gas at 0°C = V0 and coefficient of volume expansion = γp
At temperature t1 = 50°C, volume of the gas, V1= 323 cm3.
∴ V1 = V0 (1 + t1.γp) ……(1)

Again, at temperature t2 = 100°C, volume of the gas, V2= 373 cm3
∴ V2 = V0 (1 + γp • t2) …….(2)

If (1) is divided by (2), we get  \(\frac{V_1}{V_2}=\frac{1+\gamma_p \cdot t_1}{1+\gamma_p \cdot t_2}\)

or, \(\frac{323}{373}=\frac{1+50 \gamma_p}{1+100 \gamma_p}\)

or, 323 + 32300 γp = 373 + 18650 γp
or, 32300 γp – 18650yp γp = 373 – 323
or, 13650 γp = 50

or, \(\gamma_p=\frac{50}{13650}=\frac{1}{273}\)
∴ γp =1/273/°C

Question 9. Coefficient of apparent expansion of fmercury with respect to glass is 153 x 10-6 °C-1 , where coefficient of real expansion of mercury Is I8O x 10-6 °C-1. Find the volume expansion coefficient of glass.

Answer: Coefficient of real expansion of mercury (γr) = coefficient of apparent expansion of mercury (γa) + coefficient of volume expansion of glass (γg)

or, 180 x 10-6 = 153 x 10-6 + γg
∴ γg = 180X 10-6 – 153 x 10-6 = 27 x 10-6
Volume expansion coefficient of glass is 27 x 10-6 °C-1  

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 4 Question Answer

Question 10. A liquid has a coefficient of apparent expansion 180 x 10-6 °C-1 for an iron container, and 144.6 X 10-6°C-1 for an aluminium container. If the coefficient of volume expansion of iron is 36 x 10-6 °C-1, find that of aluminium .

Answer: For iron container, γ = γa + γiron, symbols have usual meanings = 180 x 10-6 + 36 x 10-6 = 216 x10-6

For aluminium container, γ = γaAI  or, 216 x 10-6 = 144.6 x 10-6 x γA,

∴ γAI= 216 X 10-6– 144.6 X 10-6 = 71.4 X 10-6
∴ Volume expansion coefficient of aluminium is 71.4 x 10-6 °C-1 .

Question 11. The internal volume of a glass flask is V cm. What volume of mercury should be kept in the flask so that the volume of the empty space remains constant at any temperature? Real expansion of mercury r= 180 x 10-6 °C-1 and volume expansion of glass =25 x 10-6 °C-1 .

Answer: Let, the volume of mercury be x cm .

To keep the volume of the empty space constant at any temperature, the expansion of mercury should be equal to that of the glass flask for the same rise in temperature. If the temperature rise is t°C,then x x 180 x 10-6 x t = V x 25 x 10-6 x t or Χ = 25V/180 = 5/36 V
∴ 5/36 V cm of mercury should be kept in the flask.

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic B Thermal Conductivity Synopsis:

1. Flow of heat from one place to another is called transmission of heat.
2. Heat is transmitted in three different process—conduction, convection and radiation. .
3. The process in which heat flows from a higher temperature region to a lower temperature region of a material without any displacement of material particles is called conduction.

4. Materials which can conduct heat easily are called thermal conductors.
5. Materials which cannot conduct heat easily are called bad conductor of heat or thermal insulators. Fibre glass, paper, cork, water, wood, glass etc are bad conductors of heat.

6. During transmission of heat through any object if both conduction and absorption go on simultaneously, it is called pre-steady state condition of heating.
7. In pre steady state heat conduction through a rod depends on both 0 the coefficient of thermal conductivity and specific heat of the material of the rod.
8. In steady state only conduction of heat takes place not absorption.

9. In steady state heat conduction along a rod depends only on the coefficient of thermal conductivity of its material. The coefficient of thermal conductivity of material is defined as the quantity of heat that conducts per unit time through unit area of the material keeping its opposite faces at a temperature difference of one degree, when the steady state has been reached.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Coefficient Of Thermal Conductivity

Let a rectangular plate of cross sectional area A and thickness d maintain temperatures θ1 and θ2 on its two opposite faces where θ12 . in this condition heat passes perpendicularly through the slab from the hotter surface to the colder surface. If θ amount of heat is transferred perpendicularly across the plate in time t in steady state then it is observed experimentally that,

(1)Q is directly proportional to A i.e., Q ∝ A
(2)Q is directly proportional to (θ1 – θ2) i.e., Q ∝ (θ1 – θ2)
(3)Q is directly proportional to t, i.e., Q ∝ t
(4)Q is inversely proportional to d i.e., Q α 1/d

Hence,\(Q \propto \frac{A\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right) t}{d}\)

or, \(Q=k \cdot \frac{A\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right) t}{d}\) k is a constant

The value of the constant depends on the material of the plate. k is known as the coefficient of thermal conductivity.

10. For ideal conductor k is infinity and for an ideal insulator k= 0.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 4 Question Answer

Units of k: In CGS system, \(calorie $\cdot \mathrm{cm}$
$\mathrm{cm}^2 \cdot{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C} \cdot$ second\) = cal. cm-1. °C-1.s-1 .

In SI it is J. m-1 . K-1 . s-1= W . m-1 . K-1

We know that, \(k=\frac{Q \cdot d}{A\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right) t}\)

∴ Dimensional formula of k, \(=[k]=\frac{\mathrm{ML}^2 \mathrm{~T}^{-2} \times \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}^2 \cdot \Theta \times \mathrm{T}}\) = \(=\mathrm{MLT}^{-3} \Theta^{-1}\)

12. Silver have highest thermal conductivity among metals [k = 406 SI unit)
13. Diamond is the best thermal conductor {k^ 1000 SI unit)
14. Among liquids, mercury is the best conductor {k = 8.3 SI unit)
15. Thermal conductivity of vacuum is zero.

16. Thermal resistance is defined as the property of a substance by which it resists the flow of heat through it.

Electrical resistance (R) = \(=\frac{\text { potential difference }\left(V_1-V_2\right)}{\text { intensity of electric current }(I)}\)

Thermal resistance = \(=\frac{\text { temperature difference }\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right)}{\text { heat current }(H)}\) = \(=\frac{\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right)}{Q / t}\)

[Heat current (H) = flow of heat (Q)/ time (t)]

From the relation of k we get, \(Q=\frac{k \cdot A\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right) t}{d}\) ,\(\text { or, } \frac{\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right)}{Q / t}=\frac{d}{k \cdot A}\)

Electrical resistance,\(R=\rho \cdot \frac{l}{A}\) [p = resistivity, l = length, A = area of cross section]

So, 1/k is similar to p
Hence 1/k is called thermal Resistivity.

17. Similarities between heat conduction and electrical conduction:

18. Dissimilarities between heat conduction and electrical conduction:

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic B Thermal Conductivity Short And Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1. What is conduction? Write down the characteristics of transmission of heat in the process of conduction.

Answer: It is the method in which heat is transmitted from a warmer place of the substance to a colder place without any displacement of the molecules.

In the conduction process:
1. A solid medium is required for heat transmission.
2. The medium becomes hot during heat transmission.
3. There is no displacement of the molecules of the medium at the time of heat transmission.
4. Heat can be transmitted along any of straight or curved path.

Question 2. What do you mean by pre-steady state condition in case of conduction of heat? Demonstrate with the help of an experiment that the capacity of heat conduction is different for different substances.

Answer: During transmission of heat through any object if both conduction and absorption go on simultaneously, it is called pre-steady state condition of heating.

Experiment: A rectangular, metallic vessel is taken. Three holes are made on its wall in the same height. Three different metal rods (say of copper, aluminium and iron) of same length and same cross sectional area are inserted through the holes. The portion of the rods outside the vessel are wax-coated.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Fig6
Next, water is poured in the vessel and then it is heated uniformly by a bunsen burner. In this condition heat conducts along the lengths of the rods. After some time, it is seen that wax has melted in all the rods but up to different lengths.

Conclusion: It is clearly understood from this experiment that the capacity of conducting heat is different for different substances. If wax melts up to l1, l2 and l3 on copper, aluminium and iron rods respectively, it is observed that l1 > l2 > l3

Question 3. What is thermal conductivity? Suppose the thickness of a rectangular plate is d, its cross-sectional area is A and the temperature of its opposite sides are θ1 and θ2 respectively (where θ1 > θ2). At thermal steady state, if Q amount of heat is transmitted perpendicularly in time t from the hotter side to the colder side then how can you express thermal conductivity of the substance of the plate?

Answer: The thermal conductivity of a substance is defined as the heat conducted perpendicularly in one second across the opposite faces of a cuboid of unit cross-sectional area and unit thickness when the difference in temperature of its two opposite faces is unity.

By experiment, it has been seen that:
1. Q ∝ A
2. Q∝(θ12)
3. Q ∝1/d
4. Q ∝ t

According to the rule of compound variation, \(Q \propto \frac{A\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right) t}{d}\) or, \(Q=\frac{k A\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right) t}{d}\)

∴ \(k=\frac{Q \cdot d}{A\left(\theta_1-\theta_2\right) t}\)

where k is a constant, known as the thermal conductivity of the substance of the plate.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Thermal Conductivity

Question 4. Find out the unit of thermal conductivity. Establish a relationship between the units thermal conductivity in CGS system and SI.

Answer: From definition, we have thermal conductivity, K = Q . d/Aθt
Where d= thickness, A= cross-section area, = temperature difference, t= time and Q = heat.

So,unit of k(in SI) = \(=\frac{J \times m}{m^2 \times K \times s}\) = J . m-1 .  K-1 . s-1    and in CGS it is cal.cm-1 .  K-1 . s-1

1 cal.cm-1.  C-1 . s-1= 42J. (10-2m)-1 K-1 . s-1  = 420W.m-1.  K-1

Question 5.  What do you mean by thermal resistance? What is the unit of thermal resistance?

Answer: Thermal resistance is defined as the property of a substance by which it resists the flow of heat through it.

Let the thickness of a body be d, its cross-sectional area be A and the thermal conductivity of its substance be k.

Therefore, its thermal resistance is d/kA.
Thermal resistance, = \(\frac{d}{k A}=\frac{\theta_2-\theta_1}{Q / t}=\frac{\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right) t}{Q}\)

Now, unit of (θ₂-θ₁) is kelvin (K), unit of t is second (s), unit of Q is the joule (J). Hence, unit of thermal resistance is K. s. J-¹.

Question 6. How is the thermal resistance of a conductor compared with its electrical resistance?

Answer: The cause of an electric current(l) through a conductor is the potential difference(V) between its two ends.

According to Ohm’s law V= IR or, \(R=\frac{V}{l}=\frac{V}{\left(\frac{q}{t}\right)}\)…….(1)

Similarly, the cause of conduction of heat through a conductor is the difference of temperature at the two ends of the conductor(θ).

Thus, amount of heat conducted, \(Q=k \cdot A \frac{\theta}{d} \cdot t\) or \(\frac{d}{k A}=\frac{\theta}{\left(\frac{Q}{t}\right)}\) …..(2)

There is somewhat similarity between equation (1) and equation(2). In this way, the quantity(d/kA) is similar to R. Thius is the thermal resistance of a conductor.

Question 7. I = q/t = V/R and \(\frac{Q}{t}=k \cdot A \cdot \frac{\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right)}{d}\)
What are the similarities between different quantities in these two equations? [The symbols represent conventional physical quantities]

Answer: The similarities in the two equations are shown:

Type Electrical quantities  Quantity related to heat conduction
Quantity Electrical charge (q) Heat (Q)
Property Potential difference (V) Difference of temperature (θ2 – θ1  )
Rate of flow Current ( I = q/t) Rate of conduction of heat (Q/t)
Resistance Electrical resistance (R) Thermal resistance (d/kA)


Question 8. Define conductor and insulator of heat. Why is the handle of a kettle wrapped with cane?

Answer:
1. Conductors of heat are those substances through which heat can be conducted easily. For example, iron.
2. Insulators of heat are those substances through which heat cannot be conducted easily. For example, wood.

3. Kettle is generally made of aluminium. Aluminium is a good conductor of heat. When water or any other liquid is heated in a kettle, the kettle also becomes hot along with the liquid inside it. In this condition, it is Very difficult to touch the handle of the kettle. Cane is an insulator of heat. So, if cane is wrapped on the handle of the kettle, no heat is transmitted to the hand and the handle can be touched easily. For this reason, the handle of a kettle is wrapped with a cane.

Question 9. If we touch two chairs, one of wood and the other of iron, both at the same temperature during winter, why does the iron chair feel colder than the other? In which condition they feel same in temperature?

Answer:
1. Our body temperature generally remains higher than the temperature of a chair during winter. Wood is a bad conductor of heat but iron is a good conductor of heat. If we touch an iron chair, heat is transmitted very quickly from our body to the chair but when we touch a wooden chair, conduction of heat is very slow.

2. This is why the iron chair feels colder. As the temperature of the chair becomes equal with one’s body temperature, they feel same in temperature.

Wbbse Class 10 Physical Science Chapter 4 Question Answer

Question 10. Let us take a rod, half of which is made of wood and the other half is made of copper; The rod is wrapped with a thin paper. Now it is held directly over the flame of a burner. Explain what happens.

Answer: If the rod is held directly over the flame of a burner, it is seen that the paper surrounding the wooden portion is burnt immediately but the paper surrounding the copper side is not burnt. Copper being a good conductor .of heat, heat is conducted evenly all over the rod and the temperature of the paper does not reach the ignition point.

But in the case of wood which is a bad conductor of heat, heat is not conducted. As a result, the temperature reaches the ignition point and the paper is burnt. But if held for a long time, the paper on the copper part also gets burnt.

WBBSE Solutions For Class 10 Physical Science And Environment Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Fig8

Question 11. Why the birds fluff up their feathers during winter?

Answer: During winter the birds fluff up their feathers to keep themselves warm. When the birds fluff up their feathers, feathers trap air in them. As air being an insulator, does not allow heat from the body to escape. So the birds keep warm.

Question 12. Wearing of two relatively fiver clothes instead of a thick cloth is more comfortable. Why?

Answer: If we wear two relatively fiver clothes instead of a thick cloth, we feel warmer. This happens because the two clothes trap a layer of air between them. Air is a thermal insulator and so it prevents the heat from our body from escaping. So we feel warm and more comfortable.

Chapter 4 Phenomena Of Heat Topic B Thermal Conductivity Very Short Answer Type Questions Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1. Which of the following metals has the highest conductivity?
1. Copper
2. Aluminium
3. Silver
4. Gold

Answer: 3. Silver

Question 2. The value of thermal conductivity of an ideal conductor (in the unit of